USER'S MANUAL
µPD78214 SUB-SERIES
8-BIT SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER
HARDWARE
µPD78212
µPD78213
µPD78214
µPD78P214
µPD78212 (A)
µPD78213 (A)
µPD78214 (A)
µPD78P214 (A)
Document No. IEU-1236H
(O. D. No. IEM-5119H)
Date Published September 1994 P
Printed in Japan
NEC Corporation 1989
Cautions on CMOS Devices
1
Countermeasures against static electricity for all MOSs
Caution When handling MOS devices, take care so that they are not electrostatically charged.
Strong static electricity may cause dielectric breakdown in gates. When transporting or
storing MOS devices, use conductive trays, magazine cases, shock absorbers, or metal
cases that NEC uses for packaging and shipping. Be sure to ground MOS devices during
assembling. Do not allow MOS devices to stand on plastic plates or do not touch pins.
Also handle boards on which MOS devices are mounted in the same way.
2
CMOS-specific handling of unused input pins
Caution Hold CMOS devices at a fixed input level.
Unlike bipolar or NMOS devices, if a CMOS device is operated with no input, an
intermediate-level input may be caused by noise. This allows current to flow in the CMOS
device, resulting in a malfunction. Use a pull-up or pull-down resistor to hold a fixed input
level. Since unused pins may function as output pins at unexpected times, each unused
pin should be separately connected to the VDD or GND pin through a resistor.
If handling of unused pins is documented, follow the instructions in the document.
3
Statuses of all MOS devices at initialization
Caution The initial status of a MOS device is unpredictable when power is turned on.
Since characteristics of a MOS device are determined by the amount of ions implanted
in molecules, the initial status cannot be determined in the manufacture process. NEC
has no responsibility for the output statuses of pins, input and output settings, and the
contents of registers at power on. However, NEC assures operation after reset and items
for mode setting if they are defined.
When you turn on a device having a reset function, be sure to reset the device first.
EWS-4800 Series, EWS-UX/V, and QTOP are trademarks of NEC Corporation.
MS-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM DOS, PC/AT, and PC DOS are trademarks of IBM Corporation.
SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc.
Sun OS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc.
HP9000 Series 300 and HP-UX are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written
consent of NEC Corporation. NEC Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors which may appear in
this document.
NEC Corporation does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual
property rights of third parties by or arising from use of a device described herein or any other liability arising
from use of such device. No license, either express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents,
copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Corporation or others.
The devices listed in this document are not suitable for use in aerospace equipment, submarine cables, nuclear
reactor control systems and life support systems. If customers intend to use NEC devices for above applications
or they intend to use "Standard" quality grade NEC devices for applications not intended by NEC, please contact
our sales people in advance.
Application examples recommended by NEC Corporation
Standard: Computer, Office equipment, Communication equipment, Test and Measurement equipment,
Machine tools, Industrial robots, Audio and Visual equipment, Other consumer products, etc.
Special: Automotive and Transportation equipment, Traffic control systems, Antidisaster systems, Anticrime
systems, etc.
M7 92.6
Main Revisions in This Edition
Page
Description
V and "Caution" have been added in (a) of Fig.
SS
P.55
4-2.
P.329
P.383
"Caution" has been added in (2) of Section 12.4.6.
"Caution" has been added in (b) of Section
14.4.2.
P.429
Appendix B has been modified as follows:
•
"IBM PC series" has been changed to "IBM
PC/AT."
• Upgraded versions of MS-DOS are now
supported by some development tools
designed for the PC-9800 series.
• 3.5" 2HC has been added to as a PC DOS
distribution media.
• MS DOS and IBM DOS have been added
as supported operating systems for the
IBM PC/AT.
• The description of real-time OS has been
deleted.
P.441
Appendix C has been added.
Major changes in this revision are indicated by stars (#)
in the margins.
PREFACE
Users:
This manual is aimed at engineers who need to be familiar with the capabilities of the µPD78214 sub-series for
application program development purposes.
Purpose:
The purpose of this manual is to help users understand the hardware capabilities of the µPD78214 sub-series.
Organization:
Two manuals are available for the µPD78214 sub-series: The hardware manual (this manual) and instruction
manual (common to all 78K/II series products). The contents of the manuals are:
Hardware
Instruction
Pin functions
CPU functions
Addressing
Internal block functions
Interrupt functions
Other built-in functions
Instruction set
Important information related to using the products described in this manual is provided in the form of
“Caution” notes, appearing in appropriate places in each chapter. Each “Caution” is repeated at the end
of the chapter. Be careful to observe these notes when using the products.
Guidance:
Readers of this manual are assumed to have a general knowledge of electronics, logical circuits, and microcom-
puters.
When using this manual with the µPD78212, µPD78213, µPD78P214, µPD78212(A), µPD78213(A), µPD78214(A), or
µPD78P214(A):
ThismanualdescribesthefunctionsoftheµPD78212,µPD78213,µPD78214,µPD78P214,µPD78212(A),µPD78213(A),
µPD78214(A), and µPD78P214(A). The relationships between these products are shown in the figure on the next
page. Where there is no functional difference between the products, only the µPD78214 is described, that
descriptionalsobeingapplicabletotheµPD78212,µPD78213,µPD78P214,µPD78212(A),µPD78213(A),µPD78214(A),
and µPD78P214(A).
The examples given in this manual are prepared for “Standard” quality products for general electronics
devices. If customers intend to use the examples in this manual in fields where the “Special” quality is
required, note the quality grade of the parts and circuits actually used.
µPD78P214
PD78P214(A)
µ
PROM 16K
RAM 512
µPD78214
PD78214(A)
µPD78213
PD78213(A)
µ
µ
ROM 16K
RAM 512
ROM-less
RAM 512
µPD78212
PD78212(A)
µ
ROM 8K
RAM 384
To check the details of a register when you know the name of the register:
See Appendix D.
To check the differences between the µPD78214 sub-series and other models of the 78K/II series:
First see Appendix A to determine the differences between the models then see Appendix E for details.
To check the details of a function when you know the name of the function:
See Appendix E.
If the microcomputer does not operate correctly during debugging:
See the cautions at the end of the chapter related to the erroneous function.
To become familiar with the general functions of the µPD78214 sub-series:
Read the entire manual in the order of the table of contents.
To determine the instructions supported by the µPD78214 sub-series in detail:
Refer to 78K/II Series User’s Manual, Instruction (IEU-1311).
To determine the electrical characteristics of the µPD78214 sub-series:
Refer to the separate data sheet.
Application examples of the µPD78214 sub-series:
Refer to the separate application note.
Notation:
Data weight:
High-order digits on the left side
Low-order digits on the right side
Active low:
Note:
××× (Pins and signal names are overscored.)
Explanation of a noted part of text
Information demanding the user's special attention
Supplementary information
Caution:
Remarks:
Numeric value: Binary
Decimal
: ××××B or ××××
: ××××
Hexadecimal : ××××H
Register representation
7
6
1
5
0
4
3
2
1
1
0
0
The encircled bit number indicates that the bit name
is used as reserved word by the NEC assembler and
defined by the header file, sfrbit.h, by C compiler.
B
×
A
×
EDC
Write operation
Read operation
Either 0 or 1 can be
written to this bit without
affecting the register
operation.
0 or 1 is read from these
bits.
Register name
Write 0 to this bit.
Write 1 to this bit.
Write a value according to A value is read according
the necessary function. to the operation.
Never use the code combinations indicated "Not to be set" in the register descriptions.
Characters likely to be confused: 0 (zero) and O (uppercase "O")
1 (one), l (lowercase "L"), and I (uppercase "I")
Related documents:
The following reference documents are also available.
• Documents related to the µPD78214 sub-series
Product
µPD78212
µPD78213
µPD78214
µPD78212(A) µPD78P214(A)
µPD78213(A)
µPD78214(A)
Document
Data Sheet
User's Manual
IC-2526
IC-2831
This manual
IEU-1311
IEA-1220
IC-3095
Hardware
Instruction
Application Note Basic
Application
IEA-1282
Floating-Point Arithme-
tic Operation Programs
IEA-1273
• Serial Bus Interface (SBI) User’s Manual (IEM-1303)
• Documents related to development tools
Document name
Document No.
EEU-1395
EEU-1322
EEU-1331
EEP-1027
EEM-1024
EEM-1260
EEM-1027
EEU-1283
EEU-1273
EEU-1254
EEU-1289
EEU-1280
EEU-1447
EEU-1413
EF-1114
IE-78240-R-A In-Circuit Emulator User's Manual
IE-78240-R In-Circuit Emulator User's Manual
Hardware
Software
IE-78210-R In-Circuit Emulator Hardware Operator's Manual
IE-78210-R In-Circuit Emulator Software Operator's Manual
For Operation on the PC-9800 Series (MS-DOS)
For Operation on the IBM PC Series (PC DOS)
IE-78210-R In-Circuit Emulator System
Software Operator's Manual
RA78K Series Assembler Package User's Manual
Language
Operation
78K Series Structured Assembler Preprocessor User's Manual
CC78K Series C Compiler User's Manual
Language
Operation
SD78K/II Screen Debugger User's Manual for Operation under
MS-DOS
Tutorial
78K/II Series Development Tools Selection Guide
• Documents related to software to be incorporated into the product
Document name
Document No.
EF-1113
Fuzzy Inference Development Support System Pamphlet
78K/II Series Fuzzy Inference Development Support System User's
Manual
Fuzzy Inference
Module
EEU-1448
78K/0, 78K/II and 87AD Series Fuzzy Inference Development Support
System User's Manual
Translator
EEU-1444
EEU-1438
User's Manual for Tool for Creating Fuzzy Knowledge Data
• Other documents
Document name
Document No.
IEI-1213
Package Manual
SMD Surface Mount Technology Manual
IEI-1207
Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices
IEI-1209
NEC Semiconductor Device Reliability/Quality Control System
Guide to Quality Assurance for Semiconductor Devices
IEI-1203
MEI-1202
Caution The above documents may be revised without notice. Use the latest versions when you designing an application system.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 FEATURES ............................................................................................................................3
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION AND QUALITY GRADE ........................................................4
1.2.1 Ordering Information.................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Quality Grade .............................................................................................................5
1.3 PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)....................................................................................6
1.3.1 Normal Operating Mode ...........................................................................................6
1.3.2 PROM Programming Mode ......................................................................................11
1.4 EXAMPLE APPLICATION SYSTEM (PRINTER) .................................................................16
1.5 BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................17
1.6 FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................................................18
1.7 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78210 AND µPD78213 .............................................20
1.8 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78214 SUB-SERIES AND µPD78218A SUB-SERIES......21
1.9 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78212 AND µPD78212(A) ........................................22
1.10 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78213 AND µPD78214, AND THE µPD78213(A)
AND µPD78214(A) ................................................................................................................22
1.11 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78P214 AND µPD78P214(A)....................................22
1.12 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78212, µPD78213, µPD78214, AND µPD78P214 ...23
1.12.1 Functional Differences ...........................................................................................23
1.12.2 Package Differences ...............................................................................................23
CHAPTER 2
PIN FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................25
2.1 PIN FUNCTION LIST ............................................................................................................25
2.1.1 Normal Operating Mode ...........................................................................................25
2.1.2 PROM Programming Mode ......................................................................................27
2.2 PIN FUNCTIONS...................................................................................................................27
2.2.1 Normal Operating Mode ...........................................................................................27
2.2.2 PROM Programming Mode ......................................................................................31
2.3 I/O CIRCUITS AND UNUSED-PIN HANDLING ..................................................................33
2.4 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................35
CHAPTER 3
CPU FUNCTION .............................................................................................................................37
3.1 MEMORY SPACE .................................................................................................................37
3.1.1 Internal Program Memory Area ...............................................................................42
3.1.2 Internal RAM Area .....................................................................................................43
3.1.3 Special Function Register (SFR) Area .....................................................................43
3.1.4 External SFR Area ......................................................................................................43
3.1.5 External Memory Space ............................................................................................43
3.1.6 External Extension Data Memory Space ................................................................43
3.2 REGISTERS ...........................................................................................................................45
3.2.1 Program Counter (PC) ...............................................................................................45
3.2.2 Program Status Word (PSW) ....................................................................................45
3.2.3 Stack Pointer (SP) ......................................................................................................46
3.2.4 General-Purpose Registers .......................................................................................47
3.2.5 Special Function Registers (SFR) .............................................................................50
- i -
Contents
3.3 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................53
CHAPTER 4
CLOCK GENERATOR .....................................................................................................................55
4.1 CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION ...................................................................................55
4.2 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................56
4.2.1 Inputting an external clock .......................................................................................56
4.2.2 Using the Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator ......................................................................56
CHAPTER 5
PORT FUNCTIONS.........................................................................................................................59
5.1 DIGITAL I/O PORTS .............................................................................................................59
5.2 PORT 0...................................................................................................................................60
5.2.1 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................61
5.2.2 Setting the Input/Output Mode and Control Mode ...............................................61
5.2.3 Operation ....................................................................................................................62
5.2.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor ............................................................................................62
5.2.5 Driving Transistors ....................................................................................................62
5.3 PORT 2...................................................................................................................................63
5.3.1 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................64
5.3.2 Setting the Input Mode and Control Mode ............................................................64
5.3.3 Operation ....................................................................................................................64
5.3.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor ............................................................................................65
5.4 PORT 3...................................................................................................................................66
5.4.1 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................68
5.4.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode ................................................................71
5.4.3 Operation ....................................................................................................................73
5.4.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor ............................................................................................74
5.5 PORT 4...................................................................................................................................75
5.5.1 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................76
5.5.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode ................................................................76
5.5.3 Operation ....................................................................................................................77
5.5.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor ............................................................................................78
5.5.5 Driving LEDs Directly.................................................................................................79
5.6 PORT 5...................................................................................................................................80
5.6.1 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................80
5.6.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode ................................................................80
5.6.3 Operation ....................................................................................................................81
5.6.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor ............................................................................................82
5.6.5 Driving LEDs Directly.................................................................................................83
5.7 PORT 6...................................................................................................................................84
5.7.1 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................85
5.7.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode ................................................................88
5.7.3 Operation ....................................................................................................................90
5.7.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor ............................................................................................91
5.7.5 Note .............................................................................................................................92
5.8 PORT 7...................................................................................................................................92
5.8.1 Hardware Configuration............................................................................................92
5.8.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode ................................................................92
5.8.3 Operation ....................................................................................................................93
- ii -
5.8.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor..........................................................................................93
5.8.5 Notes .........................................................................................................................93
5.9 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................93
CHAPTER 6
REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION .................................................................................................95
6.1 CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION ...................................................................................95
6.2 REAL-TIME OUTPUT CONTROL REGISTER (RTPC) ........................................................97
6.3 ACCESS TO THE REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT ..................................................................97
6.4 OPERATION ..........................................................................................................................99
6.5 APPLICATION EXAMPLE.....................................................................................................102
6.6 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................104
CHAPTER 7
TIMER/COUNTER UNITS..............................................................................................................107
7.1 16-BIT TIMER/COUNTER .....................................................................................................109
7.1.1 Functions...................................................................................................................109
7.1.2 Configuration............................................................................................................109
7.1.3 16-Bit Timer/Counter Control Registers................................................................111
7.1.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer 0 (TM0) ........................................................................114
7.1.5 Compare Register and Capture Register Operations..........................................117
7.1.6 Basic Operation of Output Control Circuit ...........................................................119
7.1.7 PWM Output .............................................................................................................122
7.1.8 PPG Output ...............................................................................................................125
7.1.9 Sample Applications ...............................................................................................129
7.2 8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 1....................................................................................................139
7.2.1 Functions...................................................................................................................139
7.2.2 Configuration............................................................................................................140
7.2.3 8-Bit Timer/Counter 1 Control Registers...............................................................143
7.2.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timer 1 (TM1) ..........................................................................145
7.2.5 Compare Register and Capture/Compare Register Operations.........................148
7.2.6 Sample Applications ...............................................................................................151
7.3 8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 2....................................................................................................159
7.3.1 Functions...................................................................................................................159
7.3.2 Configuration............................................................................................................161
7.3.3 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 Control Registers...............................................................163
7.3.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timer 2 (TM2) ..........................................................................167
7.3.5 External Event Counter Function ...........................................................................170
7.3.6 One-Shot Timer Function .......................................................................................175
7.3.7 Compare Register and Capture Register Operations..........................................176
7.3.8 Basic Operation of Output Control Circuit ...........................................................179
7.3.9 PWM Output .............................................................................................................182
7.3.10 PPG Output ...............................................................................................................185
7.3.11 Sample Applications ...............................................................................................190
7.4 8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 3....................................................................................................205
7.4.1 Functions...................................................................................................................205
7.4.2 Configuration............................................................................................................205
7.4.3 8-Bit Timer/Counter 3 Control Registers...............................................................207
7.4.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timer 3 (TM3) ..........................................................................208
7.4.5 Compare Register Operation..................................................................................210
- iii -
Contents
7.4.6 Sample Applications..................................................................................................211
7.5 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................212
7.5.1 Common Notes on All Timers/Counters .................................................................212
7.5.2 Notes on 16-Bit Timer/Counter ................................................................................219
7.5.3 Notes on 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 ...............................................................................219
7.5.4 Notes on Using In-Circuit Emulators.......................................................................222
#
CHAPTER 8
A/D CONVERTER ...........................................................................................................................225
8.1 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................225
8.2 A/D CONVERTER MODE REGISTER (ADM) ......................................................................228
8.3 OPERATION ..........................................................................................................................230
8.3.1 Basic A/D Converter Operation ................................................................................230
8.3.2 Select Mode ................................................................................................................232
8.3.3 Scan Mode ..................................................................................................................233
8.3.4 A/D Conversion Activated by Software Start .........................................................234
8.3.5 A/D Conversion Activated by Hardware Start........................................................235
8.4 INTERRUPT REQUEST FROM THE A/D CONVERTER .....................................................239
8.5 SETTING FOR USE OF AN6 AND AN7..............................................................................239
8.6 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................239
CHAPTER 9
ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE ......................................................................................243
9.1 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................243
9.2 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE CONTROL REGISTER ......................................245
9.3 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE OPERATIONS ...................................................247
9.3.1 Data Format ................................................................................................................247
9.3.2 Parity Types and Operations ....................................................................................247
9.3.3 Transmission ..............................................................................................................248
9.3.4 Reception ....................................................................................................................249
9.3.5 Reception Error ..........................................................................................................249
9.4 BAUD RATE GENERATOR ..................................................................................................251
9.4.1 Configuration of the Baud Rate Generator for UART ...........................................251
9.4.2 Baud Rate Generator Control Register (BRGC)......................................................251
9.4.3 Operation of the Baud Rate Generator for UART..................................................253
9.5 BAUD RATE SETTING .........................................................................................................254
9.5.1 Example of Setting the BRGC Register When the Baud Rate Generator
for UART Is Used .......................................................................................................254
9.5.2 Example of Setting the Baud Rate When 8-bit Timer/Counter 3 Is Used ..........256
9.5.3 Example of Setting the BRGC When the External Baud Rate Input (ASCK)
Is Used .........................................................................................................................258
9.6 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................258
CHAPTER 10 CLOCK SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE ...........................................................................259
10.1 FUNCTION ............................................................................................................................259
10.2 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................259
10.3 CONTROL REGISTERS ........................................................................................................262
10.3.1 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (CSIM)...............................262
10.3.2 Serial Bus Interface Control Register (SBIC) ........................................................263
- iv -
Contents
10.4 OPERATIONS IN THE THREE-WIRE SERIAL I/O MODE ..................................................265
10.4.1 Basic Operation Timing ..........................................................................................265
10.4.2 Operation When Only Transmission Is Permitted...............................................267
10.4.3 Operation When Only Reception Is Permitted.....................................................267
10.4.4 Operation When Both Transmission and Reception Are Permitted .................267
10.4.5 Action to Be Taken When the Serial Clock and Shift Become Asynchronous ....268
10.5 SBI MODE .............................................................................................................................268
10.5.1 Features of SBI .........................................................................................................268
10.5.2 Configuration of the Serial Interface.....................................................................270
10.5.3 Detecting an Address Match ..................................................................................272
10.5.4 Control Registers in SBI Mode...............................................................................272
10.6 SBI COMMUNICATION AND SIGNALS.............................................................................277
10.6.1 Bus Release Signal (REL).......................................................................................277
10.6.2 Command Signal (CMD) ........................................................................................278
10.6.3 Address ....................................................................................................................278
10.6.4 Command and Data................................................................................................279
10.6.5 Acknowledge Signal (ACK)....................................................................................279
10.6.6 Busy Signal (BUSY) and Ready Signal (READY) ................................................280
10.6.7 Signals......................................................................................................................280
10.6.8 Communication .......................................................................................................287
10.6.9 Releasing the Busy State .......................................................................................287
10.6.10 Setting Wake-Up .....................................................................................................287
10.6.11 Starting Transmission and Reception..................................................................287
10.7 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................292
CHAPTER 11 EDGE DETECTION FUNCTION .....................................................................................................293
11.1 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT MODE REGISTERS (INTM0, INTM1) .......................................293
11.2 EDGE DETECTION ON PIN P20 ..........................................................................................296
11.3 EDGE DETECTION ON PINS P21 TO P26..........................................................................297
11.4 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................298
CHAPTER 12 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS ..............................................................................................................301
12.1 INTERRUPT REQUEST SOURCES......................................................................................302
12.1.1 Software Interrupt Request ...................................................................................302
12.1.2 Nonmaskable Interrupt Request ...........................................................................303
12.1.3 Maskable Interrupt Request ..................................................................................303
12.1.4 Selecting an Interrupt Source ...............................................................................303
12.2 INTERRUPT HANDLING CONTROL REGISTERS..............................................................304
12.2.1 Interrupt Request Flag Register (IF0) ...................................................................305
12.2.2 Interrupt Mask Register (MK0) ..............................................................................306
12.2.3 Interrupt Service Mode Register (ISM0) ..............................................................306
12.2.4 Priority Specification Flag Register (PR0)............................................................306
12.2.5 Interrupt Status Register (IST) ..............................................................................307
12.2.6 Program Status Word (PSW) ................................................................................308
12.3 INTERRUPT HANDLING ......................................................................................................308
12.3.1 Accepting Software Interrupts ..............................................................................308
12.3.2 Accepting Nonmaskable Interrupts ......................................................................308
12.3.3 Accepting Maskable Interrupts .............................................................................311
- v -
Contents
12.3.4 Multiplexed-Interrupt Handling..............................................................................313
12.3.5 Interrupt Request and Macro Service Pending....................................................316
12.3.6 Interrupt and Macro Service Operation Timing ..................................................317
12.4 MACRO SERVICE FUNCTION .............................................................................................319
12.4.1 Macro Service Outline.............................................................................................319
12.4.2 Macro Service Types ...............................................................................................320
12.4.3 Macro Service Basic Operation..............................................................................321
12.4.4 Macro Service Control Register .............................................................................322
12.4.5 Macro Service Type A .............................................................................................323
12.4.6 Type B Macro Service .............................................................................................327
12.4.7 Macro Service Type C .............................................................................................331
12.5 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................343
CHAPTER 13 LOCAL BUS INTERFACE FUNCTION...........................................................................................345
13.1 CONTROL REGISTERS ........................................................................................................346
13.1.1 Memory Expansion Mode Register (MM) ............................................................346
13.1.2 Programmable Wait Control Register (PW) .........................................................347
13.2 MEMORY EXPANSION FUNCTION ...................................................................................347
13.2.1 External Memory Expansion Function..................................................................347
13.2.2 1M-Byte Expansion Function .................................................................................348
13.2.3 Memory Mapping with Expanded Memory .........................................................350
13.2.4 Example of Connecting Memories ........................................................................355
13.3 INTERNAL ROM HIGH-SPEED FETCH FUNCTION...........................................................357
13.4 WAIT FUNCTION..................................................................................................................357
13.5 PSEUDO STATIC RAM REFRESH FUNCTION ..................................................................367
13.5.1 Function ....................................................................................................................367
13.5.2 Refresh Mode Register (RFM) ................................................................................367
13.5.3 Operation ..................................................................................................................368
13.5.4 Example of Connecting Pseudo Static RAM ........................................................372
13.6 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................372
CHAPTER 14 STANDBY FUNCTION ...................................................................................................................377
14.1 FUNCTION OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................377
14.2 STANDBY CONTROL REGISTER (STBC) ..........................................................................379
14.3 HALT MODE..........................................................................................................................379
14.3.1 Specifying HALT Mode and Operation States in HALT Mode...........................379
14.3.2 Releasing HALT Mode.............................................................................................380
14.4 STOP MODE .........................................................................................................................382
14.4.1 Specifying STOP Mode and Operation States in STOP Mode ..........................382
14.4.2 Releasing STOP Mode.............................................................................................382
14.4.3 Notes on Using STOP Mode ..................................................................................384
14.5 NOTES ...................................................................................................................................386
CHAPTER 15 RESET FUNCTION .........................................................................................................................389
15.1 RESET FUNCTION................................................................................................................389
15.2 NOTE .....................................................................................................................................393
- vi -
Contents
CHAPTER 16 APPLICATION EXAMPLES ............................................................................................................395
16.1 OPEN-LOOP CONTROL OF STEPPER MOTORS ..............................................................395
16.2 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WITH MULTIPLE DEVICES..................................................397
CHAPTER 17 PROGRAMMING FOR THE µPD78P214.......................................................................................399
17.1 OPERATING MODE ..............................................................................................................399
17.2 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING INTO PROM .........................................................................399
17.3 PROCEDURE FOR READING FROM PROM.......................................................................401
17.4 NOTE .....................................................................................................................................402
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION OPERATIONS .......................................................................................................403
18.1 LEGEND.................................................................................................................................403
18.1.1 Operand Field ...........................................................................................................403
18.1.2 Operation Field.........................................................................................................404
18.1.3 Flag Field...................................................................................................................405
18.2 LIST OF OPERATIONS.........................................................................................................406
18.3 INSTRUCTION LISTS FOR EACH ADDRESSING TYPE ...................................................416
APPENDIX A 78K/II SERIES PRODUCT LIST .....................................................................................................421
APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS ................................................................................................................429
B.1 HARDWARE ..........................................................................................................................431
B.2 SOFTWARE ...........................................................................................................................433
B.2.1 Language Processing Software ...............................................................................433
B.2.2 Software for the In-Circuit Emulator .......................................................................435
B.2.3 Software for the PROM Programmer ......................................................................437
B.2.4 OS for the IBM PC ......................................................................................................437
B.3 UPGRADING OTHER IN-CIRCUIT EMULATORS TO 78K/II SERIES LEVEL ...................438
B.3.1 Upgrading to IE-78240-R-A Level.............................................................................438
B.3.2 Upgrading to IE-78240-R Level.................................................................................439
B.3.3 Upgrading to IE-78210-R Level.................................................................................440
#
#
APPENDIX C SOFTWARE FOR EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS ..........................................................................441
C.1 FUZZY INFERENCE DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT SYSTEM ..............................................441
APPENDIX D REGISTER INDEX..........................................................................................................................443
D.1 REGISTER INDEX .................................................................................................................443
D.2 REGISTER SYMBOL INDEX ................................................................................................445
APPENDIX E INDEX.............................................................................................................................................447
E.1 INDEX ....................................................................................................................................447
E.2 SYMBOL INDEX ...................................................................................................................452
- vii -
Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. No.
2-1
Title, Page
I/O Circuits Provided for Pins.......................................................................................................34
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
Memory Map of µPD78212 (EA Pin Driven High) .....................................................................38
Memory Map of µPD78212 (EA Pin Driven Low) ......................................................................39
Memory Map of µPD78213, µPD78214, or µPD78P214 (EA Pin Driven Low) ........................40
Memory Map of µPD78214, µPD78P214 (EA Pin Driven High)................................................41
Sample Data Transfer between Banks .......................................................................................44
Configuration of the Program Counter ......................................................................................45
Configuration of the Program Status Word...............................................................................45
Configuration of the Stack Pointer..............................................................................................46
Data Saved to the Stack Area ......................................................................................................47
Data Restored from the Stack Area ............................................................................................47
Configuration of General-Purpose Registers.............................................................................48
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
Block Diagram of Clock Generator..............................................................................................55
External Circuit for the Clock Oscillator .....................................................................................55
Point from Which Signals Can Be Drawn When an External Clock Is Input .........................56
Notes on Connection of the Oscillator .......................................................................................57
Incorrect Oscillator Connections .................................................................................................57
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
Port Configuration .........................................................................................................................59
Configuration of Port 0 .................................................................................................................61
Port 0 Mode Register Format.......................................................................................................61
Port Specified as an Output Port.................................................................................................62
Example of Driving a Transistor..................................................................................................62
Block Diagram of Port 2................................................................................................................64
Port Specified as an Input Port....................................................................................................65
Built-In Pull-Up Resistor Format..................................................................................................65
Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 2) ...................................................................................66
Block Diagram of P30 (Port 3)......................................................................................................68
Block Diagram of P31, and P34 through P37 (Port 3)...............................................................69
Block Diagram of P32 (Port 3)......................................................................................................70
Block Diagram of P33 (Port 3)......................................................................................................71
Port 3 Mode Register Format.......................................................................................................72
Port 3 Mode Control Register (PMC3) Format...........................................................................72
Port Specified as an Output Port.................................................................................................73
Port Specified as an Input Port....................................................................................................73
Port Specified as a Control Signal Input or Output..................................................................74
Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format...................................................................................74
Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 3) ...................................................................................75
Block Diagram of Port 4................................................................................................................76
Port Specified as an Output Port.................................................................................................77
Port Specified as an Input Port....................................................................................................77
Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format...................................................................................78
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
- viii -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-43
5-44
Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 4) ...................................................................................79
Example of Driving an LED Directly ...........................................................................................79
Block Diagram of Port 5................................................................................................................80
Port 5 Mode Register Format.......................................................................................................81
Port Specified as an Output Port.................................................................................................81
Port Specified as an Input Port....................................................................................................82
Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format...................................................................................82
Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 5) ...................................................................................83
Example of Driving an LED Directly ...........................................................................................83
Block Diagram of P60 through P63 (Port 6) ...............................................................................85
Block Diagram of P64 and P65 (Port 6) ......................................................................................86
Block Diagram of P66 (Port 6)......................................................................................................87
Block Diagram of P67 (Port 6)......................................................................................................88
Port 6 Mode Register Format.......................................................................................................89
Port Specified as an Output Port.................................................................................................90
Port Specified as an Input Port....................................................................................................90
Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format...................................................................................91
Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 6) ...................................................................................91
Block Diagram of Port 7................................................................................................................92
Port Specified as an Input Port....................................................................................................93
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Block Diagram of the Real-Time Output Port ............................................................................96
Real-Time Output Port Control Register (RTPC) Format ..........................................................97
Configuration of the Buffer Registers (P0H and P0L) ...............................................................97
Real-Time Output Port Operation Timing ..................................................................................100
Real-Time Output Port Operation Timing (Controlling 2 Channels
Independently of Each Other) ......................................................................................................101
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
Real-Time Output Port Operation Timing ..................................................................................102
Contents of the Control Register for the Real-Time Output Function....................................103
Real-Time Output Function Setting Procedure .........................................................................103
Interrupt Request Handling When the Real-Time Output Function Is Used .........................104
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
Block Diagrams of Timer/Counter Units ....................................................................................108
Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Counter .....................................................................................110
Format of Timer Control Register 0 (TMC0) ..............................................................................112
Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 0 (CRC0) ..........................................................112
Format of Timer Output Control Register (TOC).......................................................................113
Basic Operation of 16-Bit Timer 0 (TM0)....................................................................................114
TM0 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR01) ..............................................115
Clear Operation When the CE0 Bit Is Reset to 0 .......................................................................116
Compare Operation.......................................................................................................................117
TM0 Cleared After a Coincidence Is Detected ...........................................................................118
Capture Operation .........................................................................................................................119
Toggle Output Operation .............................................................................................................121
PWM Pulse Output ........................................................................................................................122
Example of PWM Output Using TM0 .........................................................................................123
PWM Output When CR00 = FFFFH ..............................................................................................123
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
- ix -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-37
7-38
7-39
7-40
7-41
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-50
7-51
7-52
7-53
7-54
7-55
7-56
7-57
7-58
7-59
7-60
7-61
Example of Rewriting Compare Register CR00.........................................................................124
Example of PWM Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor......................................................124
Example of PPG Output Using TM0 ...........................................................................................125
PPG Output When CR00 = CR01 ..................................................................................................126
PPG Output When CR00 = 0000H ................................................................................................126
Example of Rewriting Compare Register CR00.........................................................................127
Example of PPG Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor........................................................127
Example of PPG Output Period Made Longer ...........................................................................128
Timing of Interval Timer Operation (1) ......................................................................................129
Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (1) ................................................130
Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (1)..................................................................130
Interrupt Request Handling for Interval Timer Operation (1)..................................................131
Timing of Interval Timer Operation (2) ......................................................................................131
Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (2) ................................................132
Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (2)..................................................................132
Timing of Pulse Width Measurement .........................................................................................133
Setting of Control Registers for Pulse Width Measurement ...................................................133
Setting Procedure for Pulse Width Measurement ....................................................................134
Interrupt Request Handling for Pulse Width Calculation .........................................................134
Example of PWM Signal Output by 16-Bit Timer/Counter ......................................................135
Setting of Control Registers for PWM Output Operation ........................................................135
Setting Procedure for PWM Output ............................................................................................136
Changing Duty Factor of PWM Output.......................................................................................136
Example of PPG Signal Output by 16-Bit Timer/Counter ........................................................137
Setting of Control Registers for PPG Output Operation ..........................................................137
Setting Procedure for PPG Output ..............................................................................................138
Changing Duty Factor of PPG Output .........................................................................................138
Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 1 ....................................................................................141
Format of Timer Control Register 1 (TMC1) ..............................................................................143
Format of Prescaler Mode Register 1 (PRM1) ...........................................................................144
Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 1 (CRC1) ..........................................................144
Basic Operation of 8-Bit Timer 1 (TM1)......................................................................................145
TM1 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR1m) ............................................146
TM1 Cleared after Capture Operation ........................................................................................147
Clear Operation When the CE1 Bit Is Reset to 0 .......................................................................147
Compare Operation.......................................................................................................................149
TM1 Cleared After a Coincidence Is Detected ...........................................................................149
Capture Operation .........................................................................................................................150
TM1 Cleared after Capture Operations ......................................................................................151
Timing of Interval Timer Operation (1) ......................................................................................152
Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (1) ................................................152
Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (1)..................................................................153
Interrupt Request Handling for Interval Timer Operation (1)..................................................153
Timing of Interval Timer Operation (2) ......................................................................................154
Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (2) ................................................154
Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (2)..................................................................155
- x -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
7-62
7-63
7-64
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-68
7-69
7-70
7-71
7-72
7-73
7-74
7-75
7-76
7-77
Timing of Pulse Width Measurement .........................................................................................156
Setting of Control Registers for Pulse Width Measurement ...................................................157
Setting Procedure for Pulse Width Measurement ....................................................................158
Interrupt Request Handling for Pulse Width Calculation .........................................................158
Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 ....................................................................................162
Format of Timer Control Register 1 (TMC1) ..............................................................................163
Format of Prescaler Mode Register 1 (PRM1) ...........................................................................164
Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 2 (CRC2) ..........................................................165
Format of Timer Output Control Register (TOC).......................................................................166
Basic Operation of 8-Bit Timer 2 (TM2)......................................................................................167
TM2 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR21) ..............................................168
TM2 Cleared After Capture Operation........................................................................................168
Clear Operation When the CE2 Bit Is Reset to 0 .......................................................................169
External Event Count Timing of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 ...........................................................171
Interrupt Request Generation Using External Event Counter .................................................172
Example Where Input of No Valid Edge Cannot Be Distinguished from Input of
Only One Valid Edge with External Event Counter .................................................................173
7-78
How to Distinguish Input of No Valid Edge from Input of Only One Valid Edge
with External Event Counter ........................................................................................................173
7-79
7-80
7-81
7-82
7-83
7-84
7-85
7-86
7-87
7-88
7-89
7-90
7-91
7-92
7-93
7-94
7-95
7-96
7-97
7-98
7-99
7-100
7-101
7-102
7-103
7-104
7-105
One-Shot Timer Operation...........................................................................................................175
Compare Operation.......................................................................................................................176
TM2 Cleared After a Coincidence Is Detected ...........................................................................177
Capture Operation .........................................................................................................................178
TM2 Cleared After Capture Operation........................................................................................179
Toggle Output Operation .............................................................................................................181
PWM Pulse Output ........................................................................................................................182
Example of PWM Output Using TM2 .........................................................................................183
PWM Output When CR20 = FFH ..................................................................................................184
Example of Rewriting a Compare Register................................................................................184
Example of PWM Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor......................................................185
Example of PPG Output Using TM2 ...........................................................................................186
PPG Output When CR20 = CR21 ..................................................................................................187
PPG Output When CR20 = 00H ....................................................................................................187
Example of Rewriting Compare Register CR20.........................................................................188
Example of PPG Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor........................................................188
Example of PPG Output Period Made Longer ...........................................................................189
Timing of Interval Timer Operation (1) ......................................................................................190
Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (1) ................................................191
Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (1)..................................................................191
Interrupt Request Handling for Interval Timer Operation (1)..................................................192
Timing of Interval Timer Operation (2) ......................................................................................192
Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (2) ................................................193
Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (2)..................................................................194
Timing of Pulse Width Measurement .........................................................................................195
Setting of Control Registers for Pulse Width Measurement ...................................................195
Setting Procedure for Pulse Width Measurement ....................................................................196
- xi -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
7-106
7-107
7-108
7-109
7-110
7-111
7-112
7-113
7-114
7-115
7-116
7-117
7-118
7-119
7-120
7-121
7-122
7-123
7-124
7-125
7-126
7-127
7-128
7-129
7-130
7-131
7-132
7-133
7-134
7-135
7-136
7-137
7-138
7-139
Interrupt Request Handling for Pulse Width Calculation .........................................................197
Example of PWM Signal Output by 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 .....................................................197
Setting of Control Registers for PWM Output Operation ........................................................198
Setting Procedure for PWM Output ............................................................................................199
Changing Duty Factor of PWM Output.......................................................................................199
Example of PPG Signal Output by 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 .......................................................199
Setting of Control Registers for PPG Output Operation ..........................................................200
Setting Procedure for PPG Output ..............................................................................................201
Changing Duty Factor of PPG Output .........................................................................................201
External Event Counter Operation ..............................................................................................201
Setting of Control Registers for External Event Counter Operation ......................................202
Setting Procedure for External Event Counter Operation .......................................................202
One-Shot Timer Operation...........................................................................................................203
Setting of Control Registers for One-Shot Timer Operation ...................................................203
Setting Procedure for One-Shot Timer Operation ....................................................................204
Procedure for Starting an Additional One-Shot Timer Operation ..........................................204
Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 3 ....................................................................................206
Format of Timer Control Register 0 (TMC0) ..............................................................................207
Format of Prescaler Mode Register 0 (PRM0) ...........................................................................207
Basic Operation of 8-Bit Timer 3 (TM3)......................................................................................208
TM3 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR30) ..............................................209
Clear Operation When the CE3 Bit Is Reset to 0 .......................................................................209
Compare Operation.......................................................................................................................211
Timing of Interval Timer Operation ............................................................................................211
Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation ......................................................212
Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation .......................................................................212
Count Start Operation...................................................................................................................214
Count Operation Stop ...................................................................................................................214
Timing of Count Operation Stop and Restart............................................................................214
Example of PWM Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor......................................................216
Example of PPG Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor........................................................217
Example of PPG Output Period Made Longer ...........................................................................218
Interrupt Request Generation Using External Event Counter .................................................220
Example Where Input of No Valid Edge Cannot Be Distinguished from Input of
Only One Valid Edge with External Event Counter ..................................................................220
7-140
7-141
How to Distinguish Input of No Valid Edge from Input of Only One Valid Edge
with External Event Counter ........................................................................................................221
Interrupt Generation Timing Change by an Erroneously Detected Edge ..............................223
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
A/D Converter Configuration .......................................................................................................226
Example of Capacitors Connected to the A/D Converter Pins ................................................227
A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM) Format ............................................................................229
Basic A/D Converter Operation....................................................................................................230
Relations between Analog Input Voltages and A/D Conversion Results...............................231
Select Mode Operation Timing ...................................................................................................232
Scan Mode Operation Timing......................................................................................................233
Software-Started Select-Mode A/D Conversion ........................................................................234
- xii -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
8-9
Software-Started Scan-Mode A/D Conversion ..........................................................................235
Example of Malfunction in a Hardware-Started A/D Conversion ...........................................236
Select-Mode A/D Conversion Started by Hardware .................................................................237
Scan-Mode A/D Conversion Started by Hardware ...................................................................238
Example of Capacitors Connected to the A/D Converter Pins ................................................240
Example of Malfunction in a Hardware-Started A/D Conversion ...........................................241
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
Asynchronous Serial Interface Configuration ...........................................................................244
Format of the Asynchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (ASIM)....................................246
Format of the Asynchronous Serial Interface Status Register (ASIS) ...................................247
Format of the Transmission/Reception Data at the Asynchronous Serial Interface ............247
Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Completion Interrupt Timing ........................248
Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Completion Interrupt Timing...............................249
Reception Error Timing ................................................................................................................250
Baud Rate Generator Clock Configuration.................................................................................251
Baud Rate Generator Control Register (BRGC) Format ...........................................................252
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
Block Diagram of the Clock Synchronous Serial Interface ......................................................260
Format of the Clock Synchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (CSIM) ...........................262
Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register (SBIC) ...........................................................264
Sample System Configuration with Three-Wire Serial I/O ......................................................265
Timing in Three-Wire Serial I/O Mode .......................................................................................266
Sample Connection with a Device Having Two-Wire Serial I/O .............................................266
Sample Serial Bus Configured with SBI.....................................................................................269
Pin Configuration...........................................................................................................................270
Block Diagram of Clock Synchronous Serial Interface.............................................................271
Format of Clock Synchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (CSIM) ..................................273
Format of SBIC Register ...............................................................................................................274
Configuration of Shift Register and Related Components ......................................................276
SBI Transfer Timing ......................................................................................................................277
Bus Release Signal ........................................................................................................................277
Command Signal ...........................................................................................................................278
Address ...........................................................................................................................................278
Selecting a Slave Device by Its Address ....................................................................................278
Command .......................................................................................................................................279
Data .................................................................................................................................................279
Acknowledge Signal .....................................................................................................................279
Busy Signal and Ready Signal ....................................................................................................280
Operation of RELT, CMDT, RELD, and CMDD ...........................................................................280
ACKT Operation .............................................................................................................................281
ACKE Operations ...........................................................................................................................281
ACKD Operations...........................................................................................................................282
BSYE Operation .............................................................................................................................283
Sending an Address from Master Device to Slave Device ......................................................288
Sending a Command from Master Device to Slave Device ....................................................289
Sending Data from Master Device to Slave Device..................................................................290
Sending Data from the Slave Device to the Master Device ....................................................291
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-18
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-28
10-29
10-30
- xiii -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0 (INTM0) ...........................................................294
Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 1 (INTM1) ...........................................................295
Edge Detection on Pin P20 ...........................................................................................................296
Edge Detection on Pins P21 to P26 .............................................................................................297
Erroneously Detected Edges ........................................................................................................297
Erroneously Detected Edges ........................................................................................................299
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
12-10
12-11
INTM1 Register Format ................................................................................................................303
ADM Register Format ...................................................................................................................304
Interrupt Request Flag Register (IF0) Format ............................................................................305
Interrupt Mask Register (MK0) Format .......................................................................................306
Interrupt Service Mode Register (ISM0) Format .......................................................................306
Priority Specification Flag Register (PR0) Format.....................................................................307
Interrupt Status Register (IST) Format .......................................................................................307
Program Status Word Format......................................................................................................308
Accepting an NMI Interrupt Request ..........................................................................................309
Interrupt Handling Algorithm ......................................................................................................312
Example of Handling an Interrupt Request When an Interrupt Is
Already Being Handled .................................................................................................................314
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-15
12-16
12-17
12-18
12-19
12-20
12-21
12-22
12-23
12-24
12-25
12-26
12-27
12-28
12-29
12-30
12-31
Example of Handling Interrupts That Occur Simultaneously..................................................316
Interrupt Request Generation and Acceptance .........................................................................317
Differences between a Vectored Interrupt and Macro Service ...............................................319
Macro Service Processing Sequence..........................................................................................321
Macro Service Control Word Configuration ..............................................................................322
Macro Service Mode Register Format ........................................................................................323
Flow of Data Transfer by Macro Service (Type A)....................................................................325
Type A Macro Service Channel ...................................................................................................326
Asynchronous Serial Reception ..................................................................................................327
Flow of Data Transfer by Macro Service (Type B) ....................................................................328
Type B Macro Service Channel ...................................................................................................329
Parallel Data Input in Synchronization with an External Interrupt .........................................330
Parallel Data Input Timing ...........................................................................................................330
Flow of Data Transfer by Macro Service (Type C) ....................................................................332
Type C Macro Service Channel ...................................................................................................334
Open-Loop Control for a Stepper Motor by the Real-Time Output Port ...............................336
Data Transfer Control Timing ......................................................................................................337
Four-Phase Stepping Motor with Phase 1 Excitation ...............................................................338
Four-Phase Stepping Motor with Phases 1 and 2 Excitation ..................................................338
Block Diagram 1 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(Constant-Speed Rotation with Phases 1 and 2 Excitation) ....................................................339
12-32
12-33
12-34
Timing Chart 1 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(Constant-Speed Rotation with Phases 1 and 2 Excitation) ....................................................340
Block Diagram 2 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(with the Output Timing Varied by Phase 2 Excitation)...........................................................341
Timing Chart 2 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(with the Output Timing Varied by Phase 2 Excitation)...........................................................342
- xiv -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
Format of the Memory Expansion Mode Register (MM) .........................................................346
Format of Programmable Wait Control Register (PW).............................................................347
Read Timing ...................................................................................................................................348
Write Timing ..................................................................................................................................348
Accessing Expansion Data Memory ...........................................................................................349
Data Memory Expansion for µPD78212 (When EA = L) ...........................................................351
Data Memory Expansion for µPD78212 (When EA = H) ..........................................................352
Data Memory Expansion for µPD78213 and µPD78214 (When EA = L) .................................353
Data Memory Expansion for µPD78214 and µPD78P214 (When EA = H) ..............................354
Example of Connecting Memories to µPD78214.......................................................................356
Wait Control Space of µPD78212 (When EA = L) ......................................................................358
Wait Control Space of µPD78212 (When EA = H) .....................................................................359
Wait Control Space of µPD78213 and µPD78214 (When EA = L) ............................................360
Wait Control Space of µPD78214 and µPD78P214 ....................................................................361
Read Timing of Programmable Wait Function..........................................................................362
Write Timing of Programmable Wait Function .........................................................................364
Timing When External Wait Signal Is Used ..............................................................................366
Format of Refresh Mode Register (RFM) ...................................................................................367
Pulse Refresh When Internal Memory Is Accessed ..................................................................368
Pulse Refresh When External Memory Is Accessed .................................................................369
Restoration Timing from Self-Refresh........................................................................................370
Return from Self-Refresh .............................................................................................................371
Example of Connecting Pseudo Static RAM to µPD78214.......................................................372
Return from Self-Refresh .............................................................................................................374
Glitch Observed on Pins A16 to A19 during Emulation ...........................................................374
Insufficient Address Hold Time during Emulation ...................................................................374
Preventing Problems That May Occur during Emulation ........................................................375
13-9
13-10
13-11
13-12
13-13
13-14
13-15
13-16
13-17
13-18
13-19
13-20
13-21
13-22
13-23
13-24
13-25
13-26
13-27
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-5
14-6
14-7
14-8
14-9
Transition Diagram for the Standby Modes ..............................................................................377
Standby Function Block ................................................................................................................378
Configuration of the Standby Control Register (STBC) ...........................................................379
Releasing STOP Mode with an NMI Signal ...............................................................................383
Example of Longer Oscillation Settling Time............................................................................383
Example of Address Bus Arrangement ......................................................................................385
Example Address/Data Bus Arrangement..................................................................................385
Example Arrangement for Analog Input Pin .............................................................................386
Example of Longer Oscillation Settling Time............................................................................387
15-1
15-2
15-3
Acceptance of the RESET Signal .................................................................................................389
Reset Operation at Power-On ......................................................................................................389
Timing Charts for Reset Operation .............................................................................................393
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
Example of Controlling Two Stepper Motors............................................................................396
Example System Configuration Using the Serial Bus Interface .............................................397
Example of Communication with SBI.........................................................................................398
Serial Bus Communication Timing .............................................................................................398
- xv -
Contents
Fig. No.
Title, Page
17-1
17-2
17-3
Timing Chart for PROM Write and Verify .................................................................................. 400
Write Operation Flowchart ...........................................................................................................401
PROM Read Timing Chart ............................................................................................................402
- xvi -
Contents
LIST OF TABLES
Table No.
Title, Page
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
Port 2 Functions.............................................................................................................................27
Port 3 Operating Mode .................................................................................................................29
Port 6 Operating Mode .................................................................................................................30
Types of I/O Circuits and Unused-Pin Handling........................................................................33
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
Vector Table ...................................................................................................................................42
Selecting a Register Bank.............................................................................................................46
Function Names and Absolute Names .......................................................................................49
Special Function Registers (SFR) ................................................................................................51
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
Port Functions ................................................................................................................................60
Number of I/O Ports ......................................................................................................................60
Functions of Port 2 ........................................................................................................................63
Port 3 Operating Modes ...............................................................................................................67
Port 4 Operating Modes ...............................................................................................................76
Port 5 Operating Modes ...............................................................................................................81
Port 6 Operating Modes ...............................................................................................................84
Port 6 Control Pin Functions and the Required Operations ....................................................88
6-1
6-2
Port 0 Operating Modes and Operations Needed for the Port 0 Buffer Registers ...............98
Output Trigger for the Real-Time Output Port ..........................................................................99
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
Timer/Counter Types and Functions...........................................................................................107
Intervals of 16-Bit Timer/Counter ................................................................................................109
Programmable Square Wave Output Setting Range of 16-Bit Timer/Counter .....................109
Pulse Width Measurement Range of 16-Bit Timer/Counter ....................................................109
Timer Output (TO0, TO1) Operation ...........................................................................................120
TO0 and TO1 Toggle Output........................................................................................................121
PWM Output on TO0 and TO1 .....................................................................................................122
PPG Output on TO0.......................................................................................................................125
Intervals of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 1 ...............................................................................................139
Pulse Width Measurement Range of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 1 ...................................................139
Intervals of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 ...............................................................................................159
Programmable Square Wave Output Setting Range of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 ....................160
Pulse Width Measurement Range of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 ...................................................160
Clock Signals That Can Be Applied to 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 .................................................161
Timer Output (TO2, TO3) Operation ...........................................................................................180
TO2 and TO3 Toggle Output........................................................................................................182
PWM Output on TO2 and TO3 .....................................................................................................183
PPG Output on TO2.......................................................................................................................186
Intervals of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 3 ...............................................................................................205
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
Maximum Number of Wait States Inserted When Registers Associated with
Timers/Counters Are Accessed ...................................................................................................215
- xvii -
Contents
Table No.
Title, Page
8-1
8-2
8-3
Modes Generating the INTAD......................................................................................................225
A/D Conversion Time ....................................................................................................................232
Conditions to Generate Interrupt Requests in Each A/D Converter Operating Mode .........239
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
Causes of Reception Errors..........................................................................................................250
Baud Rate Setting..........................................................................................................................254
Example of Setting the BRGC Register When the Baud Rate Generator for UART Is Used.......255
Example of Setting the Baud Rate When 8-Bit Timer/Counter 3 Is Used
(Asynchronous Serial Interface) ..................................................................................................257
9-5
Examples of Setting the BRGC When an External Baud Rate Input (ASCK) Is Used ..........258
10-1
10-2
10-3
Reading/Writing the Contents of the SBIC Register .................................................................263
Signals in SBI Mode......................................................................................................................284
Conditions Governing Release of BUSY ....................................................................................287
11-1
Pins P20 to P26 and Use of Detected Edge ...............................................................................293
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
12-10
12-11
12-12
Interrupt Request Handling Modes .............................................................................................301
Interrupt Request Sources ...........................................................................................................302
Flags for Interrupt Request Sources ...........................................................................................305
Multiple-Interrupt Handling .........................................................................................................313
Interrupt Request Acceptance Processing Time .......................................................................317
Macro Service Processing Time ..................................................................................................318
Interrupts That Can Use a Macro Service ..................................................................................320
Interrupt Requests That Can Specify Macro Service and Related SFRs (Type A)................324
Illegal Write Access Conditions and Corresponding Operations ...........................................324
Interrupt Requests That Can Specify Macro Service and SFRs (Type C) ..............................331
Illegal Write Access Conditions and Corresponding Operations ...........................................331
Illegal Write Access Conditions and Corresponding Operations ...........................................344
13-1
13-2
Conditions and Operations for Illegal Write Access.................................................................350
System Clock Frequency and Refresh Pulse Output Cycle
When Pseudo Static RAM Is Used ..............................................................................................368
13-3
Conditions and Operations for Illegal Write Access.................................................................373
14-1
14-2
14-3
14-4
Operation States in HALT Mode .................................................................................................379
Sources for Releasing HALT Mode and Operations Performed After Release.....................380
Release of HALT Mode by a Maskable Interrupt Request .......................................................381
Operation States in STOP Mode .................................................................................................382
15-1
15-2
Pin States during Reset and After Reset State Is Released.....................................................390
Hardware States after Reset ........................................................................................................391
17-1
Operating Modes for PROM Programming ...............................................................................399
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-4
8-Bit Instructions for Each Addressing Type .............................................................................416
16-Bit Instructions for Each Addressing Type ...........................................................................417
Bit Manipulation Instructions for Each Addressing Type ........................................................418
Call Instructions and Branch Instructions for Each Addressing Type....................................419
- xviii -
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
The µPD78214 sub-series is part of the 78K/II series of eight-bit single-chip microcomputers capable of accessing
an expanded memory space of 1 megabyte. This sub-series consists of the following products.
1
The µPD78214 offers a 16-KB masked ROM, 512-byte RAM, highly functional timers/counters, a high-precision A/
D converter, and two independent serial interfaces.
The µPD78212 is the same as the µPD78214 except that it offers an 8-KB ROM and 384-byte RAM.
The µPD78213 is the same as the µPD78214 except that it has no built-in ROM.
The µPD78P214 is the PROM version (used in place of masked ROM) of the µPD78214.
• µPD78P214DW: Programs can be written repeatedly (suitable for evaluating an application system).
• Others
: A program can be written once (suitable for application systems produced in small lots).
TheµPD78212(A), µPD78213(A),µPD78214(A), andµPD78P214(A)arethespecialqualityversionsoftheµPD78212,
µPD78213, µPD78214, and µPD78P214, respectively.
µPD78P214
PD78P214(A)
µ
PROM 16K
RAM 512
µPD78214
PD78214(A)
µPD78213
PD78213(A)
µ
µ
ROM 16K
RAM 512
ROM-less
RAM 512
µPD78212
PD78212(A)
µ
ROM 8K
RAM 384
This sub-series can be applied to the following:
Standard-quality products
°
• Printers
• Electronic typewriters
• Electronic cash registers (ECRs)
• Plain paper copiers (PPCs)
• Electronic musical instruments
• Air conditioners
• Cellular phones
• Cameras
Special-quality products
°
• Vehicle-mounted electrical equipment
• Combustion control
1
µPD78214 Sub-Series
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
2
Chapter 1 General
1.1 FEATURES
78K/II series
°
Multiplexed internal bus (faster execution of instructions)
1
°
Minimum instruction cycle (operating at 12 MHz): 333 ns (µPD78212, µPD78214, and µPD78P214),
or 500 ns (µPD78213)
Instruction set suitable for control applications
°
°
°
Data memory expansion function (memory space of 1MB with two bank designation pointers)
Interrupt controller (with two priority levels)
• Vectored interrupt handling
• Macro service
Internal memory
°
• ROM
Masked ROM : 16KB (µPD78214), 8KB (µPD78212), or none (µPD78213)
PROM
: 16KB (µPD78P214)
• RAM: 512 bytes (µPD78213, µPD78214, and µPD78P214), or 384 bytes (µPD78212)
Number of I/O pins: 54 (µPD78212, µPD78214, and µPD78P214), or 36 (µPD78213)
• Number of pins with software-programmable pull-up resistors: 16 (µPD78213 only),
°
or 34 (other than µPD78213)
• Number of LED direct-drive pins: 16 (µPD78212, µPD78214, and µPD78P214)
• Number of transistor direct-drive pins: 8
Serial interface
°
°
• UART (baud rate generator included)
• Synchronous serial interface (three-wire serial I/O, serial bus interface)
Real-timeoutputports(twosteppermotorscanbeindependentlycontrolledbycombiningtheoutputportswith
an eight-bit timer/counter.)
Eight-bit A/D converter (analog eight-bit input)
Highly functional timer/counter units
• 16-bit unit
°
°
• Three eight-bit units
3
µPD78214 Sub-Series
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION AND QUALITY GRADE
1.2.1 Ordering Information
Ordering code
Package
Internal ROM
µPD78212CW-×××
µPD78212GC-×××-AB8
µPD78212GJ-×××-5BJ
µPD78213CW
µPD78213GC-AB8
µPD78213GJ-5BJ
µPD78213GQ-36
µPD78213L
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
None
None
None
None
68-pin plastic QFJ
None
µPD78214CW-×××
µPD78214GC-×××-AB8
µPD78214GJ-×××-5BJ
µPD78214GQ-×××-36
µPD78214L-×××
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
68-pin plastic QFJ
µPD78P214CW
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
µPD78P214GC-AB8
µPD78P214GJ-5BJ
µPD78P214GQ-36
µPD78P214L
68-pin plastic QFJ
µPD78P214DW
µPD78P214CW-×××
µPD78P214GC-×××-AB8
µPD78P214GJ-×××-5BJ
µPD78P214GQ-×××-36
µPD78P214L-×××
µPD78212CW (A)-×××
µPD78212GC (A)-×××-AB8
µPD78213CW (A)
µPD78213GQ (A)-36
µPD78214CW (A)-×××
µPD78214GC (A)-×××-AB8
µPD78214GJ (A)-×××-5BJ
µPD78214GQ (A)-×××-36
µPD78214L (A)-×××
64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window (750 mil) EPROM
Note
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
Program-written one-time PROM
Note
Program-written one-time PROM
Program-written one-time PROM
Program-written one-time PROM
Program-written one-time PROM
Masked ROM
Note
Note
Note
68-pin plastic QFJ
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QUIP
Masked ROM
None
None
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
Masked ROM
68-pin plastic QFJ
Masked ROM
µPD78P214CW (A)
µPD78P214GC (A)-AB8
µPD78P214CW (A)-×××
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
One-time PROM
One-time PROM
Note
Program-written one-time PROM
TM
Note QTOP microcomputers. QTOP microcomputers are a line of one-time PROM single-chip microcomputers that are fully supported by
NEC, from writing of the program, through marking and screening, to verifying.
Remark ××× indicates the ROM code number.
4
Chapter 1 General
1.2.2 Quality Grade
Ordering code
Package
Quality grade
µPD78212CW-×××
µPD78212GC-×××-AB8
µPD78212GJ-×××-5BJ
µPD78213CW
µPD78213GC-AB8
µPD78213GJ-5BJ
µPD78213GQ-36
µPD78213L
µPD78214CW-×××
µPD78214GC-×××-AB8
µPD78214GJ-×××-5BJ
µPD78214GQ-×××-36
µPD78214L-×××
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
1
68-pin plastic QFJ
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
68-pin plastic QFJ
µPD78P214CW
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
µPD78P214GC-AB8
µPD78P214GJ-5BJ
µPD78P214GQ-36
µPD78P214L
68-pin plastic QFJ
µPD78P214DW
64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window (750 mil) Standard
Note
µPD78P214CW-×××
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Special
Note
µPD78P214GC-×××-AB8
Note
µPD78P214GJ-×××-5BJ
Note
µPD78P214GQ-×××-36
Note
µPD78P214L-×××
68-pin plastic QFJ
µPD78212CW (A)-×××
µPD78212GC (A)-×××-AB8
µPD78213CW (A)
µPD78213GQ (A)-36
µPD78214CW (A)-×××
µPD78214GC (A)-×××-AB8
µPD78214GJ (A)-×××-5BJ
µPD78214GQ (A)-×××-36
µPD78214L (A)-×××
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QUIP
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
64-pin plastic QUIP
68-pin plastic QFJ
µPD78P214CW (A)
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
µPD78P214GC (A)-AB8
Note
µPD78P214CW (A)-×××
TM
Note QTOP microcomputers. QTOP microcomputers are a line of one-time PROM single-chip microcomputers that are fully supported by
NEC, from writing of the program, through marking and screening, to verifying.
Remark ××× indicates the ROM code number.
Refer to “Quality grade on NEC Semiconductor Devices” (Document number IEI-1209), published by NEC
Corporation, for the specifications of the quality grade of the devices and the recommended applications.
5
µPD78214 Sub-Series
1.3 PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
1.3.1 Normal Operating Mode
(1) 64-pin plastic shrink DIP, 64-pin plastic QUIP, 64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window
P03
P04
1
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
P02
2
P01
P05
3
P00
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
P06
4
P37/TO3
P36/TO2
P35/TO1
P34/TO0
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
AVREF
P07
5
P67/REFRQ/AN7
P66/WAIT/AN6
P65/WR
P64/RD
P63/A19
P62/A18
P61/A17
P60/A16
RESET
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
X2
AVSS
X1
VDD
VSS
EA
P57/A15
P56/A14
P55/A13
P54/A12
P53/A11
P52/A10
P51/A9
P50/A8
P47/AD7
P46/AD6
P45/AD5
P44/AD4
P43/AD3
P42/AD2
VSS
P33/SO/SB0
P32/SCK
P31/TXD
P30/RXD
P27/SI
µ
µ
µ
µ
P26/INTP5
P25/INTP4/ASCK
P24/INTP3
P23/INTP2/CI
P22/INTP1
P21/INTP0
P20/NMI
ASTB
P40/AD0
P41/AD1
6
Chapter 1 General
(2) 68-pin plastic QFJ
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
P70/AN0
P34/TO0
P35/TO1
P36/TO2
P37/TO3
P00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
P24/INTP3
P23/INTP2/CI
P22/INTP1
P21/INTP0
P20/NMI
ASTB
P01
P40/AD0
P41/AD1
VSS
µPD78213L
P02
µPD78214L-×××
µPD78214L(A)-×××
µPD78P214L
P03
P04
VSS
µPD78P214L-×××
P05
P42/AD2
P43/AD3
P44/AD4
P45/AD5
P46/AD6
P47/AD7
P50/A8
P06
P07
NC
P67/REFRQ/AN7
P66/WAIT/AN6
P65/WR
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Remark The NC pin is not connected inside the chip.
7
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) 64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
P64/RD
P63/A19
P62/A18
P61/A17
P60/A16
RESET
X2
1
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
AVREF
2
3
4
5
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
6
7
AVSS
X1
8
VDD
VSS
9
EA
P57/A15
P56/A14
P55/A13
P54/A12
P53/A11
P52/A10
P51/A9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P33/SO/SB0
P32/SCK
P31/TXD
P30/RXD
P27/SI
P26/INTP5
P25/INTP4/ASCK
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
8
Chapter 1 General
(4) 74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
1
74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
P65/WR
P66/WAIT/AN6
P67/REFRQ/AN7
P07
P50/A8
P47/AD7
P46/AD6
P45/AD5
P44/AD4
P43/AD3
P42/AD2
VSS
1
2
3
4
NC
5
P06
6
P05
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
7
P04
8
P03
VSS
9
NC
P41/AD1
P40/AD0
ASTB
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P02
P01
P00
NC
P37/TO3
P36/TO2
P35/TO1
NC
P20/NMI
P21/INTP0
P22/INTP1
P23/INTP2/CI
P24/INTP3
P34/TO0
P70/AN0
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Remark The NC pins are not connected inside the chip.
9
µPD78214 Sub-Series
P00-P07
P20-P27
P30-P37
P40-P47
P50-P57
P60-P67
P70-P75
TO0-TO3
CI
: Port 0
: Port 2
: Port 3
: Port 4
: Port 5
: Port 6
: Port 7
: Timer output
: Clock input
: Receive data
: Transmit data
: Serial clock
: Asynchronous serial clock
: Serial bus
: Serial input
: Serial output
: Non-maskable interrupt
RxD
TxD
SCK
ASCK
SBO
SI
SO
NMI
INTP0-INTP5 : Interrupt from peripherals
AD0-AD7
A8-A19
RD
: Address/data bus
: Address bus
: Read strobe
: Write strobe
: Wait
WR
WAIT
ASTB
REFRQ
RESET
X1, X2
EA
: Address strobe
: Refresh request
: Reset
: Crystal
: External access
: Analog input
: Reference voltage
: Analog ground
: Power supply
: Ground
AN0-AN7
AV
AV
REF
SS
V
V
DD
SS
NC
: Non-connection
10
Chapter 1 General
1.3.2 PROM Programming Mode (P20/NMI = 12.5 V, RESET = L)
(1) 64-pin plastic shrink DIP, 64-pin plastic QUIP, 64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window
1
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
1
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
A2
A1
A0
2
3
4
5
(Open)
6
(L)
(L)
7
CE
OE
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
(L)
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
RESET
(Open)
(G)
VDD
VSS
VPP
(L)
(L)
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
(L)
(Open)
(G)
A8
D7
D6
D5
A9
D4
P20/NMI
(Open)
D0
D3
D2
VSS
D1
Caution The symbols enclosed in parentheses indicate that the corresponding pins, not used in PROM programming mode, shall be handled
as follows:
L
: Connect the corresponding pin independently to V , through a 10-kΩ resistor.
SS
#
G
: Connect the corresponding pin to V
.
SS
Open : Leave the corresponding pin unconnected.
11
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) 68-pin plastic QFJ
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61
(L)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
(G)
(Open)
A9
P20/NMI
(Open)
D0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
NC
D1
µPD78P214L
PD78P214L-×××
VSS
µ
VSS
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
(L)
D7
CE
A8
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Caution The symbols enclosed in parentheses indicate that the corresponding pins, not used in PROM programming mode, shall be handled
as follows:
L
: Connect the corresponding pin independently to V , through a 10-kΩ resistor.
SS
#
G
: Connect the corresponding pin to V
.
SS
Open : Leave the corresponding pin unconnected.
Remark The NC pin is not connected inside the chip.
12
Chapter 1 General
(3) 64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
1
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
OE
1
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
2
3
(L)
4
(L)
5
µ
µ
µ
RESET
(Open)
(G)
6
7
8
VDD
VPP
VSS
9
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
(L)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
(L)
(Open)
(G)
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Caution The symbols enclosed in parentheses indicate that the corresponding pins, not used in PROM programming mode, shall be handled
as follows:
L
: Connect the corresponding pin independently to V , through a 10-kΩ resistor.
SS
#
G
: Connect the corresponding pin to V
.
SS
Open : Leave the corresponding pin unconnected.
13
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(4) 74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
CE
A7
A8
D7
1
(L)
2
D6
3
D5
4
(Open)
A6
D4
5
D3
6
A5
µ
µ
D2
7
A4
VSS
8
A3
IC
9
NC
A2
D1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
D0
A1
(Open)
NC
A0
P20/NMI
A9
(Open)
NC
(G)
(Open)
(L)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Caution The symbols enclosed in parentheses indicate that the corresponding pins, not used in PROM programming mode, shall be handled
as follows:
L
: Connect the corresponding pin independently to V , through a 10-kΩ resistor.
SS
#
G
: Connect the corresponding pin to V
.
SS
Open : Leave the corresponding pin unconnected.
Remark The NC pins are not connected inside the chip.
14
Chapter 1 General
V
: Programming power supply
PP
RESET : Reset
D0-D7 : Data bus
A0-A14 : Address bus
1
V
: Ground
SS
OE
: Output enable
: Power supply
: Chip enable
V
DD
CE
P20/NMI : Port 2/non-maskable interrupt
NC : Non-connection
15
µPD78214 Sub-Series
1.4 EXAMPLE APPLICATION SYSTEM (PRINTER)
µ
µ
µ
16
Chapter 1 General
1.5 BLOCK DIAGRAM
1
µ
Bus control
System control
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
Data bus (8)
µ
µ
µ
Bus interface
µ
SFR address/data bus
µ
µ
µ
µ
17
µPD78214 Sub-Series
1.6 FUNCTIONS
Item
µPD78212
µPD78214
µPD78P214
µPD78213
Number of basic instructions (mnemonics)
65
Minimum instruction execution
time (when operating at 12 MHz)
333 ns
500 ns
None
Capacity of
ROM
RAM
8K bytes
16K bytes
512 bytes
internal memory
384 bytes
Memory area
64KB for program and 1MB for data
Number of
I/O pins
Input pins
14
12
Output pins
I/O pins
Total
28
54
10
36
Connected to a
pull-up resistor
34
16
16
0
Driving a LED
directly
Driving a
8
transistor directly
Real-time output ports
General-purpose registers
Timer/counters
Two four-bit ports or one eight-bit port
Four banks of eight eight-bit registers (memory mapping)
16-bit timer/counter, consisting of
one timer register, one capture
register, and two compare registers.
Pulse output possible (toggle
output or PWM/PPG output)
8-bit timer/counter unit 1, consisting of
one timer register, one capture/
compare register, and one compare
register
Pulse output possible (two
four-bit, real-time outputs)
8-bit timer/counter unit 2, consisting
of one timer register, one capture
register, and two compare registers.
Pulse output possible (toggle
output or PWM/PPG output)
8-bit timer/counter unit 3, consisting
of one timer register and one
compare register
Serial interface
One-channel UART (special baud rate generator incorporated)
One-channel CSI (three-wire serial I/O, SBI)
Note The number of I/O pins includes special-function pins.
18
Chapter 1 General
Item
µPD78212
µPD78214
µPD78P214
µPD78213
A/D converter
Interrupt
Eight channels, each having a resolution of eight bits
• 19 interrupts (seven external and 12 internal) plus those caused by
1
BRK instructions
• Two programmable priority levels
• Two types of interrupt handling, vectored interrupt and macro
service
Instruction set
• 16-bit calculation
• Multiplication (8 bits by 8 bits) and division (16 bits by 8 bits)
• Bit manipulation
• BCD conversion
• Others
Package
• 64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil) for all products
• 64-pin plastic QUIP for all products other than µPD78212,
µPD78212(A), and µPD78P214(A)
• 68-pin plastic QFJ for all products other than µPD78212,
µPD78212(A), µPD78213(A), and µPD78P214(A)
Note
• 64-pin plastic QFP (14 x 14 mm)
for all products other than
µPD78213(A)
• 74-pin plastic QFP (20 x 20 mm) for all products other than
µPD78212(A), µPD78213(A), and µPD78P214(A)
• 64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window (750 mil) for µPD78P214
only
Note Small package with a lead pitch of 0.8 mm, suitable for cameras.
19
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Note
1.7 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78210
AND µPD78213
Note For maintenance purposes only.
Product
µPD78210
µPD78213
Item
128 bytes
512 bytes
RAM capacity
I/O pins
• Software programmable pull-up resistors:
•
Software programmable pull-up resistors:
Supported
Not supported
• Transistor direct drive outputs: Not
•
Transistor direct drive outputs: Supported
supported
Timer/counter
Serial interface
PWM/PPG output: Not supported
PWM/PPG output: Supported
Scaler for the baud rate generator output:
Not supported
Scaler for the baud rate generator output:
Supported
Interrupt
Macro service can be applied to some
interrupt requests.
Macro service can be applied to all interrupt
requests with the exception of that caused by
a serial receive error.
• Six input pins.
•
•
Eight input pins.
A/D converter
• A voltage ranging from 0 V to AV
can be
A voltage ranging from 0 V to AV
can be
REF
REF
applied to the input pins.
applied only to those pins for which A/D
conversion is being performed, as well as
the pins selected by the ANI0 to ANI3 bits
of the ADM register.
Package
Others
64-pin QFP: Not supported
64-pin QFP: Supported
The area at addresses 0FE20H to 0FE7FH can
only be accessed in saddr addressing mode.
The area at addresses 0FE20H to 0FE7FH can
be accessed in any addressing mode.
20
Chapter 1 General
1.8 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78214 SUB-SERIES AND µPD78218A SUB-SERIES
Series name
Product
µPD78214 Sub-Series
µPD78218A Sub-Series
µPD78217A µPD78218A µPD78P218A
1
µPD78212
µPD78213
µPD78214 µPD78P214
µPD78212(A) µPD78213(A) µPD78214(A) µPD78P214(A)
Minimum instruction cycle
(when operating at 12 MHz)
333 ns
500 ns
333 ns
500 ns
333 ns
V
= +5 V
Operating voltage range
DD
V
= +5 V 10%
DD
0.3 V
ROM
8K bytes
16K bytes
16K bytes
(PROM)
32K bytes
32K bytes
(PROM)
Internal memory
ROM-less
36
ROM-less
36
(masked ROM)
(masked ROM)
(masked ROM)
RAM
384 bytes
54
512 bytes
1024 bytes
Number of I/O pins
54
54
• Five or seven when internal dual-port RAM is
used for the stack area
• Seven or nine in all other cases
•
Six when internal dual-port RAM
is used for the stack area
Eight in all other cases
Execution time (number of
clocks) required for PUSH
PSW instruction
•
One-shot output of 16-bit
timer/counter
Supported
None
Bit width of macro-service
counter
Eight bits or 16 bits (selectable,
except for macro service type A)
Eight bits
Only the eight lower-order bits are incremented.
(The eight high-order bits remain as is.)
MPD or MPT increment in
macro-service type C
The 16 bits are incremented.
Restriction imposed on data
transfer from memory to SFR
in macro-service type A
Transfer source buffer (memory)
addresses shall not be 0FED0H to
0FEDFH.
Transfer data shall not be D0H to DFH.
Macro-service execution time
The macro-service execution time depends on the macro-service mode and other
factors, and also varies with the sub-series. For details, refer to the table of macro-
service execution times in the relevant user's manual.
Restriction imposed
on input voltage
A voltage ranging from 0 V to AV
can be
A voltage ranging from 0 V to
AV can be applied only to those
pins for which A/D conversion is
being performed.
REF
applied only to those pins for which A/D conver-
sion is performed and the pins selected by the
ANI0 to ANI3 bits of the ADM register.
REF
Restriction imposed
3.4 V to V
3.6 V to V
on the AV
voltage
DD
DD
REF
Oscillation settling time when Pulse width of NMI at its active level, plus 16
15 counts on the corresponding
counter or pulse width of NMI at its
active level, plus 16 counts on the
corresponding counter
STOP mode is released
counts on the corresponding counter
Package
• 64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil) for all
products
•
•
•
64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
for all products
• 64-pin plastic QUIP for all products other than
µPD78212, µPD78212(A), and µPD78P214(A)
64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
for all products
• 68-pin plastic QFJ for all products other than
µPD78212, µPD78212(A), µPD78213(A), and
µPD78P214(A)
64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with
window (750 mil) for the
µPD78P218A only
• 64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm) for all products
other than µPD78213(A)
• 74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm) for all products
other than µPD78212(A), µPD78213(A), and
µPD78P214(A)
• 64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window (750
mil) for µPD78P214 only
21
µPD78214 Sub-Series
1.9 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78212 AND µPD78212(A)
Product
µPD78212
µPD78212(A)
Item
Special
Quality grade
Package
Standard
• 64-pin plastoc shrink DIP
• 64-pin plastic QFP
• 74-pin plastic QFP
• 64-pin plastoc shrink DIP
• 64-pin plastic QFP
1.10 DIFFERENCESBETWEENTHEµPD78213ANDµPD78214,ANDTHEµPD78213(A)ANDµPD78214(A)
Product
µPD78213, µPD78214
µPD78213(A), µPD78214(A)
Special
Item
Quality grade
Standard
No limit
Maximum period in which 74-
pin plastic QFPs can be soldered
satisfactorily, after their sealed
packaging has been opened
Seven days
Package
• 64-pin plastic shrink DIP
Note
• 64-pin plastic QFP
Note
• 74-pin plastic QFP
• 64-pin plastic QUIP
Note
• 68-pin plastic QFJ
Note Not supported for the µPD78213(A)
1.11 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78P214 AND µPD78P214(A)
Product
µPD78P214
µPD78P214(A)
Item
Special
Quality grade
Package
Standard
• 64-pin plastic shrink DIP
• 64-pin plastic shrink DIP
• 64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window
• 64-pin plastic QFP
• 64-pin plastic QFP
• 74-pin plastic QFP
• 64-pin plastic QUIP
• 68-pin plastic QFJ
22
Chapter 1 General
1.12 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE µPD78212, µPD78213, µPD78214, AND µPD78P214
1.12.1 Functional Differences
1
Product name
Parameter
µPD78212
µPD78213
µPD78214
µPD78P214
8KB masked ROM at None
00000H to 01FFFH
16KB masked ROM
16KB PROM at
Internal ROM
Internal RAM
Port 4
at 00000H to 03FFFH 00000H to 03FFFH
384 bytes at 0FD80H
512 bytes at 0FD00H to 0FEFFH
Used as both general-purpose I/O port
Used only as
to 0FEFFH
Used as both
(P40 to P47) and address/data bus (AD0 to
AD7)
general-purpose I/O address/data bus
port (P40 to P47) and (AD0 to AD7)
address/data bus
(AD0 to AD7)
Used as both general-purpose I/O port
(P50 to P57) and address bus (A8 to A15)
Used as both
Used only as
Port 5
Port 6
general-purpose I/O address bus (A8 to
port (P50 to P57) and A15)
address bus (A8 to
A15)
P64 and P65 are used as both general-
purpose I/O ports, and the RD and WR
pins, respectively.
P64 and P65 are
used as both
P64 and P65 are
used only as the RD
general-purpose I/O and WR pins,
ports, and the RD
and WR pins,
respectively.
respectively.
Others
PROM programming
—
—
—
mode is supported
1.12.2 Package Differences
These products are available with either of two types of QFP (64-pin and 74-pin). Taking differences such as their
soldering conditions, listed below, into consideration, select an appropriate QFP.
Item
64-pin QFP
74-pin QFP
Package size
14 × 14 mm, lead pitch: 0.8 mm
20 × 20 mm, lead pitch: 1.0 mm
Note
Note
Supported by µPD78212, µ78213
µ78214, and µ78P214
,
Supported by µPD78212
,
Infrared reflow soldering or
vapor-phase soldering (VPS)
Humidity control for
infrared reflow soldering or
VPS
Note
Note
µ78213
, µ78214, and µ78P214
Note
Note
The µPD78212, µPD78213
,
The µPD78P214
shall be soldered
µPD78214, and µPD78P214 shall be
soldered within two days of their sealed being opened.
within seven days of its sealed package
package being opened.
Note
Note
The µPD78212
, µPD78213
, and
µPD78214 can be soldered at any time
after their sealed package has been
opened.
Note The corresponding package is not available for the special quality grade versions of these products, indicated by suffix (A).
23
24
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.1 PIN FUNCTION LIST
2.1.1 Normal Operating mode
(1) Ports
2
Pin name for
Pin
Input/Output
Output
Function
secondary
function
Port 0 (P0):
—
P00-P07
Can be used as two four-bit, real-time output ports. Can drive transistors
directly.
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34-P37
NMI
INTP0
INTP1
INTP2/CI
INTP3
INTP4/ASCK
INTP5
SI
Port 2 (P2):
Cannot be used as a general-purpose port (non-maskable interrupt). The
input level can be checked as part of the interrupt routine. Pins P22 to
P27 can be collectively connected to internal pull-up resistors by means
of software.
Input
RxD
Port 3 (P3):
Each pin can be assigned to be either an input or output pin. Input pins
can be collectively connected to internal pull-up resistors by means of
software.
TxD
Input/Output
Input/Output
SCK
SO/SB0
TO0-TO3
Port 4 (P4):
Can be simultaneously assigned to be either input or output pins. Can be
collectively connected to internal pull-up resistors by means of software.
Can directly drive LEDs.
Note 1
P40-P47
AD0-AD7
A8-A15
Port 5 (P5):
Each pin can be assigned to be either an input or output pin. Input pins
can be collectively connected to internal pull-up resistors by means of
software. Can directly drive LEDs.
Note 1
P50-P57
Input/Output
Output
P60-P63
A16-A19
RD
Port 6 (P6):
Each of pins P64 to P67 can be assigned to be either an input or output
pin. Input pins P64 to P67 can be collectively connected to internal pull-
up resistors by means of software.
Note 2
Note 2
P64
P65
P66
P67
WR
Input/Output
Input
WAIT/AN6
REFRQ/AN7
AN0-AN5
P70-P75
Port 7 (P7)
Notes 1. In the case of the µPD78213, these pins do not function as ports.
2. In the case of the µPD78213, neither P64 nor P65 functions as a port.
25
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Pins other than those which function as ports
Pin name for
secondary function
Pin
Function
Input/output
Output
Input
Timer output
P34-P37
P23/INTP2
P30
TO0-TO3
CI
Count clock supplied to eight-bit timer/counter unit 2
Serial data input (UART)
RxD
Input
TxD
Output
Input
Serial data output (UART)
P31
ASCK
SB0
Baud rate clock input (UART)
P25/INTP4
P33/SO
P27
Input/output Serial data input/output (SB2)
SI
Input
Serial data input (three-wire serial I/O)
Serial data output (three-wire serial I/O)
Output
P33/SB0
P32
SO
SCK
Input/output Serial clock input/output (SBI, three-wire serial I/O)
P20
NMI
INTP0
INTP1
INTP2
INTP3
INTP4
INTP5
AD0-AD7
A8-A15
A16-A19
RD
P21
P22
P23/CI
P24
Input
External interrupt requests
P25/ASCK
P26
Note
Input/output Time-multiplexed address/data bus (external memory connected)
P40-P47
Note
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
High-order address bus (external memory connected)
High-order address when the addresses are expanded (external memory connected)
Read strobe to external memory
P50-P57
P60-P63
Note
P64
Note
Write strobe to external memory
P65
WR
WAIT
ASTB
REFRQ
RESET
X1
Wait insertion
P66/AN6
—
Output
Output
Input
Latch timing for addresses A0 to A7 (when external memory is accessed)
Refresh pulse to external pseudo-static memory
Chip reset
P67/AN7
—
Input
Connected to the crystal oscillator used for the system clock (a clock
signal can be input to X1)
—
—
X2
Designating ROM-less operation (access to the external memory
mapped to the same area as the internal ROM). Set this pin to low for
the µPD78213, or to high for the µPD78212 and µPD78214.
Input
Input
EA
—
AN0-AN5
AN6, AN7
P70-P75
Analog voltage input for A/D converter
P66/WAIT,
P67/REFRQ
AV
AV
V
A/D converter reference voltage
REF
SS
A/D converter ground
—
Main power
Ground
—
—
DD
V
SS
NC
Note These pins do not function as ports in the case of the µPD78213.
26
Chapter 2 Pin Functions
2.1.2 PROM Programming Mode (only for the µPD78P214, P20/NMI = 12.5 V, RESET = L)
Pin
P20/NMI
RESET
A0-A14
D0-D7
CE
Input/output
Function
Setting PROM programming mode
Input
2
Address bus
Input/output Data bus
PROM enable input
Input
Read strobe to PROM
Power for programming
Main power
OE
V
V
V
PP
DD
SS
—
Ground
—
NC
2.2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.2.1 Normal Operating mode
(1) P00 to P07 (Port 0): Tristate outputs
Port 0, an eight-bit output port with output latches, can directly drive transistors. Its eight bits can be
simultaneously set to either output mode or high impedance mode by specifying the port-0 mode register
(PM0) accordingly.
Port 0 can output the contents of the buffer registers (P0L, P0H) in real-time at any interval, in units of eight
or four bits (P00 to P03 and P04 to P07). The real-time output port control register (RTPC) determines whether
port 0 is used as a normal output port or real-time output port.
When the RESET signal is input, the output of port 0 becomes high impedance, resulting in the contents of
the output latches becoming undefined.
(2) P20 to P27 (port 2): Inputs
Port 2 is an eight-bit input port. P22 to P27 are provided with software-programmable pull-up resistors. P20
to P27 also act as input pins for control signals such as external interrupts (see Table 2-1). To prevent
malfunctions caused by noise, port 2 provides Schmitt-triggered input circuits.
Table 2-1 Port 2 Functions
Port
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
Function
Note
Input port/NMI input
Input port/INTP0 input/CR11 capture trigger input/trigger signal for real-time output port
Input port/INTP1 input/CR22 capture trigger input
Input port/INTP2 input/CI input
Input port/INTP3 input/CR02 capture trigger input
Input port/INTP4 input/ASCK input
Input port/INTP5 input/external trigger signal for A/D converter
Input port/SI input
Note An NMI input is received regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled.
27
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(a) When functioning as a port
Signals applied to these pins can be read and these pins can be tested, regardless of whether these pins
are acting as secondary function pins.
(b) When functioning as control-signal input pins
(i) NMI (non-maskable interrupt)
Apply an external non-maskable interrupt request signal to this pin. The external interrupt mode
register (IMTM0) specifies whether an interrupt is detected at its rising or falling edge.
(ii) INTP0 to INTP5 (interrupts from peripherals)
Apply external interrupt request signals to these pins. When an interrupt request signal is detected
at the edge specified by the external interrupt mode registers (INTM0 and INTM1), at any of the INTP0
to INTP5 pins, an interrupt is generated. (For details, see Chapter 11.)
The INTP0 to INTP3 and INTP5 pins can also be used as external trigger input pins for a range of
functions, as described below.
• INTP0: Capture trigger input for eight-bit timer/counter unit 1, and trigger input for real-time output
port
• INTP1: Capture trigger input for eight-bit timer/counter unit 2
• INTP2: External count clock input for eight-bit timer/counter unit 2
• INTP3: Capture trigger input for 16-bit timer/counter
• INTP5: External trigger input for A/D converter
(iii) CI (clock input)
External clock input for eight-bit timer/counter unit 2
(iv) ASCK (asynchronous serial clock)
External baud-rate clock input.
(v) SI (serial input)
Serial data input (when three-wire serial input mode is used)
(3) P30-P37 (port 3): Tristate inputs/outputs
Port 3, an eight-bit input and output port with output latches, is provided with software-programmable pull-
up resistors. Each pin can be used as an input or output pin by specifying the port-3 mode register (PM3).
It also acts as a control signal pin.
It can be used in either of the following two operating modes, as listed in Table 2-2, by specifying the port-
3 mode control register (PMC3). The signals applied to these pins can be read and these pins can be tested
regardless of whether these pins are acting as secondary function pins.
When the RESET signal is input, the output of port 3 becomes high impedance, such that it functions as an
input port, resulting in the contents of the output latches becoming undefined.
28
Chapter 2 Pin Functions
Table 2-2 Port 3 Operating Mode (n = 0 to 7)
Mode
Port mode
PMC3n = 0
Control signal I/O mode
PMC3n = 1
PMC3 setting
RxD input
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
2
TxD output
SCK input/output
SO output/SB0 input/output
TO0 output
I/O port
TO1 output
TO2 output
TO3 output
(a) Port mode
Pins for which port mode is specified by the PMC3 can be used independently as input or output pins by
specifying the port-3 mode register (PM3).
(b) Control signal I/O mode
Each pin can be used as a control signal pin by specifying the PMC3 register.
(i) RxD (receive data)
Serial data input for asynchronous serial interface
(ii) TxD (transmit data)
Serial data output for asynchronous serial interface
(iii) SCK (serial clock)
Serial clock input or output for synchronous serial interface
(iv) SO (serial output)/SBO (serial bus)
Serial data output (when three-wire serial I/O mode is used), or serial bus input or output in SBI mode
(v) TO0 to TO3 (timer output)
Timer outputs
(4) P40-P47 (port 4): Tristate inputs/outputs
Port4, aneight-bitI/Oportwithoutputlatches, isprovidedwithsoftware-programmablepull-upresistorsand
can directly drive LEDs. Its pins can be collectively used as input or output pins by specifying the memory
expansion mode register (MM).
It acts as a time-multiplexed address/data bus (AD0 to AD7) when external memory or I/O devices are
expanded.
In the case of the µPD78213, it acts as a time-multiplexed address/data bus (AD0 to AD7).
When the RESET signal is input, the output of port 4 becomes high impedance, such that it functions as an
input port, resulting in the contents of the output latches becoming undefined.
(5) P50 to P57 (port 5): Tristate inputs/outputs
Port5, aneight-bitI/Oportwithoutputlatches, isprovidedwithsoftware-programmablepull-upresistorsand
can directly drive LEDs. Its pins can be used independently as input or output pins by specifying the port-5
mode register(PM5) accordingly.
It acts as an address bus (A8 to A15) when external memory or I/O devices are expanded.
In the case of the µPD78213, it functions as an address bus (A8 to A15).
When the RESET signal is input, the output of port 5 becomes high impedance, such that it functions as an
input port, resulting in the contents of the output latches becoming undefined.
29
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(6) P60 to P67 (port 6): Output (P60 to P63) and tristate inputs/outputs (P64 to P67)
Port 6 is an eight-bit I/O port with output latches. Pins P64 to P67 are provided with software-programmable
pull-up resistors.
The pins of port 6 also function as control signal input pins, as listed in Table 2-3. To use these pins as control
signal input pins, set up is required.
In the case of the µPD78213, P64 and P65 act as an RD output and WR output, respectively.
When the RESET signal is applied, P60 to P63 go low and P64 to P67 function as an input port (the outputs
become high impedance). The contents of the output latches become undefined at the four high-order bits
and 0H at the four low-order bits.
Table 2-3 Port 6 Operating Mode
Port mode
Control signal I/O mode
A16-A19 output
RD output
Operation required to assign pins as control signal pins
Set the MM6 bit of the MM register to 1.
Pin
P60-P63
P64
Output port
For the µPD78213, specify external memory expansion
mode using bits MM2 to MM0 of the MM register.
P65
WR output
Input/output
port
WAIT input/AN6 input
Set the PW register, or bits PWn1 and PWn0 (n = 2
and 3) of the MM register and P66 to input mode.
P66
P67
REFRQ output/AN7 input
Set the RFEN bit of the RFM register to 1.
Caution While the RESET signal is being applied, P60 to P63 is high impedance. When the RESET signal is released, the output of these pins
is low level. Design the peripheral circuit so that it operates normally when pins P60 to P63 initially output low level.
Remark For details, see Chapter 13.
(a) Port mode
P60 to P63 are an output port. Each of pins P64 to P67 can be used for input or output by specifying the
port-6 mode register (PM6) accordingly.
(b) Control signal I/O mode
(i) A16 to A19 (address bus)
High-order address bus output when the external memory area is expanded (10000H to FFFFFH). The
memory expansion register (MM) controls these pins.
(ii) RD (read strobe)
Strobe signal output used for reading the external memory. In the case of the µPD78213, the MM
register controls this pin.
(iii) WR (write strobe)
Strobe signal output used for writing to the external memory. In the case of the µPD78213, the MM
register controls this pin.
(iv) WAIT (wait)
Wait signal input. The programmable wait control (PW) register or MM register controls this pin.
(v) REFRQ (refresh request)
Used for outputting refresh pulses to the external pseudo-static memory. The refresh mode register
(RFM) controls this pin.
(vi) AN6 and AN7 (analog input)
Analog inputs to the A/D converter.
(7) P70 to P75 (port 7): Input
Port 7 is a six-bit input port. Its pins also function as analog input pins (AN0 to AN5) for the A/D converter.
Signals applied to these pins can be read and these pins can be tested regardless of whether these pins are
acting as secondary function pins.
30
Chapter 2 Pin Functions
(8) ASTB (address strobe): Output
Timing signal output used for latching addresses externally to enable access to external memory.
(9) EA (external access): Input
Control signal input used for switching the program memory from the internal ROM to the external memory.
When this signal is high, the internal ROM is accessed. When low, the external memory is accessed in ROM-
less mode. In the case of the µPD78212, µPD78214, and µPD78P214, always apply a high-level signal to this
pin. In the case of the µPD78213, apply a low-level signal.
2
(10) X1 and X2 (crystal)
Pins for connecting the crystal used for internal clock oscillation. When an external clock signal is supplied,
apply it to pin X1. Also, apply the signal having the inverted phase of this clock signal to pin X2.
(11) RESET (reset): Input
Low-active reset input.
(12) AV
REF
Input of the reference voltage and power for the A/D converter.
(13) AV
SS
A/D converter ground.
(14) V
DD
Main power input. Connect all V pins to the power.
DD
(15) V
SS
Ground. Connect all V pins to the ground.
SS
(16) NC (non-connection)
Not connected inside the chip.
2.2.2 PROM Programming Mode (for the µPD78P214)
(1) P20/NMI: Input
Input used for setting the µPD78P214 to PROM programming mode. When a voltage of 12.5 V is applied to
this pin and the RESET pin goes low, the µPD78P214 enters PROM programming mode.
(2) RESET: Input
Input used for setting theµPD78P214 to PROM programming mode. When a low-level signal is applied to this
pin and a voltage of 12.5 V is applied to the P20/NMI pin, the µPD78P214 enters PROM programming mode.
(3) A0 to A14 (address bus): Inputs
Address bus used for the internal PROM (0000H to 3FFFFH). Apply a low-level signal to pin A14.
(4) D0 to D7 (data bus): Inputs/outputs
Data bus, through which programs are read or written to and from the internal PROM.
(5) CE (chip enable): Input
Enable signal input for the internal PROM. When this signal is active, programs can be either written or read.
(6) OE (output enable): Input
Read strobe signal input for the internal PROM. When this input goes active while the CE is low, one byte of
the program at the address specified by pins A0 to A14 in the internal PROM is read through pins D0 to D7.
(7) V (programming power supply)
PP
Power supply for writing programs. When the CE goes low while the V is 12.5 V and the OE is high, the data
PP
on pins D0 to D7 is written into the internal PROM at the address specified by pins A0 to A14.
(8) V
DD
Main power input.
31
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(9) V
SS
Ground.
(10) NC (non-connection)
Not connected inside the chip.
32
Chapter 2 Pin Functions
2.3 I/O CIRCUITS AND UNUSED-PIN HANDLING
Table 2-4 lists the types of I/O circuits provided for each pin and describes how pins are handled when not used.
Fig. 2-1 illustrates the I/O circuit types.
Table 2-4 Types of I/O Circuits and Unused-Pin Handling
2
Pin
Type of I/O circuit Input/output
Recommended unused-pin handling
Leave open.
P00-P07
4
2
Output
P20/NMI
Connect to V
Connect to V
or V
.
SS
DD
P21/INTP0
P22/INTP1
P23/INTP2/CI
P24/INTP3
P25/INTP4/ASCK
P26/INTP5
P27/SI
Input
2-A
5-A
.
DD
P30/RxD
P31/TxD
P32/SCK
8-A
Connect to V
when used as an input pin.
DD
P33/SB0/SO
P34/TO0-P37/TO3
P40/AD0-P47/AD7
P50/A8-P57/A15
P60/A16-P63/A19
P64/RD
10-A
Input/output
Leave open when used as an output pin.
5-A
Leave open.
Connect to V
4
Output
when used as an input pin.
DD
5-A
Leave open when used as an output pin.
P65/WR
Input/output
P66/WAIT/AN6
P67/REFRQ/AN7
P70/AN0-P75/AN5
ASTB
Note
Connect to V
when used as an input pin.
DD
11
Leave open when used as an output pin.
9
4
2
1
Connect to V
Leave open.
.
SS
Input
Output
RESET
—
EA
Input
Note
Connect to V
Connect to V
or V
.
AV
DD
SS
REF
—
.
AV
SS
SS
Note See Section 8.6.
Remark Since the type numbers of I/O circuits are numbered in the 78K series, they may not be serial in a certain product. (A product may
not contain some of these I/O circuits.)
Caution When an I/O pin is used as both an input and output pin, connect the pin to the V pin through a resistor of less than 100 kilohms.
DD
(Especially, when the RESET pin goes to a voltage higher than the low level upon power on, or when an I/O pin is switched with
software.)
33
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 2-1 I/O Circuits Provided for Pins
Type 1
Type 2-A
VDD
VDD
P
IN
Pull-up
enable
P
N
IN
Type 2
IN
Schmitt trigger input with hysteresis characteristics
Type 5-A
VDD
Schmitt trigger input with hysteresis characteristics
Pull-up
P
Type 4
enable
VDD
P
Data
VDD
Data
P
IN/OUT
OUT
Output
disable
N
Output
disable
N
Input
enable
Push-pull output which can output high impedance
(both the positive and negative channels are off.)
Type 8-A
Type 9
VDD
Pull-up
enable
P
Comparator
P
N
+
–
IN
VDD
Data
P
IN/OUT
Vref
(Threshold voltage)
Output
disable
N
Input
enable
Type 10-A
Type 11
VDD
VDD
Pull-up
enable
P
Pull-up
enable
P
VDD
P
Data
IN/OUT
VDD
P
Data
Output
disable
N
IN/OUT
Open
drain
Comparator
N
Output
disable
P
N
+
–
Vref
(Threshold voltage)
Input
enable
34
Chapter 2 Pin Functions
2.4 NOTES
(1) While the RESET signal is being applied, pins P60 to P63 are high impedance. When the RESET signal is
released, the output of these pins is low level. Design the peripheral circuit so that it operates satisfactorily
when pins P60 to P63 initially output the low level.
(2) When an I/O pin is used as both an input and output pin, connect the pin to the V pin through a resistor of
2
DD
lessthan100kilohms. (Especially,whentheRESETpingoestoavoltagehigherthanthelowleveluponpower
on, or when an I/O pin is switched with software.)
35
36
CHAPTER 3 CPU FUNCTION
3.1 MEMORY SPACE
The µPD78214 can access a memory space of up to 1M byte. Figs. 3-1 to 3-4 show the corresponding memory
maps. The mapping of program memory depends on the status of the EA pin. The EA pin of the µPD78213 must
be tied low.
3
(1) µPD78212
Program memory is mapped to the internal ROM (8K bytes: 00000H to 01FFFH) and external memory (56704
bytes: 02000H to 0FD7FH). External memory is accessed in external memory expansion mode. The area
mapped as external memory can also be used as data memory.
Data memory is mapped to internal RAM (384 bytes: 0FD80H to 0FEFFH). In 1M-byte expansion mode,
external memory (960K bytes: 10000H to FFFFFH) is mapped as expanded data memory.
(2) µPD78213
Programmemoryismappedtoexternalmemory(64768bytes: 00000Hto0FCFFH). Thisareacanalsobeused
as data memory.
Data memory is mapped to internal RAM (512 bytes: 0FD00H to 0FEFFH). In 1M-byte expansion mode,
external memory (960K bytes: 10000H to FFFFFH) is mapped as expanded data memory.
(3) µPD78214, µPD78P214
Program memory is mapped to internal ROM (16K bytes: 00000H to 03FFFH) and external memory (48384
bytes: 04000H to 0FCFFH). External memory is accessed in external memory expansion mode. The area
mapped as external memory can also be used as data memory.
Data memory is mapped to internal RAM (512 bytes: 0FD00H to 0FEFFH). In 1M-byte expansion mode,
external memory (960K bytes: 10000H to FFFFFH) is mapped as expanded data memory.
37
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 3-1 Memory Map of µPD78212 (EA Pin Driven High)
FFFFFH
Note 1
External memory
(960K bytes)
10000H
0FFFFH
0FEFFH
General registers
(32 bytes)
Special function registers (SFR)
0FFDFH
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
0FEE0H
0FEDFH
Note 2
Macro service control
words (30 bytes)
(256 bytes)
0FEC2H
Internal RAM
(384 bytes)
Data area
(512 bytes)
0FD80H
0FD7FH
0FD80H
01FFFH
Program area
(4K bytes)
External memory
(56704 bytes)
01000H
00FFFH
CALLF entry area
(2K bytes)
02000H
01FFFH
00800H
007FFH
Program area
(1920 bytes)
00080H
0007FH
CALLT table area
(64 bytes)
Internal ROM
(8K bytes)
00040H
0003FH
Vector table area
(64 bytes)
00000H
00000H
Notes 1. Accessed in 1M-byte expansion mode.
2. External SFR area
Remark The shaded areas indicate internal memory.
38
Chapter 3 CPU Function
Fig. 3-2 Memory Map of µPD78212 (EA Pin Driven Low)
FFFFFH
Note 1
External memory
(960K bytes)
3
10000H
0FFFFH
0FEFFH
General registers
(32 bytes)
Special function registers (SFR)
0FFDFH
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
0FEE0H
0FEDFH
Note 2
Macro service control
words (30 bytes)
(256 bytes)
0FEC2H
Internal RAM
(384 bytes)
Data area
(512 bytes)
0FD80H
0FD7FH
0FD80H
External memory
(64896 bytes)
00FFFH
CALLF entry area
(2K bytes)
00800H
007FFH
Program area
(1920 bytes)
00080H
0007FH
CALLT table area
(64 bytes)
00040H
0003FH
Vector table area
(64 bytes)
00000H
00000H
Notes 1. Accessed in 1M-byte expansion mode.
2. External SFR area
Remark The shaded areas indicate internal memory.
39
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 3-3 Memory Map of µPD78213, µPD78214, or µPD78P214 (EA Pin Driven Low)
FFFFFH
Note 1
External memory
(960K bytes)
10000H
0FFFFH
0FEFFH
General registers
(32 bytes)
Special function registers (SFR)
0FFDFH
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
0FEE0H
0FEDFH
Note 2
Macro service control
words (30 bytes)
(256 bytes)
0FEC2H
Internal RAM
(512 bytes)
Data area
(512 bytes)
0FD00H
0FCFFH
0FD00H
External memory
(64768 bytes)
00FFFH
CALLF entry area
(2K bytes)
00800H
007FFH
Program area
(1920 bytes)
00080H
0007FH
CALLT table area
(64 bytes)
00040H
0003FH
Vector table area
(64 bytes)
00000H
00000H
Notes 1. Accessed in 1M-byte expansion mode.
2. External SFR area
Remark The shaded areas indicate internal memory.
40
Chapter 3 CPU Function
Fig. 3-4 Memory Map of µPD78214, µPD78P214 (EA Pin Driven High)
FFFFFH
Note 1
External memory
(960K bytes)
3
10000H
0FFFFH
0FEFFH
General registers
(32 bytes)
Special function registers (SFR)
0FFDFH
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
0FEE0H
0FEDFH
Notes 2, 3
Macro service control
words (30 bytes)
(256 bytes)
0FEC2H
Internal RAM
(512 bytes)
Data area
(512 bytes)
0FD00H
0FCFFH
0FD00H
03FFFH
Program area
(12K bytes)
External memory
(48384 bytes)
01000H
00FFFH
CALLF entry area
(2K bytes)
04000H
03FFFH
00800H
007FFH
Program area
(1920 bytes)
00080H
0007FH
CALLT table area
(64 bytes)
Internal ROM
(16K bytes)
00040H
0003FH
Vector table area
(64 bytes)
00000H
00000H
Notes 1. Accessed in 1M-byte expansion mode.
2. Accessed in external memory expansion mode
3. External SFR area
Remark The shaded areas indicate internal memory.
41
µPD78214 Sub-Series
3.1.1 Internal Program Memory Area
In the area from 00000H to 03FFFH (00000H to 01FFFH for the µPD78212), a 16K × 8 bit ROM (8K × 8 bit ROM for
the µPD78212) is incorporated. Programs and table data are stored in this area. Usually, the program counter (PC)
is used for addressing.
If the µPD78213 is used or if the EA pin is driven low, this area becomes external memory (ROM-less operation).
(1) Vector table area
The 64-byte area from 00000H to 0003FH is reserved as a vector table area. Stored in the vector table area
is the program start address to which a program is branched if RESET is input or if an interrupt request occurs.
The low-order eight bits of the 16-bit address are stored at even-numbered addresses, and the high-order
eight bits at odd-numbered addresses.
Table 3-1 Vector Table
Vector table address
00000H
00002H
00006H
00008H
0000AH
0000CH
0000EH
00010H
00012H
00014H
00016H
00018H
0001AH
0001CH
00020H
00022H
00024H
00026H
0003EH
Interrupt request
Reset (RESET input)
NMI
INTP0
INTP1
INTP2
INTP3
INTP4/INTC30
INTP5/INTAD
INTC20
INTC00
INTC01
INTC10
INTC11
INTC21
INTSER
INTSR
INTST
INTCSI
BRK
(2) CALLT instruction table area
Inthe64-byteareafrom00040Hto0007FH, thesubroutineentryaddressofaone-bytecallinstruction(CALLT)
can be stored.
(3) CALLF instruction entry area
A two-byte call instruction (CALLF) can directly call a subroutine, starting from an address between 00800H
and 00FFFH.
42
Chapter 3 CPU Function
3.1.2 Internal RAM Area
A 512-byte (384-byte for the µPD78212) general-purpose static RAM is incorporated into the area from 0FD00H to
0FEFFH.
This area consists of the following two RAMs:
Peripheral RAM (PRAM)
: 0FD00H to 0FDFFH (0FD80H to 0FDFFH for the µPD78212)
°
°
Internal dual-port RAM (IRAM): 0FE00H to 0FEFFH
3
The internal dual-port RAM (IRAM) can be accessed at high speed.
Short direct addressing mode for high-speed access can be used for the area from 0FE20H to 0FEFFH. (Refer to
Chapter 6, Instruction, “78K/II Series User’s Manual.”)
General-purpose registers of four banks are mapped into the 32-byte area from 0FEE0H to 0FEFFH. Macro service
control words are mapped into the 30-byte area from 0FEC2H to 0FEDFH.
Caution Program fetch from the internal RAM area is prohibited.
Remark It is convenient to store data, work areas, and status flags that are frequently accessed in the area from 0FE20H to 0FEC1H. The area
from 0FE00H to 0FE1FH can be accessed at high speed. If this area is used as a stack area, macro service channel, or a data transfer
area for a macro service, system throughput can be improved. (For this area, short direct addressing cannot be used. This area is
addressed in the same way as other memory spaces. The area, however, can be accessed faster than other memory spaces. In terms
of the efficiency of the entire system, it is advantageous to use the area as a stack area, macro service channel, or a data transfer area
for a macro service channel.)
3.1.3 Special Function Register (SFR) Area
Special function registers (SFR), which are on-chip hardware peripherals, are mapped into the area from 0FF00H
to 0FFFFH (see Section 3.2.5).
The area from 0FFD0H to 0FFDFH is mapped as an external SFR area. This area allows the µPD78214 in external
memoryexpansionmode(selectedbymemoryexpansionmoderegisterMM)andµPD78213(ROM-less)toaccess
external peripheral I/O.
Caution NeveraccessanaddresstowhichnoSFRismappedinthisarea. Ifthisisattempted, theµPD78214mayenteradeadlock. Torestore
the device from the deadlock, a reset signal must be input.
3.1.4 External SFR Area
In the SFR area, the 16-byte area from 0FFD0H to 0FFDFH is mapped as an external SFR area. This area allows the
µPD78214 in external memory expansion mode (selected by memory expansion mode register MM) and the
µPD78213 (ROM-less) to access external peripheral I/O through the address bus or address/data bus.
TheexternalSFRareacanbeaccessedbytheSFRaddressingmethod. Theareafeaturesthefollowing: Peripheral
I/O can be easily manipulated and the object size can be compressed. This area can also be specified as an SFR
of macro service type B.
When the external SFR area is accessed, the bus operates as in ordinary memory access (see Chapter 13).
3.1.5 External Memory Space
The area from 04000H to 0FCFFH (02000H to 0FD7FH for the µPD78212) is an external memory space that can be
accessed by setting a memory expansion mode register (MM). In this area, programs and table data can be stored
and peripheral I/O devices can be mapped.
For the µPD78213, the area from 00000H to 0FCFFH can be accessed at any time.
3.1.6 External Extension Data Memory Space
Theareafrom10000HtoFFFFFHcanbeaccessedif1M-byteexpansionmodeisselectedbythememoryexpansion
mode register (MM). In this mode, pins P60 to P63 of port 6 function as the expansion address bus of four bits (A16
to A19). The data memory space is manipulated as 16 banks of 64K bytes. The low-order four bits of registers P6
and PM6 function as a bank register for selecting a bank. This memory space is useful if the kanji character
generator or a large amount of data is used.
43
µPD78214 Sub-Series
To access the space, specify the bank to be used (high-order four bits of address, A16 to A19) in the bank register
(P60 to P63 of register P6, or PM60 to PM63 of register PM6). Then, execute an instruction which allows extended
addressing. The high-order four bits of address output from pins P60 to P63 are valid only while an instruction
that allows extended addressing is being executed.
Because two bank registers are provided, two data banks can always be used. To select either of the two bank
registers, specify the operand of the instruction with or without &. If & is added, register P6 is selected as the bank
register. If & is omitted, register PM6 is selected as the bank register.
If one of the two banks is specified as the main data bank in a RAM area, and if the other bank is specified as the
sub-data bank in a data ROM area, for example, the data read from the data ROM (for example, character data for
the printer) can easily be enlarged or reduced in size and stored in the RAM.
Example Specifying bank 1 as the main bank and bank 5 as the sub-bank and transferring the data from bank 5 to bank 1
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MM, #47H
PM6, #1H
P6, #5H
; Selects memory expansion mode.
; Sets the main bank register (PM6).
; Sets the sub-bank register (P6).
; Sets the loop counter.
B, #0FFH
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
LOOP :
MOV
A, &[HL+]
[DE+], A
; Reads data from bank 5. (The contents of register P6 are added as the most significant address.)
; Stores the data in bank 1. (The contents of register PM6 are added as the most significant address.)
MOV
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
DBNZ
B, $LOOP
; Repetition
Fig. 3-5 Sample Data Transfer between Banks
Bank 1
(main data bank)
Bank 5
(auxiliary data bank)
10000H
1FFFFH
50000H
5FFFFH
MOV [DE+], A
MOV A, &[HL+]
A register
Remarks 1. The MOV [DE+], A and MOV A, &[HL+] instructions are both held in bank 0.
2. The instruction that uses register PM6 as the bank register requires a shorter instruction code and shorter execution time than
thatwhichusesregisterP6. TheinstructionthatmanipulatesregisterP6requiresashorterinstructioncodeandshorterexecution
time than that which manipulates register PM6. It is, therefore, efficient to use PM6 as the main bank register that specifies the
bank accessed most frequently and P6 as the sub-bank register that frequently specifies different banks.
44
Chapter 3 CPU Function
3.2 REGISTERS
3.2.1 Program Counter (PC)
This 16-bit binary counter holds the address of the program to be executed next (see Fig. 3-6).
Usually, the address is automatically incremented according to the number of bytes of the instruction to be
fetched. If an instruction causing a branch is executed, the contents of the register or immediate data are set.
3
When RESET is input, the contents at address 00000H of the internal ROM (external memory for the µPD78213)
arespecifiedinthelow-ordereightbitsofthePCandthecontentsataddress00001Harespecifiedinthehigh-order
eight bits of the PC.
Fig. 3-6 Configuration of the Program Counter
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PC PC15 PC14 PC13 PC12 PC11 PC10 PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
3.2.2 Program Status Word (PSW)
This 8-bit register consists of flags that are set or reset according to the execution results of an instruction (seeFig.
3-7).
The contents can be read and written in units of eight bits. Each flag can be manipulated by a bit manipulation
instruction. The PSW is saved to a stack when a vectored interrupt request is acknowledged or when the BRK or
PUSH PSW instruction is executed. The PSW is restored when an RETI, RETB, or POP PSW instruction is executed.
When RESET is input, the PSW is set to 02H. (In this state, no interrupt requests can be acknowledged.)
Fig. 3-7 Configuration of the Program Status Word
7
6
Z
5
4
3
2
0
1
0
PSW IE
RBS1 AC RBS0
ISP CY
(1) Carry flag (CY)
This flag indicates whether an overflow or underflow occurs when an add/subtract instruction is executed.
If a shift/rotate instruction is executed, the flag holds a shift-out value. If a bit arithmetic/logical instruction
is executed, the flag functions as a bit accumulator.
(2) Interrupt priority status flag (ISP)
This flag manages the priority of maskable vectored interrupts that can currently be acknowledged. If a
maskable interrupt is acknowledged, the contents of the priority designation flag of the acknowledged
interrupt are transferred to the ISP flag. If a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) is acknowledged, this flag is set to
0.
If the ISP flag is set to 0, vectored interrupts assigned a lower priority by the priority designation flag register
(PR0) cannot be acknowledged. If the ISP flag is set to 1, interrupts can be acknowledged, independent of the
priority. The actual acknowledgment of interrupts is controlled according to the status of the IE flag.
The contents are updated each time a maskable vectored interrupt is acknowledged.
For details, see Chapter 12.
45
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) Register bank selection flags (RBS0, RBS1)
These two flags are used to select one of four register banks (see Table 3-2).
The flags hold two-bit information indicating the register bank selected by the SEL RBn instruction.
Table 3-2 Selecting a Register Bank
RBS1
RBS0
Specified register bank
Register bank 0
Register bank 1
Register bank 2
Register bank 3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
(4) Auxiliary carry flag (AC)
If an operation generates a carry from bit 3 or a borrow into bit 3, this flag is set (1). Otherwise, the flag is reset
(0).
The flag is used when a BCD conversion instruction is executed.
(5) Zero flag (Z)
If an operation results in zero, this flag is set (1). Otherwise, the flag is reset (0).
(6) Interrupt request enable flag (IE)
This flag controls the CPU’s acknowledgment of interrupt requests.
If the flag is set to 0, interrupts are inhibited. Only nonmaskable interrupts and unmasked macro services can
be acknowledged. All other interrupts are prohibited.
Iftheflagissetto1, interruptsarepermitted. TheISP flag, interrupt maskflag corresponding to each interrupt
request, and priority designation flag control the acknowledgment of an interrupt request.
When the EI instruction is executed, the IE flag is set (1). When the DI instruction is executed or when an
interrupt is acknowledged, the flag is reset (0).
3.2.3 Stack Pointer (SP)
This 16-bit register holds the first address of a stack area (LIFO: 00000H to 0FFFFH) (see Fig. 3-8). The stack pointer
is used to address a stack area when a subroutine is executed or when an interrupt is handled.
The contents of the SP are decremented before data is written into the stack area and incremented after data is
read from the stack area (see Figs. 3-9 and 3-10).
A special instruction can access the SP.
The contents of the SP become undefined when RESET is input. Immediately after a reset is released (before a
subroutine is called or before an interrupt is acknowledged), run an initialization program to initialize the SP.
Example Initializing the SP
MOVW SP, #0FEE0H; SP ← 0FEE0H (if used from FEDFH)
Fig. 3-8 Configuration of the Stack Pointer
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SP SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0
46
Chapter 3 CPU Function
Fig. 3-9 Data Saved to the Stack Area
PUSH rp instruction
Stack
CALL, CALLF, and CALLT instructions
Stack
Interrupt
Stack
SP ← SP – 2
SP ← SP – 2
SP ← SP – 3
SP – 2
Register pair, low
Register pair, high
SP – 2
PC7-PC0
PC7-PC0
PC15-PC8
PSW
SP – 3
↑
↑
↑
PC15-PC8
SP – 1
SP – 1
SP – 2
3
↑
↑
↑
SP ⇒
SP ⇒
SP – 1
↑
SP ⇒
Fig. 3-10 Data Restored from the Stack Area
POP rp instruction
Stack
RET instruction
Stack
RETI instruction
Stack
SP ⇒ Register pair, low
SP ⇒
PC7-PC0
SP ⇒
PC7-PC0
PC15-PC8
PSW
↓
↓
↓
Register pair, high
PC15-PC8
SP + 1
SP + 1
SP + 1
↓
↓
↓
SP + 2
SP + 2
SP + 2
↓
SP ← SP + 2
SP ← SP + 2
SP + 3
SP ← SP + 3
Cautions 1. In stack addressing, the entire 64K bytes can be accessed. A stack area cannot be mapped in the SFR area or internal ROM area.
2. The SP becomes undefined when RESET is input. Meanwhile, nonmaskable interrupts can be acknowledged immediately after
a reset is released. If a nonmaskable interrupt request occurs, while the SP is undefined, immediately after a reset is released,
an unpredictable operation may be carried out. To minimize this danger, initialize the SP immediately after a reset is released.
For details, see Section 12.3.2.
3.2.4 General-Purpose Registers
(1) Configuration
General-purpose registers are mapped to special addresses (0FEE0H to 0FEFFH) in data memory. The
registers are grouped into four banks, each of which consists of eight 8-bit registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H) (see
Fig. 3-11).
47
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 3-11 Configuration of General-Purpose Registers
(8-bit processing)
(16-bit processing)
0FEE0H
↑
A E1H
X E0H
C E2H
E E4H
L E6H
X E8H
C EAH
E ECH
L EEH
X F0H
C F2H
E F4H
L F6H
X F8H
C FAH
E FCH
L FEH
AX
BC
DE
HL
AX
BC
DE
HL
AX
BC
DE
HL
AX
BC
DE
HL
E0H
E2H
E4H
E6H
E8H
EAH
ECH
EEH
F0H
F2H
F4H
F6H
F8H
FAH
FCH
FEH
B E3H
D E5H
H E7H
A E9H
B EBH
D EDH
H EFH
A F1H
B F3H
D F5H
H F7H
A F9H
B FBH
D FDH
H FFH
Register bank 3
(RBS1, 0 = 11)
↓
↑
Register bank 2
(RBS1, 0 = 10)
↓
↑
Register bank 1
(RBS1, 0 = 01)
↓
↑
Register bank 0
(RBS1, 0 = 00)
0FEFFH
↓
To specify the register bank to be used to execute an instruction, use the CPU control instruction (SEL RBn).
When RESET is input, register bank 0 is specified.
Thecurrentregisterbankcanbecheckedbyreadingtheregisterbankselectionflags(RBS0,RBS1)inthePSW.
The area from 0FEE0H to 0FEFFH can be addressed and accessed as an ordinary data memory area,
irrespective of whether the area is used for general-purpose registers.
Remark To restore the current register bank after it is changed to a different register bank, execute the PUSH PSW instruction to save the PSW
to a stack, then execute the SEL RBn instruction. The POP PSW instruction can restore the register bank if the stack position is not
changed. If an interrupt handling program changes the register bank, the PSW is automatically saved to a stack when an interrupt
is acknowledged. The PSW is restored by the RETI or RETB instruction. If a single register bank is predetermined for the interrupt
handling routine, only the SEL RBn instruction need be executed. The PUSH PSW instruction need not be executed.
Examples 1. Changing the register bank by an ordinary program
Specifying register bank 2
·
·
·
·
·
PUSH PSW
SEL
RB2
·
·
·
·
·
Register bank 2 is used.
POP
PSW
·
·
·
·
·
The previous register bank is used.
2. Changing the register bank by an interrupt handling program
Selecting register bank 1
SEL
RB1
Register bank 1 is used.
·
·
·
·
·
Thepreviousregisterbankisautomatically
restored upon return from the interrupt
handling program.
RETI
48
Chapter 3 CPU Function
(2) Function
General-purpose registers can be operated in units of eight bits. They can also be operated in units of 16 bits,
that is, a pair of eight-bit registers can be operated as a single unit (AX, BC, DE, HL).
Each register can temporarily hold operation results or can be used as an operand of an arithmetic/logical
instruction between registers.
General-purpose registers are grouped into four register banks. By separating the register banks to be used
for ordinary operation from those for interrupt handling, an efficient program can be created.
3
The registers have different functions as described below:
A (R1)
: Central register for the transfer of 8-bit data or arithmetic/logical operations. This
register can also hold bit data.
The register can also hold the offset value for indexed addressing.
: Central register for the transfer of 16-bit data or arithmetic/logical operations
: Register that can hold bit data
AX (RP0)
X (R0)
B (R3)
: Register with the functions of a loop counter. The register can be used by the DBNZ
instruction.
This register can also hold the offset value for indexed addressing.
C (R2)
: Register with the functions of a loop counter. The register can be used by the DBNZ
instruction.
DE (RP2), HL (RP3) : Registerswiththefunctionsofapointer. Theregistersspecifyabaseaddressforregister
indirect addressing and base addressing.
This register can also hold the offset value for indexed addressing.
Each register can be identified by a name representing its function (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, HL) or
by an absolute name (R0 to R7, RP0 to RP3). For details of the relationship between the function names and
absolute names, see Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Function Names and Absolute Names
Function name
Absolute name
Function name
Absolute name
X
A
C
B
E
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
AX
BC
DE
HL
RP0
RP1
RP2
RP3
D
L
H
49
µPD78214 Sub-Series
3.2.5 Special Function Registers (SFR)
A mode register, control register, and other registers with special functions, which are built-in hardware
peripherals, are mapped into the 256-byte space from 0FF00H to 0FFFFH.
Caution Never access an address to which no SFR is mapped in this area. If this is attempted, the µPD78214 may enter a deadlock. To clear
the deadlock, a reset signal must be input to the device.
Table 3-4 lists the special function registers (SFR). The following column headings are used:
• Symbol : Symbol indicating the built-in SFR. This is a reserved word for NEC’s assembler (RA78K/II). For the
C compiler (CC78K/II), the #pragma sfr instruction allows this symbol to be used as an sfr variable.
• R/W
: Whether the contents of the SFR can be read or written
R/W : Read/write
R
: Read-only
: Write-only
W
• Bit unit : Number of bits that can be manipulated when the SFR is operated. The SFR that can be manipulated
in units of 16 bits can be coded in the sfrp operand or specified by an even address. The SFR that can
be manipulated in one-bit units can be coded in the bit manipulation instruction.
• At reset : Status of the register when RESET is input
50
Chapter 3 CPU Function
Table 3-4 Special Function Registers (SFR) (1/2)
Bit unit
Address
0FF00H
Name of special function register (SFR)
Symbol R/W
At reset
1 bit
8 bits 16 bits
Port 0
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
P0
P2
R/W
R
—
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
0FF02H
0FF03H
0FF04H
0FF05H
0FF06H
0FF07H
0FF0AH
0FF0BH
0FF0CH
0FF10H
0FF11H
0FF12H
0FF13H
0FF14H
—
3
°
P3
—
°
Not defined
P4
°
—
R/W
R
P5
°
P6
×0H
°
—
P7
°
Not defined
Port 0 buffer register
P0L
P0H
RTPC
°
—
Port 0 buffer register
°
—
Real-time output port control register
00H
°
°
—
—
16-bit compare register 0
(16-bit timer/counter)
CR00
CR01
°
—
—
—
—
—
16-bit compare register 1
(16-bit timer/counter)
°
—
R/W
8-bit compare register
(8-bit timer/counter 1)
—
—
—
—
CR10
CR20
CR21
CR30
CR02
°
—
0FF15H
0FF16H
0FF17H
8-bit compare register
(8-bit timer/counter 2)
°
Not defined
8-bit compare register
(8-bit timer/counter 2)
°
—
8-bit compare register
(8-bit timer/counter 3)
°
0FF18H
0FF19H
0FF1AH
—
—
—
16-bit capture register
(16-bit timer/counter)
°
—
—
R
8-bit capture register
(8-bit timer/counter 2)
CR22
CR11
—
—
°
8-bit capture/compare register
(8-bit timer/counter 1)
0FF1CH
—
R/W
°
°
Port 0 mode register
0FF20H
0FF23H
0FF25H
0FF26H
0FF30H
0FF31H
0FF32H
0FF34H
0FF40H
0FF43H
PM0
PM3
—
—
—
—
Port 3 mode register
—
—
—
FFH
W
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Port 5 mode register
PM5
Port 6 mode register
PM6
R/W
F×H
°
Capture/compare control register 0
Timer output control register
Capture/compare control register 1
Capture/compare control register 2
Pull-up-resistor-option register
Port 3 mode control register
CRC0
TOC
—
10H
—
—
—
—
W
CRC1
CRC2
PUO
PMC3
—
—
—
—
00H
°
°
R/W
51
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 3-4 Special Function Registers (SFR) (2/2)
Bit unit
Address
0FF50H
Name of special function register (SFR)
Symbol
TM0
R/W
At reset
0000H
1 bit 8 bits 16 bits
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
16-bit timer register 0
°
—
—
—
0FF51H
0FF52H
0FF54H
0FF56H
0FF5CH
0FF5DH
0FF5EH
0FF5FH
0FF68H
0FF6AH
0FF80H
0FF82H
0FF86H
0FF88H
0FF8AH
0FF8CH
0FF8EH
0FF90H
0FFC0H
0FFC4H
0FFC5H
0FFC6H
0FFD0H
0FFDFH
0FFE0H
0FFE1H
0FFE4H
0FFE5H
0FFE8H
0FFE9H
0FFECH
0FFEDH
0FFF4H
0FFF5H
0FFF8H
8-bit timer register 1
TM1
TM2
R
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
00H
00H
8-bit timer register 2
8-bit timer register 3
TM3
Prescaler mode register 0
PRM0
TMC0
PRM1
TMC1
ADM
ADCR
CSIM
SBIC
SIO
W
R/W
W
—
—
Timer control register 0
Prescaler mode register 1
Timer control register 1
R/W
R
A/D converter mode register
A/D conversion result register
Clock synchronous serial interface mode register
Serial bus interface control register
Serial shift register
° °
—
Not defined
00H
—
°
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
° °
° °
R/W
R
—
Not defined
80H
°
Asynchronous serial interface mode register
Asynchronous serial interface status register
Serial reception buffer: UART
Serial transmission shift register: UART
Baud rate generator control register
Standby control register
ASIM
ASIS
RXB
° °
° °
00H
—
°
Not defined
TXS
—
°
W
BRGC
STBC
MM
—
00H
0000 × 000B
20H
°
R/W
—
°
Memory expansion mode register
Programmable weight control register
Refresh mode register
° °
° °
° °
—
—
—
PW
80H
RFM
00H
—
Not defined
0000H
External SFR area
° °
Interrupt request flag register L
Interrupt request flag register H
Interrupt mask flag register L
Interrupt mask flag register H
Priority designation flag register L
Priority designation flag register H
Interrupt service mode register L
Interrupt service mode register H
External interrupt mode register 0
External interrupt mode register 1
Interrupt status register
IF0L
° °
° °
° °
° °
° °
° °
° °
° °
° °
° °
° °
IF0
MK0
PR0
°
°
°
°
IF0H
MK0L
MK0H
PR0L
PR0H
ISM0L
ISM0H
R/W
FFFFH
FFFFH
ISM0
0000H
INTM0
—
00H
INTM1
IST
—
52
Chapter 3 CPU Function
3.3 NOTES
(1) A program fetch from the internal RAM area is prohibited.
(2) Operation of the stack pointer
In stack addressing, the entire 64K bytes can be accessed. No stack area can be mapped into the SFR area
or internal ROM area.
(3) Special function register (SFR)
3
Never access an address to which no SFR is mapped in the area from 0FF00H to 0FFFFH. If this is attempted,
the µPD78214 may enter a deadlock. To clear the deadlock, a reset signal must be input to the device.
(4) Initializing the stack pointer
The SP becomes undefined when RESET is input. Meanwhile, nonmaskable interrupts can be acknowledged
immediately after a reset is released. If a nonmaskable interrupt request occurs while the SP is undefined
immediatelyafteraresetisreleased, anunpredictableoperationmaybecarriedout. Tominimizethisdanger,
initialize the SP immediately after a reset is released. For details, see Section 12.3.2.
53
54
CHAPTER 4 CLOCK GENERATOR
4.1 CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION
A clock generator generates and controls the internal system clock (CLK) sent to the CPU. Fig. 4-1 shows the
configuration of the clock generator.
Fig. 4-1 Block Diagram of Clock Generator
Frequency
divider
4
X1
Internal system
clock (CLK)
fXX or fX
fCLK
Clock
oscillator
1/2
X2
STOP mode
Remarks f
:
:
:
Crystal/ceramic oscillation frequency
External clock frequency
Internal system clock frequency (= 1/2·f or 1/2·f )
XX
f
f
X
CLK
XX
X
The clock oscillator oscillates according to a crystal or ceramic resonator connected to pins X1 and X2. In standby
(STOP) mode, the oscillation is stopped (see Chapter 14).
The external clock can also be input. To input the external clock, input the clock signal to pin X1 and the inverted
signal to pin X2. If the external clock is input, STOP mode cannot be selected.
The frequency divider divides the output from the clock oscillator (f for the crystal/ceramic oscillation, f for the
XX
X
external clock) by two and generates the internal system clock (CLK).
Fig. 4-2 External Circuit for the Clock Oscillator
(a) Crystal/ceramic oscillation
(b) External clock
#
µPD78214
µPD78214
VSS
X1
X1
X2
X2
74HC04, etc.
Caution When using the clock oscillator, the adverse influence of stray capacitance must be avoided. When configuring the circuit enclosed
in a dashed line, observe the following:
#
•
•
•
•
Minimize the wiring length.
Do not let other signal lines cross this circuit.
Keep this circuit away from lines through which a varying high current flows.
Always ground the capacitors of the oscillator at the same potential as V . Do not ground the capacitors to a ground pattern
SS
through which a high current flows.
•
Do not draw signals from the oscillator.
55
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Remark Different uses of the crystal and ceramic resonator
Generally, a crystal’s oscillation frequency is quite stable. Crystals are ideal for high-precision time management (for example, clock
or frequency measurement). In comparison with crystals, ceramic resonators are less stable but offer three advantages: a shorter
oscillation start time, smaller dimensions, and lower price. Ceramic resonators are suitable for general applications (which do not
require high-precision time management). If a ceramic resonator incorporating capacitors is used, the number of components and
the mounting area can be reduced.
4.2 NOTES
Regarding the clock generator, note the following:
4.2.1 Inputting an External Clock
(1) When inputting an external clock, do not select STOP mode. The clock generator may be damaged. At least,
its reliability will be adversely affected.
(2) When inputting an external clock, input the clock signal to pin X1 and the inverted signal to pin X2. If the
inverted signal is not input to the pin X2, malfunctions may readily occur due to noise.
(3) When inputting an external clock, use HCMOS or a device having equivalent drive capability.
(4) Do not draw signals from pins X1 and X2. Draw signals from point a shown in Fig. 4-3.
Fig. 4-3 Point from Which Signals Can Be Drawn When an External Clock Is Input
µPD78214
a
X1
X2
(5) Minimize the length of the line connecting pin X1 to pin X2 through the inverter.
4.2.2 Using the Crystal/Ceramic Oscillator
(1) The oscillator is a high-frequency analog circuit. Use the oscillator carefully. Special notes are given below:
• Minimize the lengths of the wiring.
• Do not let other signal lines cross this circuit.
• Keep the oscillator away from a line through which a varying high current flows.
• Always ground the capacitors of the oscillator at the same potential as pin V . Do not ground the
SS
capacitors to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.
• Do not draw signals from the oscillator.
The microcomputer is capable of normal, stable operation only when the oscillation is normal and stable. If
a high-precision oscillation frequency is required, consult with the oscillator manufacturer.
56
Chapter 4 Clock Generator
Fig. 4-4 Notes on Connection of the Oscillator
µPD78214
X2
X1
VSS
4
Cautions 1. Place the oscillator as close as possible to pins X1 and X2.
2. Do not let other signal lines cross the circuit enclosed in a dashed line.
Fig. 4-5 Incorrect Oscillator Connections
(a) The wiring length of the external circuit is too long.
(b) A signal line is allowed to cross the oscillator.
µPD78214
µPD78214
Pnm
X2
X1
VSS
X2
X1
VSS
57
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) A varying high current flows too close to the signal (d) A current flows through the ground line of the
line.
oscillator. (ThepotentialsvaryatpointsA, B, andC.)
VDD
µPD78214
µPD78214
X2
X1
VSS
Pnm
X2
X1
VSS
High
current
A
B
C
High current
(e) A signal is being drawn from the oscillator.
µPD78214
X2
X1
VSS
(2) At power-on or return from STOP mode, some time is required for the oscillation to settle. Generally, a crystal
requires a few milliseconds, and a ceramic resonator several hundreds of microseconds, for the oscillation
to settle.
The oscillation settling time is determined as described below. Ensure that sufficient time is allowed for the
oscillation to settle.
1 At power on
2 At return from STOP mode : (i) RESET input (reset period)
(ii) (PeriodinwhichtheNMIsignalisactive)+(periodspecifiedforthetimer
for automatic start)
: RESET input (reset period)
58
CHAPTER 5 PORT FUNCTIONS
5.1 DIGITAL I/O PORTS
The µPD78214 has the ports shown in Fig. 5-1. These ports can be used for various types of control. Table 5-1 lists
the function of each port. For ports 2 through 6, software can specify whether to use a built-in pull-up resistor for
inputs.
Fig. 5-1 Port Configuration
5
8
P00-P07
Port 0
Port 2
P20-P27
P30
8
Port 3
P37
P40-P47
P50
Port 4Note
8
Port 5Note
P57
P60-P63
4
Port 6Note
P64
P67
P70-P75
6
Port 7
Note For µPD78213, P40 through P47, P50 through P57, P64, or P65 does not function as ports.
59
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 5-1 Port Functions
Name
Port 0
Pin name
P00-P07
Function
Software-specified pull-up resistor
Can be specified for either output in 8-bit
units or high impedance.
Can also function as 4-bit real-time
output port (P00-P03 and P04-P07).
Can drive transistors directly.
—
Port 2
Port 3
P20-P27
P30-P37
Input port
In 6-bit units (P22-P27)
Can be specified for either input or
output in bit units.
For all input pins at a time
Note
Port 4
P40-P47
P50-P57
Can be specified for either input or
output in 8-bit units
In 8-bit units
Can drive LEDs directly.
Note
Port 5
Can be specified for either input or
output in bit units
For all input pins at a time
Can drive LEDs directly.
Note
Port 6
P60-P63
P64-P67
Output port
—
Can be specified for either input or
output in bit units
For all input pins at a time
Port 7
P70-P75
Input port
—
Note For µPD78213, P40 through P47, P50 through P57, P64, or P65 does not function as ports.
Table 5-2 Number of I/O Ports
I/O
Input mode
Output mode
Total
Port
Software-specified pull-up resistors
Directly driven LEDs
Direct driven transistor
Input port
I/O port
14 (14)
28 (10)
6 (6)
28 (10)
—
—
—
16 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
8 (8)
8 (8)
Output port 12 (12)
Total 54 (36)
34 (16)
16 (0)
Values enclosed in parentheses apply to the µPD78213.
5.2 PORT 0
Port 0 is an 8-bit output-only port with an output latch and can drive transistors directly. The port 0 mode register
(PM0) can specify that port 0 be in either the output mode or high-impedance state in 8-bit units.
A set of P00 through P03 and a set of P04 through P07 function as a 4-bit real-time output port. Similarly, a set of
P00 through P07 functions as an 8-bit real-time output port. These ports can output the contents of the P0L and
P0H buffers at arbitrary intervals. The real-time output trigger control register (RTPC) specifies whether port 0 is
to function as an ordinary output port or real-time output port.
WhentheRESETsignalisinput, theoutputofport0becomeshighimpedance, andthecontentsoftheoutputlatch
become undefined.
60
Chapter 5 Port Functions
5.2.1 Hardware Configuration
Fig. 5-2 shows the hardware configuration of port 0.
Fig. 5-2 Configuration of Port 0
WRRTPC
Real-time output port control register
P0LM
(P0HM)
RDRTPC
WRPM0
5
Port 0 mode register
PM0n
(PM0m)
WRP0L
Trigger
Buffer register
P0Ln
(P0Hm)
RDP0L
Output latch
Selector
P0n
(P0m)
P0n
(P0m)
WROUT
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
m = 4, 5, 6, 7
RDIN
5.2.2 Setting the Input/Output Mode and Control Mode
The port 0 mode register (PM0) sets the I/O mode of port 0, as shown in Fig. 5-3. This register is set by an 8-bit
data transfer instruction. (It can neither manipulated in bit units nor read-accessed).
Fig. 5-3 Port 0 Mode Register Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(FFH when RESET is input)
PM0 PM07 PM06 PM05 PM04 PM03 PM02 PM01 PM00
PM0
00H
FFH
Specifies P0n pin mode (n = 0 to 7)
Output mode (output buffer ON)
High-impedance state (output buffer OFF)
Other than above Cannot be set
To use port 0 as a real-time output port, it is necessary to set the P0LM and P0HM bits of the real-time output port
control register (RTPC) to 1.
When the P0LM and P0HM bits are set, the output buffer for each pin is turned on, and the contents of the output
latch are output to the pin, regardless of the contents of the PM0.
61
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.2.3 Operation
Port 0 is an output-only port.
Once port 0 is put in the output mode, the output latch becomes operable, enabling data transfer between the
output latch and accumulator according to a transfer instruction. The output latch can be loaded with any data
by a logical operation instruction. Once the output latch is loaded with some data, it retains the data until it is
loaded with other data.
If port 0 is specified to be a real-time output port, no data can be written to the output latch. However, it is possible
to read the contents of the output latch if it is in the real-time output port mode.
Fig. 5-4 Port Specified as an Output Port
WRPORT
Output
P0n
Iatch
n = 0 to 7
RDOUT
5.2.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor
Port 0 has no built-in pull-up resistor.
5.2.5 Driving Transistors
Because port 0 has an enhanced driving capacity for the high level side of the output buffer, it can drive a transistor
directly on an active-high signal.
Fig. 5-5 shows an example of connecting a transistor to the port.
Fig. 5-5 Example of Driving a Transistor
VDD
Load
P0n
62
Chapter 5 Port Functions
5.3 PORT 2
Port 2 is an 8-bit input-only port. P22 through P27 have a software-programmable built-in pull-up resistor. In
addition to functioning as an input port, port 2 functions as a control signal input pin such as for external interrupts
(see Table 5-3). All the 8 input pins of port 2 are configured as Schmitt trigger circuits in order to prevent
malfunction due to noise.
Table 5-3 Functions of Port 2
Port
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
Function
Note
Input port/NMI input
5
Input port/INTP0 input/CR11 capture trigger input/real-time output port trigger signal
Input port/INTP1 input/CR22 capture trigger input
Input port/INTP2 input/CI input
Input port/INTP3 input/CR02 capture trigger input
Input port/INTP4 input/ASCK input
Input port/INTP5 input/A/D controller external trigger input
Input port/SI input
Note NMI inputs are accepted regardless of whether interrupts are enabled.
(a) Function as a port pin
Although the pins of port 0 are shared by more than one function, the level of each pin can be read and tested.
(b) Function as a control signal input pin
(i) NMI (nonmaskable interrupt)
The NMI pin receives a nonmaskable interrupt request from the outside. The external interrupt mode
register (INTM0) specifies which edge, rising or falling, is valid as an interrupt request signal.
(ii) INTP0 through INTP5 (interrupt from peripherals)
The INTP0 through INTP5 pins receive interrupt requests from the outside. An interrupt occurs when one
of these pin receives an edge specified as valid by the external interrupt mode register (INTM0 and
INTM1). (See Chapter 11.)
The INTP0 through INTP3 and INTP5 pins are also used to receive external triggers, as listed below:
• INTP0: 8-bit timer/counter 1 capture trigger input and real-time output port trigger signal
• INTP1: 8-bit timer/counter 2 capture trigger input
• INTP2: 8-bit timer/counter 2 external count clock input
• INTP3: 16-bit timer/counter 2 capture trigger input
• INTP5: A/D converter external trigger input
(iii) CI (clock input)
The CI pin receives external clock inputs for 8-bit timer/counter 2.
(iv) ASCK (asynchronous serial clock)
The ASCK pin receives a baud rate clock from the outside.
(v) SI (serial input)
The SI pin receives serial data (during three-wire serial I/O mode).
63
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.3.1 Hardware Configuration
Fig. 5-6 shows the configuration of port 2
Fig. 5-6 Block Diagram of Port 2
VDD
WRPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO2
RDPUO
RDP2n
P2n
n = 0, 1, 2, ···, 6
Interrupt and
control signals
Edge
detector
RDP27
P27
SI input
3-wire serial
I/O mode
Note P20 or P21 does not have a circuit enclosed in a dotted box.
5.3.2 Setting the Input Mode and Control Mode
Port 2 is an input-only port.
There is no register to specify an input mode for port 2. Port 2 is always ready to receive control signals. A register
such as a control register in the hardware is used to specify what control signal to receive.
5.3.3 Operation
Port 2 is an input-only port, and the level of each pin of it can be read and tested.
For P20 through P27, the level from which noise has be removed can be read and tested. See Chapter 11 for
removing noise.
64
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-7 Port Specified as an Input Port
RDIN
P2n
n = 0 to 7
5
Caution For the in-circuit emulator, the level of each port 2 pin from which noise has not been removed can be read and tested.
5.3.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor
P22 through P27 have built-in pull-up resistors. When they must be pulled up, the built-in pull-up resistors should
be used. Use of the built-in pull-up resistors can reduce the number of the required components and the required
installation space.
The PUO2 bit of the pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO) can specify whether to use the built-in pull-up resistors
at P22 through P27, for all six pins at one time. (It is impossible to specify use of the built-in pull-up resistor for
an individual bit independently of the other bits.)
P20 or P21 does not have a built-in pull-up resistor.
Fig. 5-8 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor Format
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
(00H when RESET is input)
PUO
PUO6 PUO5 PUO4 PUO3 PUO2
PUO2 Specifies pull-up resistor connection of port 2
0
1
Not connected with port 2
Connected with pins P22 to P27
Remark Resetting the PUO2 bit to 00H can reduce the required current in the STOP mode.
65
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 5-9 Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 2)
VDD
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
PUO2
Pull-up resistor option register (PUO)
Caution P22 through P26 are not pulled up immediately after a reset. In this case, INTP1 through INTP5 (one of the multiple functions
assignedtoP22toP26)maysetinterruptrequestflags. Toavoidthisproblem, specifyuseofthepull-upresistorsintheinitialization
routine, before clearing the interrupt flags.
5.4 PORT 3
Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. The port 3 mode register (PM3) can put each bit of this port in either
the input or output mode, separately from the other bits. Each pin has a software-programmable built-in pull-up
resistor.
In addition to I/O functions, each pin works as control signal pin.
The port 3 mode control register (PMC3) can specify the mode of operation for each pin separately from the other
pins, as listed in Table 5-4. The level of any pin can be read and tested, regardless of what function the pin is
performing.
When the RESET signal is input, port 3 becomes an input port (in the high output impedance state), and the
contents of the output latch become undefined.
66
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Table 5-4 Port 3 Operating Modes (n = 0 through 7)
Mode
Condition
P30
Port mode
PMC3n = 0
Control signal I/O mode
PMC3n = 1
RxD input
P31
TxD output
P32
SCK I/O
P33
SO output or SB0 I/O
TO0 output
I/O port
P34
5
P35
TO1 output
P36
TO2 output
P37
TO3 output
(a) Port mode
If a port is put in a port mode by the PMC3 register, the port mode register (PM3) can put each bit of the port
in either the input or output mode independently of the other bits.
(b) Control signal I/O mode
The PMC3 register can specify each pin of port 3 as a control pin independently of the other pins, as described
below.
(i) RxD (receive data)
The RxD pin receives serial data from the asynchronous serial interface.
(ii) TxD (transmit data)
The TxD pin outputs serial data to the asynchronous serial interface.
(iii) SCK (serial clock)
The SCK pin is a serial clock I/O pin for the clock-synchronized serial interface.
(iv) SO (serial output)/SB0 (serial bus)
The SO pin outputs serial data (during three-wire serial I/O mode). The SB0 pin is a serial bus I/O pin
(during the SBI mode).
Remark Forbit3(P33)ofport3, “SB0”isareservedwordintheNECassemblyprogrampackage. Thebitisalsodefinedinaheader
file named sfrbit.h by the C compiler.
(v) TO0 through TO3 (timer output)
The TO0 through TO3 pins are timer output pins.
67
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.4.1 Hardware Configuration
Fig. 5-10 through 5-13 show the configuration of port 3.
Fig. 5-10 Block Diagram of P30 (Port 3)
WRPUO
RDPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO3
WRPM30
Port 3 mode register
PM30
VDD
WRPMC30
PMC30
P30
RDPMC30
WRP30
P30
RDP30
RxD input
RDP30
68
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-11 Block Diagram of P31, and P34 through P37 (Port 3)
WRPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO3
RDPUO
WRPM3n
Port 3 mode register
VDD
PM3n
WRPMC3n
5
PMC3n
RDPMC3n
WRP3n
TO, TxD output
Output latch
P3n
n = 1, 4, 5, 6, 7
P3n
RDP3n
RDP3n
69
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 5-12 Block Diagram of P32 (Port 3)
#
WRPUO
RDPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO3
WRPM32
Port 3 mode register
PM32
VDD
WRPMC32
PMC32
External
SCK
RDPMC32
WRP32
SCK
output
Output latch
P32
P32
RDP32
SCK input
RDP32
70
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-13 Block Diagram of P33 (Port 3)
#
WRPUO
RDPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO3
WRPM33
Port 3 mode register
PM33
5
WRPMC33
RDPMC33
Output disable
PMC33
VDD
PMC33
SB0 output
SO output
WRP33
Output latch
P33
P33
SBI mode
PMC33
Output
disable
RDOUT
SB0 input
RDIN
5.4.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode
The port 3 mode register (PM3) can put each pin of port 3 in either the input or output mode independently of the
other pins, as shown in Fig. 5-14.
The PM3 register is loaded with data using an 8-bit data transfer instruction; it cannot be bit-manipulated or read-
accessed.
In addition to I/O port functions, each pin of port 3 works as a control signal pin. As shown in Fig. 5-15, the port
3 mode control register (PMC3) can specify the mode of control for each pin.
71
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 5-14 Port 3 Mode Register Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(FFH when RESET is input)
PM3 PM37 PM36 PM35 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30
PM3n Specifies I/O mode of pin PM3n (n = 0 to 7)
0
1
Output mode (output buffer ON)
Input mode (output buffer OFF)
Fig. 5-15 Port 3 Mode Control Register (PMC3) Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(00H when RESET is input)
PMC3 PMC37 PMC36 PMC35 PMC34 PMC33 PMC32 PMC31 PMC30
PMC30 Specifies control mode of pin P30
0
1
I/O port mode
RxD input mode
PMC31 Specifies control mode of pin P31
0
1
I/O port mode
TxD output mode
PMC32 Specifies control mode of pin P32
0
1
I/O port mode
SCK I/O mode
PMC33 Specifies control mode of pin P33
0
1
I/O port mode
SO output mode/SB0 I/O mode
PMC3n Specifies control mode of pin P3n (n = 4 to 7)
0
1
I/O port mode
TOn output mode (n = 0 to 3)
72
Chapter 5 Port Functions
5.4.3 Operation
Port 3 is an I/O port. Its pins also function as control signal pins.
(1) Output port
When port 3 is in the output mode, its output latch is operable. Once the output latch becomes operable, data
canbetransferredbetweentheoutputlatchandtheaccumulatorusingatransferinstruction. Theoutputlatch
canbeloadedwithanydatabyalogicaloperationinstruction. Oncetheoutputlatchisloadedwithsomedata,
Note
it retains the data until it is loaded
with other data.
Note This includes a case in which any other bit of the same port is manipulated using a bit manipulation instruction.
Fig. 5-16 Port Specified as an Output Port
5
WRPORT
Output
P3n
Iatch
n = 0 to 7
RDOUT
(2) Input port
The level of each pin of port 3 can be transferred to the accumulator by a transfer instruction. Also in this case,
data can be written to the output latches, and all output latches store data transferred from the accumulator
by a transfer instruction or other similar instruction, regardless of the current mode of the port operation. If
a pin is specified as an input port, however, the latched data is not output to the port pin because the output
buffer at the pin is in the high-impedance state. (When the pin is switched to the output mode, the contents
of the output latch are output to the port pin.) If a pin is specified as an input port, the contents of the output
latch for the pin cannot be transferred to the accumulator.
Fig. 5-17 Port Specified as an Input Port
WRPORT
Output
Iatch
P3n
n = 0 to 7
RDIN
Caution Although its ultimate purpose is to manipulate only 1 bit, a bit manipulation instruction accesses a port in 8-bit units. If a
bit manipulation instruction is used for a port some pins of which are in the output mode and the other pins of which are in
the input mode, the contents of the output latch corresponding to the pins in the input mode or the control mode become
undefined (except for the bits manipulated by the SET1 or CLR1 instruction). Special care should be taken if bits are switched
between the input and output modes.
The same holds true when the port is manipulated using 8-bit arithmetic/logical instructions.
73
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) Control signal input or output
Regardless of setting of the port mode 3 register (PM3), each bit of port 3 can be used to input or output a
control signal, independently of the other bits, by setting the corresponding bit of the port mode control
register(PMC3)to1. Whenapinisusedforacontrolsignal, executingareadinstructionfortheportcandetect
the state of the control signal.
Fig. 5-18 Port Specified as a Control Signal Input or Output
Control (input)
Control (output)
PM3n
n = 0 to 7
PM3n = 0
RD
PM3n = 1
Internal bus
(a) Control signal output
When a bit of the port mode register (PM3n) is 1, executing a read instruction for port 3 can read the level
of the corresponding control signal pin.
When a bit of the port mode register (PM3n) is 0, executing a read instruction for port 3 can check the
corresponding control signal in the µPD78214.
Remark Forbit3(P33)ofport3, “SB0”isareservedwordintheNECassemblyprogrampackage. Thebitisalsodefinedinaheader
file named sfrbit.h by the C compiler.
(b) Control signal input
Only when a bit of the port mode register (PM3n) is 1, executing a read instruction for port 3 can read the
level of the corresponding control signal pin.
5.4.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor
Port 3 has built-in pull-up resistors. When port 3 must be pulled up, the built-in pull-up resistors should be used.
Use of the built-in pull-up resistors can reduce the number of the required components and the required
installation space.
Use of a built-in pull-up resistor can be specified for each bit of port 3, independently of the other bits, by the PUO3
bit of pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO) and the port 3 mode register (PM3). When the PUO3 bit is 1, the built-
in pull-up resistor for a pin specified by the PM3 (PM3n = 1, n = 0 to 7) is connected.
If a pin is specified to be in the control mode, the built-in pull-up resistor for the pin is connected. (A built-in pull-
up resistor is connected to a pin that becomes an output pin during the control mode.) If you do not want to use
the built-in pull-up resistor for a pin in the control mode, reset the corresponding bit of the PM3 to 0 (output mode).
Fig. 5-19 Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
(00H when RESET is input)
PUO
PUO6 PUO5 PUO4 PUO3 PUO2
PUO3 Specifies pull-up resistor connection of port 3
0
1
Not connected with port 3
Connected with port 3
Remark Resetting the PUO2 bit to 00H can reduce the required current in the STOP mode.
74
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-20 Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 3)
VDD
P30
P31
P32
5
P36
P37
• • •
(PUO)
PUO3
Port 3 mode
register (PM3)
5.5 PORT 4
Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. The memory expansion mode register (MM) can put all 8 bits of
this port in either the input or output mode at one time. Each pin has a software-programmable built-in pull-up
resistor, and can drive an LED directly.
When an external memory or I/O device is expanded, port 4 functions as a time-division address/data bus (AD0
through AD7).
For the µPD78213, port 4 functions only as a time-division address/data bus (AD0 through AD7).
When the RESET signal is input, port 4 becomes an input port (high output impedance), and the contents of the
output latch become undefined.
75
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.5.1 Hardware Configuration
Fig. 5-21 shows the hardware configuration of port 4.
Fig. 5-21 Block Diagram of Port 4
WRPUO
RDPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO4
VDD
MM0-MM2 EA
WRP4n
RDP4n
Output latch
P4n
P4n
n = 0 to 7
5.5.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode
The memory expansion mode register (MM, see Fig 13-1) specifies the operating mode of port 4, as listed in Table
5-5.
Table 5-5 Port 4 Operating Modes
MM register bit
EA pin
Operation mode
Input port
MM2 MM1 MM0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
×
0
0
1
×
0
1
1
×
Output port
Address/data bus
(AD0-AD7)
For the µPD78213, port 4 functions only as the address/data bus (AD0 through AD7).
76
Chapter 5 Port Functions
5.5.3 Operation
Port 4 is an I/O port. It functions also as an address/data bus (AD0 through AD7).
(1) Output port
When port 4 is in the output mode, its output latch is operable. Once the output latch becomes operable, data
canbetransferredbetweentheoutputlatchandtheaccumulatorusingatransferinstruction. Theoutputlatch
canbeloadedwithanydatabyalogicaloperationinstruction. Oncetheoutputlatchisloadedwithsomedata,
Note
it retains the data until it is loaded
with other data.
Note This includes a case in which any other bit of the same port is manipulated using a bit manipulation instruction.
Fig. 5-22 Port Specified as an Output Port
5
WRPORT
Output
P4n
Iatch
n = 0 to 7
RDOUT
(2) Input port
The level of each pin of port 3 can be transferred to the accumulator by a transfer instruction. Also in this case,
data can be written to the output latches, and all output latches hold data transferred from the accumulator
by a transfer instruction or other similar instruction, regardless of the current mode of the port operation. If
a pin is specified as an input port, however, the latched data is not output to the port pin because the output
buffer at the pin is in the high-impedance state. (When the pin is switched to the output mode, the contents
of the output latch are output to the port pin.) If a pin is specified as an input port, the contents of the output
latch for that pin cannot be transferred to the accumulator.
Fig. 5-23 Port Specified as an Input Port
WRPORT
Output
Iatch
P4n
n = 0 to 7
RDIN
Caution Although its ultimate purpose is to manipulate only 1 bit, a bit manipulation instruction accesses a port in 8-bit units. If a
bit manipulation instruction is used for a port specified to be in the input mode, the contents of the output latch become
undefined (except for the bits manipulated by the SET1 or CLR1 instruction). Special care should be taken if bits are switched
between the input and output modes. The same holds true when the port is manipulated using 8-bit arithmetic/logical
instructions.
77
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) Address/data bus (AD0 through AD7)
Port 4 is used as the address/data automatically for external access.
Do not execute I/O instructions for port 4.
5.5.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor
Port 4 has built-in pull-up resistors. When port 4 must be pulled up, the built-in pull-up resistors should be used.
Use of the built-in pull-up resistors can reduce the number of the required components and the required
installation space.
Use of built-in pull-up resistors can be specified for all 8 bits of port 4 at one time (not independently of each other)
by the PUO4 bit of the pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO).
Use of built-in pull-up resistors can be specified for this port, regardless of the current mode (input or output) of
the port.
Fig. 5-24 Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
(00H when RESET is input)
PUO
PUO6 PUO5 PUO4 PUO3 PUO2
PUO4 Specifies pull-up resistor connection of port 4
0
1
Not connected with port 4
Connected with port 4
Caution For the µPD78213, port 4 is used as an address/data bus. Therefore, the PUO4 bit must be kept to be 0, and a built-in pull-up resistor
must not be connected. For the µPD78214, the same conditions must be maintained if port 4 is used as an address/data bus.
Remark Resetting the PUO to 00H can reduce the required current in the STOP mode.
78
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-25 Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 4)
VDD
P40
P41
P42
5
P46
P47
PUO4
Pull-up resistor option register (PUO)
5.5.5 Driving LEDs Directly
Forport4,thelowlevelsideoftheoutputbufferhasanenhanceddrivingcapacitysothatitcandriveanLEDdirectly
on an active-low signal. Fig. 5-26 is an example of such an output buffer.
Fig. 5-26 Example of Driving an LED Directly
VDD
µPD78214
P4n
(n = 0 to 7)
79
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.6 PORT 5
Port 5 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. The port 5 mode register (PM5) can put each bit of this port in either
the input or output mode, independently of the other bits. Each pin has a software-programmable built-in pull-
up resistor, and can drive an LED directly.
When an external memory or I/O device is expanded, P50 through P57 function as an address bus (AD8 through
AD15). For the µPD78213, P50 through P57 function only as an address bus (AD8 through AD15).
When the RESET signal is input, port 5 becomes an input port (high output impedance), and the contents of the
output latch become undefined.
5.6.1 Hardware Configuration
Fig. 5-27 shows the hardware configuration of port 5.
Fig. 5-27 Block Diagram of Port 5
WRPUO
RDPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO5
VDD
MM0-MM2 EA
WRPM5n
Port 5 mode register
PM5n
WRP5n
RDP5n
Output latch
P5n
P5n
n = 0 to 7
5.6.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode
The port 5 mode register (PM5) can put each pin of port 5 in either the input or output mode independently of the
other pins, as shown in Fig. 5-28. The PM5 register is loaded with data using an 8-bit data transfer instruction; it
cannot be bit-manipulated or read-accessed.
The memory expansion mode register (MM, seeFig. 13-1) can specify the control mode of port 5, as listed in Table
5-6.
80
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-28 Port 5 Mode Register Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(FFH when RESET is input)
PM5 PM57 PM56 PM55 PM54 PM53 PM52 PM51 PM50
PM5n Specifies I/O mode of pin PM5n (n = 0 to 7)
0
1
Output mode (output buffer ON)
Input mode (output buffer OFF)
5
Table 5-6 Port 5 Operating Modes
MM register bit
EA pin
Operation mode
MM2 MM1 MM0
1
1
0
0
1
×
0
1
×
×
1
×
I/O port
Address/data bus
(A8-A15)
For the µPD78213, port 4 functions only as the address/data bus (AD8 through AD15).
5.6.3 Operation
Port 5 is an I/O port. Its pins also function as control signal pins.
(1) Output port
When port 5 is in the output mode, its output latch is operable. Once the output latch becomes operable, data can
be transferred between the output latch and the accumulator using a transfer instruction. The output latch can
beloadedwithanydatabyalogicaloperationinstruction. Oncetheoutputlatchisloadedwithsomedata,itretains
Note
the data until it is loaded
with other data.
Note This includes a case in which any other bit of the same port is manipulated using a bit manipulation instruction.
Fig. 5-29 Port Specified as an Output Port
WRPORT
Output
P5n
Iatch
n = 0 to 7
RDOUT
(2) Input port
The level of each pin of port 5 can be transferred to the accumulator by a transfer instruction. Also in this case,
data can be written to the output latches, and all output latches store data transferred from the accumulator
by a transfer instruction or other similar instruction, regardless of the current mode of the port operation. If
a bit is specified as an input port, however, the latched data is not output to the port pin because the output
buffer at the pin is in the high-impedance state. (When the pin is switched from the input mode to the output
mode, the contents of the output latch are output to the port pin.) If a bit is specified as an input port, the
contents of the output latch for the pin cannot be transferred to the accumulator.
81
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 5-30 Port Specified as an Input Port
WRPORT
Output
Iatch
P5n
n = 0 to 7
RDIN
Caution Although its ultimate purpose is to manipulate only 1 bit, a bit manipulation instruction accesses a port in 8-bit units. If a bit
manipulation instruction is used for a port some pins of which are in the output mode and the other pins of which are in the input
mode, the contents of the output latch corresponding to the pin in the input mode become undefined (except for the bits
manipulated by the SET1 or CLR1 instruction). Special care should be taken if bits are switched between the input and output
modes.
The same holds true when the port is manipulated using 8-bit arithmetic/logical instructions.
(3) Address bus (A8 through A15)
Port 5 is used as the address bus automatically for external addresses. Do not execute I/O instructions for port 5.
5.6.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor
Port 5 has built-in pull-up resistors. When port 5 must be pulled up, the built-in pull-up resistors should be used.
Use of the built-in pull-up resistors can reduce the number of the required components and the required
installation space.
Useofabuilt-inpull-upresistorcanbespecifiedforeachpinofport5, independentlyoftheotherpins, bythePUO5
bit of pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO) and the port 5 mode register (PM5).
WhenthePUO5bitis1, thebuilt-inpull-upresistorforapinspecifiedbythePM5(PM5n=1, n=0to7)isconnected.
Fig. 5-31 Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
(00H when RESET is input)
PUO
PUO6 PUO5 PUO4 PUO3 PUO2
PUO5 Specifies pull-up resistor connection of port 5
0
1
Not connected with port 5
Connected with port 5
Caution For the µPD78213, port 5 is used as an address bus. Therefore, the PUO5 bit must be kept to be 0, and a built-in pull-up resistor must
not be connected. For the µPD78214, the same conditions must be maintained if port 5 is used as an address bus.
Remark Resetting the PUO to 00H can reduce the required current in the STOP mode.
82
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-32 Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 5)
VDD
P50
P51
P52
5
P56
P57
• • •
(PUO)
PUO5
Port 5 mode
register (PM5)
5.6.5 Driving LEDs Directly
Forport5,thelowlevelsideoftheoutputbufferhasanenhanceddrivingcapacitysothatitcandriveanLEDdirectly
on an active-low signal. Fig. 5-33 is an example of such an output buffer.
Fig. 5-33 Example of Driving an LED Directly
VDD
µPD78214
P5n
(n = 0 to 7)
83
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.7 PORT 6
Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. P64 through P67 have a software-programmable built-in pull-up
resistor.
In addition to the port functions, port 5 works as I/O pins for various control signals as listed in Table 5-7. Each
control pin is operated by the corresponding function.
For the µPD78213, P64 and P65 function only as RD and WR output pins, respectively.
When the RESET signal is input, P60 through P63 go low, and P64 through P67 are put in the input port mode (high
output impedance state). At the same time, the contents of the higher 4 bits of the output latch become undefined,
and the lower 4 bits are reset to 0H.
Table 5-7 Port 6 Operating Modes
Operation needed to make the pin function as a
Pin
Port mode
Control signal I/O mode
control signal
P60-P63
P64
Output port
A16-A19 output
RD output
Set the MM6 bit of the MM register to 1.
For the µPD78213, no special operation is
needed. For the other models, specify the
memory expansion mode by the MM2 through
MM0 bits of the MM register.
P65
P66
WR output
I/O port
WAIT input/AN6 input
Specified by the PW register, or the PWn1 and
PWn0 bits (n = 2 or 3) of the MM register or by
putting P66 in the input mode.
P67
REFRQ output/AN7 input Set the RFEN bit of the RFM register to 1.
Caution When the RESET signal exists, P60 through P63 are kept in the high impedance state. When the RESET signal disappears, they
output a low level. So, it is necessary to design the external circuit so that P60 through P63 are allowed to output a low level during
the initial state.
Remark See Chapter 13 for details.
(a) Port mode
P60 through P63 are output-only circuits. Each of P64 through P67 can be specified to be in either the input
or output mode by the port 6 mode register (PM6), independently of the other bits.
(b) Control signal I/O mode
(i) A16 through A19 (address bus)
These pins function as the upper address bus output pins when the external memory space is expanded
(10000H through FFFFFH). They operate according to the setting of the memory expansion register (MM).
(ii) RD (read strobe)
This pin outputs a strobe signal to read from external memory. For the µPD78213, it always operates. For
the other models, it operates when the external memory is expanded.
(iii) WR (write strobe)
This pin outputs a strobe signal to write to external memory. For the µPD78213, it always operates. For
the other models, it operates according to the setting of the MM register.
(iv) WAIT (wait)
This pin receives a wait signal. It operates according to the setting of the programmable wait control (PW)
register or the MM register.
(v) REFRQ (refresh request)
When a pseudo-static memory is connected to externally, this pin outputs a refresh pulse to the pseudo-
static memory. It operates according to the setting of the refresh mode register (RFM).
84
Chapter 5 Port Functions
(vi) AN6 and AN7 (analog input)
These pins receive analog signals for the A/D converter.
5.7.1 Hardware Configuration
Fig. 5-34 through 5-37 show the hardware configuration of port 6.
Fig. 5-34 Block Diagram of P60 through P63 (Port 6)
WRMM6
RDMM6
WRPM6
Memory expansion mode register
MM6
5
Port 6 mode register
PM6n
Memory reference
instruction without "&"
Memory reference
instruction with "&"
P6n
n = 0, 1, 2, 3
WRP6
Output latch
P6n
RDP6
85
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 5-35 Block Diagram of P64 and P65 (Port 6)
WRPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO6
RDPUO
WRPM64, PM65
Port 6 mode register
VDD
P64
(P65)
EA
External extended mode
RD signal (WR signal)
WRP64, P65
Output latch
P64
(P65)
PM64
(PM65)
RDOUT
RDIN
86
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Fig. 5-36 Block Diagram of P66 (Port 6)
WRPUO
RDPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO6
WRPM66
Port 6 mode register
PM66
VDD
5
External wait
specification
WRP66
RDOUT
Output latch
P66
P66
Wait input
RDIN
A/D converter
87
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 5-37 Block Diagram of P67 (Port 6)
WRPUO
RDPUO
Pull-up resistor option register
PUO6
VDD
WRPM67
Port 6 mode register
PM67
Refresh mode
Refresh signal
Output latch
WRP67
P67
P67
RDOUT
RDIN
A/D converter
5.7.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode
The port 6 mode register (PM6) can put port 6 in either the input or output mode as shown in Fig. 5-38. Table 5-
8 lists the operations needed to make port 6 function as control pins.
P66 and P67 can always receive analog signals.
The ADM of the A/D converter specifies the mode of the A/D converter operation. (See Chapter 8.) To use port
6 as AN6 and AN7, however, it is necessary to specify the input mode using the port 6 mode register (PM6) and
disconnection of a pull-up resistor using the PUO6 bit (= 0) of the pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO).
For the µPD78213, P64 and P65 function only as output pins for RD and WR, respectively.
Table 5-8 Port 6 Control Pin Functions and the Required Operations
Pin
P60
P61
P62
P63
P64
Function
A16
I/O
Operation needed to make port 6 function as control pins
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
A17
Set the MM6 bit of the MM register to 1.
A18
A19
RD
For the µPD78213, no special operation is needed. For the other models, specify
the memory expansion mode by the MM2 through MM0 bits of the MM register.
P65
P66
WR
Output
Input
WAIT
Specify insertion of external wait using the PW register or the PWn1 and PWn0
bits (n = 2 or 3) of the MM register or by putting P66 in the input mode.
P67
REFRQ
Output
Set the RFEN bit of the RFM register to 1.
88
Chapter 5 Port Functions
Cautions 1. To use P60 through P63 as an output port, it is necessary to reset the PM60 through PM63 bits to 0. If they are not 0, the in-
circuit emulator may not work.
2. To use the P66/WAIT pin as the WAIT pin, it is necessary to put P66 in the input mode using the PM6 register.
Fig. 5-38 Port 6 Mode Register Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(F × H when RESET is input)
PM6 PM67 PM66 PM65 PM64 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60
5
Memory bank
PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60
specificationNote
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
Bank 4
Bank 5
Bank 6
Bank 7
Bank 8
Bank 9
Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Bank D
Bank E
Bank F
PM6n Specifies I/O mode of pin PM6n (n = 4 to 7)
0
1
Output mode (output buffer ON)
Input mode (output buffer OFF)
Note When the MM6 bit of the memory expansion mode register (MM) is set to 1, these bits function as a bank specification register used
to execute memory reference instructions without “&”. When the 1M-byte expansion function is not used, reset PM63 through PM60
to all 0s.
Caution To use analog inputs AN6 and AN7, put PM66 and PM67 in the input mode.
Remark The lower four bits (P60 through P63) of port 6 are an output-only port.
89
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.7.3 Operation
Port 6 is an I/O port. Its pins also function as control signal pins.
(1) Output port
When port 6 is in the output mode, the contents of its output latch are output, and data can be transferred
between the output latch and the accumulator using a transfer instruction. The output latch can be loaded
with any data by a logical operation instruction. Once the output latch is loaded with some data, it retains the
Note
data until it is loaded
with other data.
Note This includes a case in which any other bit of the same port is manipulated using a bit manipulation instruction.
Fig. 5-39 Port Specified as an Output Port
WRPORT
Output
P6n
Iatch
n = 0 to 7
RDOUT
(2) Input port
The level of each pin of port 3 can be transferred to the accumulator by a transfer instruction. Also in this case,
data can be written to the output latches, and all output latches store data transferred from the accumulator
by a transfer instruction or other similar instruction, regardless of the current mode of the port operation. If
a pin is specified as an input port, however, the latched data is not output to the port pin because the output
buffer at the pin is in the high-impedance state. (When the bit is switched from the input mode to the output
mode, thecontentsoftheoutputlatchareoutputtothecorrespondingportpin.) Ifabitisspecifiedasaninput
port, the contents of the output latch for the bit cannot be transferred to the accumulator.
Fig. 5-40 Port Specified as an Input Port
WRPORT
Output
Iatch
P6n
n = 4 to 7
RDIN
Caution Although its ultimate purpose is to manipulate only 1 bit, a bit manipulation instruction accesses a port in 8-bit units. If a
bit manipulation instruction is used for a port some pins of which are in the output mode and the other pins of which are in
the input mode, the contents of the output latch corresponding to the pins in the input mode become undefined (except for
the bits manipulated by the SET1 or CLR1 instruction). Special care should be taken if bits are switched between the input
and output modes.
The same holds true when the port is manipulated using 8-bit arithmetic/logical instructions.
90
Chapter 5 Port Functions
(3) Control pins
When port 6 function as control pins, they cannot be manipulated or tested by software.
(4) Analog inputs (P66 and P67 only)
When port 6 is used as analog input pins (AN6 and AN7), the level of each pin can be read and tested.
5.7.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor
P64 through P67 have built-in pull-up resistors. When they must be pulled up, the built-in pull-up resistors should
be used. Use of the built-in pull-up resistors can reduce the number of the required components and the required
installation space.
Use of a built-in pull-up resistor can be specified for each of these pins, independently of the other pins, by the
PUO6 bit of pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO) and the port 6 mode register (PM6).
5
WhenthePUO6bitis1, thebuilt-inpull-upresistorforapinspecifiedbythePM6(PM6n=1, n=4to7)isconnected.
P60 through P63 do not have a built-in pull-up resistor.
Fig. 5-41 Pull-Up-Resistor-Option Register Format
7
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
(00H when RESET is input)
PUO
PUO6 PUO5 PUO4 PUO3 PUO2
PUO6 Specifies pull-up resistor connection of port 6
0
1
Not connected with port 6
Connected with port 6
Remark Resetting the PUO to 00H can reduce the required current in the STOP mode.
Caution To use P66 and P67 as AN6 and AN7, respectively, it is necessary to reset the PU06 bit to 0; do not specify to use built-in pull-up
resistors for port 6.
Fig. 5-42 Connection of Pull-Up Resistors (Port 6)
VDD
P64
P65
P66
P67
• • •
(PUO)
PUO6
Port 6 mode
register (PM6)
91
µPD78214 Sub-Series
5.7.5 Note
When P66 and P67 are used as analog input pins AN6 and AN7 respectively or when A/D conversion is not
performed, do not apply a voltage out of the range AV through AV
to these pins, if AN6 and AN7 are selected
SS
REF
for ANI0 through ANI2 of the A/D converter mode register (ADM).
See Chapter 8 for details.
5.8 PORT 7
Port 7 is a 6-bit input-only port. It functions as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 through AN5) as well as input
port pins.
The level of each pin of port 7 can be read and tested, although it is a dual-function pin.
5.8.1 Hardware Configuration
Fig. 5-43 shows the hardware configuration of port 7.
Fig. 5-43 Block Diagram of Port 7
Analog input
P7n
n = 0 to 5
RDIN
5.8.2 Setting the I/O Mode and Control Mode
Port 7 is an input-only port.
Port 7 is designed so that it can always receive analog inputs. Therefore, it is unnecessary to specify a mode.
The ADM register for the A/D converter is used to specify the mode of A/D converter operation. (See Chapter 8
for details.)
92
Chapter 5 Port Functions
5.8.3 Operation
Port 7 is an input-only port, and the level of its pins can be read and tested.
Fig. 5-44 Port Specified as an Input Port
RDIN
5
P7n
n = 0 to 5
5.8.4 Built-In Pull-Up Resistor
Port 0 has no built-in pull-up resistor.
5.8.5 Notes
(1) When P70 through P75 are used as analog input pins AN0 and AN5 respectively or when A/D conversion is
not performed, do not apply a voltage out of the range AV through AV
to the pins that are selected for
SS
REF
ANI0 through ANI2 of the A/D converter mode register (ADM).
See Chapter 8 for details.
(2) Port 7 is a 6-bit input port. The upper 2 bits of “8-bit” data from port 7 are undefined.
5.9 NOTES
(1) When the RESET signal is input, all the port pins are set to high-impedance (disconnected from their built-in
pull-up resistors).
If it is necessary to prevent a port pin from being set to high-impedance state when the RESET signal is being
supplied, take an appropriate action using an external circuit.
(2) Some operations of the pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO), which is used to specify connection of built-
in pull-up resistors, cannot be emulated by an in-circuit emulator, because of the following restrictions:
• The contents of the PUO register cannot be read correctly.
• Bit manipulation instructions or logical/arithmetic instructions do not work for the PUO register; an SFR
illegal access break may occur, aborting emulation.
• No built-in pull-up resistor is provided.
Therefore, observe the following two points.
• To set the PUO register, use only an 8-bit data transfer instruction (MOV).
• When debugging the target board, use pull-up resistors provided on it.
(3) SupplyingtheRESETsignaldoesnotinitializethecontentsoftheoutputlatch. Whenusingaportintheoutput
mode, initialize the output latch before turning on the output buffer. Otherwise, data output from the output
ports is unpredictable.
Similarly, to use a port as a control pin, always initialize the internal hardware before specifying the control
pin.
93
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(4) P22 through P26 are not pulled up immediately after a reset, and the interrupt request flag may be set
depending on the function of a dual-function pin (INTP1 through INTP5). Therefore, specify connection of a
pull-up resistor in the initialization routine, before clearing the interrupt request flag.
(5) With an in-circuit emulator, the level of each pin of port 2 can be read and tested before noise is removed.
(6) For the µPD78214, to use P40 through P47 and P50 through P57 as an address/data bus and an address bus
respectively, always reset the PUO4 and PUO5 bits of the PUO register to 0 so that a built-in pull-up resistor
is not used.
For the µPD78213, P40 through P47 and P50 through P57 are always used as an address/data bus and an
address bus respectively, and the PUO4 and PUO5 bits of the PUO register must always be reset to 0, and a
built-in pull-up resistor must not be connected.
(7) To use P60 through P63 as an output port, always reset to the PM60 through P63 bits to 0. If they are not 0,
P60 through P63 cannot be emulated normally by an in-circuit emulator.
(8) To use analog inputs AN6 and AN7, put P66 and P67 in the input mode, respectively.
(9) To use P66 and P67 as AN6 and AN7 respectively, reset the PUO6 to 0; do not specify connection of built-in
pull-up resistors for port 6.
(10) When P66 and P67 are used as analog input pins AN6 and AN7 respectively or when A/D conversion is not
performed, do not apply a voltage out of the range AV through AV
to these pins, if AN6 and AN7 are
SS
REF
selected for ANI0 through ANI2 of the A/D converter mode register (ADM).
See Chapter 8 for details.
(11) To use the P66/WAIT pin as the WAIT pin, it is necessary to put P66 in the input mode using the PM6 register.
(12) When P70 through P75 are used as analog input pins AN0 and AN5 respectively or when A/D conversion is
not performed, do not apply a voltage out of the range AV through AV
to the pins that are selected for
SS
REF
ANI0 through ANI2 of the A/D converter mode register (ADM).
See Chapter 8 for details.
(13) Although its ultimate purpose is to manipulate only 1 bit, a bit manipulation instruction accesses a port in 8-
bit units. If a bit manipulation instruction is used for a port some pins of which are in the output mode and
the other pins of which are in the input mode, the contents of the output latch corresponding to the pins in
the input mode or the control mode become undefined (except for the bits manipulated by the SET1 or CLR1
instruction). Special care should be taken if bits are switched between the input and output modes. The same
applies when the port is manipulated using 8-bit arithmetic/logical instructions.
(14) Port 7 is a 6-bit input port. The upper 2 bits of “8-bit” data from port 7 are undefined.
94
CHAPTER 6 REAL-TIME OUTPUT FUNCTION
6.1 CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION
Thereal-timeoutputfunctionisimplementedbythehardwarecenteringaroundport0andthebufferregister(P0H
and P0L) as shown in Fig. 6-1.
The term real-time output function refers to a function that transfers data in the buffer register to the output latch
byhardwareforoutputtotheoutsidesimultaneouslywhenatimerinterruptorexternalinterruptoccurs. Theterm
real-time output port refers to a pin used to output such data to the outside.
The real-time output function handles the following two types of real-time output data:
• 4 bits × 2 channels
6
• 8 bits × 1 channel
Combined use of the real-time output function and the macro service function (described later) implements a
pattern generator function with programmable timing without intervention by software.
The pattern generator function is suitable to control stepper motors.
95
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Selector
Selector
96
Chapter 6 Real-Time Output Function
6.2 REAL-TIME OUTPUT CONTROL REGISTER (RTPC)
The real-time output control register (RTPC) is an 8-bit register to specify the functions of port 0. An 8-bit
manipulation instruction and a bit manipulation instruction can be used to read data from and write data to the
RTPC register. Fig. 6-2 shows the format of this register.
When the RESET signal is input, the RTPC is reset to 00H.
Fig. 6-2 Real-Time Output Port Control Register (RTPC) Format
7
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
RTPC BYTE
P0MH EXTR
P0ML
6
P0ML Function specification of P00 to P03 pins
0
1
Port mode
Real-time output port mode
EXTR Data transfer by INTP0 from buffer register to
output latch
0
1
Disabled
Enabled. BYTE = 0: Only P0L data is transferred
BYTE = 1: Both P0L and P0H data are
transferred
P0MH Function specification of P04 to P07 pins
0
1
Port mode
Real-time output port mode
BYTE Operation mode for real-time output mode
0
1
4-bit separate real-time output port
8-bit real-time output port
Caution When the P0ML or P0MH is set to 1, the output buffer for the corresponding output port is turned on to output the contents of the
port 0 output latch, regardless of the contents of the port 0 mode register (PM0). Therefore, initialize the contents of the output
latch before specifying the real-time output port.
6.3 ACCESS TO THE REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT
The buffer registers (P0H and P0L) are mapped to independent addresses in the SFR area, as shown in Fig. 6-3.
When the 4-bit × 2-channel real-time output function is specified, data can be set in each buffer register (P0H or
P0L) independently.
When the 8-bit × 1-channel real-time output function is specified, 8-bit data can be set in the buffer registers by
writing to either one (P0H or P0L).
Table 6-1 lists the operating modes of port 0 and the operations needed for the port 0 buffer registers.
Fig. 6-3 Configuration of the Buffer Registers (P0H and P0L)
High-order
4 bits
Low-order
4 bits
P0L
0FF0AH
0FF0BH
P0H
97
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 6-1 Port 0 Operating Modes and Operations Needed for the Port 0 Buffer Registers
Read operation
Write operation
Register
Operating mode
8-bit port mode
High-order 4 bits Low-order 4 bits High-order 4 bits Low-order 4 bits
P0
Output latch
Output latch
Note
Note
P0L
P0H
P0
Buffer register
Buffer register
Output latch
—
Buffer register
—
Buffer register
—
8-bit real-time
output port
mode
Note
Note
P0L
P0H
P0
Buffer register
Buffer register
Output latch
Buffer register
Buffer register
—
4-bit separate
real-time output
port mode
Note
Note
P0L
P0H
P0
Buffer register
Buffer register
Output latch
—
Buffer register
Buffer register
—
P00-P03: Port
—
—
Output latch
P04-P07: Real-time
output port mode
Note
Note
P0L
P0H
P0
Buffer register
Buffer register
Output latch
Buffer register
Buffer register
Output latch
—
—
—
Buffer register
—
P00-P03: Real-time
output port mode
Note
Note
P0L
P0H
Buffer register
Buffer register
P04-P07: Port
Buffer register
Note The contents of the P0H are read to the high-order 4 bits, and the contents of the P0L are read to the low-order 4 bits.
Remark —: The output latches or buffer registers are not affected.
Example of setting data in the buffer registers
• 4-bit × 2-channel operation
MOV P0L, #05H
; Sets 0101B in the P0L register
MOV P0H, #0C0H ; Sets 1100B in the P0H register
• 8-bit × 1-channel operation
MOV P0L, #0C5H ; Sets 0101B in the P0L register
and 1100B in the P0H register
Or,
MOV P0H, #0C5H
The following three sources can determine the timing at which data is output to an output latch.
• Interrupt from 8-bit timer/counter 1 (INTC10 or INTC11)
• INTP0 external interrupt
98
Chapter 6 Real-Time Output Function
6.4 OPERATION
When port 0 is in the real-time output port mode, the contents of the buffer registers (P0H and P0L) are sent to the
output latches for output to the pins of port 0 in synchronization with the occurrence of a trigger condition listed
in Table 6-2.
For example, let’s select, as an output trigger source, a signal (INTC10 or INTC11) indicating that timer 1 (TM1) of
8-bit timer/counter 1 coincides with the compare register (CR10 or CR11). In this case, the output data at the pins
of port 0 can be made to reflect the contents of the buffer register at intervals of a value preset in each compare
register. Combined use of the real-time output port function and the macro service function can output data at
each pin of port 0 sequentially at arbitrary intervals (see Section 12.4 ).
If external interrupt INTP0 is selected as an external output trigger source, data can be output from port 0 in
synchronization with an external event.
6
Table 6-2 Output Trigger for the Real-Time Output Port (When P0MH = P0ML = 1)
RTPC register
Output mode
P0H register
P0L register
BYTE
EXTR
0
1
0
1
INTC11
INTC11
INTC10
4-bit real-time
output
0
INTC10/INTP0
INTC10
INTC10/INTP0
8-bit real-time
output
1
Caution With an in-circuit emulator, digital noise cannot be eliminated normally from the INTP0 pin. When it is specified that data transfer
fromthebufferregistertotheoutputlatchbeperformedaccordingtoasignalfromtheINTP0pin, datatransfermayoccuraccording
to an erroneously detected edge. Keep in mind this characteristic when using the in-circuit emulator.
See the notes in Chapter 11 for details of erroneous detection of edges.
99
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 6-4 Real-Time Output Port Operation Timing
FFH
CR11
8-bit timer/
counter 1
CR11
CR11
CR11
0H
Timer starts
INTC11 interrupt
request
CPU operation
Buffer register
(P0H)
D04
D03
D03
D02
D01
D01
D00
Output latches
(P07-P04)
D02
The contents of the buffer register and compare register are rewritten by software processing or macro
service (see Section 12.4).
100
Chapter 6 Real-Time Output Function
Fig. 6-5 Real-Time Output Port Operation Timing (Controlling 2 Channels Independently of Each Other)
FFH
CR10
CR11
CR10
CR11
8-bit timer/
counter 1
CR10
6
CR11
CR11
0H
Timer starts
INTC11
interrupt request
INTC10
interrupt request
CPU operation
Buffer register
(P0H)
D03
D04
D01
D02
Buffer register
(P0L)
D13
D12
D11
D14
Output latches
(P07-P04)
D00
D01
D03
D02
Output latches
(P03-P00)
D11
D13
D10
D12
The contents of the buffer register and compare register are rewritten by software processing or macro
service (see Section 12.4).
101
µPD78214 Sub-Series
6.5 APPLICATION EXAMPLE
ThissectiondescribesanexampleofapplicationinwhichP00throughP03areusedasa4-bitreal-timeoutputport.
Each time TM1 for 8-bit timer/counter 1 coincides with the contents of CR10, the contents of the P0L are output
to P00 through P03. At this point, an interrupt occurs, and the interrupt handling routine for this interrupt sets the
next data to be output and determines the timing at which the output is to change (see Fig 6-6).
See Section 7.2 for how to use timer/counter 1.
Fig. 6-7 shows the data to be set in the control register, Fig. 6-8 illustrates the procedure to set the data, and Fig.
6-9 is a flowchart of the interrupt handling routine.
Fig. 6-6 Real-Time Output Port Operation Timing
FFH
CR10
8-bit timer/
counter 1
CR10
CR10
CR10
0H
INTC10
interrupt request
Buffer register
P0L
D02
D01
D01
D03
D02
D02
D04
D03
D01
D00
Output latches
P00-P03
Hi-z
Output latches
P00-P03
D00
D03
Change the contents of the buffer register and compare register by
an INTC10 interrupt.
Transfer the contents of the buffer register to the output latch when the contents
of TM1 coincide with those of CR10.
Timer starts
Turn the output buffer on
Set data to be output next in the buffer register P0L
Set data output first in the output latches of pins P00 to P03
102
Chapter 6 Real-Time Output Function
Fig. 6-7 Contents of the Control Register for the Real-Time Output Function
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
1
RTPC
Uses pins P00 to P03 as real-time output ports
Disables data transfer by INTP0 from the buffer
register to the output latch
Uses pins P04 to P07 as ordinary output ports
Selects a 4-bit separate real-time output port
6
Fig. 6-8 Real-Time Output Function Setting Procedure
Real-time output port
Set an initial value in
the P0 output latch
Set the value to be output next
in the P0L buffer register
Set the real-time output
port control register
Set the 8-bit timer/
counter 1
Timer start
INTC10 interrupt
103
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 6-9 Interrupt Request Handling When the Real-Time Output Function Is Used
Timer interrupt
Set the interval
Set the value to be output next
in the P0L buffer register
Return
6.6 NOTES
(1) When the P0ML or P0MH is set to 1, the output buffer for the corresponding output port is turned on to output
thecontentsoftheport0outputlatch, regardlessofthecontentsoftheport0moderegister(PM0). Therefore,
initialize the contents of the output latch before specifying the real-time output port.
(2) Whenport0isusedasareal-timeoutputport,valuescannotbewrittendirectlytotheoutputlatchbysoftware.
Therefore, the output latch must be set with the initial value by software beforehand, if necessary.
If it is necessary to forcibly change the output data into a constant value when port 0 is used as a real-time
output port, put port 0 in an ordinary output mode by manipulating the RTPC, before writing the desired value
to the output latch.
(3) Even if it is specified that data transfer from the buffer register to the output latch is to occur according to a
signal from the INTP0 pin, data transfer from the buffer register to the output latch occurs when the contents
of timer/counter 1 (TM1) coincide with the contents of the compare register (CR10).
To perform data transfer from the buffer register to the output latch only according to a signal from the INTP0
pin, perform one of the following points. Use of any of these methods does not allow use of the compare
register (CR10) for 8-bit timer/counter 1.
(a) Do not use 8-bit timer/counter 1.
(b) When using the capture/compare register (CR11) for 8-bit timer/counter 1 as the compare register, use the
compare register as an interval timer in a mode in which clearing occurs when the contents of the capture/
compare register (CR11) coincide with the contents of 8-bit timer 1 (TM1).
In this case, however, make sure that the contents of the compare register (CR10) are greater than those
in the CR11 register.
(c) When using the capture/compare register (CR11) for 8-bit timer/counter 1 as the capture register, use the
capture register only when it is guaranteed that the period of the valid edge of a signal input at INTP0 is
sufficiently shorter than the time required for the value in 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) to change from 0 to FEH.
In this case, set the compare register (CR10) to FFH, and clear timer/counter 1 after captured.
(d) If there is no problem, even if data transfer from the buffer register to the output latch is delayed by at least
one clock of 8-bit timer (TM1), and it is guaranteed that TM1 does not overflow, set the following:
• Specify that 8-bit timer/counter 1 is cleared after captured by the INTP0 signal.
• SpecifythattheINTP0signalisnotusedasatriggersignalfordatatransferthroughthereal-timeoutput
port.
• Specify that the compare register (CR10) is reset to 0H.
104
Chapter 6 Real-Time Output Function
(4) With an in-circuit emulator, digital noise cannot be eliminated normally from the INTP0 pin. When it is
specifiedthatdatatransferfromthebufferregistertotheoutputlatchbeperformedaccordingtoasignalfrom
the INTP0 pin, data transfer may occur according to an erroneously detected edge. Keep in mind this
characteristic when using the in-circuit emulator.
See the notes in Chapter 11 for details of erroneous detection of edges.
6
105
106
CHAPTER 7 TIMER/COUNTER UNITS
The µPD78214 contains one 16-bit timer/counter unit (channel) and three 8-bit timer/counter units (channels).
Table 7-1 Timer/Counter Types and Functions
Unit
16-bit timer/
counter
8-bit timer/
counter 1
8-bit timer/
counter 2
8-bit timer/
counter 3
Types and functions
Types
Interval timer
2 ch
—
2 ch
—
2 ch
1 ch
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
External event counter
One-shot timer
Timer output
°
—
—
°
2 ch
—
2 ch
Functions
7
Toggle output
—
°
°
PWM/PPG output
Real-time output
—
°
°
—
—
°
Pulse width measurement
Number of interrupt requests
Serial interface clock source
°
°
°
2
2
2
—
—
—
°
Thesetimer/counterunitscanbeusedasa7-channeltimerbecauseseveninterruptrequestsaresupportedintotal.
107
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-1 Block Diagrams of Timer/Counter Units
16-bit timer/counter unit
fCLK/8
Timer register TM0
Compare register CR00
Compare register CR01
Capture register CR02
OVF
Coinci-
dence
TO0
TO1
Pulse
output
control
Coinci-
dence
INTC00
INTC01
Edge detector
INTP3
INTP3
8-bit timer/counter unit 1
fCLK/16
Timer register TM1
Prescaler
OVF
Coinci-
dence
Compare
register CR10
INTC10
To the real-time
output port
Coinci-
dence
Capture/compare
register CR11
Edge detector
INTP0
INTC11
INTP0
8-bit timer/counter unit 2
fCLK/16
Prescaler
Timer register TM2
OVF
Event input
Coinci-
dence
Edge detector
INTP2/CI
Compare
register CR20
TO2
TO3
INTP2
Pulse
output
control
Coinci-
dence
Compare
register CR21
INTC20
INTC21
Capture
register CR22
Edge detector
INTP1
INTP1
8-bit timer/counter unit 3
Clear
fCLK/8
Timer register TM3
Prescaler
UART
CSI
Coinci-
dence
Compare
register CR30
INTP4/
INTC30
INTP4
ASCK
Edge detector
OVF: Overflow flag
108
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.1 16-BIT TIMER/COUNTER
7.1.1 Functions
The 16-bit timer/counter can function as an interval timer and can also be used for programmable square wave
output and pulse width measurement. In addition to these basic functions, the 16-bit timer/counter can be used
for the following:
• PWM output
• Period measurement
(1) Interval timer
When operating as an interval timer, the 16-bit timer/counter generates an internal interrupt at specified
intervals.
Table 7-2 Intervals of 16-Bit Timer/Counter
7
Minimum interval
Maximum interval
Resolution
16
8/f
2
× 8/f
8/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(1.3 µs)
(87.4 ms)
(1.3 µs)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
(2) Programmable square wave output
The 16-bit timer/counter outputs a square wave separately on the TO0 pin and TO1 pin.
Table 7-3 Programmable Square Wave Output Setting Range of 16-Bit Timer/Counter
Minimum pulse width
Maximum pulse width
16
8/f
2
× 8/f
CLK
CLK
(1.3 µs)
(87.4 ms)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
(3) Pulse width measurement
The 16-bit timer/counter measures the pulse width of a signal applied to the external interrupt pin INTP3.
Table 7-4 Pulse Width Measurement Range of 16-Bit Timer/Counter
Measurable pulse width
Resolution
16
≤2 × 8/f
CLK
8/f
CLK
(≤87.4 ms)
(1.3 µs)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
7.1.2 Configuration
The 16-bit timer/counter consists of one 16-bit timer 0 (TM0), two 16-bit compare registers (CR00, CR01), and one
16-bit capture register (CR02).
Fig. 7-2 shows the block diagram of the 16-bit timer/counter.
109
µPD78214 Sub-Series
110
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(1) 16-bit timer 0 (TM0)
TM0 is a count-up timer using a count clock of f
/8.
CLK
The count operation of TM0 can be enabled or disabled by timer control register 0 (TMC0).
TM0 allows only read operation using a 16-bit manipulation instruction. When the RESET signal is applied,
TM0 is cleared to 0000H, and count operation stops.
(2) Compare registers (CR00, CR01)
The CR00 and CR01 registers are 16-bit registers for holding a value that determines the period of the interval
timer.
When the values of the CR00 and CR01 registers coincide with the value of TM0, interrupt requests (INTC00,
INTC01) and timer output control signals are generated. Count value clear operation can also be performed
when the value of CR01 coincides with the value of TM0.
The compare registers allow both read and write operations using a 16-bit manipulation instruction. When
the RESET signal is applied, the compare registers become undefined.
7
(3) Capture register (CR02)
The CR02 register is a 16-bit register for capturing the value of TM0.
Capture operation is performed on a valid edge (capture trigger) occurring on the external interrupt request
(INTP3) input pin. The value of CR02 register is held until the next capture trigger occurs.
The CR02 register allows only read operation using a 16-bit manipulation instruction. When the RESET signal
is applied, the CR02 register becomes undefined,
(4) Edge detector
The edge detector detects a valid edge of an external input signal.
When the edge detector detects, on the INTP3 input pin, a valid edge specified in external interrupt mode
register 1 (INTM1), INTP3 and a capture trigger are generated. (SeeFig. 11-2 for information about the INTM1
register.)
(5) Output control circuit
When the value of CR00 or CR01 coincides with the value of TM0, timer output can be inverted. By setting
the lower 4 bits of the timer output control register (TOC), a square wave can be output on a timer output pin
(TO0, TO1). At this time, PWM/PPG output is possible, depending on the setting of capture/compare control
register 0 (CRC0).
TimeroutputcanbedisabledorenabledbytheTOCregister. Whentimeroutputisdisabled, theinactivelevel
is output on the TO0 and TO1 pins. (The active level is set using the TOC register.)
7.1.3 16-Bit Timer/Counter Control Registers
(1) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
The TMC0 register is an 8-bit register for controlling the count operation of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0).
The lower 4 bits control the count operation of TM0. (The higher 4 bits control the count operation of 8-bit
timer/counter 3.)
The TMC0 register allows both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-3
shows the format of the TMC0 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the TMC0 register is cleared to 00H.
111
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-3 Format of Timer Control Register 0 (TMC0)
0
0
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
1
0
2
TMC0
CE3
CE0
OVF0
OVF0
0
TM0 overflow flag
Overflow does not occur
Overflow occurs (countiing up from
FFFFH to 0000H)
1
CE0 TM0 counting control
0
1
Clears and stops counting
Enables counting
These bits control counting for 8-bit timer/
counter 3 (see Fig. 7-123).
Remark The OVF0 bit can be reset only by software.
(2) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)
The CRC0 register is used to specify the condition for enabling the clear operation of TM0 to be performed
by a coincidence between the value of the CR01 compare register and the count value of TM0. The CRC0
register is also used to specify a timer output (TO0, TO1) mode.
The CRC0 register allows only write operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-4 shows the
format of the CRC0 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the CRC0 register is cleared to 10H.
Fig. 7-4 Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 0 (CRC0)
7
6
5
0
4
1
3
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC0 MOD1 MOD0
CLR01
Specification of timer
output mode
Clearing TM0 when
TM0 = CR01
MOD1 MOD0 CLR01
TO0
TO1
Toggle
output
Toggle
output
PWM
Toggle
output
Toggle
output
Toggle
output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
output
Not to be set
PWM
output
PWM
output
Disabled
Not to be set
Not to be set
Toggle
Enabled
PPG output
output
112
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(3) Timer output control register (TOC)
The TOC register is an 8-bit register for specifying the active level of timer output and for enabling/disabling
timer output.
Thelower4bitscontrolthetimeroutputoperation(ontheTO0andTO1pins)ofthe16-bittimer/counter. (The
higher 4 bits control the timer output operation (on the TO2 and TO3 pins) of 8-bit timer/counter 2.)
The TOC register allows only write operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-5 shows the
format of the TOC register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the TOC register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-5 Format of Timer Output Control Register (TOC)
1
7
6
4
3
2
5
0
TOC
ENTO3 ALV3
ENTO2
ALV2
ENTO1
ALV1
ENTO0
ALV0
7
Active level for TO0 pin
ALV0
When toggle output
is specified
When PWM/PPG
output is specified
0
1
High level
Low level
Low level
High level
ENTO0 TO0 pin operation specification
Outputs ALV0
0
1
Enables pulse output
Active level for pin TO1
ALV1
When toggle output
is specified
When PWM/PPG
output is specified
High level
Low level
High level
0
1
Low level
ENTO1 TO1 pin operation specification
0
1
Outputs ALV1
Enables pulse output
These bits control timer output operation(output of pins
TO2 and TO3) by the 8-bit timer/counter 2 (see Fig. 7-70).
113
µPD78214 Sub-Series
7.1.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer 0 (TM0)
(1) Basic operation
The 16-bit timer/counter performs count operation by counting up with a count clock of f /8.
CLK
When the RESET signal is applied, TM0 is cleared to 0000H, and count operation stops.
Bit 3 (CE0) of timer control register 0 (TMC0) is used to enable/disable count operation. When the CE0 bit is
reset to 1 by software, TM0 is cleared to 0000H by the first count clock pulse, then count-up operation starts.
When the CE0 bit is reset to 0, TM0 is cleared to 0000H by the next count clock pulse, then capture operation
and coincide with signal generation stop.
If the CE0 bit is set to 1 when the CE0 bit is already set to 1, TM0 is not cleared, but continues count operation.
If the count clock is applied when the value of TM0 is FFFFH, TM0 is set to 0000H. At this time, OVF0 is set
to send the overflow signal to the output control circuit. OVF0 can be cleared only by software. Count
operation continues.
Fig. 7-6 Basic Operation of 16-Bit Timer 0 (TM0)
(a) Count start → count stop → count start
Count clock
fCLK/8
0H
101H
0H
1H
FFH
100H
TM0
CE0
1H
2H
0H
0H
Count starts
Count starts
CE0←1
Count stops
CE0←0
CE0←1
(b) When the CE0 bit is set to 1 again after count operation starts
Count clock
fCLK/8
TM0 0H
0H
1H
2H
3H
4H
5H
6H
CE0
Count starts
Rewriting
CE0←1
CE0←1
114
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(c) When the value of TM0 is FFFFH
Count clock
fCLK/8
FFFEH
0H 1H
FFFFH
TM0
OVF0
Cleared by software
OVF0←0
7
(2) Clear operation
After a coincidence with the CR01 compare register, 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) can be automatically cleared. If a
TM0 clear cause occurs, TM0 is cleared to 0000H by the next count clock pulse. This means that even if a TM0
clear cause occurs, TM0 holds the value existing at that time until the next count clock pulse is applied.
Fig. 7-7 TM0 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR01)
Count clock
n-1
n
0
1
TM0
Compare register
(CR01)
n
Cleared here
Coincidence between
TM0 and CR01
TM0 can also be cleared by software when the CE0 bit of the timer control register (TMC0) is reset to 0.
Similarly, clear operation is performed by the count clock pulse following the resetting of CE0 bit to 0. If the
CE0 bit is set to 1 before TM0 is reset to 0 by the resetting of the CE0 bit to 0 (that is, before the first count clock
pulse is applied after the CE0 bit is reset to 0), two operations are simultaneously performed: one operation
is an operation to clear TM0 to 0, and the other operation is a count operation starting with the counting of
0.
115
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-8 Clear Operation When the CE0 Bit Is Reset to 0
(a) Basic operation
Count clock
n-1
n
0
TM0
CE0
(b) Restart after 0 is set in TM0 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
1
0
0
TM0
CE0
When the CE0 bit is set to 1 after this count clock,
counting starts from 0 on the count clock input
after the CE0 bit has been set.
(c) Restart before 0 is set in TM0 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
0
1
2
TM0
CE0
When the CE0 bit is set to 1 before this count clock, Clearing
TM0 by CE0←0 and counting by CE0←1 are performed simultaneously.
116
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.1.5 Compare Register and Capture Register Operations
(1) Compare operation
The 16-bit timer/counter performs an operation to compare the values set in the compare registers with timer
count values.
When the values set in the compare registers (CR00, CR01) coincide with count values of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0),
the coincidence signal is sent to the output control circuit. At the same time, the interrupt requests (INTC00,
INTC01) are generated.
AfterthevalueoftheCR01registercoincideswithacountvalueofTM0, thecountvalueofTM0canbecleared.
Thus, the 16-bit timer/counter can operate as an interval timer for repeatedly counting up to the value set in
the CR01 register.
Caution Before the 16-bit timer/counter can perform a compare operation, a value must be loaded into the compare register or
registers used.
7
Fig. 7-9 Compare Operation
FFFFH
FFFFH
TM0
Value of CR01
Coincidence
Value of CR01
count value
Value of CR00
Coincidence
Value of CR00
Coincidence
0H
Count starts
CE0←1
Coincidence
INTC00
interrupt request
INTC01
interrupt request
OVF0
Cleared by software
Remark CLR01 = 0
117
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-10 TM0 Cleared After a Coincidence Is Detected
CR01
CR01
CR00
CR00
TM0
count value
0H
Count starts
CE0←1
Cleared
Cleared
INTC00
interrupt request
INTC01
interrupt request
Remark CLR01 = 1
(2) Capture operation
The 16-bit timer/counter performs a capture operation to load the count value of the timer into the capture
register in synchronism with an external trigger.
Asanexternaltrigger,avalidedgedetectedontheexternalinterruptrequest(INTP3)inputpinisused(capture
trigger). In synchronism with a capture trigger, the count value of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) in count operation is
loaded and held in the CR02 capture register. Until the next capture trigger occurs, the value of the CR02
register is held.
A valid edge used as a capture trigger is set using external interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1). When both a
rising edge and falling edge are set as capture triggers, the pulse width of an applied external signal can be
measured. When a capture trigger is generated using one edge, the period of an input pulse signal can be
measured.
For the detailed format of the INTM1 register, see Fig. 11-2 in Chapter 11.
118
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-11 Capture Operation
FFFFH
TM0
count value
D1
D0
D2
0H
7
Count starts
CE0←1
INTP3
pin input
INTP3
interrupt request
Capture
register
(CR02)
D0
D1
D2
OVF0
Remark Dn: TM0 count value (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
CLR01 = 0
Caution With an in-circuit emulator, digital noise on the INTP3 pin cannot be removed correctly. When the capture function is used, the
operation described below is performed if an edge is detected erroneously.
•
When IE-78210-R is used
Capture operation is performed on an erroneously detected edge. At this time, an interrupt request is also generated on the edge.
When other in-circuit emulators are used
•
Capture operation is not performed on an erroneously detected edge. However, an interrupt request is generated on the edge.
Accordingly, the capture value must be used after checking by software to see if the INTP3 interrupt was generated normally or
generated on an erroneously detected edge. For detailed information about erroneous edge detection, see Section 11.4.
7.1.6 Basic Operation of Output Control Circuit
The output control circuit controls the levels of the timer outputs (TO0, TO1) according to the overflow signal or
the coincidence signal from the compare registers. The operation of the output control circuit is determined by
the timer output control register (TOC) and capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0). (See Table 7-5.)
Before a timer output (TO0 or TO1) signal can be output on a pin, the pin must be placed in the control mode by
the PMC3 register.
119
µPD78214 Sub-Series
120
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(1) Basic operation
By setting ENTOn (n = 0, 1) of the timer output control register (TOC) to 1, the timer outputs (TO1, TO0) can
be changed with the timing determined by MOD0, MOD1, and CLR01 of capture/compare control register 0
(CRC0).
In addition, by clearing ENTOn (n = 0, 1) to 0, the levels of the timer outputs (TO1, TO0) can be tied. The level
where an output is tied is determined by ALVn (n = 0, 1) of the timer output control register (TOC). When ALVn
(n = 0, 1) is 0, the output is tied high; when ALVn (n = 0, 1) is 1, the output is tied low.
(2) Toggle output
Toggle output is an operation mode where the level of output is inverted each time the value of a compare
register(CR00, CR01)coincideswiththevalueof16-bittimer0(TM0). TheoutputlevelofTO0isinvertedwhen
the value of CR00 coincides with the value of TM0. The output level of TO1 is inverted when the value of CR01
coincides with the value of TM0.
Fig. 7-12 Toggle Output Operation
7
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
TM0
count value
Value of CR01
Value of CR00
Value of CR01
Value of CR00
Value of CR01
Value of CR00
Value of CR01
Value of CR00
0H
ENTO0
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Output of TO0
(ALV0 = 1)
ENTO1
Instruction execution
Output of TO1
(ALV1 = 0)
Table 7-6 TO0 and TO1 Toggle Output (f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
Count clock
/8
Minimum pulse width
Maximum interval
87.4 ms
f
1.3 µs
CLK
121
µPD78214 Sub-Series
7.1.7 PWM Output
The PWM output function outputs a PWM signal whose period coincides with the full-count period of 16-bit timer
0 (TM0). The pulse width of TO0 is determined by the value of CR00, and the pulse width of TO1 is determined
by the value of CR01. Before this function can be used, the CLR01 bit of capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)
must be set to 0.
The pulse period and pulse width are as follows:
• PWM period = 524288/f
CLK
Note
• PWM pulse width = (value set in compare register
) × 8 + 2/f
(value set in compare register) × 8/f
CLK
CLK
Note Zero cannot be set in the compare registers.
• Duty factor = (PWM pulse width)/(PWM period) = ((value set in compare register) × 8 + 2)/(65536 × 8) (value
set in compare register)/65536
Caution In PWM output, the actual pulse width is longer than a value obtained with the approximate expression by two clock pulses of f
CLK
for the active level, and is shorter than such an approximate value by two clock pulses of f
into consideration when high-precision output is required.
for the inactive level. Take this point
CLK
Fig. 7-13 PWM Pulse Output
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
CR00
CR00
CR00
Count value of timer
0H
Count starts
Interrupt
TO0
Pulse width
Pulse period
Pulse width
Pulse period
Remark ALV0 = 0
Table 7-7 PWM Output on TO0 and TO1 (f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
PWM frequency
11.4 Hz
Count clock
/8
Minimum pulse width
PWM period
87.4 ms
f
1.3 µs
CLK
Fig. 7-14 shows an example of 2-channel PWM output. Fig. 7-15 shows PWM output when FFFFH is set in the CR00
compare register.
122
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-14 Example of PWM Output Using TM0
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
CR01
CR01
CR00
TM0
count value
CR00
CR00
0H
INTC00
INTC01
TO0
7
TO1
Remark ALV0 = 0, ALV1 = 0
Fig. 7-15 PWM Output When CR00 = FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
Count clock period T
2
2
TM0
count value
1
1
0
0
0
INTO00
OVF flag
TO0
Pulse width
T
65535
65536
Duty factor =
× 100 = 99.998(%)
Pulse period = 65536T
Remark ALV0 = 0
123
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Even if the value of a compare register (CR00, CR01) coincides with the value of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) more than
once during one period of PWM output, the output levels on the timer outputs (TO0, TO1) do not change.
Fig. 7-16 Example of Rewriting Compare Register CR00
FFFFH
FFFFH
T2
T2
TM0
count value
T1
T1
T1
0H
CR00
T1
T2
TO0
Rewriting
CR00
TO0 does not change though CR00 coincides with TM0
Cautions 1. If a value less than the value of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) is set in a compare register (CR00, CR01), a PWM signal with a 100% duty
factor is output. Rewrite the CR00 or CR01 compare register, if required, by using an interrupt generated by a coincidence
between TM0 and the compare register.
Fig. 7-17 Example of PWM Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
n1
n1
n3
TM0
count value
n2
n2
n2
0H
n1
n2
CR00
TO0
When a value, n2 less than TM0 value, n3 is written to CR00
here, the duty factor is 100% during this period.
Remark ALV0 = 0
124
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
2. If timer output is disabled (ENTOn = 0: n = 0, 1), the output level on the TOn (n = 0, 1) pin is the inverted value of the value set
in ALVn (n = 0, 1). Accordingly, note that if timer output is disabled when the PWM output function is selected, the active level
is output.
7.1.8 PPG Output
The PPG output function outputs a square wave that has a period determined by the CR01 compare register, and
has a pulse width determined by the CR00 compare register. PPG output is PWM output whose period is made
variable. This output signal can be output on the TO0 pin only.
Before this function can be used, the CLR01 bit of capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0) must be set to 1.
The pulse period and pulse width are as follows:
• PPG period = ((value set in CR01 compare register) + 1) × 8/f
CLK
• PPG pulse width = ((value set in CR00 compare register) × 8 + 2)/f
(value set in CR00) × 8/f
CLK
CLK
where, CR00 ≤ CR01
7
• Duty factor = (PPG pulse width)/(PPG period) = ((value set in CR00) × 8 + 2)/(((value set in CR01) + 1) × 8) (value
set in CR00)/((value set in CR01) + 1)
Caution In PPG output, the actual pulse width is longer than a value obtained with the approximate expression by two clock pulses of f
CLK
for the active level, and is shorter than such an approximate value by two clock pulses of f
for the inactive level. Take this point
CLK
into consideration when high-precision output is required or the PPG pulse period is short.
Fig. 7-18 shows an example of PPG output using 16-bit timer 0. Fig. 7-19 shows an example of PPG output when
CR00 = CR01. Fig. 7-20 shows an example of PPG output when CR00 = 0000H.
Fig. 7-18 Example of PPG Output Using TM0
CR01
CR01
CR01
TM0
count value
CR00
CR00
CR00
Count starts
0H
INTC00
T
INTC01
TO0
(PPG output)
Pulse
width
TO1
(timer output)
Pulse period
Remark ALV0 = 0, ALV1 = 0
Table 7-8 PPG Output on TO0 (f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
Note
PPG frequency
385 kHz-11.4 Hz
Count clock
/8
Minimum pulse width
PPG period
f
1.3 µs
2.6 µs -87.4 ms
CLK
Note The case where CR00 = 0 is excluded.
125
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-19 PPG Output When CR00 = CR01
n
n
n
n-1
n-1
Count period T
TM0
count value
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
INTC00
INTC01
TO0
Pulse width = nT
Pulse period = (n + 1)T
Fig. 7-20 PPG Output When CR00 = 0000H
n
n
n
T
1
TM0
count value
2
0
INTC00
INTC01
TO0
Pulse period = (n + 1)T
Pulse width
= 2/fCLK
Remark ALV0 = 0
126
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Even if the value of the CR00 compare register coincides with the value of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) more than once
during one period of PPG output, the output levels on the timer outputs (TO0, TO1) are not inverted.
Fig. 7-21 Example of Rewriting Compare Register CR00
CR01
CR01
T2
T2
TM0
count value
T1
T1
0H
7
CR00
T1
T2
TO0
Rewriting
CR00
TO0 does not change though CR00 coincides with TM0
Remark ALV0 = 1
Cautions 1. If a value less than the value of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) is written into the CR00 compare register before the value of CR00 coincides
with the value of TM0, a PPG signal with a 100% duty factor is output in that period. Rewrite CR00, if required, by using an
interrupt generated by a coincidence between TM0 and CR00.
Fig. 7-22 Example of PPG Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor
CR01
CR01
CR01
CR01
n1
n1
n3
TM0
count value
n2
n2
n2
0H
n1
n2
CR00
TO0
When a value, n2 less than TM0 value, n3 is written to CR00
here, the duty factor is 100% during this period.
Remark ALV0 = 0
127
µPD78214 Sub-Series
2. If the current value of the CR01 compare register is decreased below the value of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0), the PPG period becomes
as long as the full-count time of TM0. At this time, if CR01 is rewritten after the value of the CR00 compare register coincides
with the value of TM0, the inactive level is output until TM0 overflows to 0, then normal PPG output is resumed. If CR01 is
rewritten before the value of CR00 coincides with the value of TM0, the active level is output until the value of CR00 coincides
with the value of TM0. When the value of CR00 coincides with the value of TM0 before TM0 overflows to 0, the inactive level
is output at that time. When TM0 overflows to 0, the active level is output, and normal PPG output is resumed. Rewrite CR01,
if required, by using an interrupt generated by a coincidence between TM0 and CR01.
Fig. 7-23 Example of PPG Output Period Made Longer
Full count value
n1
n1
n1
n3
n3
n5
n2
n2
TM0
n4
0H
n4
n3
n1
CR00
CR01
TO0
n2
TO0 becomes inactive when CR00 coincides with TM0;
otherwise, TO0 remains active.
The PPG period is extended when a value,
n2 less than TM0 value, n5 is written to
CR01 here.
Remark ALV0 = 1
3. If the PPG period is too short for interrupt acceptance, the measures described in Cautions 1 and 2 above do not lead to solution.
Consider other measures (such as masking all interrupts and polling interrupt request flags by software).
4. If timer output is disabled (ENTOn = 0: n = 0, 1), the output level on the TOn (n = 0, 1) pin is the inverted value of the value set
in ALVn (n = 0, 1). Accordingly, note that if timer output is disabled when the PPG output function is selected, the active level
is output.
128
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.1.9 Sample Applications
(1) Interval timer operation (1)
By free running 16-bit timer 0 (TM0), and adding a value to a compare register (CR00, CR01) in an interrupt
handlingroutine,the16-bittimer/countercanbeusedasanintervaltimerwhoseperiodisaslongastheadded
value. (See Fig. 7-24.)
This interval timer has a resolution of 1.3 µs, and can count up to 87.4 ms (at internal system clock f
= 6
CLK
MHz).
In addition, 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) has two compare registers, so that interval timers with two types of periods
can be produced.
Fig. 7-25 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-26 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-27 shows
interrupt handling.
Fig. 7-24 Timing of Interval Timer Operation (1)
7
FFFFH
FFFFH
MOD(3n)
n
TM0
count value
MOD(2n)
0H
Timer starts
Compare register
(CR00)
n
MOD(2n)
MOD(3n)
MOD(4n)
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
INTC00
interrupt request
Interval
Interval
Interval
Remark Interval = n × 8/f
, 1 ≤ n ≤ FFFFH
CLK
129
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-25 Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (1)
(a) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
#
4
0
3
1
0
0
7
6
0
5
0
2
0
1
0
×
TMC0
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM0
(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC0
Disables clearing TM0
Both TO0 and TO1 are used for
toggle output
Fig. 7-26 Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (1)
Interval
timer (1)
Set count value in CR00 register
CR00←n
Set CRC0 register
CRC0←10H
Start counting
CR0←1
; Sets bit 3 of TMC0 to 1
INTC00 interrupt
130
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-27 Interrupt Request Handling for Interval Timer Operation (1)
INTC00 interrupt
Calculation of timer value at
which next interrupt is to occur
CR00←CR00 + n
Other interrupt program
RETI
7
(2) Interval timer operation (2)
The 16-bit timer/counter can be used as an interval timer that generates an interrupt at intervals of a count
time specified beforehand. (See Fig. 7-28.)
This interval timer has a resolution of 1.3 µs, and can count up from 1.3 µs to 87.4 ms (at internal system clock
f
= 6 MHz).
CLK
Fig. 7-29 shows the setting of control registers, and Fig. 7-30 shows the setting procedure.
Fig. 7-28 Timing of Interval Timer Operation (2)
n
n
TM0
count value
0H
Cleared
n
Cleared
Count starts
Compare register
(CR01)
INTC01
interrupt request
Interrupt accepted
Interval
Interrupt accepted
Interval
Remark Interval = (n + 1) × 8/f , 0 ≤ n ≤ FFFFH
CLK
131
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-29 Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (2)
(a) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
#
7
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
×
0
0
1
TMC0
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM0
(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC0
Clears TM0 when CR01 coincides
with TM0
Both TO0 and TO1 are used for
toggle output
Fig. 7-30 Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (2)
Interval timer (2)
Set count value in CR01 register
CR01←n
Set CRC1 register
CRC0←18H
Start counting
CE0←1
; Sets bit 3 of TMC0 to 1
INTC01 interrupt
(3) Pulse width measurement operation
In pulse width measurement, the width of the high level or low level of an external pulse signal applied to the
external interrupt request (INTP3) input pin is measured.
A pulse signal applied to the INTP3 pin must have a pulse width of 12 system clock pulses (2 µs: f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
or more for both the high level and the low level. If the pulse width is less than this value, no valid edge can
be detected, thus resulting in a failure to perform capture operation.
This pulse width measurement allows a pulse width of 2.6 µs to 87.4 ms to be measured with a resolution of
1.3 µs (at f
= 6 MHz).
CLK
As shown in Fig. 7-31, the value of 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) in count operation is loaded and held in the CR02
capture register on a valid edge (either a rising edge or falling edge) of a signal applied to the INTP3 pin. The
pulse width of the input signal is found by multiplying the count clock (8/f
) by the difference between the
CLK
TM0 count value (D ) loaded and held in the CR02 register on the n-th valid edge detected and the TM0 count
n
value (D ) loaded and held in the CR02 register on the (n – 1)-th valid edge detected.
n-1
Fig. 7-32 shows the setting of control registers, and Fig. 7-33 shows the setting procedure.
132
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-31 Timing of Pulse Width Measurement
FFFFH
FFFFH
TM0
count value
D1
D3
D2
D0
0H
Captured
Captured
Captured
Captured
7
Count starts
CE0¨ 1
INTP3
external input signal
(10000H – D1
+ D2) × 8/fCLK
(D1 – D0) × 8/fCLK
(D3 – D2) × 8/fCLK
INTP3
interrupt request
CR02
OVF0
D0
D1
D2
D3
Cleared by software
Remark D : TM0 count value (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
n
Fig. 7-32 Setting of Control Registers for Pulse Width Measurement
(a) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
#
7
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
0
×
0
1
TMC0
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM0
(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC0
Disables clearing TM0
Both TO0 and TO1 are used for
toggle output
133
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) External interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1)
7
6
0
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
1
0
×
×
×
×
INTM1
Specifies valid edge of INTP3 input
to be rising and falling edges
: Don't care
×
Fig. 7-33 Setting Procedure for Pulse Width Measurement
Pulse width
measurement
Set CRC0 register
CRC0←10H
; Specifies valid edge of
Set INTM1 register and
MK0L register
INTP3 input to be both
edges and unmasks interrupt
Initialize buffer memory for capture value
X0←0
Start counting
; Sets bit 3 of TMC0 to 1
CE0←1
Enable interrupt
INTP3 interrupt
Fig. 7-34 Interrupt Request Handling for Pulse Width Calculation
INTP3 interrupt
Calculation of pulse width
Yn = CR02 – Xn
Store captured value in memory
Xn+1←CR02
RETI
134
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(4) PWM output operation
In PWM output operation, a pulse signal with a duty factor determined by the value set in a compare register
is output. (See Fig. 7-35.)
The duty factor of a PWM output signal can be changed in steps of 1/65536 from 1/65536 to 65535/65536.
In addition, 16-bit timer 0 (TM0) has two compare registers, so that two types of PWM signals can be output.
Fig. 7-36 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-37 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-38 shows the
procedure for changing the duty factor of PWM output.
Fig. 7-35 Example of PWM Signal Output by 16-Bit Timer/Counter
FFFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
TM0
count value
CR00
CR00
CR00
7
0H
Timer starts
TO0
(active low)
Fig. 7-36 Setting of Control Registers for PWM Output Operation
(a) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
#
7
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
0
×
0
1
TMC0
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM0
(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)
7
1
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC0
Disables clearing TM0
Both TO0 and TO1 are used for
PWM output
(c) Timer output control register (TOC)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
TOC
TO0 for low-active PWM signal output
Enables PWM output for TO0
(d) Port 3 mode control register (PMC3)
7
6
5
4
1
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
PMC3
Specifies P34 pin as TO0
output
135
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-37 Setting Procedure for PWM Output
PWM output
Set CRC0 register
CRC0←90H
Set TOC register
Set P34 pin in control mode
PMC3.4←1
Set initial value in compare
register
Start counting
; Sets bit 3 of TMC0
CE0←1
Fig. 7-38 Changing Duty Factor of PWM Output
Preprocessing for
changing duty factor
Clear INTC00 interrupt request
; Clears bit 4 of IF0L
flag
CIF00←0
Enable INTC00 interrupt
; Clears bit 4 of MK0L
CMK00←0
INTC00 interrupt
Duty factor changing
processing
Set duty factor in CR00
Disable INTC00 interrupt
; Sets bit 4 of MK0L
CMK00←1
RETI
136
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(5) PPG output operation
In PPG output operation, a pulse signal with a period and duty factor determined by the values set in the
compare registers is output. (See Fig. 7-39.)
Fig. 7-40 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-41 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-42 shows the
procedure for changing the duty factor of PPG output.
Fig. 7-39 Example of PPG Signal Output by 16-Bit Timer/Counter
CR01
CR01
CR01
TM2
count value
CR00
CR00
CR00
0H
7
Timer starts
TO0
(active low)
Fig. 7-40 Setting of Control Registers for PPG Output Operation
(a) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
#
7
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
0
×
0
1
TMC0
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM0
(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)
7
1
6
1
5
0
4
1
3
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC0
Clears when TM0 coincides
with CR01
TO0 is used for PPG output
(c) Timer output control register (TOC)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
TOC
TO0 for low-active PPG signal output
Enables PPG output for TO0
(d) Port 3 mode control register (PMC3)
7
6
5
4
1
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
PMC3
Specifies P34 pin as TO0
output
137
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-41 Setting Procedure for PPG Output
PPG output
Set CRC0 register
CRC0←D8H
Set TOC register
Set P34 pin in control mode
PMC3.4←1
Set period in compare
register CR01
Set duty factor in compare
register CR00
Start counting
; Sets bit 3 of TMC0
CE0←1
Fig. 7-42 Changing Duty Factor of PPG Output
Preprocessing for
changing duty factor
Clear INTC00 interrupt request
; Clears bit 4 of IF0L
flag
CIF00←0
Enable INTC00 interrupt
; Clears bit 4 of MK0L
CMK00←0
INTC00 interrupt
Duty factor changing
processing
Set duty factor in CR00
Disable INTC00 interrupt
; Sets bit 4 of MK0L
CMK00←1
RETI
138
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.2 8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 1
7.2.1 Functions
Eight-bit timer/counter 1 can function as an interval timer and can also be used for pulse width measurement. In
addition to these basic functions, 8-bit timer/counter 1 can be used as a timer for generating an output trigger on
a real-time output port.
(1) Interval timer
Whenoperatingasanintervaltimer,8-bittimer/counter1generatesaninternalinterruptatspecifiedintervals.
Table 7-9 Intervals of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 1
Resolution
Minimum interval
Maximum interval
8
16/f
16/f
2
2
2
× 16/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
7
(2.6 µs)
(2.6 µs)
(683 µs)
8
32/f
32/f
× 32/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(5.3 µs)
(5.3 µs)
(1.37 ms)
8
64/f
64/f
× 64/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(10.7 µs)
(10.7 µs)
(2.73 ms)
8
128/f
128/f
2
× 128/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(21.3 µs)
(21.3 µs)
(5.46 ms)
8
256/f
256/f
2
2
× 256/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(42.7 µs)
(42.7 µs)
(10.9 ms)
8
512/f
512/f
× 512/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(85.3 µs)
(85.3 µs)
(21.8 ms)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
(2) Pulse width measurement
Eight-bit timer/counter 1 measures the pulse width of a signal applied to the external interrupt request input
pin INTP0.
Table 7-10 Pulse Width Measurement Range of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 1
Measurable pulse width
Resolution
8
≤2 × 16/f
CLK
16/f
CLK
(683 µs)
(2.6 µs)
8
≤2 × 32/f
CLK
32/f
CLK
(1.37 ms)
(5.3 µs)
8
≤2 × 64/f
CLK
64/f
CLK
(2.73 µs)
(10.7 µs)
8
≤2 × 128/f
CLK
128/f
CLK
(5.46 ms)
(21.3 µs)
8
≤2 × 256/f
CLK
256/f
CLK
(10.9 ms)
(42.7 µs)
8
≤2 × 512/f
CLK
512/f
CLK
(21.8 ms)
(85.3 µs)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
139
µPD78214 Sub-Series
7.2.2 Configuration
Eight-bit timer/counter 1 consists of one 8-bit timer 1 (TM1), one 8-bit compare register (CR10), and one 8-bit
capture/compare register (CR11).
Fig. 7-43 shows the block diagram of 8-bit timer/counter 1.
140
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7
141
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(1) 8-bit timer 1 (TM1)
TM1 is a timer for counting up with the count clock specified by the lower 4 bits of prescaler mode register
1 (PRM1).
The count operation of TM1 can be enabled or disabled by timer control register 1 (TMC1).
TM1 allows only read operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. When the RESET signal is applied,
TM1 is cleared to 00H, and count operation stops.
(2) Compare register (CR10)
TheCR10registerisan8-bitregisterforholdingavaluethatdeterminestheperiodofintervaltimeroperation.
When the value of the CR10 register coincides with the value of TM1, an interrupt request (INTC10) is
generated. This coincide with signal functions also as a real-time output port trigger signal. Count value clear
operation can also be performed when the value of CR10 coincides with the value of TM1.
The compare register allows both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. When
the RESET signal is applied, the compare register becomes undefined.
(3) Capture/compare register (CR11)
TheCR11registerisan8-bitregisterthatcanbesetbycapture/comparecontrolregister1(CRC1)asacompare
register used to detect a coincidence with the count value of TM1 or as a capture register used to capture the
count value of TM1.
(a) When CR11 is set as a compare register
The CR11 register functions as an 8-bit register for holding a value that determines the period of interval
timer operation.
When the value of the CR11 register coincides with the value of TM1, an interrupt request (INTC11) is
generated.
In addition, this coincide with signal functions also as a real-time output port trigger signal. Count value
clear operation can also be performed when the value of CR11 coincides with the value of TM1.
(b) When CR11 is set as a compare register
The CR11 register functions as an 8-bit register that captures the value of TM1 on a valid edge (capture
trigger) appearing on the external interrupt request (INTP0) input pin.
The value of the CR11 register is held until the next capture trigger occurs. After capture operation, TM1
can be cleared.
The CR11 register allows both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. When
the RESET signal is applied, the CR11 register becomes undefined.
(4) Edge detector
The edge detector detects a valid edge of an external input signal.
When the edge detector detects, on the INTP0 input pin, a valid edge specified in external interrupt mode
register 0 (INTM0), INTP0 and a capture trigger are generated. (SeeFig. 11-1 for information about the INTM0
register.)
(5) Prescaler
The prescaler generates count clocks from the internal system clock. From these count clocks generated by
the prescaler, a count clock is selected with the selector for the timer to perform count operation.
142
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.2.3 8-Bit Timer/Counter 1 Control Registers
(1) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
The TMC1 register is an 8-bit register for controlling the count operations of 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) and 8-bit timer
2 (TM2).
Thelower4bitscontrolthecountoperationofTM1of8-bittimer/counter1. (Thehigher4bitscontrolthecount
operation of TM2 of 8-bit timer/counter 2.)
The TMC1 register allows both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-44
shows the format of the TMC1 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the TMC1 register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-44 Format of Timer Control Register 1 (TMC1)
0
0
7
6
5
4
0
3
1
0
2
7
TMC1
CE2 OVF2 CMD2
CE1
OVF1
OVF1
0
TM1 overflow flag
Overflow does not occur
Overflow occurs
(countiing up from FFH to 00H)
1
CE1 TM1 counting control
0
1
Clears and stops counting
Enables counting
These bits control counting for 8-bit timer/
counter 2 (TM2) (see Fig. 7-67).
Remark The OVF1 bit can be reset only by software.
(2) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
The PRM1 register is an 8-bit register used to specify a count clock for 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) and 8-bit timer 2
(TM2).
The lower 4 bits are used to specify a count clock for TM1 of 8-bit timer/counter 1. (The higher 4 bits are used
to specify a count clock for TM2 of 8-bit timer/counter 2.)
The PRM1 register allows only write operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-45 shows the
format of the PRM1 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the PRM1 register is cleared to 00H.
143
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-45 Format of Prescaler Mode Register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
PRM1 PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
PRS12 PRS11 PRS10
fCLK = 6 MHz
PRS12 PRS11 PRS10
Specification of count clock [Hz]
Resolution
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
fCLK/16
2.6 µs
5.3 µs
fCLK/32
fCLK/64
10.7 µs
21.3 µs
fCLK/128
fCLK/256
fCLK/512
42.7 µs
85.3 µs
These bits specify the count clock supplied to
8-bit timer/counter 2 (TM2) (see Fig. 7-68).
Remark f
: System clock frequency
CLK
(3) Capture/compare control register 1 (CRC1)
The CRC1 register is used to specify the operation of the CR11 capture/compare register and the condition for
enabling the clear operation of 8-bit timer 1 (TM1).
The CRC1 register allows only write operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-46 shows the
format of the CRC1 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the CRC1 register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-46 Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 1 (CRC1)
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
CRC1
0
CLR11 CM CLR10
CLR10
Clearing TM1 when TM1 coincides with CR10
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
Operation speci-
Clearing TM1
CLR11
CM fication of the
CR11 register
Disabled
0
0
1
Compare
Enabled (when contents
register
0
1
1
of TM1 register coincides
with those of CR11 register)
Disabled
0
1
Capture
register
Enabled (when contents
of TM1 register is captured
to the CR11 register)
144
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.2.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timer 1 (TM1)
(1) Basic operation
Eight-bit timer/counter 1 performs count operation by counting up with the count clock specified by the lower
4 bits of prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1).
When the RESET signal is applied, TM1 is cleared to 00H, and count operation stops.
Bit 3 (CE1) of timer control register 1 (TMC1) is used to enable/disable count operation. (The lower 4 bits of
the TMC1 register are used to control the operation of 8-bit timer/counter 1.) When the CE1 bit is set to 1 by
software, TM1 is cleared to 00H by the first count clock pulse, then count-up operation starts.
When the CE1 bit is reset to 0, TM1 is cleared to 00H by the next count clock pulse, then capture operation and
coincide with signal generation stop.
If the CE1 bit is set to 1 when the CE1 bit is already set to 1, TM1 is not cleared, but continues count operation.
If the count clock signal is applied when the value of TM1 is FFH, TM1 is set to 00H. At this time, OVF1 is set.
OVF1 can be cleared only by software. Count operation continues.
7
Fig. 7-47 Basic Operation of 8-Bit Timer 1 (TM1)
(a) Count start → count stop → count start
Count clock
0H
0H
1H
0FH
10H
11H
TM1
CE1
1H
2H
0H
0H
Count starts
Count starts
CE1←1
Count stops
CE1←0
CE1←1
(b) When the CE1 bit is set to 1 again after count operation starts
Count clock
0H
0H
1H
2H
3H
4H
5H
6H
TM1
CE1
Count starts
Rewriting
CE1←1
CE1←1
145
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) When the value of TM1 is FFH
Count clock
TM1 FEH FFH 0H
1H
OVF1
Cleared by software
OVF1←0
(2) Clear operation
After a coincidence with a compare register (CR1m: m = 0, 1) or capture operation, 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) can be
automatically cleared. If a TM1 clear cause occurs, TM1 is cleared to 00H by the next count clock pulse. This
means that even if a TM1 clear cause occurs, TM1 holds the value existing at that time until the next count
clock pulse is applied.
Fig. 7-48 TM1 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR1m)
Count clock
n-1
n
0
1
TM1
Compare register
(CR1m)
n
(m=0,1)
Cleared here
Coincidence between
TM1 and CR1m
146
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-49 TM1 Cleared after Capture Operation
Count clock
TM1
n
1
n-1
0
2
INTP0
TM1 is captured
to CR11 here
7
Cleared here
TM1 can also be cleared by software when the CE1 bit of the timer control register (TMC1) is reset to 0.
Similarly, clear operation is performed by the count clock pulse following the resetting of CE1 bit to 0. If the
CE1 bit is set to 1 before TM1 is reset to 0 by the resetting of the CE1 bit to 0 (that is, before the first count clock
pulse is applied after the CE1 bit is reset to 0), two operations are simultaneously performed: one operation
is an operation to clear TM1 to 0, and the other operation is a count operation starting with the counting of
0.
Fig. 7-50 Clear Operation When the CE1 Bit Is Reset to 0
(a) Basic operation
Count clock
n-1
n
0
TM1
CE1
147
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(b) Restart after 0 is set in TM1 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
1
0
0
TM1
CE1
When the CE1 bit is set to 1 aftr this count clock,
counting starts from 0 on the count clock input
after the CE1 bit has been set.
(c) Restart before 0 is set in TM1 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
0
1
2
TM1
CE1
When the CE1 bit is set to 1 before this count clock, Clearing
TM1 by CE1←0 and counting by CE1←1 are performed simultaneously.
7.2.5 Compare Register and Capture/Compare Register Operations
(1) Compare operation
Eight-bit timer/counter 1 performs an operation to compare the values set in the compare registers with timer
count values.
When the value set in the compare register (CR10) and the value set in the capture/compare register (CR11)
specifiedtoperformcompareoperationcoincidewithcountvaluesof8-bittimer1(TM1),theinterruptrequest
signals (INTC10 for the CR10 register and INTC11 for the CR11 register) are generated.
After the value of the CR10 register or CR11 register coincides with a count value of TM1, the count value of
TM1 can be cleared. Thus, 8-bit timer/counter 1 can operate as an interval timer for repeatedly counting up
to the value set in the CR10 register or CR11 register.
148
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-51 Compare Operation
FFH
TM1
count value
Value of CR10
Value of CR11
Coincidence
0H
Coincidence
Count starts
CE1←1
INTC10
interrupt request
INTC11
interrupt request
7
OVF1
Remark CLR10 = 0, CLR11 = 0, CM = 0
Caution When using an in-circuit emulator, see the notes described in Section 7.5.4.
Fig. 7-52 TM1 Cleared After a Coincidence Is Detected
CR11
CR10
CR10
CR10
TM1
count value
0H
Count starts
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Count starts
CE1←1
CLR10←0
CLR11←1
CE1←0
CLR10←1
CLR11←0
Count stops
CE1←0
INTC10
interrupt request
INTC11
interrupt request
(2) Capture operation
Eight-bit timer/counter 1 performs a capture operation to load the count value of the timer into the capture
register in synchronism with an external trigger.
Asanexternaltrigger,avalidedgedetectedontheexternalinterruptrequest(INTP0)inputpinisused(capture
trigger). In synchronism with a capture trigger, the count value of 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) in count operation is
loaded and held in the capture/compare register (CR11) specified to perform capture operation. Until the next
capture trigger occurs, the value of the CR11 register is held.
A valid edge used as a capture trigger is set using external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0). When both a
rising edge and falling edge are set as capture triggers, the pulse width of an applied external signal can be
measured. When a capture trigger is generated using one edge, the period of an input pulse signal can be
measured.
For the detailed format of the INTM0 register, see Fig. 11-1 in Chapter 11.
Caution When using an in-circuit emulator, see the notes described in Section 7.5.4.
149
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-53 Capture Operation
FFH
TM1
count value
D1
D0
D2
0H
Count starts
INTP0
pin input
INTP0
interrupt request
Capture/compare
register(CR11)
D0
D1
D2
OVF1
Remark D : TM1 count value (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
n
CLR10 = 0, CLR11 = 0, CM = 1
150
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-54 TM1 Cleared after Capture Operations
N1
N4
N2
N5
N3
TM1
count value
0H
Captured
Captured
Captured
Captured
Captured
7
INTP0
pin input
INTP0
interrupt request
Capture/compare
register (CR11)
N1
N2
N3
N4
Remark D : TM1 count value (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
n
CLR10 = 0, CLR11 = 0, CM = 1
7.2.6 Sample Applications
(1) Interval timer operation (1)
By free running 8-bit timer 1 (TM1), and adding a value to a compare register (CR10, CR11) in an interrupt
handling routine, 8-bit timer/counter 1 can be used as an interval timer whose period is as long as the added
value. (See Fig. 7-55.)
In addition, 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) has two compare registers, so that interval timers with two types of periods
can be produced.
Fig. 7-56 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-57 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-58 shows
interrupt handling.
151
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-55 Timing of Interval Timer Operation (1)
FFH
FFH
MOD(3n)
n
TM1
count value
MOD(2n)
0H
Timer starts
Compare register
(CR10)
n
MOD(2n)
MOD(3n)
MOD(4n)
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
INTC10
interrupt request
Interval
Interval
Interval
Remark Interval = n × x/f
, 1 ≤ n ≤ FFH
CLK
x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
Fig. 7-56 Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (1)
(a) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
6
5
4
0
3
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
×
×
×
TMC1
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM1
(b) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
PRM1
×
×
×
×
PRS12 PRS11 PRS10
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, or 512)
(c) Capture/compare control register 1 (CRC1)
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
0
CRC1
Disables clearing TM1, when CR10
coincides with TM1
Specifies the CR11 register as a compare
register
Disables clearing TM1, when CR11
coincides with TM1
152
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-57 Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (1)
Interval timer (1)
Set PRM1 register
Set count value in CR10 register
CR10←n
Set CRC1 register
CRC1←00H
7
Start counting
CE1←1
; Sets bit 3 of TMC1 to 1
INTC10 interrupt
Fig. 7-58 Interrupt Request Handling for Interval Timer Operation (1)
INTC10 interrupt
Calculation of timer value at
which next interrupt is to occur
CR10←CR10 + n
Other interrupt program
RETI
(2) Interval timer operation (2)
Eight-bit timer/counter 1 can be used as an interval timer that generates an interrupt at intervals of a count
time specified beforehand. (See Fig. 7-59.)
Fig. 7-60 shows the setting of control registers, and Fig. 7-61 shows the setting procedure.
153
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-59 Timing of Interval Timer Operation (2) (When CR11 Is Used As a Compare Register)
n
n
TM1
count value
0H
Cleared
Cleared
Count starts
Compare register
(CR11)
n
Coincidence
Coincidence
INTC11
interrupt request
Interrupt accepted
Interval time
Interrupt accepted
Interval time
Remark Interval = (n + 1) × x/f
, 0 ≤ n ≤ FFH
CLK
x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
Fig. 7-60 Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (2)
(a) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
6
5
4
0
3
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
×
×
×
TMC1
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM1
(b) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
PRM1
×
×
×
×
PRS12 PRS11 PRS10
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, or 512)
(c) Capture/compare control register 1 (CRC1)
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
0
CRC1
Disables clearing TM1, when CR10
coincides with TM1
Specifies the CR11 register as a compare
register
Enables clearing TM1, when CR11
coincides with TM1
154
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-61 Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (2)
Interval timer (2)
Set PRM1 register
Set count value in CR11 register
CR11←n
Set CRC1 register
CRC1←08H
7
Start counting
CE1←1
; Sets bit 3 of TMC1 to 1
INTC11 interrupt
(3) Pulse width measurement operation
In pulse width measurement, the width of the high level or low level of an external pulse signal applied to the
external interrupt request (INTP0) input pin is measured.
A pulse signal applied to the INTP0 pin must have a pulse width of 12 system clock pulses (2 µs: f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
or more for both the high level and the low level. If the pulse width is less than this value, no valid edge can
be detected, thus resulting in a failure to perform capture operation.
AsshowninFig.7-62,thevalueof8-bittimer1(TM1)incountoperationisloadedandheldintheCR11capture/
compare register specified as a capture register on a valid edge (either a rising edge or falling edge) of a signal
applied to the INTP0 pin. The pulse width of the input signal is found by multiplying the count clock (X/f
:
CLK
X = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512) by the difference between the TM1 count value (D ) loaded and held in the CR11
n
register on the n-th valid edge detected and the TM1 count value (D ) loaded and held in the CR11 register
n-1
on the (n – 1)-th valid edge detected.
Fig. 7-63 shows the setting of control registers, and Fig. 7-64 shows the setting procedure.
155
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-62 Timing of Pulse Width Measurement (When CR11 Is Used As a Capture Register)
FFH
FFH
TM1
count value
D3
D1
D2
D0
0H
Captured
Captured
Captured
Captured
Count starts
CE1←1
INTP0
external input signal
(100H – D1
+ D2) × X/fCLK
(D1 – D0) × X/fCLK
(D3 – D2) × X/fCLK
INTP0
interrupt request
Capture/compare
register (CR11)
D0
D1
D2
D3
OVF1
↑
Cleared by software
Remark D : TM1 count value (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
n
X = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
156
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-63 Setting of Control Registers for Pulse Width Measurement
(a) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
0
0
0
0
1
TMC1
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM1
(b) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
PRM1
×
×
×
×
PRS12 PRS11 PRS10
7
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, or 512)
(c) Capture/compare control register 1 (CRC1)
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
CRC1
Disables clearing TM1, when TM1
coincides with CR10
Specifies the CR11 register as a capture
register
Clearing TM1, when TM1 is captured to
CR11, is disabled
(d) External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0)
7
6
5
4
3
1
2
1
1
0
0
×
×
×
×
×
INTM0
Specifies valid edge of INTP0 input
to be rising and falling edges
: Don't care
×
157
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-64 Setting Procedure for Pulse Width Measurement
Pulse width
measurement
Set PRM1 register
Set CRC1 register
CRC1←04H
; Specifies valid edge of
Set INTM0 register and
MK0L register
INTP0 input to be both
edges and unmasks interrupt
Initialize buffer memory for capture value
X0←0
Start counting
; Sets bit 3 of TMC1 to 1
CE1←1
Enable interrupt
INTP0 interrupt
Fig. 7-65 Interrupt Request Handling for Pulse Width Calculation
INTP0 interrupt
Calculation of pulse width
Yn=CR11 – Xn
Store captured value in memory
Xn+1←CR11
RETI
158
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.3 8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 2
7.3.1 Functions
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 has two functions not available with the other three timers/counters:
• External event counter
• One-shot timer
This section describes the following four basic functions in sequence:
• Interval timer
• Programmable square wave output
• Pulse width measurement
• External event counter
(1) Interval timer
7
Whenoperatingasanintervaltimer,8-bittimer/counter2generatesaninternalinterruptatspecifiedintervals.
Table 7-11 Intervals of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
Resolution
Minimum interval
Maximum interval
8
16/f
16/f
2
2
2
× 16/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(2.6 µs)
(2.6 µs)
(683 µs)
8
32/f
32/f
× 32/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(5.3 µs)
(5.3 µs)
(1.37 ms)
8
64/f
64/f
× 64/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(10.7 µs)
(10.7 µs)
(2.73 ms)
8
128/f
128/f
2
× 128/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(21.3 µs)
(21.3 µs)
(5.46 ms)
8
256/f
256/f
2
2
× 256/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(42.7 µs)
(42.7 µs)
(10.9 ms)
8
512/f
512/f
× 512/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
(85.3 µs)
(85.3 µs)
(21.8 ms)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
159
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Programmable square wave output
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 outputs a square wave separately on the TO2 and TO3 timer output pins.
Table 7-12 Programmable Square Wave Output Setting Range of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
Minimum pulse width
Maximum pulse width
8
16/f
2
2
2
× 16/f
CLK
CLK
(2.6 µs)
(683 µs)
8
32/f
× 32/f
CLK
CLK
(5.3 µs)
(1.37 ms)
8
64/f
× 64/f
CLK
CLK
(10.7 µs)
(2.73 ms)
8
128/f
2
× 128/f
CLK
CLK
(21.3 µs)
(5.46 ms)
8
256/f
2
2
× 256/f
CLK
CLK
(42.7 µs)
(10.9 ms)
8
512/f
× 512/f
CLK
CLK
(85.3 µs)
(21.8 ms)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
Caution The values in Table 7-12 assume the use of an internal clock.
(3) Pulse width measurement
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 measures the pulse width of a signal applied to the external interrupt input pin
INTP1.
Table 7-13 Pulse Width Measurement Range of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
Measurable pulse width
Resolution
8
≤2 × 16/f
CLK
16/f
CLK
(683 µs)
(2.6 µs)
8
≤2 × 32/f
CLK
32/f
CLK
(1.37 ms)
(5.3 µs)
8
≤2 × 64/f
CLK
64/f
CLK
(2.73 ms)
(10.7 µs)
8
≤2 × 128/f
CLK
128/f
CLK
(5.46 ms)
(21.3 µs)
8
≤2 × 256/f
CLK
256/f
CLK
(10.9 ms)
(42.7 µs)
8
≤2 × 512/f
CLK
512/f
CLK
(21.8 ms)
(85.3 µs)
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
160
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(4) External event counter
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 counts clock pulses (CI pin input pulses) applied to the external interrupt input pin
(INTP2).
Table 7-14 indicates the clock signals that can be applied to 8-bit timer/counter 2.
Table 7-14 Clock Signals That Can Be Applied to 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
When occurrences of one
edge only are counted
When occurrences of both
edges are counted
f
/24 (250 kHz)
CLK
f
/32 (187.5 kHz)
CLK
Maximum frequency
Note
Minimum pulse width
(high and low level)
12/f
(2 µs)
16/f
(2.67 µs)
CLK
CLK
Note The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
7
7.3.2 Configuration
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 consists of one 8-bit timer 2 (TM2), two 8-bit compare registers (CR20, CR21), and one
8-bit capture register (CR22).
Fig. 7-66 shows the block diagram of 8-bit timer/counter 2.
(1) 8-bit timer 2 (TM2)
TM2 is a timer for counting up with the count clock specified by external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0)
or the lower 4 bits of prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1). Either an internal count clock or an external count
clock can be selected.
TM2 allows only read operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. The count operation of TM2 can be
enabled or disabled by timer control register 1 (TMC1).
When the RESET signal is applied, TM2 is cleared to 00H, and count operation stops.
(2) Compare registers (CR20, CR21)
The CR20 and CR21 registers are 8-bit registers for holding a value that determines the period of interval timer
operation.
When the values of the CR20 and CR21 registers coincide with the value of TM2, interrupt requests (INTC20,
INTC21) and timer output control signals are generated. Count value clear operation can also be performed
when the value of CR21 coincides with the value of TM2.
The CR20 and CR21 registers allow both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction.
When the RESET signal is applied, the CR20 and CR21 registers become undefined.
(3) Capture register (CR22)
The CR22 register is an 8-bit register for capturing the value of TM2.
Capture operation is performed on a valid edge (capture trigger) occurring on the external interrupt request
(INTP1) input pin. The value of CR22 register is held until the next capture trigger occurs or the value of the
CR22 register is read. After being read, the CR22 register is undefined until a value is set in the CR22 register
when the next capture trigger occurs. After a capture operation, TM2 can be cleared.
The CR22 register allows only read operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. When the RESET signal
is applied, the CR22 register becomes undefined,
(4) Edge detector
The edge detector detects a valid edge of an external input signal.
When the edge detector detects, on the INTP1 input pin, a valid edge specified in external interrupt mode
register 0 (INTM0), INTP1 and a capture trigger are generated. When the edge detector detects a valid edge
on the external interrupt request (INTP2) input pin, a TM2 count clock and INTP2 are generated.
161
µPD78214 Sub-Series
162
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(5) Output control circuit
When the value of CR20 or CR21 coincides with the value of TM2, timer output can be inverted.
By setting the higher 4 bits of the timer output control register (TOC), a square wave can be output on a timer
output pin (TO2, TO3). At this time, PWM/PPG output is possible, depending on the setting of capture/
compare control register 2 (CRC2).
Timer output can be disabled or enabled by the TOC register. When timer output is disabled, a fixed level is
output on the TO2 and TO3 pins. (An output level is set using the TOC register.)
(6) Prescaler
The prescaler generates count clocks from the internal system clock. From these count clocks generated by
the prescaler, a count clock is selected with the selector for the timer to perform count operation.
7.3.3 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2 Control Registers
(1) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
The TMC1 register is an 8-bit register for controlling the count operations of 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) and 8-bit timer
2 (TM2).
Thehigher4bitscontrolthecountoperationofTM2of8-bittimer/counter2. (Thelower4bitscontrolthecount
operation of TM1 of 8-bit timer/counter 1.)
The TMC1 register allows both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-67
shows the format of the TMC1 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the TMC1 register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-67 Format of Timer Control Register 1 (TMC1)
0
0
7
6
5
4
0
3
1
0
2
TMC1
CE2 OVF2 CMD2
CE1
OVF1
These bits control counting for TM1 of 8-bit
timer/counter 1 (see Fig. 7-44).
CMD2
TM2 operating mode specification
Normal mode
0
1
One-shot mode
TM2 overflow flag
OVF2
0
Overflow does not occur
Overflow occurs
(counting up from FFH to 00H)
1
CE2
0
TM2 counting control
Clears and stops counting
Enables counting
1
Remark The OVF2 bit can be reset only by software.
163
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
The PRM1 register is an 8-bit register used to specify a count clock for 8-bit timer 1 (TM1) and 8-bit timer 2
(TM2).
The higher 4 bits are used to specify a count clock for TM2 of 8-bit timer/counter 2. (The lower 4 bits are used
to specify a count clock for TM1 of 8-bit timer/counter 1.)
The PRM1 register allows only write operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-68 shows the
format of the PRM1 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the PRM1 register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-68 Format of Prescaler Mode Register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
PRM1 PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
PRS12 PRS11 PRS10
These bits specify the count clock supplied to
8-bit timer/counter 1 (TM1) (see Fig. 7-45).
fCLK = 6 MHz
PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
Resolution
Specification of count clock [Hz]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
fCLK/16
2.6 µs
5.3
s
µ
fCLK/32
fCLK/64
10.7 µs
fCLK/128
21.3
42.7
85.3
s
s
s
µ
µ
µ
fCLK/256
fCLK/512
External clock (CI)
Remark f
: System clock frequency
CLK
164
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(3) Capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2)
The CRC2 register is used to specify the condition for enabling the clear operation of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) with
the CR21 compare register or CR22 capture register, and also specify a timer output (TO2, TO3) mode.
The CRC2 register allows only write operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-69 shows the
format of the CRC2 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the CRC2 register is cleared to 10H.
Fig. 7-69 Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 2 (CRC2)
0
0
7
6
5
4
1
3
1
0
2
CRC2
MOD1 MOD0 CLR22
0
CLR21
Timer output mode
7
MOD1 MOD0 CLR22 CLR21
Clearing TM2
Does not clear
TO2
TO3
Toggle output
Toggle output
Toggle output
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Clears when the TM2 register coincides
with the CR21 register
Toggle output
Clears after contents of TM2 is captured
to the CR22 register
Toggle output Toggle output
Toggle output Toggle output
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Clears when the TM2 register coincides
with the CR21 register or after contents
of TM2 is caped to the CR22 register
Toggle output
PWM output
Does not clear
Does not clear
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
PWM output PWM output
Clears when the TM2 register coincides
with the CR21 register
1
1
0
1
PPG output
Toggle output
Caution Combinations other than those indicated above are prohibited.
165
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(4) Timer output control register (TOC)
The TOC register is an 8-bit register for controlling the active level of timer output and for enabling/disabling
timer output.
The higher 4 bits control the timer output operation (on the TO2 and TO3 pins) of 8-bit timer/counter 2. (The
lower 4 bits control the timer output operation (on the TO0 and TO1 pins) of the 16-bit timer/counter.)
The TOC register allows only write operation using an 8-bit measurement instruction. Fig. 7-70 shows the
format of the TOC register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the TOC register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-70 Format of Timer Output Control Register (TOC)
0
7
6
5
4
3
1
2
TOC
ALV1
ENTO0 ALV0
ENTO3
ENTO2 ALV2 ENTO1
ALV3
These bits control timer output operation (output of
pins TO0 and TO1) by the 16-bit timer/counter
(see Fig. 7-5).
Active level for TO2 pin
ALV2
When toggle output
is specified
When PWM/PPG
output is specified
Low level
High level
High level
Low level
0
1
ENTO2 TO2 pin operation specification
Outputs ALV2
0
Enables pulse output
1
Active level for TO3 pin
ALV3
When toggle output
is specified
When PWM/PPG
output is specified
High level
0
1
Low level
High level
Low level
ENTO3
TO3 pin operation specification
0
1
Outputs ALV3
Enables pulse output
166
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.3.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timer 2 (TM2)
(1) Basic operation
Eight-bittimer/counter2performscountoperationbycountingupwiththecountclockspecifiedbythehigher
4 bits of prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1).
Bit 7 (CE2) of timer control register 1 (TMC1) is used to enable/disable count operation. (The higher 4 bits of
the TMC1 register are used to control the operation of 8-bit timer/counter 2.) When the CE2 bit is set to 1 by
software, TM2 is cleared to 00H by the first count clock pulse, then count-up operation starts.
When the CE2 bit is reset to 0 by software, TM2 is cleared to 00H by the next count clock pulse, then capture
operation and coincide with signal generation stop.
If the CE2 bit is set to 1 when the CE2 bit is already set to 1, TM2 count operation is not affected. (See Fig. 7-
71 (b).)
If the count clock signal is applied when the value of TM2 is FFH, TM2 is set to 00H. At this time, OVF2 is set,
and the overflow signal is sent to the output control circuit. OVF2 can be cleared only by software. Count
operation continues.
7
When the RESET signal is applied, TM2 is cleared to 00H, and count operation stops.
Fig. 7-71 Basic Operation of 8-Bit Timer 2 (TM2)
(a) Count start → count stop → count start
Count clock
0H
0H
1H
0FH
10H
11H
TM2
CE2
1H
2H
0H
0H
Count starts
Count starts
CE2←1
Count stops
CE2←0
CE2←1
(b) When the CE2 bit is set to 1 again after count operation starts
Count clock
0H
0H
1H
2H
3H
4H
5H
6H
TM2
CE2
Count starts
Rewriting
CE2←1
CE2←1
167
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) When the value of TM2 is FFH
Count clock
fCLK/8
TM2 FEH FFH 0H
1H
OVF2
Cleared by software
OVF2←0
(2) Clear operation
After a coincidence with the CR21 compare register or capture operation, 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) can be
automatically cleared. If a TM2 clear cause occurs, TM2 is cleared to 00H by the next count clock pulse. This
means that even if a TM2 clear cause occurs, TM2 holds the value existing at that time until the next count
clock pulse is applied.
Fig. 7-72 TM2 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR21)
Count clock
n-1
n
0
1
TM2
Compare register
(CR21)
n
Cleared here
Coincidence between
TM2 and CR21
Fig. 7-73 TM2 Cleared after Capture Operation
Count clock
n
1
n-1
TM2
0
2
INTP1
TM2 is captured
to CR22 here
Cleared here
168
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
TM2 can also be cleared by software when the CE2 bit of the timer control register (TMC1) is reset to 0.
Similarly, clear operation is performed by the count clock pulse following the resetting of CE2 bit to 0. If the
CE2 bit is set to 1 before TM2 is reset to 0 by the resetting of the CE2 bit to 0 (that is, before the first count clock
pulse is applied after the CE2 bit is reset to 0), two operations are simultaneously performed: one operation
is an operation to clear TM2 to 0, and the other operation is a count operation starting with the counting of
0.
Fig. 7-74 Clear Operation When the CE2 Bit Is Reset to 0
(a) Basic operation
Count clock
7
n-1
n
0
TM2
CE2
(b) Restart after 0 is set in TM2 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
1
0
0
TM2
CE2
When the CE2 bit is set to 1 aftr this count clock,
counting starts from 0 on the count clock input
after the CE2 bit has been set.
169
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) Restart before 0 is set in TM2 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
0
1
2
TM2
CE2
When the CE2 bit is set to 1 before this count clock, Clearing
TM2 by CE2←0 and counting by CE2←1 are performed simultaneously.
7.3.5 External Event Counter Function
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 can count clock pulses externally applied to the CI pin.
The external event counter operation mode requires no particular selection method. TM2 functions as an external
event counter when external count input is specified for the count clock of TM2 by setting the higher 4 bits of
prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1).
The maximum frequency of an external clock pulse that can be counted by TM2 functioning as an external event
counter is 187.5 kHz when occurrences of both CI input signal edges are counted, and is 250 kHz when occurrences
of only one edge are counted (f
= 6 MHz).
CLK
Whenoccurrencesofbothedgesarecounted, theexternalclockpulsesignalmusthaveapulsewidthof16system
clock pulses (2.67 µs: f = 6 MHz) or more for both the high level and the low level. If the pulse width is less than
CLK
this value, no edges may be counted. When occurrences of only one edge are counted, the external clock pulse
signal must have a pulse width of 12 system clock pulses (2 µs: f = 6 MHz) or more for both the high level and
CLK
the low level. If the pulse width is less than this value, no edges may be counted.
Fig. 7-75 shows the external event count timing of 8-bit timer/counter 2.
170
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-75 External Event Count Timing of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
(1) When occurrences of one edge are counted (maximum frequency = f /24)
CLK
12/fCLK(Min.)12/fCLK(Min.)
24/fCLK(Min.)
CI
8-12/fCLK
ICI
16/fCLK
(constant)
7
Countable
timing
of TM2
Count
clock of
TM2
Dn + 1
Dn + 2
Dn + 3
Dn
TM2
Remark ICI: CI input signal after passing through the edge detector
(2) When occurrences of both edges are counted (maximum frequency = f
/32)
CLK
16/fCLK(Min.)
32/fCLK(Min.)
16/fCLK(Min.)
CI
8-12/fCLK
ICI
16/fCLK
(constant)
Countable
timing of
TM2
Count
clock of
TM2
Dn + 2
Dn + 3
Dn + 4
Dn + 5
Dn
TM2
Dn + 1
Remark ICI: CI input signal after passing through the edge detector
171
µPD78214 Sub-Series
The count operation of TM2 is controlled by the CE2 bit of the TMC1 register as in the case of basic operation.
When the CE2 bit is set to 1 by software, TM2 is cleared to 00H by the first count clock pulse, then count-up
operation starts.
When the CE2 bit is set to 0 by software during TM2 count operation, TM2 is cleared to 00H by the next count
clock pulse, and count operation stops. If the CE2 bit is set to 1 by software when the CE2 bit is already set
to 1, TM2 count operation is not affected.
Cautions 1. When 8-bit timer/counter 2 is used as an external event counter, the increment of TM2 lags the input of a valid edge to
the CI pin by a maximum of 28 system clock pulses (4.67 µs: f
= 6MHz). This means that TM2 may not be incremented
CLK
yet when read immediately after an edge is detected. In addition, the generation of an interrupt request by a coincidence
with a compare register (CR20, CR21) lags the input of an edge. Take this point into consideration when short-period
timing control is required after input of an edge.
Fig. 7-76 Interrupt Request Generation Using External Event Counter
CI
8 to 12 clocks
ICI
16 clocks (Max.)
Countable
timing of
TM2
Count clock of
TM2
n-1
n
n+1
TM2
ICI: Signal that has gone
through the edge
INTP2 occurs
here
TM2 counts up here
or is compared with
compare register.
detector of CI input
2. When 8-bit timer/counter 2 is used as an external event counter, TM2 alone cannot distinguish between the state where
no valid edge is applied and the state where only one valid edge has been applied. (See Fig. 7-77.) In either case, the value
of TM2 is 0. When the states need to be distinguished from each other, use the INTP2 interrupt request flag. (The same
pin is used as the INTP2 pin as well as the CI pin, so that the functions can be used at the same time.) Fig. 7-78 shows
an example of distiction.
172
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-77 Example Where Input of No Valid Edge Cannot Be Distinguished from Input of Only One Valid Edge
with External Event Counter
CI
TM2
1
2
0
0
Cannot be distinguished
Count starts
7
Fig. 7-78 How to Distinguish Input of No Valid Edge from Input of Only One Valid Edge
with External Event Counter
(a) Count start processing
Count starts
Clear INTP2 interrupt
request flag
IF0L.2←0
; Clears PIF2 (0)
; Sets CE2 (1)
Start counting
TMC1.7←1
End
173
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(b) Count value read processing
Reads count value
Read contents of TM2
A←TM2
Yes
; Check TM2 value.
If 0, check interrupt
request flag.
A = 0?
No
Yes
IF0L.2 = 1?
No
; Check contents of PIF2.
If 1, valid edge has
been input.
A←A + 1
End
; The number of valid edges input to register A is set.
3. With an in-circuit emulator, digital noise on the CI/INTP2 pin cannot be removed correctly. When the event counter
function is used, the operation described below is performed if an edge is detected erroneously.
• When IE-78210-R is used
Count operation is performed on an erroneously detected edge. At this time, an interrupt request is also generated on
the edge.
• When other in-circuit emulators are used
Count operation is not performed on an erroneously detected edge. However, an interrupt request is generated on the
edge.
For detailed information about erroneous edge detection, see Section 11.4.
174
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.3.6 One-Shot Timer Function
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 has an operation mode in which the full-count (FFH) is reached as the result of count
operation.
Fig. 7-79 One-Shot Timer Operation
FFH
TM2
count value
Value of CR21
7
0H
Cleared
Count starts
CE2←1
OVF2←0
INTC21
OVF2
As shown in Fig. 7-79, a one-shot interrupt is generated when the value (00H-FFH) set in the CR20 or CR21 register
coincides with the value of TM2.
The one-shot timer operation mode can be specified by setting bit 5 (CMD2) of timer control register 1 (TMC1) to
1 by software.
The count operation of TM2 is controlled using the CE2 bit of the TMC1 register as in the case of basic operation.
WhentheCE2bitissetto1bysoftware,TM2isclearedto00Hbythefirstcountclockpulse,thencount-upoperation
starts.
When the value of TM2 reaches FFH (full-count) as the result of count operation, bit 6 (OVF2) of the TMC1 register
is set to 1, and TM2 stops its count operation with the count value of FFH held.
From the count stop state, one-shot timer operation can be started again by resetting the OVF2 bit to 0 by
software. When the OVF2 bit is reset to 0, TM2 is cleared to 00H by the next count clock pulse, then count-up
operation restarts.
When the CE2 bit is reset to 0 by software during TM2 count operation, TM2 is cleared to 00H by the next count
clock pulse, and count operation stops. If the CE2 bit is set to 1 by software when the CE2 bit is already set to 1,
TM2 count operation is not affected.
175
µPD78214 Sub-Series
7.3.7 Compare Register and Capture Register Operations
(1) Compare operation
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 performs an operation to compare the values set in the compare registers with timer
count values.
When the values set in the compare registers (CR20, CR21) coincide with count values of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2),
the coincidence signal is sent to the output control circuit. At the same time, the interrupt requests (INTC20,
INTC21) are generated.
AfterthevalueoftheCR21registercoincideswithacountvalueofTM2, thecountvalueofTM2canbecleared.
Thus, 8-bit timer/counter 2 can operate as an interval timer for repeatedly counting up to the value set in the
CR21 register.
Fig. 7-80 Compare Operation
FFH
FFH
TM2
count value
Value of CR21
Coincidence
Value of CR21
Coincidence
Value of CR20
Coincidence
Value of CR20
Coincidence
0H
Count starts
CE2←1
INTC20
interrupt request
INTC21
interrupt request
TO2 pin output
ENTO2=1
Inactive level
(
(
(
ALV2=1
TO3 pin output
ENTO2=1
Inactive level
(
ALV3=0
OVF2
Cleared by software
Remark CLR21 = 0, CLR22 = 0
176
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-81 TM2 Cleared After a Coincidence Is Detected
FFH
CR20
TM2
count value
CR21
CR21
CR21
0H
Count stops
CE2←0
Count starts
Count starts
Cleared
Cleared
CE2←1
CE2←1
(
(
(
(
CLR21←0
CLR21←1
7
INTC20
INTC21
TO2 pin output
ENTO2←1
Inactive level
Inactive level
(
(
ALV2←1
TO3 pin output
ENTO3←1
ALV3←1
(
(
OVF2
Cleared by software
Remark CLR22 = 0
Caution When using an in-circuit emulator, see the notes described in Section 7.5.4.
(2) Capture operation
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 performs a capture operation to load the count value of the timer into the capture
register in synchronism with an external trigger.
Asanexternaltrigger,avalidedgedetectedontheexternalinterruptrequest(INTP1)inputpinisused(capture
trigger). In synchronism with a capture trigger, the count value of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) in count operation is
loaded and held in the CR22 capture register. After the value captured in the CR22 register is read by the
program, the value of the CR22 register becomes undefined.
A valid edge used as a capture trigger is set using external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0). When both a
rising edge and falling edge are set as capture triggers, the pulse width of an applied external signal can be
measured. When a capture trigger is generated using one edge, the period of an input pulse signal can be
measured.
For the detailed format of the INTM0 register, see Fig. 11-1 in Chapter 11.
Cautions 1. The value of the CR22 register, after being read, becomes undefined. A captured value can be used more than once by
saving the captured value to a register or memory.
2. When using an in-circuit emulator, see the notes described in Section 7.5.4.
177
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-82 Capture Operation
FFH
TM2
count value
D1
D0
D2
0H
Count starts
CE←1
INTP1
pin input
INTP1
interrupt request
Interrupt accepted
D0
Interrupt accepted
Capture
register
(CR22)
D1
(undefined)
(undefined)
D2
OVF2
CPU operation
Reads CR22
Reads CR22
Remark D : TM2 count value (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
n
CLR21 = 0, CLR22 = 0
178
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-83 TM2 Cleared after Capture Operation
N1
N4
N2
N3
N5
TM2
count value
0H
Captured
Captured
Captured
Captured
Captured
7
INTP1
pin output
INTP1
interrupt request
Capture/compare
register (CR22)
N1
N2
N3
N4
Remark CLR21 = 0, CLR22 = 1
7.3.8 Basic Operation of Output Control Circuit
The output control circuit controls the levels of the timer outputs (TO2, TO3) according to the coincidence signal
from the compare registers. The operation of the output control circuit is determined by timer output control
register(TOC)andcapture/comparecontrolregister2(CRC2). (SeeTable7-15.) Beforeatimeroutput(TO0orTO1)
signal can be output on a pin, the pin must be placed in the control mode by the PMC3 register.
179
µPD78214 Sub-Series
180
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(1) Basic operation
By setting ENTOn (n = 2, 3) of the timer output control register (TOC) to 1, the timer outputs (TO2, TO3) can
be changed with the timing determined by MOD0, MOD1, and CLR21 of capture/compare control register 2
(CRC2).
In addition, by clearing ENTOn (n = 2, 3) to 0, the levels of the timer outputs (TO2, TO3) can be tied. The level
where an output is tied is determined by ALVn (n = 2, 3) of the timer output control register (TOC). When ALVn
(n = 2, 3) is 0, the output is tied high; when ALVn (n = 2, 3) is 1, the output is tied low.
(2) Toggle output
Toggle output is an operation mode where the level of output is inverted each time the value of a compare
register (CR20, CR21) coincides with the value of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2). The output level of TO2 is inverted when
the value of CR20 coincides with the value of TM2. The output level of TO3 is inverted when the value of CR21
coincides with the value of TM2.
When8-bittimer/counter2isstoppedbyresettingtheCE2bitoftheTMC1registerto0,theoutputlevelpresent
at that time is held.
7
Fig. 7-84 Toggle Output Operation
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
TM0
count value
Value of CR21
Value of CR20
Value of CR21
Value of CR20
Value of CR21
Value of CR20
Value of CR21
Value of CR20
0H
ENTO0
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Output of TO2
(ALV2 = 1)
ENTO3
Instruction execution
Output of TO3
(ALV3 = 0)
181
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 7-16 TO2 and TO3 Toggle Output (f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
Count clock
Minimum pulse width
Maximum pulse width
8
2
2
2
× 16/f
CLK
f
f
f
/16
/32
/64
2.6 µs
CLK
CLK
CLK
(683 µs)
8
× 32/f
CLK
5.3 µs
10.7 µs
21.3 µs
42.7 µs
85.3 µs
(1.37 ms)
8
× 64/f
CLK
(2.73 ms)
8
2
× 128/f
CLK
f
/128
/256
/512
CLK
CLK
CLK
(5.46 ms)
8
2
2
× 256/f
CLK
f
f
(10.9 ms)
8
× 512/f
CLK
(21.75 ms)
Caution When using an in-circuit emulator, see the notes described in Section 7.5.4.
7.3.9 PWM Output
The PWM output function outputs a PWM signal whose period coincides with the full-count period of 8-bit timer
2 (TM2). The pulse width of TO2 is determined by the value of CR20, and the pulse width of TO3 is determined
by the value of CR21. Before this function can be used, the CLR21 and CLR22 bits of capture/compare control
register 2 (CRC2) must be set to 0, and the CMD2 bit of timer control register 1 (TMC1) must be set to 0.
The pulse period and pulse width are as follows:
• PWM period = 256 × x/f
CLK
Note
• PWM pulse width = ((value set in compare register
) × x + 2)/f
CLK
; x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
Note Zero cannot be set in the compare registers.
• Duty factor = (PWM pulse width)/(PWM period) = ((value set in compare register) × x + 2)/(256 × x) (value set
in compare register)/256
Caution In PWM output, the actual pulse width is longer than a value obtained with the approximate expression by two clock pulses of f
CLK
for the active level, and is shorter than such an approximate value by two clock pulses of f
into consideration when high-precision output is required or a high-speed count clock is used.
for the inactive level. Take this point
#
CLK
Fig. 7-85 PWM Pulse Output
FFH
FFH
FFH
CR20
CR20
CR20
Count value of timer
0H
Count starts
Interrupt
TO2
Pulse width
Pulse period
Pulse width
Pulse period
Remark ALV2 = 0
182
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Table 7-17 PWM Output on TO2 and TO3 (f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
PWM frequency (Hz)
Count clock
Minimum pulse width
PWM period (ms)
1465
732
366
183
92
f
f
f
/16
/32
/64
2.7
5.3
0.7
1.4
CLK
CLK
CLK
10.7
21.3
42.7
85.3
2.7
f
/128
/256
/512
5.5
CLK
CLK
CLK
f
f
10.9
21.8
46
Fig. 7-86 shows an example of 2-channel PWM output. Fig. 7-87 shows PWM output when FFH is set in the CR20
compare register.
7
Fig. 7-86 Example of PWM Output Using TM2
FFH
FFH
FFH
CR21
CR21
CR20
TM2
count value
CR20
CR20
0H
INTC20
INTC21
TO2
TO3
Remark ALV2 = 0, ALV3 = 0
183
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-87 PWM Output When CR20 = FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
Count clock period T
2
2
TM2
count value
1
1
0
0
0
INTO20
OVF flag
TO2
Pulse width
T
255
256
Duty factor =
× 100 = 99.6 (%)
Pulse period = 256T
Remark ALV2 = 0
Evenifthevalueofacompareregister(CR20, CR21)coincideswiththevalueof8-bittimer2(TM2)morethanonce
during one period of PWM output, the output levels on the timer outputs (TO2, TO3) are not inverted.
Fig. 7-88 Example of Rewriting a Compare Register
FFH
FFH
FFH
T2
T2
TM2
count value
T1
T1
T1
0H
CR20
T1
T2
TO2
Rewriting
CR20
TO2 does not change though CR20 coincides with TM2
Remark ALV2 = 1
184
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Cautions 1. If a value less than the value of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) is set in a compare register (CR20, CR21), a PWM signal with a 100% duty
factor is output. Rewrite the CR20 or CR21 compare register, if required, by using an interrupt generated by a coincidence
between TM2 and the compare register.
Fig. 7-89 Example of PWM Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor
FFH
FFH
FFH
FFH
n1
n1
n3
TM2
count value
n2
n2
n2
0H
7
n1
n2
CR20
TO2
When a value, n2 less than TM2 value, n3 is written to CR20
here, the duty factor is 100% during this period.
Remark ALV2 = 0
2. If timer output is disabled (ENTOn = 0: n = 2, 3), the output level on the TOn (n = 2, 3) is the inverted value of the value set in
ALVn (n = 2, 3). Accordingly, note that if timer output is disabled when the PWM output function is selected, the active level
is output.
7.3.10 PPG Output
The PPG output function outputs a square wave that has a period determined by the CR21 compare register, and
has a pulse width determined by the CR20 compare register. PPG output is PWM output whose period is made
variable. This output signal can be output on the TO0 pin only.
Before this function can be used, the CLR21 bit of capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2) must be set to 1, the
CLR22 bit of the same register must be set to 0, and the CMD2 bit of timer control register 1 (TMC1) must be set
to 0.
The pulse period and pulse width are as follows:
• PPG period = ((value set in CR21 compare register) + 1) × x/f
CLK
; x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
• PPG pulse width = ((value set in CR20 compare register) × x + 2)/f
(value set in CR20) × x/f
CLK
CLK
where, CR20 ≤ CR21
• Duty factor = (PPG pulse width)/(PPG period) = ((value set in CR20) × x + 2)/(((value set in CR21) + 1) × x) (value
set in CR20)/((value set in CR21) + 1)
Caution In PPG output, the actual pulse width is longer than a value obtained with the approximate expression by two clock pulses of
f
for the active level, and is shorter than such an approximate value by two clock pulses of f
for the inactive level. Take
CLK
CLK
this point into consideration when high-precision output is required, the PPG pulse period is short, or a high-speed count clock
is used.
185
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-90 shows an example of PPG output using 8-bit timer 2 (TM2). Fig. 7-91 shows an example of PPG output
when CR20 = CR21. Fig. 7-92 shows an example of PPG output when CR20 = 00H.
Fig. 7-90 Example of PPG Output Using TM2
CR21
CR21
CR21
TM2
count value
CR20
CR20
CR20
Count starts
0H
INTC20
T
INTC21
TO2
(PPG output)
Pulse
width
TO3
(timer output)
Pulse period
Remark ALV2 = 0, ALV3 = 0
Table 7-18 PPG Output on TO2 (f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
Note
PPG frequency
Count clock
Minimum pulse width
2.67 µs
PPG period
187.5 kHz to 1.46 kHz
93.75 kHz to 732 Hz
46.9 kHz to 366 Hz
23.4 kHz to 183 Hz
11.7 kHz to 91.6 Hz
5.86 kHz to 45.8 Hz
f
f
f
/16
/32
/64
5.33 µs to 683 µs
10.7 µs to 1.37 ms
21.3 µs to 2.73 ms
42.7 µs to 5.46 ms
85.3 µs to 10.9 ms
171 µs to 21.8 ms
CLK
CLK
CLK
5.33 µs
10.7 µs
f
/128
/256
/512
21.3 µs
CLK
CLK
CLK
f
42.7 µs
f
85.3 µs
Note The case where CR20 = 0 is excluded.
186
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-91 PPG Output When CR20 = CR21
n
n
n
n-1
n-1
Count period T
TM2
count value
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
INTC20
7
INTC21
TO2
Pulse width = nT
Pulse period = (n + 1)T
Remark ALV2 = 0
Fig. 7-92 PPG Output When CR20 = 00H
n
n
n
T
1
TM2
count value
2
0
INTC20
INTC21
TO2
Pulse period = (n + 1)T
Pulse width
= 2/fCLK
Remark ALV2 = 0
187
µPD78214 Sub-Series
EvenifthevalueoftheCR20compareregistercoincideswiththevalueof8-bittimer2(TM2)morethanonceduring
one period of PPG output, the output level on the timer output (TO2) is not inverted.
Fig. 7-93 Example of Rewriting Compare Register CR20
CR21
CR21
CR21
T2
T2
TM2
count value
T1
T1
CR20
TO2
T1
T2
Rewriting
CR20
TO2 does not change though CR20 coincides with TM2
Remark ALV2 = 1
Cautions 1. If a value less than the value of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) is written into the CR20 compare register before the value of CR20 coincides
with the value of TM2, a PPG signal with a 100% duty factor is output in that period. Rewrite CR20, if required, by using an
interrupt generated by a coincidence between TM2 and CR20.
Fig. 7-94 Example of PPG Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor
CR20
CR20
CR20
CR20
n1
n1
n3
TM2
count value
n2
n2
n2
0H
n1
n2
CR20
TO2
When a value, n2 less than TM2 value, n3 is written to CR20
here, the duty factor is 100% during this period.
Remark ALV2 = 0
188
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
2. If the current value of the CR21 compare register is decreased below the value of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2), the PPG period becomes
as long as the full-count time of TM2. At this time, if CR21 is rewritten after the value of the CR20 compare register coincides
with the value of TM2, the inactive level is output until TM2 overflows to 0, then normal PPG output is resumed. If CR21 is
rewritten before the value of CR20 coincides with the value of TM2, the active level is output until the value of CR20 coincides
with the value of TM2. When the value of CR20 coincides with the value of TM2 before TM2 overflows to 0, the inactive level
is output at that time. When TM2 overflows to 0, the active level is output, and normal PPG output is resumed. Rewrite CR21,
if required, by using an interrupt generated by a coincidence between TM2 and CR21.
Fig. 7-95 Example of PPG Output Period Made Longer
Full count value
n1
n1
7
n3
n3
n5
n2
n2
TM2
count value
n4
0H
n4
n3
n1
CR20
CR21
TO2
n2
TO2 becomes inactive when CR20 coincides with TM2;
otherwise, TO2 remains active.
The PPG period is extended when a value,
n2 less than TM2 value, n5 is written to
CR21 here.
Remark ALV2 = 1
3. If the PPG period is too short for interrupt acceptance, the measures described in Cautions 1 and 2 above do not lead to solution.
Consider other measures (such as masking all interrupts and polling interrupt request flags by software).
4. If timer output is disabled (ENTOn = 0: n = 2, 3), the output level on the TOn (n = 2, 3) is the inverted value of the value set in
ALVn (n = 2, 3). Accordingly, note that if timer output is disabled when the PPG output function is selected, the active level is
output.
189
µPD78214 Sub-Series
7.3.11 Sample Applications
(1) Interval timer operation (1)
By free running 8-bit timer 2 (TM2), and adding a value to a compare register (CR20, CR21) in an interrupt
handling routine, 8-bit timer/counter 2 can be used as an interval timer whose period is as long as the added
value. (See Fig. 7-96.)
In addition, 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) has two compare registers, so that interval timers with two types of periods
can be produced.
Fig. 7-97 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-98 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-99 shows
interrupt handling.
Fig. 7-96 Timing of Interval Timer Operation (1)
FFH
FFH
MOD(3n)
n
TM2
count value
MOD(2n)
0H
Timer starts
Compare register
(CR20)
n
MOD(2n)
MOD(3n)
MOD(4n)
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
Rewriting by inter-
rupt program
INTC20
interrupt request
Interval
Interval
Interval
Remark Interval = n × x/f
, 1 ≤ n ≤ FFH
CLK
x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
190
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-97 Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (1)
(a) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
×
×
×
PRM1
PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, 512,
or external clock)
(b) Capture /compare control register 0 (CRC0)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
7
CRC0
Disables clearing TM2
Both TO2 and TO3 are used for
toggle output
(c) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
TMC1
×
×
Normal mode
Overflow flag
Enables counting
Fig. 7-98 Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (1)
Interval timer (1)
Set PRM1 register
Set count value in CR20 register
CR20←n
Set CRC2 register
CRC2←10H
Set TMC1 register
; Sets bit 7 of TMC1 to 1
Sets normal mode (CMD2 = 0)
CE2←1
CMD2←0
INTC20 interrupt
191
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-99 Interrupt Request Handling for Interval Timer Operation (1)
INTC20 interrupt
Calculation of timer value at
which next interrupt is to occur
CR20←CR20 + n
Other interrupt program
RETI
(2) Interval timer operation (2)
Eight-bit timer/counter 2 can be used as an interval timer that generates an interrupt at intervals of a count
time specified beforehand. (See Fig. 7-100.)
Fig. 7-101 shows the setting of control registers, and Fig. 7-102 shows the setting procedure.
Fig. 7-100 Timing of Interval Timer Operation (2)
n
n
TM2
count value
0H
Cleared
Cleared
Count starts
Compare register
(CR21)
n
INTC21
interrupt request
Interrupt accepted
Interval
Interrupt accepted
Interval
Remark Interval = (n + 1) × x/f
, 0 ≤ n ≤ FFH
CLK
x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
192
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-101 Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation (2)
(a) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
×
×
×
PRM1
PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, 512,
or external clock)
(b) Capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
7
CRC2
Enables clearing TM2, when CR21 coincides
with TM2
Disables clearing TM2, when TM2 captured
Both TO2 and TO3 are used for toggle output
(c) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
TMC1
×
×
Normal mode
Overflow flag
Enables counting
193
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-102 Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation (2)
Interval timer
Set PRM1 register
Set count value in CR21 register
CR21←n
Set CRC2 register
CRC2←18H
Set TMC1 register
; Sets bit 7 of TMC1 to 1
Sets normal mode (CMD2 = 0)
CE2←1
CMD2←0
INTC21 interrupt
(3) Pulse width measurement operation
In pulse width measurement, the width of the high level or low level of an external pulse signal applied to the
INTP1 pin is measured.
A pulse signal applied to the INTP1 pin must have a pulse width of 12 system clock pulses (2 µs: f
= 6 MHz)
CLK
or more for both the high level and the low level. If the pulse width is less than this value, no valid edge can
be detected, thus resulting in a failure to perform capture operation.
As shown in Fig. 7-103, the value of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) in count operation is loaded and held in the CR22
capture register on a valid edge (either a rising edge or falling edge) of a signal applied to the INTP1 pin. The
pulsewidthoftheinputsignalisfoundbymultiplyingthecountclockbythedifferencebetweentheTM2count
value (D ) loaded and held in the CR22 register on the n-th valid edge detected and the TM2 count value (D
n
n-
) loaded and held in the CR22 register on the (n – 1)-th valid edge detected.
1
Fig. 7-104 shows the setting of control registers, and Fig. 7-105 shows the setting procedure.
194
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-103 Timing of Pulse Width Measurement
FFH
FFH
TM2
count value
D3
D1
D2
D0
0H
7
Captured
Captured
Captured
Captured
Count starts
INTP1
external input signal
(100H – D1+
D2) × X/fCLK
(D1 – D0) × X/fCLK
(D3 – D2) × X/fCLK
INTP1
interrupt request
Capture register (CR22)
OVF2
D0
D1
D2
D3
↑
Cleared by software
Remark D : TM2 count value (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
n
Fig. 7-104 Setting of Control Registers for Pulse Width Measurement
(a) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
×
×
×
PRM1
PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, 512,
or external clock)
(b) Capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC2
Disables clearing TM2
195
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
TMC1
×
×
Normal mode
Overflow flag
Enables counting
(d) External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0)
7
6
5
4
1
3
2
1
0
0
×
×
×
×
×
INTM0
1
Specifies valid edge of INTP1 input
to be rising and falling edges
Fig. 7-105 Setting Procedure for Pulse Width Measurement
Pulse width
measurement
Set CRC1 register
CRC2←10H
; Specifies valid edge of
Set INTM0 register and
MK0L register
INTP1 input to be both
edges and unmasks interrupt
Initialize buffer memory for capture value
X0←0
Set TMC1 register
CE2←1
; Sets bit 7 of TMC1 to 1
Sets normal mode (CMD2 = 0)
CMD2←0
Enable interrupt
INTP1 interrupt
196
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-106 Interrupt Request Handling for Pulse Width Calculation
INTP1 interrupt
Store captured value in memory
Xn+1←CR22
Calculation of pulse width
Yn=Xn+1 – Xn
RETI
7
(4) PWM output operation
In PWM output operation, a pulse signal with a duty factor determined by the value set in a compare register
is output. (See Fig. 7-107.)
The duty factor of a PWM output signal can be changed in steps of 1/256 from 1/256 to 255/256.
In addition, 8-bit timer 2 (TM2) has two compare registers, so that two types of PWM signals can be output.
Fig. 7-108 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-109 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-110 shows
the procedure for changing the duty factor of PWM output.
Fig. 7-107 Example of PWM Signal Output by 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
FFH
FFH
FFH
TM2
count value
0H
Timer starts
TO3
(active high)
197
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-108 Setting of Control Registers for PWM Output Operation
(a) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
TMC1
×
×
Normal mode
Overflow flag
Enables counting for TM2
(b) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
PRM1
PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 or 512)
(c) Capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2)
7
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
1
CRC2
Disables clearing TM2
Both TO2 and TO3 are used for PWM output
(d) Timer output control register (TOC)
7
6
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
TOC
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
TO3 for high-active PWM signal output
Enables PWM output for TO3
(e) Port 3 mode control register (PMC3)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PMC3
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Specifies P37 pin as TO3 output
198
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-109 Setting Procedure for PWM Output
Fig. 7-110 Changing Duty Factor of PWM Output
Preprocessing for
changing duty factor
PWM output
Clear INTC21 interrupt request
; Clears bit 0 of IF0H
Set CRC2 register
CRC2←90H
flag
CIF21←0
Enable INTC21 interrupt
; Clears bit 0 of MK0H
CMK21←0
Set TOC register
INTC21 interrupt
Set P34 pin in control mode
7
PMC3.4←1
Duty factor changing
processing
Set count clock in PRM1
Set duty factor in CR21
Set initial value in compare
register
Disable INTC21 interrupt
; Sets bit 0 of MK0H
CMK21←1
Start counting
; Sets bit 7 of TMC1
RETI
CE2←1
(5) PPG output operation
In PPG output operation, a pulse signal with a period and duty factor determined by the values set in the
compare registers is output. (See Fig. 7-111.)
Fig. 7-112 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-113 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-114 shows
the procedure for changing the duty factor of PPG output.
Fig. 7-111 Example of PPG Signal Output by 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
CR21
CR21
CR21
CR20
CR20
TM2
count value
CR20
0H
Timer starts
TO2
(active high)
199
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-112 Setting of Control Registers for PPG Output Operation
(a) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
1
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
TMC1
×
×
Normal mode
Overflow flag
Enables counting for TM2
(b) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
×
×
×
PRM1
PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 or 512)
(c) Capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2)
7
6
1
5
0
4
3
2
0
1
0
0
0
CRC2
1
1
1
Clears when TM2 coincides with CR21
Disables clearing when TM2 is captured
by CR22 register
TO2 is used for PPG output
(d) Timer output control register (TOC)
7
6
5
1
4
0
3
2
1
0
TOC
×
×
×
×
×
×
TO2 for high-active PWM signal output
Enables PPG output for TO2
(e) Port 3 mode control register (PMC3)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
×
PMC3
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
Specifies P36 pin as TO2 output
200
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-113 Setting Procedure for PPG Output
Fig. 7-114 Changing Duty Factor of PPG Output
Preprocessing for
changing duty factor
PPG output
Clear INTC20 interrupt request
Set CRC2 register
CRC2←D8H
; Clears bit 3 of IF0H
flag
CIF20←0
Enable INTC20 interrupt
; Clears bit 3 of MK0H
CMK20←0
Set TOC register
INTC20 interrupt
Set P34 pin in control mode
7
PMC3.6←1
Duty factor changing
processing
Set count clock in PRM1
Set duty factor in CR20
Set period in compare
register CR21
Disable INTC20 interrupt
; Sets bit 3 of MK0H
CMK20←1
Set duty factor in compare
register CR21
RETI
Start counting
; Sets bit 7 of TMC1
CE2←1
(6) External event counter operation
When functioning as an external event counter, 8-bit timer/counter 2 counts clock pulses externally applied
to the CI pin.
AsshowninFig.7-115,thevalueof8-bittimer2(TM2)isincrementedoneachvalidedgespecified(risingedge
only in this case) of a pulse signal applied to the CI pin.
Fig. 7-115 External Event Counter Operation (When Only One Edge Is Used)
CI pin input
n
n + 1
n + 2
TM2
Fig. 7-116 shows the setting of control registers, and Fig. 7-117 shows the setting procedure when 8-bit timer/
counter 2 functions as an external event counter.
Remark The value of TM2 is less then the number of input clock pulses by 1.
201
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-116 Setting of Control Registers for External Event Counter Operation
(a) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
1
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
0
2
1
0
PRM1
×
×
×
Specifies external clock input (C1)
(b) External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTM0
0
1
×
×
×
×
×
×
Specifies valid edge of C1 input as rising edge
(c) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
1
6
5
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
TMC1
×
×
0
0
Normal mode
Overflow flag
Enables counting
Fig. 7-117 Setting Procedure for External Event Counter Operation
Event counter
Specify valid edge of C1 pin input
Set PRM1 register
PRM1→0F × H
Start counting
; Sets bit 7 of TMC1 to 1
CE2←1
202
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(7) One-shot timer operation
When functioning as a one-shot timer, 8-bit timer/counter 2 generates only one interrupt when a specified
count time has elapsed after the start of 8-bit timer 2 (TM2). (See Fig. 7-118.)
An additional one-shot timer operation can be started by clearing the OVF2 bit of timer control register 1
(TMC1).
Fig. 7-119 shows the setting of control registers. Fig. 7-120 shows the setting procedure. Fig. 7-121 shows
the procedure for starting an additional one-shot operation.
Fig. 7-118 One-Shot Timer Operation
FFH
7
TM2
count value
Value of CR21
0H
Cleared
Count starts
CE2←1
OVF2←0
INTC21
OVF2
Fig. 7-119 Setting of Control Registers for One-Shot Timer Operation
(a) Timer control register 1 (TMC1)
7
6
5
1
4
0
3
2
1
0
TMC1
CE2
×
×
×
×
OVF2
One-shot timer mode
(b) Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
×
×
×
PRM1
PRS23 PRS22 PRS21 PRS20
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64,
128, 256, 512,
or external clock)
(c) Capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2)
7
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
CRC2
0
0
Disables clearing TM2
203
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-120 Setting Procedure for One-Shot Timer Operation
One-shot timer
Set one-shot timer mode
; Sets bit 5 of TMC1 to 1
CMD2←1
Set PRM1 register
Set count value in CR21 register
CR21←n
Set CRC2 register
CRC2←10H
Start counting
; Sets bit 7 of TMC1 to 1
CE2←1
INTC21 interrupt
Fig. 7-121 Procedure for Starting an Additional One-Shot Timer Operation
Restarting one-shot timer
Set count value in CR21
register
CR21←n
Restart counting
; Clears bit 6 of TMC1 to 0
OVF2←0
INTC21 interrupt
204
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.4 8-BIT TIMER/COUNTER 3
7.4.1 Functions
Eight-bit timer/counter 3 can be used as an interval timer, and also as a counter for generating a clock signal used
with the baud rate generator.
When operating as an interval timer, 8-bit timer/counter 3 generates an internal interrupt at specified intervals.
Table 7-19 indicates the interval setting range.
Table 7-19 Intervals of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 3
Resolution
Minimum interval
Maximum interval
8
8/f
(1.3 µs)
(2.6 µs)
(5.3 µs)
(10.7 µs)
(21.3 µs)
(42.7 µs)
(85.3 µs)
8/f
(1.3 µs)
(2.6 µs)
(5.3 µs)
(10.7 µs)
(21.3 µs)
(42.7 µs)
(85.3 µs)
2
× 8/f (341 µs)
CLK
CLK
CLK
8
16/f
16/f
32/f
64/f
2
× 16/f (683 µs)
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
7
8
8
32/f
64/f
2
2
× 32/f
(1.37 ms)
(2.73 ms)
(5.46 ms)
(10.9 ms)
(21.8 ms)
CLK
CLK
× 64/f
CLK
CLK
8
128/f
128/f
2
2
2
× 128/f
× 256/f
× 512/f
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
8
8
256/f
512/f
256/f
512/f
The values in parentheses are based on f
= 6 MHz.
CLK
7.4.2 Configuration
Eight-bit timer/counter 3 consists of one 8-bit timer 3 (TM3) and one 8-bit compare register (CR30).
Fig. 7-122 shows the block diagram of 8-bit timer/counter 3.
205
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-122 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Counter 3
Internal bus
1/8
RESET
8
8
ES41
ES40
ES41,ES40
Compare register (CR30)
INTP4
Edge
detector
INTP4/ASCK
INTC30
INTP4
Coincidence
Clear
fCLK/512
fCLK/256
fCLK/128
fCLK/64
fCLK/32
fCLK/16
fCLK/8
Serial interface
MPX
8-bit timer 3 (TM3)
Timer control
register 0 (TMC0)
Prescaler mode
register (PRM0)
CE3
8
PRS3
PRS2 PRS1
8
PRS0
Internal bus
(1) 8-bit timer 3 (TM3)
TM3 is a timer for counting up with the count clock specified by the lower 4 bits of prescaler mode register
0 (PRM0).
TM3 allows only read operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. The count operation of TM3 can be
enabled or disabled by timer control register 0 (TMC0).
When the RESET signal is applied, TM3 is cleared to 00H, and count operation stops.
(2) Compare registers (CR30)
The CR30 register is an 8-bit registers for holding a value that determines the period of interval timer
operation.
WhenthevalueoftheCR30registercoincideswiththevalueofTM3,thevalueofTM3isautomaticallycleared,
and an interrupt request (INTC30) is generated.
The CR30 register allows both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. When the
RESET signal is applied, the CR30 register becomes undefined.
(3) Prescaler
The prescaler generates count clocks from the internal system clock. From these count clocks generated by
the prescaler, a count clock is selected with the selector for the timer to perform count operation.
206
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
7.4.3 8-Bit Timer/Counter 3 Control Registers
(1) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
The TMC0 register is an 8-bit register for controlling the count operation of 8-bit timer 3 (TM3).
Thehigher4bitscontrolthecountoperationofTM3of8-bittimer/counter3. (Thelower4bitscontrolthecount
operation of TM0 of the 16-bit timer/counter.)
The TMC0 register allows both read and write operations using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-123
shows the format of the TMC0 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the TMC0 register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-123 Format of Timer Control Register 0 (TMC0)
7
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
6
0
TMC0 CE3
CE0 OVF0
7
These bits control counting for 16-bit timer/counter
(TM0) (see Fig. 7-3).
TM3 counting control
Clears and stops counting
Enables counting
CE3
0
1
(2) Prescaler mode register 0 (PRM0)
The PRM0 register is an 8-bit register used to specify a count clock for 8-bit timer 3 (TM3).
The PRM0 register allows only write operation using an 8-bit manipulation instruction. Fig. 7-124 shows the
format of the PRM0 register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the PRM0 register is cleared to 00H.
Fig. 7-124 Format of Prescaler Mode Register 0 (PRM0)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
PRM0
PRS1 PRS0
PRS3 PRS2
0
fCLK = 6 MHz
Specification of count clock [Hz]
PRS3 PRS2 PRS1 PRS0
Resolution
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
×
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
×
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
×
1.3 µs
fCLK/8
fCLK/16
fCLK/32
fCLK/64
fCLK/128
fCLK/256
fCLK/512
2.6
5.3
s
s
s
µ
µ
µ
10.7
21.3 µs
42.7 µs
85.3 µs
Not to be set
Remark
f : System clock frequency
CLK
×: 1 or 2
207
µPD78214 Sub-Series
7.4.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timer 3 (TM3)
(1) Basic operation
Eight-bittimer/counter3performscountoperationbycountingupwiththecountclockspecifiedbythehigher
4 bits of prescaler mode register 0 (PRM0).
When the RESET signal is applied, TM3 is cleared to 00H, and count operation stops.
Bit 7 (CE3) of timer control register 0 (TMC0) is used to enable/disable count operation. (The higher 4 bits of
the TMC0 register are used to control the operation of 8-bit timer/counter 3.) When the CE3 bit is set to 1 by
software, TM3 is cleared to 00H by the first count clock pulse, then count-up operation starts. When the CE3
bitisresetto0, TM3isclearedto00Hbythenextcountclockpulse, thencoincidewithsignalgenerationstops.
If the CE3 bit is set to 1 when the CE3 bit is already set to 1, TM3 is not cleared, but continues count operation.
Fig. 7-125 Basic Operation of 8-Bit Timer 3 (TM3)
(a) Count start → count stop → count start
Count clock
TM3
10H
11H
0H
1H
2H
0FH
0H
0H
1H
Count starts
Count stops
Count starts
CE3←1
CE3←0
CE3←1
(b) When the CE3 bit is set to 1 again after count operation starts
Count clock
1H
2H
3H
4H
5H
0H
TM3
Count starts
Count starts
CE3←1
CE3←1
208
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(2) Clear operation
After a coincidence with the CR30 compare register, 8-bit timer 3 (TM3) can be automatically cleared.
If a TM3 clear cause occurs, TM3 is cleared to 00H by the next count clock pulse. This means that even if a
TM3 clear cause occurs, TM3 holds the value existing at that time until the next count clock pulse is applied.
Fig. 7-126 TM3 Cleared by a Coincidence with Compare Register (CR30)
TM3
count clock
1
n
0
n-1
TM3
7
Compare register
(CR30)
n
Coincidence
Cleared here
between TM3
and CR30
TM3 can also be cleared by software when the CE3 bit of the timer control register (TMC0) is reset to 0.
Similarly, clear operation is performed by the count clock pulse following the resetting of CE3 bit to 0. If the
CE3 bit is set to 1 before TM3 is reset to 0 by the resetting of the CE3 bit to 0 (that is, before the first count clock
pulse is applied after the CE3 bit is reset to 0), two operations are simultaneously performed: one operation
is an operation to clear TM3 to 0, and the other operation is a count operation starting with the counting of
0.
Fig. 7-127 Clear Operation When the CE3 Bit Is Reset to 0
(a) Basic operation
Count clock
n-1
n
0
TM3
CE3
209
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(b) Restart after 0 is set in TM3 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
1
0
0
TM3
CE3
When the CE3 bit is set to 1 after this count clock,
counting starts from 0 on the count clock input
after the CE3 bit has been set.
(c) Restart before 0 is set in TM3 cleared
Count clock
n-1
n
0
1
2
TM3
CE3
When the CE3 bit is set to 1 before this count clock, Clearing
TM3 by CE3←0 and counting by CE3←1 are performed simultaneously.
7.4.5 Compare Register Operation
Eight-bit timer/counter 3 performs a compare operation to compare the value set in the compare register with a
timer count value.
When the value set in the compare register (CR30) coincides with a count value of 8-bit timer 3 (TM3), the interrupt
request (INTC30) is generated.
After the value of the CR30 register coincides with a count value of TM3, the value of TM3 is automatically cleared.
Thus, 8-bit timer/counter 3 can operate as an interval timer for repeatedly counting up to the value set in the CR30
register.
210
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-128 Compare Operation
CR30
CR30
TM3
count value
0H
Cleared
(coincidence)
Cleared
(coincidence)
Count starts
CE←1
INTC30
interrupt request
7
7.4.6 Sample Applications
(1) Interval timer operation
Eight-bit timer/counter 3 can be used as an interval timer that generates an interrupt at intervals of a count
time specified beforehand. Eight-bit timer/counter 3 can also be used for baud rate generation.
This interval timer has a resolution from 1.3 µs to 85.3µs, and can count up to 341 µs and 21.8 ms, respectively
(at internal system clock f
= 6 MHz).
CLK
Fig. 7-129 shows the timing of interval timer operation. Fig. 7-130 shows the setting of control registers for
interval timer operation. Fig. 7-131 shows the setting procedure.
Fig. 7-129 Timing of Interval Timer Operation
n
n
TM3
count value
0H
Cleared
Cleared
Count starts
Compare register
(CR30)
n
INTC30
interrupt request
Interrupt accepted
Interval
Interrupt accepted
Interval
Remark Interval = (n + 1) × x/f
, 0 ≤ n ≤ FFH
CLK
x = 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
211
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-130 Setting of Control Registers for Interval Timer Operation
(a) Timer control register 0 (TMC0)
#
4
0
3
1
0
0
7
6
0
5
0
2
0
1
0
×
TMC0
Overflow flag
Enables counting TM0
(b) Prescaler mode register 0 (PRM0)
4
3
0
7
6
5
2
0
1
0
0
0
PRS3 PRS2 PRS1 PRS0
PRM0
Specifies count clock
(x/fCLK; where x = 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512)
Fig. 7-131 Setting Procedure for Interval Timer Operation
Interval timer
Set PRM0 register
Set count value in CR30 register
CR30←n
Start counting
CE←1
; Sets bit 7 of TMC0 to 1
INTC30 interrupt
7.5 NOTES
7.5.1 Common Notes on All Timers/Counters
(1) When the registers listed below are rewritten while a counter is operating (with the CEm bit of register TMCn
isset), thecountercanmalfunction. Thecauseofsuchamalfunctionisthatwhenahardwarefunctionchange
made by the rewriting of a register conflicts with a state change of the function before the rewriting, which
change is to have priority is undefined.
Before rewriting these registers, be sure to stop counter operation for safety.
• Prescaler mode register (PRMn)
• Capture/compare control register (CRCn)
• Timer output control register (TOC)
• CMD2 bit of timer control register 1 (TMC1)
212
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(2) The OVFm flag for holding an overflow from a timer/counter is contained in register TMCn used to control the
operation of the timer/counter. When a read/modify/write instruction (such as AND TMCn,#7FH) is executed,
for example, the OVFm flag may be cleared. (Even if the OVFm flag is 0 when the OVFm flag is read by the
CPU, the OVFm flag may already be set to 1 by a timer/counter overflow when the OVFm flag is rewritten to
by the CPU. However, the OVFm flag was 0 when being read by the CPU, so that the OVFm flag is cleared to
0.)
To prevent the OVFm flag of a timer/counter controlled by register TMCn from being cleared, use the method
below.
1. Read the TMm register of the timer/counter using the OVFm flag.
2. After a timer/counter operation, read the TMm register again.
3. Make a comparison between two read values. Set the OVFm flag if the value read later is smaller than
the value read first.
When this method is used, the OVFm flag must not be manipulated. In addition, the time between the first
TMm read operation and the next TMm read operation must be shorter than the full-count time of TMm.
7
Example: To prevent the OVF1 flag of timer/counter 1 from being cleared
MOV A,TM1
MOV TMC1,#xxx01000B ; xxx depends on the manipulation of timer/counter 2.
CMP A,TM1
; Checks the timer value.
BL
BE
$NEXT
$NEXT
MOV TMC1,#xxx011000B ; Sets OVF1.
NEXT:
(3) If the value of a compare register coincides with the value of a timer register when an instruction for stopping
timer operation is executed, the count operation of the timer stops, but an interrupt request is generated.
To prevent an interrupt request from being generated when timer operation is stopped, mask the interrupt
by using the mask register before stopping the timer.
Program that can generate an interrupt request
Program that generates no interrupt request
·
·
·
·
·
·
← An interrupt from
Example: MOV TMC1, #6CH
AND MK0H, #0F6H
← An interrupt request
timer/counter2isdisa-
AND MK0H, #0F6H
isgeneratedfromthe
MOV TMC1, #6CH
bled.
·
timer/counter be-
tween these instruc-
tions.
·
AND IF0H, #0F6H
← The interrupt request
flag for timer/counter
2 is cleared.
·
·
·
·
(4) After an operation for starting a timer/counter is performed (CEn ← 1: n = 0 to 3), a maximum of 1 count clock
pulse is required until the timer/counter actually starts. (See Fig. 7-132.)
When a timer/counter is used as an interval timer, for example, the first interval is longer by a maximum of
1 clock pulse. After the first interval, the specified interval occurs.
213
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-132 Count Start Operation
Count clock
TMn (n = 0 to 3)
0
1
2
3
0
CEn
Actual counting starts
Count start instruction by software (CEn←1)
(5) Even when an instruction is executed to stop a timer (CEn ← 0), the value of TMn is not cleared to 0
immediately. Instead, the value of TMn is cleared to 0 by the count clock pulse occurring after an instruction
is executed (CEn ← 0) to stop the timer.
Even if a timer is started (CEn ← 1) before the timer is cleared to 0 immediately after the timer is stopped, the
timer counts up starting with 0.
Fig. 7-133 Count Operation Stop
Count clock
m
TMn (n = 0 to 3)
m+1
0
Count stop
(CEn←0)
Counter is cleared here
Fig. 7-134 Timing of Count Operation Stop and Restart
Count clock
TMn (n = 0 to 3)
m
m+1
0
1
2
Count start (CE←1)
Count stop (CEn←0)
214
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(6) When a register associated with a timer/counter is accessed, wait states as many as the maximum number
Note
of clock pulses
indicated below are automatically inserted.
Note One wait state: 1/f
CLK
Table 7-20 Maximum Number of Wait States Inserted When Registers Associated
with Timers/Counters Are Accessed
Number of wait states inserted
Register
For read
For write
0
—
—
—
1
1
1
TMCn
PRMn
CRCn
TOC
1
1
7
1
CRnm
TM0
7
—
—
—
—
15
15
7
TM1
TM2
TM3
(7) While an instruction for writing to compare register CRnm (n = 0 to 3, m = 0, 1) is being executed, no
coincidence is detected between the CRnm register being written to and TMn (n = 0 to 3). For example, if the
value of the CRnm register remains unchanged after the CRnm is written to, no interrupt request is generated,
and timer output (TOn: n = 0 to 3) does not change even when the value of TMn coincides with the value of
the CRnm register.
Whileatimer/counterisperformingcountoperation, CRnmregisterwriteoperationmustbeperformedwhen
the value of TMn does not coincide with the value of the CRnm register before or after CRnm register write
operation. (CRnm register write operation must be performed, for example, immediately after an interrupt
request is generated by a coincidence between TMn and CRnm.)
(8) A coincidence between TMn and CRnm is detected only when TMn is incremented. This means that no
interruptrequestisgenerated, andnotimeroutputchangeismadeevenifthesamevalueasofTMniswritten
to CRnm.
215
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(9) When PWM is used, a PWM signal with a 100% duty factor is output if a value less than the value of TMn (n
= 0, 2) is set in compare register CRnm (n = 0, 2, m = 0, 1). CRnm rewrite operation must be performed using
an interrupt generated by a coincidence between TMn and CRnm to be rewritten.
Fig. 7-135 Example of PWM Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor
FFFFH or FFH
FFFFH or FFH
FFFFH or FFH
FFFFH or FFH
n1
n1
n3
TMn
count value
n2
n2
n2
0H
n1
n2
CRnm
TOp
(p = 0,2)
When a value, n2 less than TMn value, n3 is written to CRnm
here, the duty factor is 100% during this period.
Remark ALVp = 0
216
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(10)Notes on compare register rewrite operation when PPG output is used
(a) If a value less than the value of TMn is written into compare register CRn0 (n = 0, 2) before the value of
the CRn0 register coincides with the value of TMn (n = 0, 2), a PPG signal with a 100% duty factor is output
in that period. CRn0 rewrite operation must be performed using an interrupt generated by a coincidence
between TMn and CRn0.
Fig. 7-136 Example of PPG Output Signal with a 100% Duty Factor
CRn1
CRn1
CRn1
CRn1
n1
n1
n3
TMn
count value
7
n2
n2
n2
0H
n1
n2
CRn0
TOp
(p = 0,2)
When a value, n2 less than TMn value, n3 is written to CRn0
here, the duty factor is 100% during this period.
Remark ALVp = 0
(b) If the current value of the CRn1 compare register is decreased below the value of TMn, the PPG period
becomes as long as the full-count time of TM2. At this time, if CRn1 is rewritten after the value of the
CRn0 compare register coincides with the value of TMn, the inactive level is output until TMn overflows
to 0, then normal PPG output is resumed. If CRn1 is rewritten before the value of CRn0 coincides with the
value of TMn, the active level is output until the value of CRn0 coincides with the value of TMn. When the
value of CRn0 coincides with the value of TMn before TMn overflows to 0, the inactive level is output at
that time. When TMn overflows to 0, the active level is output, and normal PPG output is resumed.
CRn1 rewrite operation must be performed using an interrupt generated by a coincidence between TMn
and CRn1.
217
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-137 Example of PPG Output Period Made Longer
Full count value
n1
n1
n1
n3
n3
n5
n2
n2
TMn
n4
0H
n4
n3
n1
CRn0
CRn1
n2
TOp
(p = 0,2)
TOp becomes inactive when CRn0 coincides with TM0;
otherwise, TOp remains active.
The PPG period is extended when a value,
n2 less than TMn value, n5 is written to
CRn1 here.
Remark ALVp = 1
(c) If the PPG period is too short for interrupt acceptance, the measures described in (a) and (b) above do not
lead to solution. Consider other measures (such as masking all interrupts and polling interrupt request
flags by software).
(11) In PWM output, the actual pulse width is longer than a value obtained with the approximate expression by
two clock pulses of f
for the active level, and is shorter than such an approximate value by two clock pulses
#
CLK
of f
for the inactive level. Take this point into consideration when high-precision output is required or a
CLK
high-speed count clock is used. For details, see Section 7.1.7 and Section 7.3.9.
(12) Iftimeroutputisdisabled(ENTOn=0:n=0,1,or2,3),theoutputlevelontheTOn(n=0,1,or2,3)istheinverted
value of the value set in ALVn (n = 0, 1, or 2, 3). Accordingly, note that if timer output is disabled when the
PWM output function or PPG output function is selected, the active level is output.
(13) In PPG output, the actual pulse width is longer than a value obtained with the approximate expression by two
clock pulses of f
for the active level, and is shorter than such an approximate value by two clock pulses of
CLK
#
f
for the inactive level. Take this point into consideration when high-precision output is required, the PPG
CLK
pulse period is short, or a high-speed count clock is used.
For details, see Section 7.1.8 and Section 7.3.10.
218
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
(14) With an in-circuit emulator, digital noise cannot be removed correctly. When a timer/counter is used together
with edge detection function, note the point below.
(a) When IE-78210-R is used
Operations are performed on an erroneously detected edge.
(b) When other in-circuit emulators are used
• Timer/counter capture operation and clear operation
An erroneously detected edge has no effect. Accordingly, even if an interrupt is generated by an
erroneously detected edge, the capture value is not updated. Particularly, note that the value of CR22
after being read is undefined.
• Timer/counter compare operation
If a mode is set which performs a clear operation after a capture operation, an erroneously detected
edge changes the timing of coincidence-based interrupt generation. As the result, an interrupt is
repeatedly generated at a time when the value of the timer/counter does not coincide with the value
of the compare register. Normal coincidence-based interrupt generation is resumed when a normal
edgeisappliedorthetimer/counterisstopped. Timeroutputisnotaffectedbyanerroneouslydetected
edge, but is performed with the normal timing.
7
For details of erroneous edge detection, see Section 11.4.
When using an in-circuit emulator, see also Section 7.5.4.
#
7.5.2 Notes on 16-Bit Timer/Counter
Before compare operation can be performed with the 16-bit timer/counter, an appropriate value must be written
into a compare register to be used.
7.5.3 Notes on 8-Bit Timer/Counter 2
(1) When 8-bit timer/counter 2 is used as an external event counter, the increment of TM2 lags the input of a valid
edge to the CI pin by a maximum of 28 system clock pulses (4.67 µs: f
= 6 MHz). This means that TM2 may
CLK
not be incremented when read immediately after an edge is detected. In addition, the generation of an
interrupt request by a coincidence with a compare register (CR20, CR21) lags the input of an edge. Take this
point into consideration when fine timing control is required.
219
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 7-138 Interrupt Request Generation Using External Event Counter
CI
8 to 12 clocks
ICI
16 clocks (Max.)
Countable
timing of
TM2
Count clock of
TM2
n-1
n
n+1
TM2
ICI: Signal that has gone
through the edge
Coincidence
TM2 counts up here
detector of CI input
between INTP2 or is compared with
and ICI
compare register.
(2) When 8-bit timer/counter 2 is used as an external event counter, TM2 alone cannot distinguish between the
state where no valid edge is applied and the state where only one valid edge has been applied. (See Fig. 7-
139.) In either case, the value of TM2 is 0. When the states need to be distinguished from each other, use the
INTP2 interrupt request flag. (The same pin is used as the INTP2 pin as well as the CI pin, so that the functions
can be used at the same time.) Fig. 7-140 shows an example of distinction.
Fig. 7-139 Example Where Input of No Valid Edge Cannot Be Distinguished from Input of
Only One Valid Edge with External Event Counter
CI
TM2
1
2
0
0
Cannot be distinguished
Count starts
220
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-140 How to Distinguish Input of No Valid Edge from Input of Only One Valid Edge
with External Event Counter
(a) Count start processing
Count starts
Clear INTP2 interrupt
request flag
; Clears PIF2 (0)
; Sets CE2 (1)
IF0L.2←0
Start counting
TMC1.7←1
7
End
(b) Count value read processing
Reads count value
Read contents of TM2
A←TM2
Yes
; Check TM2 value.
If 0, check interrupt
request flag.
A = 0?
No
Yes
IF0L.2 = 1?
No
; Check contents of PIF2.
If 1, valid edge has
been input.
A←A + 1
End
; The number of valid edges input to register A is set.
221
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) With an in-circuit emulator, digital noise cannot be removed correctly. When the timer/counter is used
together with edge detection function, note the point below.
• When IE-78210-R is used
All functions are performed on an erroneously detected edge.
• When other in-circuit emulators are used
When 8-bit timer/counter 2 is used as an external event counter, an erroneously detected edge changes the
timing of coincidence-based interrupt generation. As the result, an interrupt is repeatedly generated at a
time when the value of the timer/counter does not coincide with the value of the compare register.
Normal coincidence-based interrupt generation is resumed when the timer/counter is stopped.
Timer output is not affected by an erroneously detected edge, but is performed with the normal timing.
For details of erroneous edge detection, see Section 11.4.
When using an in-circuit emulator, see also Section 7.5.4.
(4) The value of the CR22 register, after being read, becomes undefined. A captured value can be used more than
once by saving the captured value to a register or memory.
7.5.4 Notes on Using In-Circuit Emulators
When an in-circuit emulator is used, noise removal operation for INTP0, INTP1, INTP2/CI, and INTP3 may not be
performed normally, thus resulting in noise detected erroneously as an edge. For details of erroneous edge
detection, see Section 11.4. How a timer/counter operates with an erroneously detected edge is described below.
(1) When IE-78210-R is used
All timer/counter-related operations are performed on erroneously detected edges in the same way as on
normal edges.
(2) When other in-circuit emulators are used
(a) Capture operation
Capture operation is not performed on an erroneously detected edge. However, an interrupt is generated
on an erroneously detected edge. The value of a capture register read during interrupt handling
performed on an erroneously detected edge is as follows:
• For CR02 and CR11
Value captured on the immediately preceding normal edge
• For CR22
Undefined value
(b) Clear operation after capture operation (with only 8-bit timer/counter 1 and 8-bit timer/counter 2)
Clear operation is not performed on an erroneously detected edge. After erroneous edge detection,
however, an interrupt request to be generated when the value of the timer/counter coincides with the
value of a compare register is generated with the timing not based on the values of the timer/counter and
compare register. This interrupt generation timing is the timing assuming that the timer/counter is
cleared. (See Fig. 7-141.)
When a coincidence between the value of 8-bit timer/counter 1 and the value of a compare register is used
as an output trigger for a real-time output port, such a deviated timing is used as an output trigger for the
real-time output port.
The timer output function of 8-bit timer/counter 2 is not affected by an erroneously detected edge, but
operates with the correct timing. Such an interrupt generation timing deviation as described above can
be corrected by the following operations:
• Clear operation on a normal edge
• Clearing bit CEn (n = 1, 2) for the 8-bit timer/counter in timer control register 1 (TMC1) to 0
222
Chapter 7 Timer/Counter Units
Fig. 7-141 Interrupt Generation Timing Change by an Erroneously Detected Edge
n2
TMn
count value
(n = 1,2)
n1
n1
Erroneous edge detection
7
µ
For PD78214
Interrupt generation
timing when CRnm = n1
(n = 1,2, m = 0,1)
Emulator other
than IE-78210-R
Interrupt request is generated
by the effect of an erroneously
detected edge
µ
For PD78214
Interrupt generation
timing when CRnm = n2
(n = 1,2, m = 0,1)
Emulator other
than IE-78210-R
Interrupt is generated here
by the effect of an erroneously
detected edge
Interrupt request is not
generated by the effect of
an erroneously detected here
223
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) Event counter function (with only 8-bit timer/counter 2)
An erroneously detected edge causes no change in the value of the timer/counter. However, the timing
for generating an interrupt by a coincidence between the value of the timer/counter and the value of a
compare register becomes faster by the number of edges detected erroneously.
The timer output function is not affected by an erroneously detected edge, but operates with the correct
timing.
Such an interrupt generation timing deviation as described above can be corrected by the following
operations:
• Clear operation on a normal edge when the clear function following capture operation is used
• Clearing the CE2 bit of timer control register 1 (TMC1) to 0
224
CHAPTER 8 A/D CONVERTER
TheµPD78214containsananalog-to-digital(A/D)converterwitheightmultiplexedanaloginputpins(AN0through
AN7).
ThisA/Dconverterusessuccessiveapproximation Theconversionresultisstoredinan8-bitA/Dconversionresult
register (ADCR). Conversion can be performed at high speed (with conversion time of 30 µs and at f
and with high accuracy.
= 6 MHz)
CLK
The A/D converter can be started in the following two modes:
Hardware start: Conversion starts on a trigger input (INTP5).
°
Software start: Conversion starts as specified in the A/D converter mode register (ADM).
°
Once started, the A/D converter operates in either of the following modes:
Scan mode: Analog inputs are sequentially selected for A/D conversion from all the input pins.
°
Select mode: Only one input pin is used. Analog signals are successively input from this pin to the converter.
°
8
These start and operating modes are specified by the ADM register. The ADM register is also used to stop
conversion.
When the conversion result is sent to the ADCR register, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated (except in the
select mode started by software). Therefore, the conversion result can be successively sent to the memory by
using a macro service.
Table 8-1 Modes Generating the INTAD
Scan mode
Select mode
Hardware start
Software start
°
°
°
—
8.1 CONFIGURATION
Fig. 8-1 shows the configuration of the A/D converter.
225
µPD78214 Sub-Series
T a p s e l e c t o r
I n p u t s e l e c t o r
226
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
Cautions 1. To prevent malfunction due to noise, insert a capacitor between each analog input pins (AN0 through AN7) and the AV pin
SS
and between the reference voltage input pin (AV ) and the AV pin.
REF
SS
Fig. 8-2 Example of Capacitors Connected to the A/D Converter Pins
µPD78214
Analog input
AN0-AN7
100-
500pF
Reference
AVREF
voltage input
AVSS
8
2. Do not apply a voltage out of the rated voltage range (AV through AV ) to the A/D converter input pins. See Section 8.6
SS
REF
for details.
(1) Input circuit
The input circuit selects an input analog signal as specified by the A/D converter mode register (ADM) and
sends the signal to the sample and hold circuit in accordance with a specified operating mode.
(2) Sample and hold circuit
The sample and hold circuit samples each of the analog signals successively sent from the input circuit and
retains the analog signals during A/D conversion.
(3) Voltage comparator
The voltage comparator compares the potential differences between the analog inputs and the voltage taps
of the serial resistor string.
(4) Series resistor string
The series resistor string generates a voltage that matches the input analog signal voltage.
The series resistor string is connected between the reference voltage pin (AV ) and the GND pin (AV ) of
REF
SS
the A/D converter. It consists of 255 resistors, each having equal resistance, and two resistors, each having
half the resistance of the other 255 resistors. This configuration enables the voltage between the AV and
REF
AV pins to be divided into 256 steps.
SS
A voltage tap of the resistor string is selected by a tap selector, which is controlled by the SAR register.
(5) Successive approximation register (SAR)
When the voltage at one of the voltage taps of the serial resistor string matches the analog input voltage, this
8-bit register is set with the corresponding data on a bit-by-bit basis, starting at the most significant bit (MSB).
When the SAR is set up to the least significant bit (LSB), the SAR contents (conversion result) are sent to the
A/D conversion result register (ADCR) and held there.
(6) A/D conversion result register (ADCR)
This 8-bit register holds the A/D conversion result. Each time A/D conversion ends, this register is loaded with
the conversion result received from the SAR.
When the RESET signal is input, the contents of the register become undefined.
227
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(7) Edge detector
The edge detector detects the valid edge of an input at the interrupt request input pin (INTP5) and generates
an external interrupt request signal (INTP5) and an external trigger for A/D conversion.
The valid edge of an input at the INTP5 pin is specified by external interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1) (see Fig.
11-2). The external trigger is enabled or disabled by the ADM register (see Section 8.2).
8.2 A/D CONVERTER MODE REGISTER (ADM)
This 8-bit register controls A/D converter operations.
A bit manipulation instruction or an 8-bit manipulation instruction can be used to read data from or write data to
this register. Fig. 8-3 shows the ADM format.
Bit 0 (MS) of the ADM register controls the A/D converter operating mode.
Bits 1, 2, and 3 (ANI0, ANI1, and ANI2) select analog input signals to be converted to digital form.
Bit 6 (TRG) is used to enable external synchronization for A/D conversion. When the TRG bit is set to 1, if the CS
bit is already 1, the conversion is initialized each time a valid edge arrives at the INTP5 pin as an external trigger.
When the TRG bits is reset to 0, conversion is carried out regardless of the state of the INTP5 pin.
Bit 7 (CS) controls A/D conversion. When this bit is set to 1, the A/D converter starts operating. When the CS bit
is reset to 0, the converter stops, even if it is in the middle of conversion. At this point, however, the ADCR register
contents are not updated, nor does an INTPAD interrupt occurs. Power supply to the voltage comparator is
stopped to reduce supply current to the A/D converter.
When the RESET signal is input, the ADM register is reset to 00H.
Caution When using the STOP mode, reset the CS bit to 0 beforehand to reduce supply current. If the CS bit remains set to 1, conversion
do stops when the STOP mode is selected, but power supply to the voltage comparator is not stopped. Consequently, the supply
current to the A/D converter does not decrease.
228
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
Fig. 8-3 A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM) Format
7
6
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
ADM
CS
TRG
FR
ANI2 ANI1 ANI0
MS
Specifies A/D conversion mode
ANI2 ANI1 ANI0
MS
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Scans AN0 input
0
Scans AN0 and AN1 inputs
Scans AN0 to AN2 inputs
Scans AN0 to AN3 inputs
Scans AN0 to AN4 inputs
Scans AN0 to AN5 inputs
Scans AN0 to AN6 inputs
Scans AN0 to AN7 inputs
Selects AN0 input
0
0
Scan
mode
0
0
0
8
0
1
1
Selects AN1 input
1
Selects AN2 input
1
Select
mode
Selects AN3 input
1
Selects AN4 input
1
Selects AN5 input
1
Selects AN6 input
1
Selects AN7 input
Controls conversion speed
fCLK >4 MHz
FR
0
Note
Note
180/fCLK
120/fCLK
1
fCLK £ 4 MHz
TRG
0
Controls external terminal trigger
Disables external trigger
1
Enables external trigger
CS
0
Controls A/D conversion
Stops A/D conversion
Starts A/D conversion
1
Note F : System clock frequency
CLK
229
µPD78214 Sub-Series
8.3 OPERATION
8.3.1 Basic A/D Converter Operation
(1) A/D conversion sequence
The A/D converter operates as follows:
(a) The input selector selects one of the analog input pins (AN0 through AN7) according to the mode of
operation specified in the A/D converter mode register (ADM).
(b) The sample and hold circuit samples the voltage at the analog input pin selected by the input selector.
(c) After a certain sampling period, the sample and hold circuit goes on hold and retains the input analog
voltage until A/D conversion ends.
(d) When bit 7 of the SAR register is set, the tap selector sets the voltage tap of the serial resistor string to
(255/512)AV
(
(1/2)AV ).
REF
REF
(e) The voltage comparator compares the voltage at the serial resistor string with an input analog signal
voltage. If the analog input signal voltage is greater than (1/2)AV , the MSB of the SAR register remains
REF
set. If it is less than (1/2)AV , the MSB is reset.
REF
(f) Bit 6 of the SAR register is set to 1 automatically, and the voltage comparator starts comparing the next
analog input signal voltage. A voltage tap of the serial resistor string is selected as follows, according to
the state of bit 7, which has already been set according to the result.
...
• Bit 7 = 1 (383/512)AV
(3/4)AV
(1/4)AV
REF
REF
REF
REF
...
• Bit 7 = 0 (127/512)AV
The voltage at this tap is compared with the input analog voltage. According to the comparison result,
bit 6 of the SAR register is set or reset as follows:
• Analog input voltage ≥ voltage tap voltage: Bit 6 = 1
• Analog input voltage < voltage tap voltage: Bit 6 = 0
(g) These comparisons are carried out successively until the least significant bit (bit 0) of the SAR register is
compared (binary search method).
(h) When all the 8 bits of the SAR register have been compared, a valid digital number is left in the SAR
register. This digital number is sent to and latched in the ADCR register.
At the same time, an A/D conversion end interrupt (INTAD) can be generated (except in software-started
select mode). This INTAD interrupt should be handled as either a vectored interrupt or by a macro service
(described later).
Fig. 8-4 Basic A/D Converter Operation
Conversion time
Sampling time
A/D converter
operation
Sampling
A/D conversion
Conversion
result
C0H or
40H
Undefined
SAR
80H
Conversion
result
ADCR
INTADNote
Note Except for software-started select mode
230
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
A/D conversion continues until the CS bit is reset by software.
If data is written to the ADM register during conversion, conversion is initialized. If the CS bit is 1,
conversion is started from the beginning.
When the RESET signal is input, the ADCR register contents become undefined.
(2) Input voltage and conversion result
The analog voltages input to the analog input pins (AN0 through AN7) are related to the A/D conversion result
(value held in the ADCR), as follows:
V
IN
ADCR = INT(
× 256 + 0.5)
AV
REF
or,
AV
AV
REF
REF
(ADCR - 0.5) ×
≤ V < (ADCR + 0.5) ×
IN
256
256
Remark INT( ) : Function returning the integer part of a value specified in ( )
V
:
:
Analog input voltage
AV pin voltage
IN
8
AV
REF
REF
ADCR : Value in the ADCR register
Fig. 8-5 shows the relations between the analog voltages and the A/D conversion results.
Fig. 8-5 Relations between Analog Input Voltages and A/D Conversion Results
255
254
A/D conversion
result (ADCR)
253
3
2
1
0
1
1
3
2
5
3
507 254 509 255 511
512 256 512 256 512
1
512 256 512 256 512 256
Input voltage/AVREF
231
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) A/D conversion time
The time required for A/D conversion is determined by the system clock frequency (f ) and the FR bit of the
CLK
ADM register. To maintain A/D conversion accuracy above a certain level, it is necessary to set the FR bit as
listed in Table 8-2 according to the system clock frequency.
This A/D conversion time includes all the time required for one A/D conversion sequence and the sampling
time.
Table 8-2 shows the conversion time and sampling time.
Table 8-2 A/D Conversion Time
System clock (f
range
)
CLK
FR bit
Conversion time
Sampling time
4 MHz < f
≤ 6 MHz
0
1
180/f
(30 µs to 45 µs)
36/f
(6 µs to 9 µs)
CLK
CLK
CLK
CLK
2 MHz ≤ f
≤ 4 MHz
120/f
(30 µs to 60 µs)
24/f
(6 µs to 12 µs)
CLK
CLK
8.3.2 Select Mode
Bits 1 through 3 (ANI0 through ANI2) of the ADM register specify one analog input pin. A/D conversion is repeated
for the specified pin. The resultant digital data is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).
If bit 6 (TRG) of the ADM register is set to enable an external trigger, an A/D conversion end interrupt request
(INTAD) is generated.
Fig. 8-6 Select Mode Operation Timing
(a) TRG bit ← 0
A/D
AN3
AN3
AN3
AN3
AN3
AN3
AN3
AN3
conversion
Conversion starts
CS←1
MS←1
ANI2-0←011
ADCR
AN3
AN3
AN3
(b) TRG bit ← 1
INTP5
Initialization
Initialization
Initialization
A/D
conversion
AN0
AN0
AN0
AN0
AN0
AN0
AN0
Conversion
end
Conversion
end
Conversion
end
Conversion Conversion
end end
Conversion starts
CS←1
MS←1
ANI2-0←000
ADCR
AN0
AN0
AN0
AN0
INTAD
232
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
8.3.3 Scan Mode
In the scan mode, signals input from the analog input pins, specified by bits 1 through 3 (ANI0 through ANI2) of
the A/D converter mode register (ADM), are selected successively for conversion.
For example, when the ANI2 through ANI0 bits of the ADM register are 001, the AN0 and AN1 pins are scanned
repeatedly, starting at the ANI0 pin in the sequence: AN0 → AN1 → AN0 → AN1 →... In this mode, each time
conversion is completed, the conversion result is stored in the ADCR register, and an A/D conversion end interrupt
request (INTAD) is generated.
Fig. 8-7 Scan Mode Operation Timing
(a) TRG bit ← 0
A/D
conversion
AN0
AN1
AN0
AN1
AN0
AN1
Conversion
end
Conversion starts Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion
Conversion
end
end
end
end
end
CS←1
MS←0
8
ANI2-0←001
ADCR
AN0
AN1
AN0
AN1
AN0
INTAD
(b) TRG bit ← 1
INTP5
Initialization
Initialization Initialization
Initialization
A/D
conversion
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN0
AN0
AN1
AN0
Conversion
end
Conversion starts
Conversion
end
Conversion
end
Conversion
end
CS←1
MS←0
ANI2-0←010
ADCR
INTAD
AN0
AN1
AN0
Cautions 1. When the result of A/D conversion is read by using a vectored interrupt during the scan mode, if the A/D conversion end
interrupt is kept pending for a prolonged time because of other interrupts being handled (at least 180 clocks if the FR bit is 0
or 120 clocks if the FR bit is 1), the conversion result cannot be accurately measured. To measure the conversion result
accurately, take the following measures:
• Keep the time required to handle other interrupts adequately shorter than the required A/D conversion time.
• Use the multiplexed interrupt mode so that the A/D conversion end interrupt can be accepted even when other interrupts
are being handled.
• Use a macro service to handle the A/D conversion end interrupt.
Note that the A/D conversion end interrupt may also be kept pending by the causes described in Section 12.3.5.
Of the measures described above, the macro service might be the simplest method for you application.
233
µPD78214 Sub-Series
2. If the ADM register is set after registers related to interrupts have been set during the scan mode, an unwanted interrupt may
occur, thus causing the storage location of the conversion result to appear to have shifted. To prevent this, take the actions
listed below in the stated order.
• Write to the ADM register.
• Reset the interrupt request flag (PIF5) to 0.
• Set the interrupt mask flag or interrupt service mode flag.
8.3.4 A/D Conversion Activated by Software Start
Software can start A/D conversion by writing such a value to the ADM register that the TRG bit is reset to 0 and
the CS bit is set to 1.
If such a value is written to the ADM register again during A/D conversion (the CS bit is 1) that the TRG is reset to
0andtheCSbitissetto1, theongoingA/Dconversionsequenceisstopped, andanotherA/Dconversionsequence
(that matches the newly written value) is started immediately.
Once A/D conversion is started, the conversion sequence of the new data is started according to the mode of
operation specified in the ADM register immediately when the conversion sequence of the previous data is
completed. A/D conversion continues until a write instruction is executed for the ADM register.
If A/D conversion is started by software (the TRG bit is 0), an input to the INTP5 (pin P26) does not affect the
conversion.
(1) Select-mode A/D conversion
In the select mode, the analog signal, input to the pin selected by the ADM register, is converted to digital form.
When conversion is completed, the analog signal at the same pin is converted again. An interrupt request
(INTAD) does not occur when conversion is completed.
Fig. 8-8 Software-Started Select-Mode A/D Conversion
A/D conversion
ANn
ANn
ANn
ANm
ANm
ANm
ADM rewriting
CS←1, TRG←0
Conversion starts
CS←1, TRG←0
ADCR
ANn
ANn
ANm
ANm
Remark n = 0, 1, ..., 7
m = 0, 1, ..., 7
234
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
(2) Scan-mode A/D conversion
When triggered, conversion begins with the signal input to the AN0 pin. When the conversion sequence for
the AN0 pin is completed, the signal at the next analog input pin is converted. Each time a conversion
sequence is completed, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated.
Fig. 8-9 Software-Started Scan-Mode A/D Conversion
A/D conversion
(scans AN0 to
AN2)
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN0
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN0
AN1
AN0
ADM rewriting
CS←1,
TRG←0
Conversion
starts
CS←1, TRG←0
ADCR
INTAD
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN0
AN1
AN2
8
Interrupt request
accepted
8.3.5 A/D Conversion Activated by Hardware Start
Hardware can start A/D conversion by setting both the TRG and CS bits of the ADM register to 1. When they are
set to 1, the A/D converter is ready to receive an external signal. A/D conversion begins when a valid edge arrives
at the INT5 pin (pin P26).
AfterA/Dconversionisstarted,ifanothervalidedgearrivesattheINT5pin,thecurrentsequenceofA/Dconversion
isstopped, andanothersequenceofconversionisstartedfromthebeginning, inaccordancewiththecurrentADM
register contents.
If such a value that both the TRG and CS bits are set to 1 is written to the ADM register again during A/D conversion
(the CS bit is 1), the current conversion sequence (including a wait period for an external signal) is stopped. The
converter stands by, until a valid edge arrives at the INTP5 pin in the mode of A/D conversion specified by the
written value. When a valid edge arrives, conversion starts.
By using this function, A/D conversion can be synchronized with an external signal.
When one A/D conversion sequence is completed, another conversion sequence is started immediately in an
operating mode set in the ADM register (the converter does not wait for the input from the INTP5 pin). Conversion
continues until an instruction that writes to the ADM register is executed or until a valid edge arrives at the INTP5
pin.
Cautions 1. Eight to twelve system clocks are required from when a valid edge appears at the INTP5 pin until A/D conversion is actually
started. Take this delay into consideration when designing your application. See Chapter 11 for details on the edge detection
function.
2. When A/D conversion is already activated by hardware start (by a valid edge at the INTP5 pin), if another valid edge arrives at
the INTP5 pin, the A/D converter may malfunction. To be specific, the malfunction occurs if the valid edge arrives at the INTP5
pin when the previous conversion result is being stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR). In this case, an A/D
conversion end interrupt (INTAD) is generated. However, the value stored in the ADCR register is not the conversion result.
Instead, it is always 7FH (see Fig. 8-10).
235
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 8-10 Example of Malfunction in a Hardware-Started A/D Conversion
INTP5
Note 2
Conversion trigger
A/D converter
operatioon
Conversion 1
Conversion 2
Conversion
result 1
7FHNote 1
ADCR
INTAD
Conversion completion and
conversion trigger occur
simultaneously
Notes 1. When the operation is normal, the result of conversion 2 is stored. If a malfunction occurs, however, value 7FH is stored.
2. Time from when an input to the INT5 pin changes to when its edge is asserted. See Chapter 11 for details.
In order to solve this problem, the A/D converter mode register (ADM) must be set again after the necessary A/D conversion
is hardware-started and completed. A similar problem occurs during in-circuit emulation.
3. Digital noise at the INTP6 pin cannot be eliminated normally with an in-circuit emulator. If it has been specified that A/D
conversion be hardware-started, A/D conversion may be started by an erroneously detected edge. See Section 11.4 for detail
on erroneous detection of an edge.
(1) Select-mode A/D conversion
The analog signal at the input pin, specified in the ADM register, is converted to digital form. When one
A/D conversion sequence is completed, the analog signal at the same input pin is converted again. Each time
a conversion sequence is completed, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated.
If a valid edge arrives at the INTP5 pin during A/D conversion, the current conversion sequence is stopped,
and another conversion session is started.
236
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
Fig. 8-11 Select-Mode A/D Conversion Started by Hardware
INTP5 pin input
(rising edge valid)
A/D conversion
Standby state
ANn
ANn
ANn
ANn
ANn
ANn Standby state ANm
ANm
ANm
ADM writing
CS←1, TRG←1
ADM writing
CS←1, TRG←1
ANn
ANn
ADCR
INTAD
8
INTAD accepted
Remark n = 0, 1, ..., 7
m = 0, 1, ..., 7
(2) Scan-mode A/D conversion
When A/D conversion is started, the analog signal input to the AN0 pin is converted. When one conversion
sequence is completed, the signal from the next analog input pin is converted. Each time a conversion
sequence is completed, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated.
WhenavalidedgearrivesattheINTP5pinduringA/Dconversion,thecurrentconversionsequenceisstopped,
and another conversion session is started for the signal at the AN0 pin.
237
µPD78214 Sub-Series
238
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
8.4 INTERRUPT REQUEST FROM THE A/D CONVERTER
The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD), each time a conversion sequence
is completed, except for the select mode.
The interrupt control flags are shared by the INTAD interrupt and the INTP5 external interrupt. Therefore, the
timing at which an interrupt request occurs varies depending on the mode of A/D conversion specified in the ADM
register, as listed in Table 8-3.
The INTAD interrupt is handled using the interrupt control register in the same manner as the INTP5 interrupt. See
Chapter 12 for details.
Table 8-3 Conditions to Generate Interrupt Requests in Each A/D Converter Operating Mode
A/D converter
operation
Interrupt
Interrupt
request
Condition to generate interrupt
requests
Mask flag
request flag
Valid edge input to the INTP5 pin
A/D conversion end
Stop
INTP5
INTAD
INTP5
Scan mode
8
PIF5
PMK5
Valid edge input to the INTP5 pin
Select mode
Hardware-started
A/D conversion
A/D conversion end
INTAD
8.5 SETTING FOR USE OF AN6 AND AN7
When using AN6 or AN7, set up as follows:
(1) When using AN6
• Specify an internal weight (according to the MM and PW registers)
• Specify P66 as an input port (PM66 = 1)
• Do not use an internal pull-up resistor (PUO6 = 0)
(2) When using AN7
• Inhibit refresh (RFEN = 0)
• Specify P67 as an input port (PM67 = 1)
• Do not use an internal pull-up resistor (PUO6 = 0)
8.6 NOTES
(1) Range of voltages applied to analog input pints
When using the A/D converter input pins AN0 through AN7 (P66, P67, P70 through P75, observe the following
points. Otherwise, the µPD78214 may be damaged.
(a) Do not apply voltages out of the range of AV to AV
to the pin subjected to A/D conversion.
REF
SS
(b) If the A/D converter is not in use (not operating), do not apply voltages out of the range of AV through
SS
Note
AV
to the pin
selected by the A/D converter mode register (ADM).
REF
Especially after the RESET signal is input, observe the following points, because AN0 (P70) is selected
automatically.
(i) When you clamp the AV
pin to the V level, also clamp the AN0 (P70) pin to the V level.
SS SS
REF
(ii) When you use the AN0 (P70) pin, clamp the AV
to the V level or keep the input to the AN0 (P70)
DD
REF
pin below the potential at the AV
pin.
REF
Note If the MS bit is 1, a pin selected by the ADM register is a pin subjected to A/D conversion. If the MS bit = 0, a pin selected
by the ADM register is the AN0 pin.
239
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) About hardware-started A/D conversion
(a) Eight to twelve system clocks are required from when a valid edge appears at the INTP5 pin until A/D
conversion is actually started. Take this delay into consideration when designing your application. See
Chapter 11 for details of the edge detection function.
(b) Digital noise at the INTP6 pin cannot be eliminated normally with an in-circuit emulator. If it has been
specified that A/D conversion be hardware-started, A/D conversion may be started by an erroneously
detected edge. See Section 11.4 for detail of erroneous detection of an edge.
(3) Capacitors connected to analog input pins
To prevent malfunction due to noise, insert a capacitor between each analog input pins (AN0 through AN7)
and the AV pin and between the reference voltage input pin (AV ) and the AV pin.
SS
REF
SS
Fig. 8-13 Example of Capacitors Connected to the A/D Converter Pins
µPD78214
Analog input
AN0-AN7
100-
500pF
Reference
AVREF
voltage input
AVSS
(4) When using the STOP mode, reset the CS bit to 0 beforehand to reduce supply current. If the CS bit remains
set to 1, conversion do stops when the STOP mode is selected, but power supply to the voltage comparator
is not stopped. Consequently, the supply current to the A/D converter does not decrease.
(5) When A/D conversion is already activated by hardware start (by a valid edge at the INTP5 pin), if another valid
edge arrives at the INTP5 pin, the A/D converter may malfunction. To be specific, a malfunction occurs if the
valid edge arrives at the INTP5 pin when the previous conversion result is being stored in the A/D conversion
resultregister(ADCR). Inthiscase, anA/Dconversionendinterrupt(INTAD)isgenerated. However, thevalue
stored in the ADCR register is not the conversion result. Instead, it is always 7FH (see Fig. 8-14).
240
Chapter 8 A/D Converter
Fig. 8-14 Example of Malfunction in a Hardware-Started A/D Conversion
INTP5
Note 2
Conversion trigger
A/D converter
operatioon
Conversion 1
Conversion 2
Conversion
result 1
7FHNote 1
ADCR
INTAD
8
Conversion completion and
conversion trigger occur
simultaneously
Notes 1. When the operation is normal, the result of conversion 2 is stored. If a malfunction occurs, however, value 7FH is stored.
2. Time from when an input to the INT5 pin changes to when its edge is asserted. See Chapter 11 for details.
In order to solve this problem, the A/D converter mode register (ADM) must be set again after the necessary
A/D conversion is hardware-started and completed. A similar problem occurs during in-circuit emulation.
(6) When the result of A/D conversion is read by using a vectored interrupt during the scan mode, if the A/D
conversion end interrupt is kept pending for a prolonged time because of other interrupts being handled (at
least 180 clocks if the FR bit is 0 or 120 clocks if the FR bit is 1), the conversion result cannot be accurately
measured. To measure the conversion result accurately, take the following measures:
• KeepthetimerequiredtohandleotherinterruptsadequatelyshorterthantherequiredA/Dconversiontime.
• Use the multiplexed interrupt mode so that the A/D conversion end interrupt can be accepted even when
other interrupts are being handled.
• Use a macro service to handle the A/D conversion end interrupt.
NotethattheA/DconversionendinterruptmayalsobekeptpendingbythecausesdescribedinSection12.3.5.
Of the measures described above, the macro service might be the simplest method for you application.
(7) IftheADMregisterissetafterregistersrelatedtointerruptshavebeensetduringthescanmode, anunwanted
interrupt may occur, thus causing the storage location of the conversion result to appear to have shifted. To
prevent this, take the actions listed below in the stated order.
• Write to the ADM register.
• Reset the interrupt request flag (PIF5) to 0.
• Set the interrupt mask flag or interrupt service mode flag.
241
242
CHAPTER 9 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE
The µPD78214 contains an asynchronous serial interface, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter).
This interface transmits 1-byte data following a start bit and is capable of full-duplex transmission.
The µPD78214 also contains a baud rate generator for UART, which allows data to be transmitted at a wide baud
rate range.
In addition, a baud rate can also be specified by dividing the frequency of the clock input to the ASCK pin.
Moreover, 8-bit timer/counter 3 can be used to generate a baud rate.
When the baud rate generator for UART is used, the MIDI standard baud rate (31.25 kbps) can also be obtained.
The asynchronous serial interface operates independently of the clock-synchronized serial interface.
9.1 CONFIGURATION
This section describes the configuration of the asynchronous serial interface.
See Section 9.4 for details of the baud rate generator.
9
243
µPD78214 Sub-Series
S e l e c t o r
244
Chapter 9 Asynchronous Serial Interface
(1) Reception buffer (RXB)
The reception buffer holds the receive data. Each time the shift register receives 1 byte of data, it sends it to
this reception buffer.
If the data length is specified to be 7 bits, the receive data is sent to bits 0 through 6 of the RXB. The MSB of
the RXB is always kept as 0.
Only an 8-bit manipulation instruction can be used for the reception buffer, and its use is limited to read
operations. When the RESET signal is input, the contents of the RXB become undefined.
(2) Transmission shift register (TXS)
The transmission shift register holds the data to be transmitted. The data written to the TXS is transmitted
as serial data.
If the data length is specified to be 7, bits 0 through 6 of the data written to the TXS register are treated as the
transmit data. Writing data to the TXS register triggers transmission. Do not write to the TXS register when
transmission is in progress.
Only an 8-bit manipulation instruction can be used for the transmission shift register, and its use is limited
to write operations. When the RESET signal is input, the contents of the TXS become undefined.
(3) Shift register
9
The shift register converts the serial data input to the RxD pin into parallel data. When it receives 1 byte of
data, it sends it to the reception buffer.
The shift register cannot be manipulated directly from the CPU.
(4) Reception control parity check
Reception is controlled according to the contents of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM).
Inaddition, errorcheckssuchasparityerrorcheckarealsoperformedduringreception. Ifanerrorisdetected,
a value corresponding to the error is set in the asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS).
(5) Transmission control parity generation
Transmission is controlled by appending a start bit, parity bit, and one or two stop bits to the data written to
the TXS register according to the contents of the ASIM register.
(6) Selector
The selector selects a baud rate clock source.
9.2 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE CONTROL REGISTER
(1) Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)
This 8-bit register specifies the asynchronous serial interface operations.
Either 8-bit manipulation instruction or a bit manipulation instruction can be used to read data from or write
data to this register. Fig. 9-2 shows the format of the asynchronous serial interface control register.
When the RESET signal is input, the ASIM register is set to 80H.
245
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 9-2 Format of the Asynchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (ASIM)
7
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
ASIM
RXE
PSI
PS0
CL
SL
SCK
SCK Specifies serial clock
0
1
8-bit timer/counter 3 output
Baud rate generator output
SL
0
Specifies stop bit for transmit data
1 bit
2 bits
1
Specifies character length for transmit/
receive data
CL
7 bits
8 bits
0
1
Specifies parity bit for transmit/
PS1
0
PS0
receive data
0
1
No parity
Transmit: 0 parity append
Receive: No parity error
0
Odd parity
Even parity
1
1
0
1
RXE Controls reception permission
Disables reception
Enables reception
0
1
Cautions 1. The asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) must not be modified during transmission. If the ASIM register is
modified during transmission, further transmission becomes impossible (inputting the RESET signal resumes normal
operation).
Software can determine whether transmission is in progress, using the transmission completion interrupt (INTST) or the
interrupt request flag (STIF), which is set by the INTST.
2. IftheASIMregisterismodifiedduringreception, thecurrentandnextreceivedatamaybedamaged. Whenchangingthemode,
disable reception beforehand.
(2) Asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS)
The ASIS register is a collection of flags that describe reception errors. A flag is set to 1 when a reception error
occurs. It is reset to 0 by reading data from the reception buffer. When the next data is received, the overrun
error flag (OVE) is set to 1, and the other error flags are reset to 0 (if this new data also contains an error, the
error flag corresponding to that error is set to 1).
Both 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can be used for the ASIS register, but
their use is limited to read operations.
When the RESET signal is input, the ASIS register is reset to 00H.
246
Chapter 9 Asynchronous Serial Interface
Fig. 9-3 Format of the Asynchronous Serial Interface Status Register (ASIS)
7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
1
0
ASIS
0
PE
FE
OVE
Overrun error flag
Indicates that the next reception is completed
before data is read from receive buffer
1
Framing error flag
Indicates that stop bit is not detected
1
Parity error flag
Indicates that specified parity for transmit
data does not match receive data parity
1
Caution Be sure to read the reception buffer (RXB) contents, even if a reception error occurs. Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when
the next data is received, and the error status will persist.
9
9.3 ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE OPERATIONS
9.3.1 Data Format
Fig. 9-4 shows the format of the transmit/receive data. One data frame consists of a start bit, character bits, a parity
bit, and one or two stop bits.
The asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) specifies the number of character and stop bits, and
whether to use a parity bit.
Fig. 9-4 Format of the Transmission/Reception Data at the Asynchronous Serial Interface
1 data frame
Start
bit
Parity
bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop bit
• Start bit : 1 bit
• Character bits : 7 or 8 bits
• Parity bit : Even parity, odd parity, 0 parity, or no parity
• Stop bit : 1 or 2 bits
The serial transmission rate can range from 1.43 bps to 93.75 kbps according to the setting of the asynchronous
serial interface mode register and baud rate generator or timer/counter 3.
If an error occurs during reception of serial data, the error can be identified by reading the contents of the
asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS).
9.3.2 Parity Types and Operations
The parity bit is used to detect a bit error in transmit/receive data. Usually, the same parity bit is used at both the
transmission and reception ends. When even or odd parity is used, a 1-bit (the odd number of bits) error can be
detected. When 0 parity or no parity is used, no error can be detected.
• Even parity
When the transmit data has an odd (or even) number of 1 bits, the parity bit is set to 1 (or 0), so that the number
of 1 bits in the data becomes even. When data is received, the number of 1 bits in it is counted, and if the number
of 1 bits is odd, a parity error is detected.
247
µPD78214 Sub-Series
• Odd parity
In contrast to even parity, the parity bit for odd parity is controlled so that the number of 1 bits in the transmit
data becomes odd. When data is received, the number of 1 bits in it is counted, and if the number of 1 bits is
even, a parity error is detected.
• 0 parity
Whendataistransmitted,theparitybitisresetto0,regardlessofwhatthetransmitdataislike. Duringreception,
the parity bit is not checked. Therefore, a parity error is not detected, regardless of whether the parity bit is 0
or 1.
• No parity
No parity bit is attached to the transmit data. The reception end assumes that there is no parity bit. Because
no parity bit is used, no parity error is detected.
9.3.3 Transmission
The asynchronous serial interface for the µPD78214 is always ready to transmit data. Writing transmit data to the
transmission shift register (TXS) triggers transmission. The start bit, parity bit, and stop bit(s) are attached
automatically.
When transmission is triggered, the transmission shift register (TXS) shifts out its contents. When the register
becomes empty, a transmission completion interrupt (INTST) occurs.
If no further transmission data is written to the transmission shift register (TXS), transmission breaks.
Fig. 9-5 Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Completion Interrupt Timing
(a) Stop bit length: 1
STOP
Parity
D0
D1
D2
D6
D7
TxD (Output)
INTST
START
(b) Stop bit length: 2
STOP
Parity
D0
D1
D2
D6
D7
TxD (Output)
START
INTST
Cautions 1. When the RESET signal is input, the transmission shift register becomes empty, but no transmission completion interrupt
occurs. Transmission is triggered by writing the transmit data to the transmission shift register.
2. The asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) must not be modified during transmission. If the ASIM register is
modified during transmission, further transmission becomes impossible (inputting the RESET signal resumes normal
operation).
Software can determine whether transmission is in progress, using the transmission completion interrupt (INTST) or the
interrupt request flag (STIF), which is set by the INTST.
248
Chapter 9 Asynchronous Serial Interface
9.3.4 Reception
When the RXE bit of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) is set to 1, reception is enabled, and
the input to the RxD pin is sampled.
Sampling at the RxD pin is performed using the serial clock specified in the ASIM register.
WhentheinputtotheRxDpinbecomeslow,the1/16frequencydivisioncounterstartscounting. Whenthecounter
reaches eight counts, it outputs the start timing signal for data sampling. The RxD pin is sampled with this start
timing signal again. If the pin is found to be at low level, it is recognized as a start bit, then initializing the 1/16
frequency division counter and causing it to start counting again for data sampling. When a start bit, data bits,
parity bit, and a stop bit Note are detected, reception of one frame of data is completed.
When one frame of data is received, the receive data in the shift register is sent to the reception buffer (RXB),
eventually generating a reception completion interrupt (INTSR).
If an error occurs, the erroneous receive data is sent to the RXB and causes an INTSR to be generated.
Resetting the RXE bit to 0 immediately stops reception. In this case, the contents of the RXB or ASIS are not
affected, and neither INTSR nor INTSER is generated. Setting the RXE bit to 1 triggers sampling for a start bit.
Note Reception assumes there is only one stop bit, regardless of whether the SL bit of the ASIM register is 1.
#
9
Fig. 9-6 Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Completion Interrupt Timing
STOP
Parity
D0
D1
D2
D6
D7
RxD (Input)
INTSR
START
Cautions 1. IftheASIMregisterismodifiedduringreception, thecurrentandnextreceivedatamaybedamaged. Whenchangingthemode,
disable reception beforehand.
2. Besuretoreadthereceptionbuffer(RXB)contents,evenifareceptionerroroccurs. Otherwise,anoverrunerrorwilloccurwhen
the next data is received, and the error status will persist.
9.3.5 Reception Error
Threetypesoferrorsmayoccurduringreception;parityerror, framingerror, andoverrunerror. Ifanyoneofthese
errors occurs, the corresponding error flag in the asynchronous serial interface register (ASIS) is set, and a
reception error interrupt (INTSER) is generated. Table 9-1 lists causes of reception errors.
The type of the reception error can be identified by the reception error interrupt routine (INTSER), which reads and
checks the contents of the asynchronous serial interface register (ASIS). (See Fig. 9-3 and Fig. 9-7.)
The ASIS is reset to 0 by reading data from the reception buffer (RXB) or receiving the next data. (If the next data
again contains an error, the corresponding error flag will be set.)
249
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 9-1 Causes of Reception Errors
Reception error
Parity error
Cause
The parity of the receive data does not match the type of parity specified at transmission.
Note
No stop bit is detected
.
Framing error
Overrun error
#
Before the receive data is read out from the reception buffer, the next data is received.
Note Reception assumes that only one stop bit is used. Therefore, if the transmission end uses a two-stop bit format, and the second stop
bit is low when received, no reception error is detected; it is recognized as the start bit of the next data.
Fig. 9-7 Reception Error Timing
STOP
Parity
D0
D1
D2
D6
D7
RxD (Input)
START
INTSR
INTSER
Remark With the µPD78214, no break signal can be detected by hardware. Because a break signal consists of two characters’ worth of low
level, softwareidentifiesitbydetectingthataframingerrorhasoccurredtwiceconsecutivelywherethereceivedatais00H. Software
can differentiate the break signal from a sequence of two accidental framing errors. This is done by reading the level of the RxD pin
(by reading port 3 (P3) by setting bit 0 of the port 3 mode register to 1) and checking if it is 0.
Cautions 1. The ASIS register is reset to 0 when the reception buffer (RXB) is read-accessed or receives the next data. To identify the error,
be sure to check the ASIS before reading data from the RXB. If a macro service is used during reception, it is impossible to
identify the error; it is only possible to know an error has occurred (an INTSER has occurred or the reception error interrupt
request flag (SERIF) is set to 1). Make sure that this poses no problem for your application.
2. Besuretoreadthereceptionbuffer(RXB)contents,evenifareceptionerroroccurs. Otherwise,anoverrunerrorwilloccurwhen
the next data is received, and the error status will persist.
250
Chapter 9 Asynchronous Serial Interface
9.4 BAUD RATE GENERATOR
9.4.1 Configuration of the Baud Rate Generator for UART
Fig. 9-8 shows the configuration of the baud rate generator.
Fig. 9-8 Baud Rate Generator Clock Configuration
Internal bus
8
ASIM
BRGC
Baud rate generator
control register
SCK
RESET
4
Coincidence
Clear
4
Resets writing
to BRGC
9
fCLK
4-bit counter
8
Asynchronous serial
interface
INTP4/ASCK
1
2
8-bit timer/counter 3 output
Clock synchronous
serial interface
(1) 4-bit counter
The 4-bit counter counts the internal system clock (f ). It generates a signal having the frequency selected
CLK
by the lower four bits of the baud rate generator control register (BRGC).
(2) Frequency divider
The frequency divider divides the signal input from the 4-bit counter or an external baud rate input (ASCK),
and allows the selector at the next stage to select the clock for the baud rate.
(3) Both-edge detector
The both-edge detector detects either edge of the signal input to the ASCK pin and generates a signal having
afrequencytwotimesashighastheASCKinputclockfrequency. SeeChapter11fordetailsofedgedetection.
9.4.2 Baud Rate Generator Control Register (BRGC)
The BRGC register is an 8-bit register that holds the clock for baud rate generation controlled according to the
internal system clock (f ).
CLK
Only an 8-bit manipulation instruction can be used for this register, and its use is limited to write operations. Fig.
9-9 shows the format of the register.
When the RESET signal is input, the BRGC register is reset to 00H.
Caution When a BRGC register write instruction is executed, the 4-bit counter and the frequency divider are reset. If the BRGC register is
write-accessed during transmission, the baud rate being generated is disrupted, hampering normal communication. For this
reason, do not write to the BRGC register during transmission.
251
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 9-9 Baud Rate Generator Control Register (BRGC) Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BRGC
CE
TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 MDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0
Input clock of baud
rate generator
MDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0
k
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
fCLK/4
fCLK/2
fCLK/3
fCLK/4
fCLK/5
fCLK/6
fCLK/7
fCLK/8
fCLK/9
fCLK/10
fCLK/11
fCLK/12
fCLK/13
fCLK/14
fCLK/15
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
External clock input (ASCK)
TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 Frequency divider tap 1/n
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1/2
1/4
1/8
1/16
1/32
1/64
1/128
1/256
CE
0
Operations of 4-bit counter and frequency divider
Stop
1
Counting operation
252
Chapter 9 Asynchronous Serial Interface
9.4.3 Operation of the Baud Rate Generator for UART
The baud rate generator for UART starts operating, when the CE bit of the baud rate generator control register
(BRGC) is set to 1. The baud rate clock to be generated is a signal obtained by dividing either the internal system
clock (f
) or the clock input from the external baud rate input (ASCK) pin.
CLK
Resetting the CE bit to 0 stops the operation of the baud rate generator.
When the CE is 1, if an attempt is made to set it to 1 again, the 4-bit counter and frequency divider for baud rate
generation are reset, then baud rate clock generation starts again.
Caution When a BRGC register write instruction is executed, the 4-bit counter and the frequency divider are reset. If the BRGC register is
write-accessed during transmission, the baud rate being generated is disrupted, hampering normal communication. For this
reason, do not write to the BRGC register during transmission.
(1) Generating the baud rate clock from the internal system clock (f
)
CLK
The internal system clock (f
) is divided by the 4-bit counter. The resultant signal is further divided by the
CLK
frequency divider to generate the baud rate clock.
The baud rate generated from the internal system clock (f ) is determined by the following formula:
CLK
(Baud rate) = f
/(k + 1) × 1/n × 1/16
CLK
where, f
: Internal system clock frequency
CLK
9
k
: Value set in the MDL3 to MDL0 bits of the BRGC register (k = 1 through 14; see Fig. 9-9.)
1/n : Frequency divider tap
16 : Serial data sampling rate
(2) Generating the baud rate clock from the ASCK input
Both edges of an input to the ASCK pin are detected to generate a clock having the frequency two times as
high as the frequency at the ASCK pin. The resultant clock is then divided at the frequency divider. This
function makes it possible to generate more than one baud rate from one external input clock.
The baud rate generated from the input to the ASCK pin is determined by the following formula:
(Baud rate) = f
× 2/n × 1/16
ASCK
where, f
: ASCK input clock frequency
ASCK
Note that the ASCK input cannot be higher than f
/24 (250 kHz for f
= 6 MHz).
CLK
CLK
253
µPD78214 Sub-Series
9.5 BAUD RATE SETTING
The baud rate can be set by three methods listed in Table 9-2.
The table indicates the ranges of baud rates that can be generated by each method, the baud rate calculation
formulas, and the selection methods.
Table 9-2 Baud Rate Setting
Baud rate clock source
Selection method
Calculation formula
Baud rate range
Baud rate
generator
for UART
Internal
SCK of the ASIM MDL0 through MDL3 of the
f
1
n
1
f
f
CLK
CLK
CLK
–
–
×
×
×
×
system clock register = 1
CE of the BRGC
register = 1
BRGC register = 0H to EH
K + 1
16
61440
64
Note
ASCK
f
MDL0 through MDL3 of
the BRGC register = FH
2
n
1
f
ASCK
ASCK input
f
ASCK
16
16
2048
f
CLK
j + 3
f
f
CLK
CLK
2
8-bit timer/counter 3
SCK of the ASIM register = 0
1
1
2
–
4194304
256
×
×
m + 1
16
f
: Internal system clock frequency
CLK
k
: Value set in the MDL3 through MDL0 bits of the BRGC register (k = 1 through 14; see Fig. 9-9.)
1/n : Frequency divider tap (n = 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256)
: Frequency of the ASCK input clock (0 – f /24)
f
ASCK
CLK
1/16 : Serial data sampling rate
j
: Value set in the PRS3 through PRS0 bits of prescaler mode register 0 (j = 0 through 6)
PRS3-PRS0
j
0H
1H
2H
1
3H
2
4H
3
5H
4
6H
5
7H
6
0
m
: Value set in the 8-bit compare register (CR30); m = 0 through 255
Note 0 – f
/384 if the f
input range is included.
CLK
ASCK
9.5.1 Example of Setting the BRGC Register When the Baud Rate Generator for UART Is Used
This section shows examples of setting the BRGC register when the baud rate generator for UART is used.
To use the baud rate generator, set the SCK bit of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) to 1.
254
Chapter 9 Asynchronous Serial Interface
9
255
µPD78214 Sub-Series
9.5.2 Example of Setting the Baud Rate When 8-bit Timer/Counter 3 Is Used
Table 9-4 lists examples of setting the baud rate when 8-bit timer/counter 3 is used. When using 8-bit timer/
counter 3, reset the SCK bit of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) to 0.
See Section 7.4 for how to use 8-bit timer/counter 3.
256
Chapter 9 Asynchronous Serial Interface
9
257
µPD78214 Sub-Series
9.5.3 Example of Setting the BRGC When the External Baud Rate Input (ASCK) Is Used
Table 9-5 lists examples of setting the BRGC register when an external baud rate input (ASCK) is used. To use the
ASCK input, set the SCK bit of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) to 1.
Table 9-5 Examples of Setting the BRGC When an External Baud Rate Input (ASCK) Is Used
f
ASCK
153.6 kHz
(ASCK input frequency)
Baud rate [bps]
BRGC value
FFH
75
150
EFH
DFH
300
600
CFH
1200
2400
4800
9600
BFH
AFH
9FH
8FH
9.6 NOTES
(1) The asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) must not be modified during transmission. If the
ASIM register is modified during transmission, further transmission becomes impossible (inputting the
RESET signal resumes normal operation).
Software can determine whether transmission is in progress, using the transmission completion interrupt
(INTST) or the interrupt request flag (STIF), which is set by the INTST.
(2) When the RESET signal is input, the transmission shift register becomes empty, but no transmission
completion interrupt occurs. Transmission is triggered by writing the transmit data to the transmission shift
register.
(3) The ASIS register is reset to 0 when the reception buffer (RXB) is read-accessed or receives the next data. To
identifytheerror,besuretochecktheASISbeforereadingdatafromtheRXB. Ifamacroserviceisusedduring
reception, it is impossible to identify the error; it is only possible to detect that an error has occurred (an
INTSER has occurs or the reception error interrupt request flag (SERIF) is set to 1). Make sure that this poses
no problem for your application.
(4) If the ASIM register is modified during reception, the current and next receive data may become undefined.
When changing the mode, disable reception beforehand.
(5) Be sure to read the reception buffer (RXB) contents, even if a reception error occurs. Otherwise, an overrun
error will occur when the next data is received, and the error status will persist.
(6) Do not write to the BRGC register during communication. If a write instruction is executed for the BRGC
register, the 4-bit counter and frequency divider are reset, and the baud rate clock generated is disturbed,
hampering normal communication.
258
CHAPTER 10 CLOCK SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE
10.1 FUNCTION
TheclocksynchronousserialinterfaceoftheµPD78214isconfiguredasshowninFig. 10-1. Theclocksynchronous
serial interface supports the following two operation modes:
(1) Three-wire serial I/O mode (MSB first)
Threelines, serialclock(SCK)andserialbuslines(SO, SI), areusedtotransfer8-bitdata. Thismodeissuitable
for connecting a display controller or peripheral I/O device having a conventional clock synchronous serial
interface.
(2) Serial bus interface (SBI) mode (MSB first)
In this mode, the device can communicate with two or more devices via two lines, the serial clock (SCK) and
serial data bus line (SB0).
This mode conforms to the NEC serial bus format.
In SBI mode, an address for selecting a target device for serial communication, a command specifying the
operation of the target device, and actual data can be output on the serial data bus. This mode eliminates the
need for a handshaking line, which would otherwise be required to connect two or more devices through a
conventional clock synchronous serial interface. The input/output ports can thus used efficiently.
10
10.2 CONFIGURATION
This section describes the configuration of the clock synchronous serial interface.
259
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Selector
260
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
(1) Shift register (SIO)
Converts 8-bit serial data into 8-bit parallel data and vice versa. The SIO is used for both transmission and
reception.
Data is shifted in (received) or shifted out (transmitted) from the MSB.
The actual transmission/reception is controlled by writing or reading the contents of the SIO.
The 8-bit manipulation instruction can read or write the contents of this register. The contents become
undefined when RESET is input.
(2) SO latch
Retains the output level of the SO/SB0 pin. In serial bus interface (SBI) mode, the software can directly control
the latch.
(3) Serial clock selector
Selects the serial clock to be used.
(4) Serial clock counter
Countsthenumberofserialclockpulsesoutputorinputduringtransmissionorreceptionandcheckswhether
8-bit data is transmitted or received.
(5) Interrupt signal generator
Controls whether an interrupt request is generated when the serial clock counter counts eight serial clock
pulses. In three-wire serial I/O mode, an interrupt request is generated each time eight pulses are counted.
In SBI mode, an interrupt request is generated whenever the conditions are satisfied.
10
(6) Serial clock controller
Controls the supply of the serial clock to the shift register. If the internal clock is used, the controller also
controls the clock output to the SCK pin.
(7) Busy/acknowledge output circuit, bus release/command/acknowledge detector
Output and detect control signals in SBI mode. These circuits do not operate in three-wire serial I/O mode.
261
µPD78214 Sub-Series
10.3 CONTROL REGISTERS
10.3.1 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (CSIM)
This 8-bit register specifies a serial interface operation mode, serial clock and wake-up function.
The 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can read and write the contents of the CSIM
register. Fig. 10-2 shows the format.
The register is set to 00H when RESET is input.
Fig. 10-2 Format of the Clock Synchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (CSIM)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CSIM CTXE CRXE WUP 0Note 1 MOD1 0Note 1 CLS1 CLS0
Master/slave selection in
SBI mode
CLS1 CLS0
Selects serial clock
SCK pin
Input
0
0
0
1
External clock
Slave
8-bit timer/counter 3
output/2
Internal
clock
Output
Master
fCLK/32Note 2
fCLK/8Note 2
1
1
0
1
WUP MOD1
Operation mode
Controls wakeup function
0
0
0
1
3-wire serial I/O mode
Generates interrupt request at
each serial transfer
SBI mode
Generates interrupt request only
when address is received
1
1
CRXE Reception
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
CTXE
Transmission
Disabled
0
1
Enabled
Notes 1. Always write 0 into bits 2 and 4.
2. f : Internal system clock
CLK
Caution Do not change CTXE from 0 to 1 and CRXE from 1 to 0, or vice versa, by means of a single instruction. If this is attempted, the serial
clock counter will malfunction and the first communication after the change will be terminated before the eighth bit is sent. To
change these statuses, use two instructions, as shown below:
Example Changing CTXE from 1 to 0 and CRXE from 0 to 1
CLR1 CTXE
SET1 CRXE
262
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10.3.2 Serial Bus Interface Control Register (SBIC)
The SBIC register consists of bits that control the status of the serial bus, as well as bits that indicate the status
of the data input from the serial bus. This 8-bit register can be used only in SBI mode, not in three-wire serial
I/O mode.
The8-bitmanipulationinstructionandbitmanipulationinstructionmanipulatethecontentsoftheregister. These
bits have different read/write attributes, listed in Table 10-1. When the contents are read, 0 is read from the write-
only bits. The format is shown in Fig. 10-3.
The register is set to 00H when RESET is input.
Detection flags ACKD, CMDD, and RELD are cleared when transmission and reception are inhibited (both CTXE
and CRXE are set to 0).
Table 10-1 Reading/Writing the Contents of the SBIC Register
7
6
3
2
1
0
5
4
SBIC
CMDD
R
BSYE
R/W
ACKD
R
ACKE
R/W
ACKT
W
RELD
R
CMDT
W
RELT
W
Remarks R/W : Read/write
R
W
: Read-only
: Write-only
10
263
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 10-3 Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register (SBIC)
#
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT
RELT
Trigger output control for bus release signal (REL)
0
1
Not output
Output
CMDT
Trigger output control for command signal (CMD)
0
1
Not output
Output
RELD
Detection of bus release signal (REL)
0
1
Not detected
Detected
CMDD
Detection of command signal (CMD)
0
1
Not detected
Detected
ACKT
Trigger output control for acknowledge signal (ACK)
0
1
Not output
Output
ACKE Permission of acknowledge signal (ACK) automatic output
0
1
Prohibited
Permitted
ACKD
Detection of acknowledge signal (ACK)
0
1
Not detected
Detected
BSYE Permission of synchronous busy signal (BUSY) automatic output
0
1
Prohibited
Permitted
264
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10.4 OPERATIONS IN THE THREE-WIRE SERIAL I/O MODE
In three-wire serial I/O mode, the device can communicate with a device having a conventional clock synchronous
serial interface.
Basically, communicationisperformedoverthreelinesofserialclock(SCK), serialdataoutput(SO)andserialdata
input (SI). A handshaking line is required to connect the device to two or more devices.
Fig. 10-4 Sample System Configuration with Three-Wire Serial I/O
Three-wire serial I/O ↔ three-wire serial I/O
Master CPU
Slave CPU
SCK
SO
SI
SCK
SI
SO
Port
Note
Port (interrupt)
Port
Interrupt (port)
10
Note Handshaking line
10.4.1 Basic Operation Timing
In three-wire serial I/O mode, data is transmitted and received in units of eight bits. The data is transmitted and
received one bit at a time by means of the MSB-first method, in synchronization with the serial clock.
The transmission data is output in synchronization with the falling edge of SCK. The reception data is sampled
at the rising edge of SCK.
At the eighth rising edge of SCK, interrupt request INTCSI is issued.
If SCK is used as the internal clock, the output of SCK is stopped at the eighth rising edge of SCK. SCK is tied high
until transmission or reception of the subsequent data is started.
Fig. 10-5 shows the timing chart for three-wire serial I/O mode.
265
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 10-5 Timing in Three-Wire Serial I/O Mode
SCKNote
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0
SI (input)
DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0
SO (output)
INTCSI
Transfer end interrupt occurs
Transfer starts in synchronization with SCK falling edge
Executing instruction to write data to SIO
Notes Master CPU: Output
Slave CPU : Input
In three-wire serial I/O mode, the SO pin sends a CMOS push-pull output.
Remark Whenconnectingthedevicetoadevicehavingtwo-wireserialI/O, connectabuffertotheSOpinasshowninFig. 10-6. Intheexample
shown in Fig. 10-6, the buffer inverts the output level. Invert the data to be output and write the inverted data into the SIO. Do not
connect the built-in pull-up resistor to pin P33/SO.
Fig. 10-6 Sample Connection with a Device Having Two-Wire Serial I/O
PD78214
µ
2-wire serial
I/O device
SCK
SCK
SI
SIO
SO
If transmission and reception are time-shared, and if the µPD78214 can control the output level of the SIO pin of
a device containing two-wire serial I/O, the SI pin and SO pin can be connected directly. To do this, disable
transmission by other devices while the µPD78214 is transmitting data.
266
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10.4.2 Operation When Only Transmission Is Permitted
Transmission is enabled when the CTXE bit of the clock synchronous serial interface mode register (CSIM) is set
(1). If the CTXE bit is set, writing the contents of the shift register (SIO) invokes the start of transmission.
If the CTXE bit is reset (0), the output from the SO pin goes to the high-impedance state.
(1) Selecting the internal clock as the serial clock
Whentransmissionisstarted,theserialclockisoutputfromtheSCKpin. Atthesametime,dataissequentially
outputfromtheSIOtotheSOpininsynchronizationwiththefallingedgeoftheserialclock. Insynchronization
with the rising edge of the serial clock, the signal from the SI pin is shifted into the SIO.
It takes up to one cycle of the SCK clock to drive SCK low for the first time after transmission is started.
If transmission is inhibited (the CTXE bit is reset to 0) during transmission, the output of the SCK clock is
stopped and transmission is halted at the next rising edge of SCK. At this time, no interrupt request (INTCSI)
occurs. The output from the SO pin goes to the high-impedance state.
(2) Selecting the external clock as the serial clock
When transmission is started, data is sequentially output from the SIO to the SO pin in synchronization with
the falling edge of the serial clock input to the SCK pin, after the start of transmission. At the same time, the
signal from the SI pin is shifted into the SIO in synchronization with the rising edge of the input to the SCK
pin. If the serial clock is input to the SCK pin before transmission has been started, no shift occurs. The output
level of the SO pin does not change.
10
If transmission is inhibited (the CTXE bit is reset to 0) during transmission, the transmission is halted and any
subsequent SCK input is ignored. At this time, no interrupt request (INTCSI) occurs. The output from the SO
pin goes to the high-impedance state.
10.4.3 Operation When Only Reception Is Permitted
Reception is performed when the CRXE bit of the CSIM register is set (1). When the CRXE bit is changed from 0
to 1 or when the contents of the SIO are read, reception is started.
(1) Selecting the internal clock as the serial clock
When reception is started, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. In synchronization with the rising edge
of the serial clock, data is sequentially sent from the SI pin to the SIO.
It takes up to one cycle of the SCK clock to drive SCK low for the first time, after the reception is started.
If reception is inhibited (the CRXE bit is reset to 0) during reception, the output of the SCK clock is stopped
and reception is halted at the next rising edge of SCK. At this time, no interrupt request (INTCSI) is issued.
The contents of the SIO become undefined.
(2) Selecting the external clock as the serial clock
Whenreceptionisstarted, dataissentsequentiallyfromtheSIpintotheSIOinsynchronizationwiththerising
edge of the serial clock input to the SCK pin after the start of reception. If the serial clock is input to the SCK
pin before reception has been started, no shift occurs.
If reception is inhibited (the CRXE bit is reset to 0) during reception, the reception is halted and subsequent
SCK input is ignored. At this time, no interrupt request (INTCSI) is issued.
10.4.4 Operation When Both Transmission and Reception Are Permitted
Transmission and reception can be simultaneously performed when both the CTXE bit and CRXE bit of the CSIM
register are set (1) (transmission and reception). Transmission and reception are started when the CRXE bit is
changed from 0 to 1 or when the contents of the SIO are written.
When transmission and reception are started for the first time, the CRXE bit is changed from 0 to 1. Because
transmission and reception are started immediately, undefined data may be output. To prevent this, write the first
transmission data into the SIO while both transmission and reception are inhibited (the CTXE and CRXE bits are
both reset to 0), then permit transmission and reception.
If transmission and reception are inhibited (both CTXE and CRXE are set to 0), the output from the SO pin goes
to the high-impedance state.
267
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(1) Selecting the internal clock as the serial clock
When transmission and reception are started, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. In synchronization
with the falling edge of the serial clock, data is sequentially output from the SIO to the SO pin. In
synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock, data is sequentially shifted in from the SI pin to the
SIO.
It takes up to one cycle of the SCK clock to drive SCK low for the first time, after the transmission and reception
are started.
Ifeithertransmissionorreceptionisinhibitedduringtransmissionandreception, onlytheinhibitedoperation
ishalted. Iftransmissionisinhibited,theoutputfromtheSOpingoestothehigh-impedancestate. Ifreception
is inhibited, the contents of the SIO register become undefined.
If transmission and reception are simultaneously inhibited, the output of the SCK clock is stopped and
transmission and reception are halted at the next rising edge of SCK. If this occurs, the contents of the SIO
become undefined. No interrupt request (INTCSI) is issued. The output from the SO pin goes to the high-
impedance state.
(2) Selecting an external clock as the serial clock
When transmission and reception are started, data is sequentially output from the SIO to the SO pin in
synchronization with the falling edge of the serial clock input to the SCK pin, after the start of the transmission
and reception. In synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock, data is sequentially shifted in from
the SI pin to the SIO. If the serial clock is input to the SCK pin before transmission and reception have been
started, shift into the SIO does not occur. The output level of the SO pin does not change.
Ifeithertransmissionorreceptionisinhibitedduringtransmissionandreception, onlytheinhibitedoperation
ishalted. Iftransmissionisinhibited,theoutputfromtheSOpingoestothehigh-impedancestate. Ifreception
is inhibited, the contents of the SIO become undefined.
If transmission and reception are simultaneously inhibited, transmission and reception are halted and the
subsequent SCK input is ignored. If this occurs, the contents of the SIO become undefined. No interrupt
request (INTCSI) is issued. The output from the SO pin goes to the high-impedance state.
10.4.5 Action to Be Taken When the Serial Clock and Shift Become Asynchronous
If the external clock is selected as the serial clock, the serial clock and shift may become asynchronous because
of noise. If this occurs, inhibit both transmission and reception (reset the CTXE and CRXE bits to 0). This initializes
the serial clock counter. Then, the shift and serial clock are synchronized again at the first serial clock pulse input,
after either transmission or reception is permitted.
10.5 SBI MODE
SBI (serial bus interface) is a high-speed serial interface conforming to the NEC serial bus format.
SBI is a high-speed serial bus with a single master, consisting of a clock synchronous serial I/O and a bus
configuration function. In SBI mode, the device can communicate with two or more devices over two signal lines.
If the serial bus is configured with two or more microcomputers and peripheral ICs, the number of ports and lines
on the board can be reduced.
For details of the SBI functions, refer also to “Serial Bus Interface (SBI) User’s Manual (IEM-1303)”.
10.5.1 Features of SBI
Conventional serial I/O supports only data transfer. If the serial bus is configured with two or more devices, many
ports and lines are required for the chip select signal, the separation of commands from data, and judgment of
the busy state. If they are controlled by the software, an excessive load will be applied to the software.
If SBI is used, two signal lines, serial clock SCK and serial data bus line SB0, can form the serial bus. The number
of ports for the microcomputers and lines on the printed circuit board can thus be reduced.
The SBI functions are described below:
(1) Function to separate address, command, and data
This function separates serial data into an address, command, and data.
268
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
(2) Function to select a chip by its address
The master sends an address to select a slave chip.
(3) Wake-up function
Using the wake-up function (which can be set or released by software), a slave device can easily detect
whether it receives the address (chip select).
If the wake-up function is set, a serial reception interrupt (INTCSI) occurs only when the address is received.
While the master device is communicating with two or more devices, the CPUs of those slave devices which
are not selected can operate, independent of the serial communication.
(4) Acknowledge signal (ACK) control function
This function controls the acknowledge signal to check whether the serial data has been received.
(5) Busy signal (BUSY) control function
This function controls the busy signal that indicates that a slave device is busy.
Fig. 10-7 shows a sample serial bus configured with CPUs having a serial interface conforming to SBI and
peripheral ICs.
In SBI mode, serial data bus pin SB0 functions as an open-drain output pin. The serial data bus lines are wired-
ORed. The serial data bus line requires a pull-up resistor.
10
Fig. 10-7 Sample Serial Bus Configured with SBI
+VDD
Serial data bus
SB0
SCK
SB0
SCK
Slave CPU
Address 1
Master CPU
Serial clock
SB0
SCK
Slave CPU
Address 2
SB0
SCK
Slave IC
Address 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
SB0
SCK
Slave IC
Address N
Caution When switching the master and slave, the input and output of the serial clock line (SCK) are asynchronously switched between the
master and slave. The serial clock line (SCK) requires a pull-up resistor.
269
µPD78214 Sub-Series
10.5.2 Configuration of the Serial Interface
Fig. 10-9 is a block diagram of the µPD78214.
The serial clock pin (SCK) and serial data bus pin SB0 are configured as shown in Fig. 10-8.
(1) SCK: Pin to input/output the serial clock
• Master : CMOS push-pull output
• Slave : Schmitt input
(2) SB0: Input/output pin for serial data
For both master and slave, N-ch open-drain output or Schmitt input
The serial data bus line requires an external pull-up resistor because of the N-ch open-drain output pin.
Fig. 10-8 Pin Configuration
Slave device
Master device
(Clock output)
Clock input
SCK
SCK
Clock output
(Clock input)
Serial clock
RL
N-ch open-drain
SO
SB0
SB0
N-ch open-drain
SO
Serial data bus
SI
SI
270
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10
Selector
271
µPD78214 Sub-Series
10.5.3 Detecting an Address Match
SBI communication is started when a slave device is selected according to the address sent by the master device.
The software detects whether the address of a slave device matches the sent address. In the wake-up state (WUP
setto1),theslavedevicegeneratesaserialtransfercompletioninterruptrequestonlywhenitreceivestheaddress.
Upon detecting the address match, the software releases the wake-up state (sets WUP to 0) and prepares for the
reception of the subsequent command and data.
10.5.4 Control Registers in SBI Mode
(1) Clock synchronous serial interface mode register (CSIM)
This 8-bit register specifies a serial interface operation mode, serial clock, and wake-up function.
Fig. 10-10 shows the format of the CSIM register.
The 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can read and write the contents of the
register.
The bits of the register have different read/write attributes.
The value of the CSIM register is set to 00H when RESET is input.
272
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
Fig. 10-10 Format of Clock Synchronous Serial Interface Mode Register (CSIM)
7
6
5
4
0
3
2
0
1
0
(00H when RESET is input)
CSIM CTXE CRXE WUP
MOD1
CLS1 CLS0
Master/slave selection in
SBI mode
CLS1 CLS0
Selects serial clock
SCK pin
Input
0
0
0
1
External clock
Slave
8-bit timer/counter 3
output/2
Internal
clock
Input
Master
1
1
0
1
fCLK/32
fCLK/8
WUP MOD1
Operation mode
Controls wakeup function
0
0
0
1
3-wire serial I/O mode
Generates interrupt request at
each serial transfer
SBI mode
10
Generates interrupt request only
when address is received
1
1
CRXE Reception
0
1
Disabled
Enabled
CTXE
0
Transmission
Disabled
1
Enabled
Caution Do not change CTXE from 0 to 1 or CRXE from 1 to 0, or vice versa, by means of a single instruction. If this is attempted, the serial
clock counter will malfunction and the first communication after the change will be terminated before the eighth bit is sent. To
change those statuses, use two instructions as shown below:
Example Changing CTXE from 1 to 0 and CRXE from 0 to 1
CLR1 CTXE
SET1 CRXE
273
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)
This 8-bit register consists of bits controlling the serial bus statuses and flags indicating the statuses of data
input from the serial bus.
The 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can read and write the contents of the
register. The bits have different read/write attributes. Fig. 10-11 shows the format.
The value of the SBIC register is set to 00H when RESET is input.
Fig. 10-11 Format of SBIC Register (1/2)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SBIC
BSYE
ACKD
ACKE
ACKT
CMDD
RELD
CMDT
RELT
(00H when RESET is input)
Bus release trigger bit (W)
Trigger output control bit for the bus release signal (REL). When this bit is set, the SO latch is set to 1,
then the RELT bit is automatically cleared to 0.
RELT
Command trigger bit (W)
Trigger output control bit for the command signal (CMD). When this bit is set, the SO latch is cleared to 0,
then the CMDT bit is automatically cleared to 0.
CMDT
Bus release detection flag (R)
Clearing condition (RELD = 0)
Setting condition (RELD = 1)
1
2
3
When transfer start instruction is executed
When RESET signal is input
CTXE = CRXE = 0
RELD
When bus release signal (REL) is detected
Command detection flag (R)
Clearing condition (CMDD = 0)
Setting condition (CMDD = 1)
1
2
3
4
When transfer start instruction is executed
When bus release signal (REL) is detected
When RESET signal is input
CMDD
When command signal (CMD) is detected
CTXE = CRXE = 0
274
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
Fig. 10-11 Format of SBIC Register (2/2)
Acknowledge trigger bit (W)
When this bit is set after transfer, ACK is output in synchronization with the next SCK. After the ACK signal
is output, this bit is automatically cleared to 0.
1
2
3
Do not set this bit to 1 before serial transfer is completed.
ACKT cannot be cleared by software.
Set ACKT when ACKE = 0.
Cautions:
ACKT
Acknowledge enable bit (R/W)
0
1
Disables automatic output of acknowledge signal
Before transfer
After transfer
Outputs ACK in synchronization with the 9th SCK
ACKE
Outputs ACK in synchronization with SCK immediately after set instruction execution
Acknowledge detection flag (R)
10
Clearing condition (ACKD = 0)
When SCK falls first time after releasing busy
after the transfer start instruction has been
executed
Setting condition (ACKD = 1)
1
#
ACKD
2
3
4
When RESET signal is input
CTXE = CRXE = 0
When acknowledge signal (ACK) is detected
When bus release is detected (in slave mode
only)
Busy enable bit (R/W)
1
Disables automatic output of busy signal
2
Stops busy signal output in synchronization with SCK falling immediately after clear instruction
execution
0
1
BSYE
Outputs busy signal in synchronization with SCK falling after acknowledge signal
Remarks (R) : Read-only
(W) : Write-only
(R/W): Read/write
275
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) Shift register (SIO)
This 8-bit shift register is used for parallel-serial conversion.
The data written into the SIO is output to the serial data bus. The data on the serial data bus is read into the
SIO. Fig. 10-12 shows the configuration of the shift register and related components.
Fig. 10-12 Configuration of Shift Register and Related Components
Wired-OR connection
RELT
Internal bus
CMDT
8
SET
D
CLR SO latch
Q
Shift register (SIO)
CLK
BUSY/ACK
Shift clock
N-ch open-drain output
In the SBI data bus configuration, the same pins are used for both input and output. The output pin functions
as an N-ch open-drain output pin. With an external pull-up resistor, the output pin has a wired-OR
configuration. For a device that is going to receive data, set the shift register (SIO) to FFH. Alternatively,
disable transmission by the device.
276
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10.6 SBI COMMUNICATION AND SIGNALS
This section describes the format of the SBI serial data and signals to be used.
SerialdatatransferredviaSBIcanbedividedintothreegroups: address, command, anddata. Eachframeofserial
data is formed as shown below:
(bus release signal) + (command signal) + 8-bit data + ACK + (BUSY)
Fig. 10-13 shows the transfer timing of the address, command, and data.
Fig. 10-13 SBI Transfer Timing
Address transfer
SCK
8
9
SB0
A7
A0
ACK
BUSY
Bus release signal
Command transfer
Command signal
10
SCK
9
SB0
C7
C0 ACK
BUSY
READY
Data transfer
SCK
8
9
D7
D0 ACK
BUSY
READY
SB0
The master device outputs the bus release signal and command signal. The slave device outputs BUSY. Either
the master or slave device can output ACK. (Usually, the device receiving 8-bit data outputs ACK.)
The master device continues serial clock output during the period from the start of 8-bit data transfer to the release
of BUSY.
10.6.1 Bus Release Signal (REL)
The bus release signal is the SB0 line going from low to high while the SCK line is high (the serial clock is not
output). The master device outputs this signal.
Fig. 10-14 Bus Release Signal
SCK
"H"
SB0
The bus release signal indicates that the master device is going to send an address to a slave device. The slave
device contains hardware to detect the bus release signal.
277
µPD78214 Sub-Series
10.6.2 Command Signal (CMD)
ThecommandsignalistheSB0linegoingfromhightolowwhiletheSCKlineishigh(theserialclockisnotoutput).
The master device outputs this signal.
Fig. 10-15 Command Signal
SCK
"H"
SB0
The slave device contains the hardware to detect the command signal.
10.6.3 Address
The master device outputs an address, which is 8-bit data, to select one of the slave devices connected to the bus
line.
Fig. 10-16 Address
SCK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SB0
A7
A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
Address
Bus release signal
Command signal
The 8-bit data output following the bus release signal and command signal is defined as an address. In a slave
device, the hardware detects the condition and the hardware or software checks whether the 8-bit data matches
its own number (slave address). If the 8-bit data matches a slave address, the slave device is selected. This slave
device communicates with the master device until the slave is disconnected from the master.
Fig. 10-17 Selecting a Slave Device by Its Address
Master
Slave 1
Slave 2
Slave 3
Slave 4
Not selected
Selected
Sends address for
slave 2
Not selected
Not selected
278
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10.6.4 Command and Data
The master device sends commands to, and sends or receives data to or from, the slave device selected according
to the specified address.
Fig. 10-18 Command
SCK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SB0
C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Command
Command signal
Fig. 10-19 Data
SCK
SB0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Data
10
The8-bitdatafollowingthecommandsignalisdefinedasacommand. The8-bitdatawithoutthecommandsignal
is defined as data. The use of the command and data can be determined according to the communication
specifications.
10.6.5 Acknowledge Signal (ACK)
Thetransmittingdeviceandreceivingdeviceusetheacknowledgesignaltocheckwhetherthedataissuccessfully
received.
Fig. 10-20 Acknowledge Signal
[Output in synchronization with the eleventh pulse of the SCK clock]
SCK
8
9
10
11
SB0
ACK
[Output in synchronization with the ninth pulse of the SCK clock]
SCK
8
9
SB0
ACK
The acknowledge signal is a one-shot pulse, synchronized with the falling edge of SCK after the 8-bit data is
transferred. The signal can be synchronized with the SCK clock pulse at a desired position.
After sending the 8-bit data, the transmitting device checks whether the receiving device returns the acknowledge
signal. If the receiving device does not return the acknowledge signal within a certain period after the data is sent,
the device has not successfully received the data.
279
µPD78214 Sub-Series
10.6.6 Busy Signal (BUSY) and Ready Signal (READY)
The busy signal informs the master device that the slave device is preparing for data transmission or reception.
The ready signal informs the master device that the slave device is ready for data transmission or reception.
Fig. 10-21 Busy Signal and Ready Signal
SCK
8
9
ACK
SB0
BUSY
READY
In SBI mode, the slave device drives the SB0 line low to inform the master device that the slave is busy.
The busy signal is output after the acknowledge signal is output by the master or slave device. The busy signal
is set or released in synchronization with the falling edge of SCK. When the busy signal is released, the master
device automatically terminates the output of the SCK serial clock.
The master device can start the next transfer when the busy signal is released and the ready signal is set.
10.6.7 Signals
Figs. 10-22 to 10-26 show the signals in SBI mode and the flag operations of the SBIC. Table 10-2 lists the SBI
signals.
Fig. 10-22 Operation of RELT, CMDT, RELD, and CMDD
Transfer start request
SIO
SCK
SB0
RELT
CMDT
RELD
CMDD
280
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
Fig. 10-23 ACKT Operation
SCK
SB0
6
7
8
9
ACK signal is output during first clock
cycle immediately after ACKT is set.
D2
D1
D0
ACK
ACKT
When set during this period
Caution Do not set ACKT before transfer has been completed.
Fig. 10-24 ACKE Operations
(a) When ACKE is set to 1 at the end of transfer
SCK
SB0
1
2
7
8
9
The ACK signal is output
during the ninth clock
cycle
D1
D7
D6
D2
D0
ACK
10
ACKE
When ACKE = 1 at this point
(b) When ACKE is set after transfer has been completed
SCK
SB0
6
7
8
9
The ACK signal is output
during the first clock cycle
D2
D1
D0
ACK
immediately after ACKT is set.
ACKE
When ACKE is set during this period and ACKE = 1 at
the falling edge of the next SCK
(c) When ACKE is set to 0 at the end of transfer
SCK
SB0
1
2
7
8
9
The ACK signal is not
output
D7
D1
D0
D2
D6
ACKE
When ACKE = 0 at this point
281
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(d) When ACKE is set to 1 for a short period of time
SCK
The ACK signal is not
output
SB0
D1
D0
D2
ACKE
When ACKE is set or cleared during this period,
and ACKE = 0 at the falling edge of SCK
Fig. 10-25 ACKD Operations
(a) When the ACK signal is output during the ninth cycle of the SCK clock
Transfer start request
SIO
Transfer operation start
SCK
SB0
6
7
8
9
D2
D1
D0
ACK
D7 D6
ACKD
(b) When the ACK signal is output after the ninth pulse of the SCK clock
Transfer start request
SIO
Transfer operation start
SCK
SB0
6
7
8
9
D2
D1
D0
ACK
D7 D6
ACKD
(c) Clear timing when a transfer start is specified in the busy state
Transfer start request
SIO
SCK
SB0
6
7
8
9
D2
D1
D0
ACK
BUSY
D7
D6
ACKD
282
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
Fig. 10-26 BSYE Operation
SCK
SB0
6
7
8
9
D2
D1
D0
ACK
BUSY
BSYE
When BSYE = 1 at this point
When reset operation is executed during
this period and BSYE = 0 at the falling edge
of SCK.
10
283
µPD78214 Sub-Series
284
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10
285
µPD78214 Sub-Series
286
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10.6.8 Communication
InSBIcommunication, themasterdeviceoutputsanaddressontheserialbusand, usually, onetargetslavedevice
is selected out of two or more devices according to the address.
Once the target device has been determined, commands and data are transferred between the master device and
slave device to implement serial communication.
Figs. 10-27 to 10-30 show the timing charts for data communication.
10.6.9 Releasing the Busy State
The conditions governing the release of the busy state depend on whether transmission or reception is permitted.
They can be applied to high-speed transfer using the SBI macro service. Table 10-3 lists the methods of releasing
the BUSY state.
Table 10-3 Conditions Governing Release of BUSY
Divice and condition
Conditions governing the release of BUSY
CTxE
CRxE
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
BSYE←0, SIO read access
10
Note
BSYE←0, SIO write access
Note Write FFH into the SIO if the next operation is reception.
10.6.10 Setting Wake-Up
If WUP is set to 1 in the busy state, the wake-up state is set as soon as the device enters the ready state.
In the wake-up state, an interrupt (INTCSI) is issued only when an address is received. The acknowledge (ACK)
signal is not detected in this state.
10.6.11 Starting Transmission and Reception
Start transmission and reception in the same way as the busy state is released. Even if start of transmission and
reception is specified, transmission and reception are not started while the slave device is outputting the BUSY
signal. Transmission and reception are started when the busy state is released.
287
µPD78214 Sub-Series
288
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10
289
µPD78214 Sub-Series
290
Chapter 10 Clock Synchronous Serial Interface
10
291
µPD78214 Sub-Series
10.7 NOTES
(1) Do not change CTXE from 0 to 1 and CRXE from 1 to 0, or vice versa, by means of a single instruction. If this
is attempted, the serial clock counter will malfunction and the first communication after the change will be
terminated before the eighth bit is sent. To change these statuses, use two instructions as shown below:
Example Changing CTXE from 1 to 0 and CRXE from 0 to 1
CLR1 CTXE
SET1 CRXE
(2) When switching the master and slave, the input and output of the serial clock line (SCK) are asynchronously
switched between the master and slave. The serial clock line (SCK) requires a pull-up resistor.
(3) Do not set ACKT before the transfer has been completed.
292
CHAPTER 11 EDGE DETECTION FUNCTION
Pins P20 to P26 support an edge detection function to program a rising or falling edge. The detected edge is sent
to the internal hardware. Table 11-1 shows the relationship between pins P20 to P26, and the use of the detected
edge.
Table 11-1 Pins P20 to P26 and Use of Detected Edge
Register specifying the edge
Pins
P20
P21
Use
to be detected
NMI, control of the standby circuit
INTP0, capture signal of 8-bit timer/counter 1, trigger signal of
real-time output port
INTM0
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
INTP1, capture signal of 8-bit timer/counter 2
INTP2, CI (count clock of 8-bit timer/counter 2)
INTP3, capture signal of 16-bit timer/counter
INTP4, ASCK (external baud rate input of UART)
INTP5, conversion start signal of the A/D converter
INTM1
The edge detection function is always enabled except in STOP mode. (The edge detection function of pin P20 is
enabled even in STOP mode.)
11
11.1 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT MODE REGISTERS (INTM0, INTM1)
The external interrupt mode registers (INTM0, INTM1) specify the valid edge to be detected on pins P20 to P26.
The INTM0 register specifies the valid edge for pins P20 to P23, while the INTM1 register specifies that for pins P24
to P26.
The INTM1 register can also switch the INTP4 interrupt and INTC30 interrupt (for details see Chapter 12). When
ASCK is input, both edges are detected, independent of the values of these registers.
The 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can read and write the contents of the INTM0
and INTM1 registers. Figs. 11-1 and 11-2 show their formats.
When RESET is input, both these registers are set to 00H.
293
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 11-1 Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0 (INTM0)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
INTM0 ES21 ES20 ES11 ES10 ES01 ES00
ESNMI
ESNMI Specifies edge to be detected on P20 (NMI)
0
1
Falling edge
Rising edge
Specifies edge to be detected on P21 (INTP0, CR11
capture trigger, real-time output port output trigger)
ES01 ES00
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge
Rising edge
Inhibited
Both falling and rising edges
Specifies edge to be detected on P22
(INTP1, CR22 capture trigger)
ES11 ES10
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge
Rising edge
Inhibited
Both falling and rising edges
Specifies edge to be detected on P23
(INTP2, CI input)
ES21 ES20
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge
Rising edge
Inhibited
Both falling and rising edges
294
Chapter 11 Edge Detection Function
Fig. 11-2 Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 1 (INTM1)
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTM1
ES51 ES50 ES41 ES40 ES31 ES30
Specifies edge to be detected on P24
(INTP3, CR02 capture trigger)
ES31 ES30
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge
Rising edge
Inhibited
Both falling and rising edges
ES41 ES40 Specifies edge to be detected on P25 (INTP4)
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge
Rising edge
Selects INTC30
Both falling and rising edges
11
Specifies edge to be detected on P26
(INTP5, A/D conversion start signal)
ES51 ES50
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge
Rising edge
Inhibited
Both falling and rising edges
Caution If an edge is input while a valid edge is changing, it is not known whether the new edge is judged as being a valid edge.
295
µPD78214 Sub-Series
11.2 EDGE DETECTION ON PIN P20
An edge on pin P20 is detected after noise elimination by means of analog delay. A pulse width of at least 10 µs
is required to detect the edge.
Fig. 11-3 Edge Detection on Pin P20
10 µs (Min.)
P20 input
10 µs
(Max.)
10 µs
(Max.)
P20 after noise rejection
Rising edge
detection signal
Falling edge
detection signal
Rejected as noise
because pulse is
too narrow
Falling edge is detected
because pulse is sufficiently wide.
Rejected as noise
because pulse is
too narrow
Rising edge is detected
because pulse is sufficiently wide.
Caution Because noise elimination by analog delay is performed by pin P20, an edge is detected up to 10 µs after it is actually input. This
pin differs from pins P21 to P26 in that the delay depends on the characteristics of the device.
296
Chapter 11 Edge Detection Function
11.3 EDGE DETECTION ON PINS P21 TO P26
An edge on pins P21 to P26 is detected after digital noise elimination by means of clock sampling.
The digital noise elimination is performed by means of sampling with the f /4 clock. The input signal is
CLK
eliminated as noise if an identical level is not obtained three or more times in a row (even if an identical level is
consecutively obtained twice). The input signal is detected as a valid edge only when its level remains identical
for three or more cycles of the f
/4 clock (2 µs: f
= 6 MHz).
CLK
CLK
Fig. 11-4 Edge Detection on Pins P21 to P26
P21 to P26
fCLK/4
P21 to P26
after noise rejection
Rising edge
Falling edge
11
Digital noise is rejected at fCLK/4 clock.
Cautions 1. Because the f
/4 clock is used for digital noise elimination, it takes about 8 to 12 cycles of the f
CLK
clock to detect an edge
CLK
after the edge is actually input.
2. If the width of an input pulse corresponds to 8 to 12 cycles of the f
clock, it cannot be determined whether the pulse is
CLK
detected as a valid edge. To ensure the accurate detection of a pulse, hold the pulse at an identical level for 12 clock cycles
or longer.
3. If noise input to a pin is synchronized with the f
/4 clock of the µPD78214, it may not be judged as being noise. If input of
CLK
such noise is possible, add a filter to the input pin to eliminate the noise.
4. An in-circuit emulator cannot successfully eliminate digital noise. It may erroneously detect a falling edge due to noise during
the input of a low signal and a rising edge due to noise during the input of a high signal (see Fig. 11-5). When data is read from
port 2, noise is not eliminated, being read instead.
Fig. 11-5 Erroneously Detected Edges
(a) Erroneously detected edge during input of a low signal
Noise
INTPn input (n = 0 to 6)
fCLK/4
After noise rejection
Falling edge detection
"L"
Rising edge detection
Erroneously detected edge
297
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(b) Erroneously detected edge during input of a high signal
Noise
INTPn input (n = 0 to 6)
fCLK/4
After noise rejection
Falling edge detection
Rising edge detection
"L"
Erroneously detected edge
If the IE-78210-R is used, the real-time output port, timer/counter, and A/D converter operate according to the
erroneouslydetectededge. Ifanotherin-circuitemulatorisused, thesecomponentsoperateasdescribedbelow:
• Real-time output port : Operates according to the erroneously detected edge.
• A/D converter
: Operates according to the erroneously detected edge.
• Capture or clear operation of the timer/counter : Carried out independently of the erroneously detected
edge. Even if the erroneously detected edge causes an
interrupt, the capture value is not updated. The value of
CR22 becomes undefined after being read by the CPU.
• Compare operation of the timer/counter : Ifamodeforperformingaclearoperationafteracaptureoperation
is selected, or if timer/counter 2 is used as an external event
counter, the erroneously detected edge causes the timing of
match interrupt generation to be changed. As a result, the timing
of match interrupt generation will disagree with that when the
values of the timer/counter and compare register match. If the
mode for performing a clear operation after a capture operation is
selected, the timing of match interrupt generation can be cor-
rected by inputting a correct edge or by stopping the timer/
counter. If timer/counter 2 is used as an external event counter,
the timing of the match interrupt generation can be corrected by
stopping the timer/counter. Timer output is not affected by the
erroneously detected edge and operates according to the correct
timing.
11.4 NOTES
(1) If an edge is input while a valid edge is changed, it cannot be determined whether the new edge is judged as
being a valid edge.
(2) Noise elimination by analog delay is carried out on pin P20. An edge is detected up to 10 µs after the edge
is actually input. Pin P20 differs from pins P21 to P26 in that the delay time depends on the characteristics of
the device.
(3) On pins P21 to P26, digital noise elimination is carried out with the f /4 clock. It takes about 8 to 12 cycles
CLK
of the f
clock to detect an edge after it is actually input.
CLK
(4) If the width of a pulse input to pins P21 to P26 corresponds to 8 to 12 cycles of the f
clock, it cannot be
CLK
determined whether the pulse is detected as being a valid edge. To ensure the accurate detection of a pulse,
hold the pulse at an identical level for 12 clock cycles or longer.
298
Chapter 11 Edge Detection Function
(5) If noise input to pins P21 to P26 is synchronized with the f
/4 clock of the µPD78214, it may not be judged
CLK
as being noise. If the input of such noise is possible, add a filter to the input pin so that the noise can be
eliminated.
(6) Anin-circuitemulatorcannotsuccessfullyeliminatedigitalnoise. Itmayerroneouslydetectafallingedgedue
to noise during the input of a low signal and a rising edge due to the noise during the input of a high signal
(see Fig. 11-6). When data is read from port 2, noise is not eliminated, being read instead.
Fig. 11-6 Erroneously Detected Edges
(a) Erroneously detected edge during input of low signal
Noise
INTPn input (n = 0 to 6)
fCLK/4
After noise rejection
Falling edge detection
"L"
11
Rising edge detection
Erroneously detected edge
(b) Erroneously detected edge during input of high signal
Noise
INTPn input (n = 0 to 6)
fCLK/4
After noise rejection
"L"
Falling edge detection
Rising edge detection
Erroneously detected edge
If the IE-78210-R is used, the real-time output port, timer/counter, and A/D converter operate according to the
erroneously detected edge. If another in-circuit emulator is used, these components operate as described below:
• Real-time output port : Operates according to the erroneously detected edge.
• A/D converter
: Operates according to the erroneously detected edge.
• Capture or clear operation of the timer/counter : Carriedoutindependentlyoftheerroneouslydetectededge.
Even if the erroneously detected edge causes an interrupt,
the capture value is not updated. The value of CR22
becomes undefined after it has been read by the CPU.
299
µPD78214 Sub-Series
• Compare operation of the timer/counter : If the mode for carrying out a clear operation after a capture
operation is selected, or if timer/counter 2 is used as an external
event counter, the erroneously detected edge causes the timing of
match interrupt generation to be changed. As a result, the timing
of match interrupt generation will disagree with that when the
values of the timer/counter and compare register match. If the
mode for performing a clear operation after a capture operation is
selected, thetimingofmatchinterruptgenerationcanbecorrected
by inputting a correct edge or by stopping the timer/counter. If
timer/counter 2 is used as an external event counter, the timing of
match interrupt generation can be corrected by stopping the timer/
counter. The timer output is not affected by the erroneously
detected edge, operating according to the correct timing.
300
CHAPTER 12 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
The µPD78214 has the following two interrupt handling modes. Either mode can be selected by the program.
Interrupt handling by a macro service is limited to the interrupt request sources provided with a macro service
handling mode listed in Table 12-1.
Table 12-1 Interrupt Request Handling Modes
Interrupt request handling mode Processed by:
PC and PSW contents
Saved and restored
Processing
Software
Program control branches to a
specified service program.
Vectored interrupt
Macro service
Hardware
(firmware)
Retained
Predetermined processing,
such as data transfer between
memory and I/O, is performed.
Maskable vectored interrupts can easily be controlled by multiple-interrupt handling with two priority levels.
12
301
µPD78214 Sub-Series
12.1 INTERRUPT REQUEST SOURCES
TheµPD78214has19interruptrequestsourcesshowninTable12-2. Eachofthesesourcesisassignedaninterrupt
vector table.
Table 12-2 Interrupt Request Sources
Interrupt
Default
priority
Macro
Vector table
address
Interrupt request source
BRK instruction execution
Generating unit
request type
service type
Software
None
None
None
A, B
A, B
A, B
B
003EH
0002H
0006H
0008H
000AH
000CH
0014H
0016H
0018H
001AH
001CH
Nonmaskable
Maskable
None
NMI (edge input to the pin is detected)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INTP0 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTP1 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTP2 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTP3 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTC00 (TM0-CR00 coincidence signal generation)
INTC01 (TM0-CR01 coincidence signal generation)
INTC10 (TM1-CR10 coincidence signal generation)
INTC11 (TM1-CR11 coincidence signal generation)
INTC21 (TM2-CR21 coincidence signal generation)
INTP4 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTC30 (TM3-CR30 coincidence signal generation)
INTP5 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTAD (A/D conversion end)
Edge detection
B
16-bit timer/counter
8-bit timer/counter 1
B
A, B, C
A, B, C
A, B
B
8-bit timer/counter 2
Edge detection
000EH
0010H
A, B
B
8-bit timer/counter 3
Edge detection
10
A, B
A, B
A/D converter
11
12
INTC20 (TM2-CR20 coincidence signal generation)
0012H
0020H
8-bit timer/counter 2
INTSER (asynchronous serial interface recep-
tion error occurrence)
None
A, B
A, B
A, B
13
14
15
INTSR (asynchronous serial interface reception
end)
Asynchronous serial
interface
0022H
0024H
0026H
INTST (asynchronous serial interface transmis-
sion end)
INTCSI (clock-synchronized serial interface
transmission end)
Clock-synchronized
serial interface
Remark The default priority is fixed by hardware. If two or more interrupts having the same priority occur simultaneously, they are handled
according to their default priority.
12.1.1 Software Interrupt Request
A software interrupt request is issued by the BRK instruction, which eventually causes a vectored interrupt.
Interrupt requests issued by the BRK instruction are accepted even in an interrupt disabled state. In this case,
interrupt priority control is not applied.
WhentheBRKinstructionisexecuted, thevectortablecontentsareunconditionallysetinthePCtocauseabranch.
By executing the BRK instruction in a BRK service routine, the service routine can nest itself.
To exit the BRK service routine, execute the RETB instruction.
302
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
12.1.2 Nonmaskable Interrupt Request
A nonmaskable interrupt request is input to the NMI pin. When a valid edge, specified by bit 0 (ESNMI) of external
interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0), is input to the NMI pin, an interrupt request is generated.
A nonmaskable interrupt request is accepted unconditionally, even in an interrupt disabled state. In this case,
interrupt priority control is not applied; the nonmaskable interrupt request takes precedence over all other
interrupts.
12.1.3 Maskable Interrupt Request
Maskable interrupt requests can be masked by setting the interrupt mask register (MK0). The IE flag in the PSW
can specify whether to enable or disable all the maskable interrupts simultaneously.
AdefaultpriorityisassignedtoeachmaskableinterruptrequestasshowninTable12-2, sothat, whentwoormore
interrupts having the same priority occur at the same time, which interrupt takes precedence is determined. The
interrupts can be divided into two groups by the priority specification flag register (PR0); a group of interrupts with
higher priority and a group of interrupts with lower priority, so that multiple-interrupt handling can be achieved.
However, the macro service is accepted independently of the priority control and the IE flag.
12.1.4 Selecting an Interrupt Source
Interrupts INTP4 and INTC30 cannot be used at the same time, because these interrupts share the same vector
table, interrupt request flags, and other control flags. Therefore, either INTP4 or INTC30 must be selected by
software. The same holds true of a pair of INTP5 and INTAD. A selected interrupt request source is given the right
to use the vector table, interrupt request flags (PIFn; n = 4 or 5), interrupt mask flags (PMKn; n = 4 or 5), interrupt
servicemodeflags(PISMn;n=4or5), andpriorityspecificationflags(PPRn;n=4or5)exclusively, thusgenerating
the corresponding interrupt and macro service. The other interrupt request sources cannot use these resources,
and therefore cannot generate an interrupt or macro service.
12
The other types of interrupts have a dedicated vector table and control flags, and therefore need not be selected.
(1) Selecting INTP4 or INTC30
Interrupt INTP4 or INTC30 is selected by the ES40 and ES41 bits of external mode register 1 (INTM1).
Both 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can be used to read data from and write
data to the INTM1 register. The format of this register is shown in Fig. 12-1.
When the RESET signal is input, the register is reset to 00H, and INTP4 occurs on the falling edge at the INTP4
pin.
Fig. 12-1 INTM1 Register Format
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTM1
ES51 ES50 ES41 ES40 ES31 ES30
Specifies edges to be detected
on P24 and P26 pins (See Fig. 11-2)
ES41 ES40 Selects interrupt request source
Selects INTP4 (which occurs at falling edge
for INTP4 pin input)
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Selects INTP4 (which occurs at rising edge
for INTP4 pin input)
Selects INTC30 (which occurs when TM3
coincides with CR30)
Selects INTP4 (which occurs at both rising
and falling edge for INTP4 pin input)
303
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Selecting INTP5 or INTAD
Interrupt INTP5 or INTAD is selected by the A/D converter mode register (ADM). (Either of these interrupts
is selected automatically, according to the mode of operation specified for the A/D converter.)
Both 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can be used to read data from and write
data to the ADM register. The format of this register is shown in Fig. 12-2. See Chapter 8 for control of the
A/D converter.
When the RESET signal is input, the register is reset to 00H.
Fig. 12-2 ADM Register Format
7
6
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
ADM
CS
TRG
FR
ANIS2 ANIS1 ANIS0 MS
These bits do not affect interrupt request source
selection. (For details about controlling
A/D converter operation, see Fig. 8-3.)
CS
0
TRG
MS
×
Selects interrupt request source
×
0
0
1
INTP5 (valid edge input to INTP5)
INTAD (each time A/D conversion ends)
INTP5 (valid edge input to INTP5)
INTAD (each time A/D conversion ends)
1
0
1
1
1
×
12.2 INTERRUPT HANDLING CONTROL REGISTERS
The following six registers control interrupt handling.
• Interrupt request flag register (IF0)
• Interrupt mask register (MK0)
• Interrupt service mode register (ISM0)
• Priority specification flag register (PR0)
• Interrupt status register (IST)
• Program status word (PSW)
The IF0, MK0, ISM0, and PR0 are 16-bit read/write registers. The contents of these registers can be manipulated
in either 16- or 8-bit units. In addition, each bit of these registers can be set and reset by a bit manipulation
instruction independently of the other bits. The IST and PSW are 8-bit read/write registers, whose contents can
be manipulated in either 8- or 1-bit units. The IE flag in the PSW can be manipulated by a dedicated instruction.
Fig. 12-3 through 12-8 show the formats of these registers.
Table 12-3 lists the interrupt request flags, interrupt mask flags, interrupt service mode flags, and priority
specification flags corresponding to each interrupt request source.
304
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Table 12-3 Flags for Interrupt Request Sources
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt service Priority specification
request source
request flag
mask flag
mode flag
flag
INTP0
INTP1
PIF0
PIF1
PMK0
PMK1
PISM0
PPR0
PPR1
PISM1
INTP2
PIF2
PMK2
PISM2
PPR2
INTP3
PIF3
PMK3
PISM3
PPR3
INTC00
INTC01
INTC10
INTC11
INTC21
INTP4
CIF00
CIF01
CIF10
CIF11
CIF21
CMK00
CMK01
CMK10
CMK11
CMK21
CISM00
CISM01
CISM10
CISM11
CISM21
CPR00
CPR01
CPR10
CPR11
CPR21
PIF4
PIF5
PMK4
PMK5
PISM4
PISM5
PPR4
PPR5
)
INTC30
INTP5
)
INTAD
INTC20
INTSER
INTSR
INTST
CIF20
SERIF
SRIF
CMK20
SERMK
SRMK
STMK
CISM20
—
CPR20
SERPR
SRPR
12
SRISM
STISM
CSIISM
STIF
STPR
INTCSI
CSIIF
CSIMK
CSIPR
12.2.1 Interrupt Request Flag Register (IF0)
The IF0 register is a 16-bit register consisting of interrupt request flags.
Each interrupt request flag is set to 1, when the corresponding interrupt request occurs. It is reset to 0, when a
vectored interrupt is accepted or macro service processing is performed.
When the RESET signal is input, this register is reset to 0000H.
Fig. 12-3 Interrupt Request Flag Register (IF0) Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
IF0L CIF11 CIF10 CIF01 CIF00 PIF3
PIF2
PIF1
PIF0
(0000H when RESET signal is input)
IF0H CSIIF STIF SRIF SERIF CIF20 PIF5
PIF4 CIF21
Interrupt request flag
0
1
Interrupt request is not generated.
Interrupt request is generated.
305
µPD78214 Sub-Series
12.2.2 Interrupt Mask Register (MK0)
TheMK0registerisa16-bitregisterconsistingofinterruptmaskflags. Eachinterruptmaskflagenablesordisables
the corresponding interrupt request.
When the RESET signal is input, the register is set to FFFFH, thus disabling all maskable interrupts.
If an interrupt mask flag is set to 1, it inhibits acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request.
If an interrupt mask flag is reset to 0, it enables the corresponding interrupt request to be accepted as a vectored
interrupt or macro service.
Fig. 12-4 Interrupt Mask Register (MK0) Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MK0L CMK11 CMK10 CMK01 CMK00 PMK3 PMK2 PMK1 PMK0
(FFFFH when RESET signal is input)
MK0H CSIMK STMK SRMK SERMK CMK20 PMK5 PMK4 CMK21
Interrupt request flag
0
1
Enables interrupt
Disables interrupt
12.2.3 Interrupt Service Mode Register (ISM0)
The ISM0 register is a 16-bit register consisting of interrupt service mode flags.
If an interrupt service mode flag is 0, the corresponding interrupt request is handled as a vectored interrupt. If it
is 1, the corresponding interrupt request is processed by a macro service. When a macro service request is
executed a specified number of times, the interrupt service mode flag is reset to 0.
When the RESET signal is input, the register is reset to 0000H, thereby specifying vectored interrupt handling.
Fig. 12-5 Interrupt Service Mode Register (ISM0) Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ISM0L CISM11 CISM10 CISM01 CISM00 PISM3 PISM2 PISM1 PISM0 (0000H when RESET signal is input)
ISM0H CSIISM STISM SRISM
0
CISM20 PISM5 PISM4 CISM21
Interrupt service mode flags
0
1
Vector interrupt processing
Macro service processing
12.2.4 Priority Specification Flag Register (PR0)
The PR0 register is a 16-bit register consisting of interrupt priority specification flags that determine priority with
which each interrupt is accepted. They are used to control multiple-interrupt handling.
There are two interrupt groups with respect to priority; one having higher priority and one having lower priority.
Whenapriorityspecificationflagis0,thecorrespondinginterruptrequestisspecifiedtobelongtothehigh-priority
group; when a priority specification flag is 1, the corresponding interrupt request is specified to belong to the
lower-priority group.
When an interrupt is accepted, the corresponding priority specification flag is sent to the ISP bit of the PSW.
306
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
When a low-priority vectored interrupt is being handled, vectored interrupt requests with lower and higher
priorities are accepted for multiple-interrupt handling provided that interrupts are enabled. When a high-priority
interrupt is being handled, high-priority vectored interrupts are accepted for multiple-interrupt handling provided
that interrupts are enabled. Moreover, any interrupt requests specifying a macro service are accepted regardless
of their priority.
When the RESET signal is input, this register is set to FFFFH, thereby specifying that all interrupts be in the low-
priority group.
Fig. 12-6 Priority Specification Flag Register (PR0) Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PR0L CPR11 CPR10 CPR01 CPR00 PPR3 PPR2 PPR1 PPR0
(FFFFH when RESET signal is input)
PR0H CSIPR STPR SRPR SERPR CPR20 PPR5 PPR4 CPR21
Priority specification flags
High priority
Low priority
0
1
12.2.5 Interrupt Status Register (IST)
The IST register is an 8-bit register that controls multiple-interrupt handling for nonmaskable interrupt requests
(input to the NMI pin) and indicates whether a nonmaskable interrupt request has been accepted.
12
When a nonmaskable interrupt is being handled, another nonmaskable interrupt request may occur. In such a
case, the nonmaskable interrupt request is accepted if the NMIS bit is 0; it is not accepted if the NMIS bit is 1.
The NMIS bit is set to 1 when a nonmaskable interrupt request is accepted. It is reset to 0, when a return (execution
of the RETI instruction) from the interrupt handling for the nonmaskable interrupt request occurs.
Both an 8-bit manipulation instruction and bit manipulation instruction can be used to read data from and write
data to the IST register. The NMIS flag is set to 1 when a nonmaskable interrupt is accepted. It is reset to 0 by the
RETI instruction. Fig. 12-7 shows the format of the IST register.
When the RESET signal is input, the register is reset to 00H.
Fig. 12-7 Interrupt Status Register (IST) Format
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
IST
NMIS
Multiple interrupt processing by
nonmaskable interrupt request
Accepting status for
nonmaskable interrupt request
NMIS
0
Execution exits from nonmaskable
interrupt processing or nonmaskable
interrupt request is not accepted.
Enabled
Disabled
Nonmaskable interrupt request is
accepted or being processed.
1
307
µPD78214 Sub-Series
12.2.6 Program Status Word (PSW)
ThePSWisaregisterthatholdstheresultofinstructionexecutionandthecurrentstatusofinterruptrequests. The
register is mapped with the IE flag that specifies whether to enable maskable interrupts and the ISP flag to control
multiple-interrupt handling.
The PSW can be read and written to in 8-bit units. It can also be manipulated by a bit manipulation instruction and
dedicated instructions (EI and DI). When a vectored interrupt request is accepted, and the BRK instruction is
executed, thePSWissavedinthestack, andtheIEflagisresetto0. Whenamaskableinterruptrequestisaccepted,
the priority specification flag for the corresponding interrupt is transferred to the ISP flag. When a nonmaskable
interrupt request is accepted, the ISP flag is reset to 0. Also when the PUSH PSW instruction is executed, the PSW
is saved in the stack. Executing the RETI, RETB, or POP PSW instruction restores the PSW from the stack.
When the RESET signal is input, the PSW is set to 02H.
Fig. 12-8 Program Status Word Format
7
6
Z
5
4
3
2
0
1
0
PSW
IE
RBS1
AC
RBS0
ISP
CY
Used when ordinary instruction is executed
ISP
0
Priority for interrupt currently processed
Interrupt with higher priority is processed
(low-priority interrupt is disabled).
Interrupt is not accepted, or low-priority interrupt
is processed (all maskable interrupts are enabled).
1
IE
0
Enables or disables interrupts
Disables
1
Enables
12.3 INTERRUPT HANDLING
12.3.1 Accepting Software Interrupts
AsoftwareinterruptrequestisacceptedbyexecutingtheBRKinstruction. Softwareinterruptscannotbedisabled.
When a software interrupt request is accepted, the PSW and PC are saved in the stack in the stated order, the IE
flag is reset to 0, and the PC is loaded with the contents of the vector table (at 003EH and 003FH) to cause a branch.
The RETB instruction is used to return from software interrupt handling.
Caution Do not use the RETI instruction to return from software interrupt handling.
12.3.2 Accepting Nonmaskable Interrupts
A nonmaskable interrupt request is accepted regardless of whether interrupts are enabled. It is not subjected to
priority control. Instead it has precedence over all other interrupt requests.
When a nonmaskable interrupt request is accepted, the NMIS bit of the interrupt status register (IST) is set to 1,
the PSW and PC are saved in the stack in the stated order, the IE and ISP flags are reset to 0, and the PC is loaded
with the contents of the vector table to cause a branch. When the RETI instruction is executed, the NMIS bit is reset
to 0.
If the NMIS bit is 1, a new nonmaskable interrupt request is not accepted. It is kept pending until the NMIS bit is
resetto0. Inotherwords,whenanonmaskableinterruptserviceprogramisrunning,anewnonmaskableinterrupt
request is not accepted. If a new nonmaskable interrupt request occurs when a nonmaskable interrupt service
program is already running, it is accepted after the service program ends (an RETI instruction is executed). In this
case, if two nonmaskable interrupt requests occur, only one request is accepted after the current service program
ends.
308
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Resetting the NMIS bit to 0 during execution of a nonmaskable interrupt service program enables multiple-
interrupt handling for nonmaskable interrupt requests. If the NMIS bit is 0, a new nonmaskable interrupt request
is accepted even when a nonmaskable interrupt service program is running.
Fig. 12-9 Accepting an NMI Interrupt Request
(a) If a new NMI request occurs during execution of an NMI service program (when the IST register is not
manipulated)
Main routine
(NMIS = 1)
NMI request NMI request pending because NMIS = 1
NMI request
Processing pending NMI request
12
(b) If a new NMI request occurs during execution of an NMI service program (when the NMIS bit is reset to 0 by
the current NMI service program)
Main routine
(NMIS = 1)
NMIS←0
NMI request
NMI request
309
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(c) If a new NMI request occurs during execution of an NMI service program (when the NMIS bit is reset to 0 by
the current NMI service program after the NMI request occurs)
Main routine
Pending NMI request is
accepted when NMIS = 0.
(NMIS = 1)
Pending,
because NMIS = 1
NMI
request
NMIS←0
NMI request
(d) If two new NMI requests occur during execution of an NMI service program (when the NMIS bit is not
manipulated by the current NMI service program)
Main routine
(NMIS = 1)
NMI Pending, because NMIS = 1
request
NMI request
NMI Pending, because NMIS = 1
request
Although NMI request is issued
more than once, it is accepted
only once.
Cautions 1. A macro service request is accepted and processed even when a nonmaskable interrupt service program is running. To disable
macro service processing during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt service program, cause the nonmaskable interrupt
service program to manipulate the mask register so that no macro service will not occur.
2. If the IE bit of the PSW is set to 1, for example, by executing the EI instruction in the nonmaskable interrupt service program,
maskableinterruptrequestsassignedhighpriorityaremadeacceptable. Ifamaskableinterruptwithhighpriorityoccursduring
execution of the nonmaskable interrupt service program, a service program for the maskable interrupt runs. If the IE and ISP
bits of the PSW are set to 1, interrupt requests with low priority will also occur, thus causing the interrupt service program to
run. An RETI instruction will be used to return from the maskable interrupt service program. The RETI instruction resets the
NMIS bit to 0, thus enabling nonmaskable interrupt requests even when multiple-interrupt handling should not be performed
for nonmaskable interrupts during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt service program to which a return was just made.
To inhibit multiple-interrupt handling for nonmaskable interrupt requests, do not enable interrupts during execution of the
nonmaskable interrupt service program.
310
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
3. Nonmaskable interrupts are always accepted except during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt handling program (except
when multiple-interrupt handling for nonmaskable interrupts have been enabled by resetting the NMIS bit of the IST register
to 0 during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt handling program) and except a period between a special instruction
described in Section 12.3.5 and an instruction that follows that special instruction. Therefore, nonmaskable interrupts are
accepted, even if the contents of the stack pointer are undefined, for example, right after a reset occurs. At this point, the
contents of the PC and PSW may be transferred to addresses (see Table 3-4 in Section 3.2.5) where writing to any special-
function register is inhibited, depending on the value in the stack pointer. If this occurs, the CPU may hang, unexpected signals
may be output from pins, or an attempt may be made to transfer the contents of the PC or PSW to a location where no RAM
has been installed, thereby making it impossible to return from the nonmaskable interrupt handling program to the main
routine, hence a program crash.
If a falling edge (valid edge of the NMI input after a reset) arrives at the NMI pin at much the same time when a rising edge is
supplied to the RESET pin, a branch occurs to the nonmaskable interrupt handling program without executing a single
instruction after a reset, resulting in a program crash almost with no exception. To avoid these problems, initialize the stack
pointer after a reset, and design the hardware so that the NMI signal does not drop within 10µs + 20/f
after the RESET signal
#
CLK
rises.
12.3.3 Accepting Maskable Interrupts
A maskable interrupt is accepted when the corresponding interrupt request flag is set to 1, if the corresponding
interrupt mask flag is 0. When a macro service is used, the interrupt is accepted immediately when the interrupt
flagissetto1. Ifitisavectoredinterrupt,itisacceptedwheninterruptsareenabled(whentheIEflagis1). However,
low-priority interrupts are not accepted if a high-priority interrupt is already being serviced (when the ISP flag is
0).
If two or more maskable interrupt requests occur simultaneously, they are accepted according to their priority (as
specified in the priority specification flag). If interrupt requests have the same priority, an interrupt request with
the highest default priority is accepted first.
A pending interrupt request is accepted when it is enabled.
Fig. 12-10 shows the algorithm for accepting interrupt requests.
12
When a maskable interrupt request is accepted, the contents of the PSW and PC are saved in the stack in the stated
order, the IE flag is reset to 0 (interrupt disabled state), the content of the priority specification flag corresponding
totheacceptedinterruptrequestistransferredtotheISP. Moreover,thePCisloadedwiththecontentsofthevector
tablecorrespondingtotheacceptedinterruptrequest,thuscausingabranch. TheRETIinstructionisusedtoreturn
from the interrupt.
311
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-10 Interrupt Handling Algorithm
No
××IF = 1?
Yes (interrupt request occurs)
No
××MK = 0?
Yes
Interrupt request pending
Yes (high priority)
××PR = 0?
No (low priority)
Is there a high-priority interrupt
among interrupts for ××PR = 0
that have occurred
Yes
Interrupts for
××PR = 0 occur
simultaneously?
simultaneously?
Yes
No
Interrupt request pending
Interrupt request pending
No
No
××ISM = 0?
Yes
Yes
Macro service processing
No
Higher-priority interrupts
occur simultaneously?
IE = 1?
Yes
Interrupt request pending
No
Interrupt request pending
No
No
No
××ISM = 0?
Vectored interrupt processing
Yes
Macro service processing
Interrupt request pending
Interrupt request pending
IE = 1?
Yes (EI)
ISP = 1?
Yes
Vectored interrupt processing
312
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
12.3.4 Multiple-Interrupt Handling
The µPD78214 performs multiple-interrupt handling in which another interrupt request is accepted during one
interrupt is already being handled. Multiple-interrupt handling runs according to priority.
Priority control is based on either default priority or programmable priority specified in the priority specification
flag register (PR0). Priority control by default priority handles interrupt requests according to the default priority
assigned to each interrupt request (see Table 12-2). Priority control by programmable priority divides interrupt
requests into a high-priority group and a low-priority group according to the corresponding bit of the PR0 register.
Table 12-4 lists interrupt requests that can be subjected to multiple-interrupt handling.
Table 12-4 Multiple-Interrupt Handling
Interrupt request accepted
IE flag
0
Interrupt request source that can be subjected to multiple-interrupt handling
• Nonmaskable interrupt
Interrupts assigned low pro-
grammable priority
• Maskable interrupt by macro service processing
• Nonmaskable interrupt
Note 1
1
• All maskable interrupts
• Nonmaskable interrupt
Interrupts assigned high
programmable priority
0
• Maskable interrupt by macro service processing
• Nonmaskable interrupt
Note 1
• Maskable interrupt by macro service processing
• Maskable interrupt assigned high programmable priority
1
1
12
Note 2
• Nonmaskable interrupt
Nonmaskable interrupt
0
• Maskable interrupt by macro service processing
Note 2
• Nonmaskable interrupt
• Maskable interrupt by macro service processing
Note 1
Note 3
• Maskable interrupt assigned high programmable priority
Notes 1. Immediately after an interrupt is accepted, interrupts are disabled (IE = 0) automatically. To enable interrupts (IE = 1), execute the
EI instruction.
2. When a nonmaskable interrupt request is being accepted, bit 0 (NMIS) of the interrupt status register (IST) is 1.
When the NMIS bit is 1, nonmaskable interrupt requests are not accepted. To enable multiple-interrupt handling for nonmaskable
interrupt requests, reset the NMIS flag to 0 by software.
3. When the ISP flag is 1, low priority interrupt requests are accepted.
313
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-11 Example of Handling an Interrupt Request When an Interrupt Is Already Being Handled (1/2)
Main routine
[Nesting 1]
[Nesting 2]
[Nesting 3]
Processing a
Processing b
EI
Macro service
→
request b
Processing c
Vectored interrupt request a
(low priority)
→
Processing d
Vectored interrupt
request c
Macro service
request d
→
→
(high priority)
Processing e
EI
Processing f
Macro service
→
request f
← Vectored interrupt request g (low priority): Pending
Vectored interrupt request e
(high priority)
→
Processing g
Processing h
Macro service
request h
→
314
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Fig. 12-11 Example of Handling an Interrupt Request When an Interrupt Is Already Being Handled (2/2)
Main routine
[Nesting 1]
[Nesting 2]
Processing i
EI
Processing j
Vectored interrupt request i
(low priority)
→
Vectored interrupt
request j
→
(low priority)
Processing k
← Vectored interrupt request l (low priority): Pending
Vectored interrupt request k
(low priority)
→
Processing l
12
Processing m
← Vectored interrupt request n (low priority): Pending
Vectored interrupt request m
(low priority)
→
→
Processing n
Processing o
← Vectored interrupt request p (low priority): Pending
Processing p
Vectored interrupt request o
(high priority)
Setting EI, ISP to 1
Processing q
EI
← Vectored interrupt request r (low priority): Pending
Processing s
Vectored interrupt
request j
→
(high priority)
Vectored interrupt request q
(high priority)
→
Processing r
315
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-12 Example of Handling Interrupts That Occur Simultaneously
Main routine
[Nesting 1]
[Nesting 2]
Processing b
• Vectored interrupt request a (low priority)
• Macro service request b (high priority)
• Macro service request c (low priority)
• Vectored interrupt request d (high priority)
Default priority: a > b > c > d
Processing d
Processing a
Processing c
12.3.5 Interrupt Request and Macro Service Pending
When any of the following instructions is executed, all interrupts (including nonmaskable interrupts) and macro
services are kept pending. The pending state continues until another instruction is executed. Software interrupt
requests are not kept pending, however.
EI
DI
RETI
RETB
POP PSW
MOV PSW,A
MOV PSW,#byte
IST, MK0, IF0, PR0, and ISM0 manipulation instructions
PSW bit manipulation instructions (excluding BT PSW.bit, $addr16, BF PSW.bit, $addr16, SET1 CY, NOT1 CY, and
CLR1 CY instructions)
Cautions 1. When a BF instruction is used to poll registers related to interrupts, do not specify this BF instruction as the branch destination.
Otherwise, all interrupts and macro services are kept pending until a condition that inhibits a branch is met during execution
of the instruction.
Example of incorrect coding
•
•
•
All interrupts and macro services are kept pending, until
IF0H.3 is set to 1. The pending state continues until the
instruction next to the BF is executed.
LOOP: BF IF0H.3, $LOOP
←
←
× × ×
•
•
•
Example of correct coding (1)
•
•
•
LOOP: NOP
Interrupts or macro services will not be kept pending long,
because they are processed after the NOP is executed.
BF IF0H.3, $LOOP
•
•
•
316
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Example of correct coding (2)
•
•
•
LOOP: BT IF0H.3, $NEXT
BR $LOOP
Remark The BTCLR would be more convenient than the
BT, because it clears the flags automatically.
NEXT:
←
Interrupts or macro services will not be kept pending long,
because they are processed after the BR is executed.
•
•
•
2. In addition, when you have to use a coding of the instructions listed above consecutively, yet expect frequent occurrence of
interrupts and macro services, insert NOP instructions in the coding to allow time during which interrupts and macro service
can be accepted.
12.3.6 Interrupt and Macro Service Operation Timing
(1) Generation and acceptance of an interrupt request
An interrupt request is generated by hardware. The generated interrupt request sets the corresponding
interrupt request flag to 1.
When the interrupt request flag is set to 1, three clocks (0.5 µs at f
priority of the interrupt request.
= 6 MHz) are required to identify the
CLK
If the acceptance of the interrupt request is allowed when the current instruction has been executed, the
interruptrequestisaccepted. Ifthecurrentinstructionisonethatkeepsinterruptrequestsandmacroservices
pending,theinterruptrequestisacceptedaftertheinstructionnexttothatinstructionhasbeenexecuted. (See
Section 12.3.5 for instructions that keep interrupt requests and macro services pending.)
12
Fig. 12-13 Interrupt Request Generation and Acceptance (Unit: Clock)
Interrupt request flag
3 clocks
Instruction
Interrupt request accepting processing/macro service processing
(2) Interrupt request acceptance time
The time listed in Table 12-5 is required to accept each interrupt request. The interrupt handling program
starts running after the time listed in Table 12-5 has elapsed.
Note
Table 12-5 Interrupt Request Acceptance Processing Time
(Unit: Clock)
Stack area
External memory
Internal RAM
Peripheral RAM
Program fetch
24
24 + w × 3
Internal ROM fetch
External ROM fetch
18
30 + w × 6
24 + w × 3
30 + w × 3
(w = number of wait cycles)
Note The time listed here does not include the time that elapses before the current instruction is completed or the time required to identify
the priority of the interrupt request.
Remarks 1. Thevaluesonthe“InternalROMfetch”rowapplywhentheprogramisfetchedfromtheinternalROMwithIFCHbitofthememory
expansion mode register (MM) set to 1. If the IFCH bit is 0, the same values as when the program is fetched from an external
ROM apply.
2. “Internal RAM” is located at addresses 0FE00H through 0FEFFH.
317
µPD78214 Sub-Series
3. “Peripheral RAM” corresponds to the internal RAM at addresses 0FC80H through 0FDFFH (for the µPD78212, 0FD80H through
0FDFFH).
4. 1 clock = 1/f
(167 ns at 12 MHz).
CLK
(3) Macro service processing time
The time required to process a macro service varies, depending on the type of the macro service, as listed in
Table 12-6.
Note
Table 12-6 Macro Service Processing Time
(Unit: Clock)
Program fetch
Memory
Internal ROM fetch
Internal External
External ROM fetch
Internal External
Internal
macro service
Internal
processing type
RAM
memory
RAM
memory
ROM
ROM
Memory to SFR
SFR to memory
Memory to SFR
SFR to memory
Data transfer
19
20
29
31
35
39
—
21 + w
22 + w
31 + w
33 + w
37 + w
41 + w
—
—
—
30
—
37
41
—
—
A
B
—
—
31 + w
33 + w
39 + 2w
43 + 2w
33 + 2w
35 + 2w
41 + 3w
45 + 3w
32 + w
—
39 + w
43 + w
Without ring
control
Automatic addition
44 + 2w/
49 + 2w
42 + w/ 46 + 3w/
47 + w 51 + 3w
44 + w/
49 + w
C
Data transfer
40/45
42/47
With ring
control
48 + 2w/
53 + 2w
46 + w/ 50 + 3w/
51 + w 55 + 3w
48 + w/
53 + w
44/49
Automatic addition
46/51
(w = number of wait cycles)
Note The time listed here does not include the time that elapses before the current instruction is completed or the time required to identify
the priority of the interrupt request.
Remarks 1. The values in the “Internal ROM fetch” column apply when the IFCH bit of the memory expansion mode register (MM) is 1. If
the IFCH bit is 0, see the “External ROM fetch” column.
2. The values in the “Internal RAM” column apply when an internal RAM at 0FE00H through 0FEFFH is used. If other areas in the
internal RAM are used, the values in the “External memory” column apply after w is reset to 0.
3. The values on the right of “/” apply when the ring counter is 0. The values on the left of “/” apply when the ring counter is other
than 0.
4. 1 clock = 1/f
(167 ns at 12 MHz)
CLK
5. For types A and B, an additional wait time of up to 15 clocks is inserted. See (8) of Section 7.5.1 and Table 7-20 in Chapter 7 for
details.
6. The number of clocks for type C does not include wait states inserted for access to the CR10 or CR11. If the wait time is inserted,
the values in the list must be increased by one clock.
318
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
12.4 MACRO SERVICE FUNCTION
12.4.1 Macro Service Outline
Macro service is one of the interrupt handling methods. When a vectored interrupt is processed, the contents of
the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW) are saved in the stack and the PC is loaded with the
vector address retrieved from the vector table. With the macro service function, a different type of processing
(mainlydatatransfer)isperformed. Thistypeofprocessingcanrespondtoaninterruptrequestquickly. Moreover,
it transfers data much faster than the program does, shortening the required processing time significantly.
With the macro service function, a vectored interrupt can be generated after processing has been performed a
specified number of times, so that the vectored interrupt program can be simplified.
Fig. 12-14 Differences between a Vectored Interrupt and Macro Service
Main
routine
Macro service
processing
Macro service
Vectored interruptNote 1
Vectored interrupt
Main routine
Main
routine
SEL
RBn
Interrupt
processing
Restores
PC, PSW
Note 2
Main routine
Saves
general
registers registers
Initializes
general
Restores
Main
routine
Interrupt
processing
Restores
PC, PSW
general
Main routine
Note 2
registers
12
Interrupt request occurs
Notes 1. This timing chart applies when the register bank switching function is used and the registers are loaded with the initial values in
advance.
2. The PC and PSW contents are saved in the stack and the PC is loaded with the vector address.
319
µPD78214 Sub-Series
12.4.2 Macro Service Types
The macro service can be used by the 17 types of interrupts listed in Table 12-7 (of which, 15 types can use macro
services simultaneously). In addition, three modes of operation are available, and each should be selected
according to the application.
Table 12-7 Interrupts That Can Use a Macro Service
Macro service Special function
Interrupt request source
Generating unit
type
A, B
A, B
A, B
B
register used for type A
INTP0 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTP1 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTP2 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTP3 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTC00 (TM0-CR00 coincidence signal generation)
INTC01 (TM0-CR01 coincidence signal generation)
INTC10 (TM1-CR10 coincidence signal generation)
INTC11 (TM1-CR11 coincidence signal generation)
INTC21 (TM2-CR21 coincidence signal generation)
INTP4 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTC30 (TM3-CR30 coincidence signal generation)
INTP5 (edge input to the pin is detected)
INTAD (A/D conversion end)
CR11
CR22
TM2
—
Edge detection
B
—
16-bit timer/counter
8-bit timer/counter 1
B
—
A, B, C
A, B, C
A, B
B
CR10
CR11
CR21
—
8-bit timer/counter 2
Edge detection
8-bit timer/counter 3
Edge detection
A, B
B
CR30
—
A/D converter
A, B
A, B
A, B
A, B
ACDR
CR20
RxB
TxB
INTC20 (TM2-CR20 coincidence signal generation)
INTSR (asynchronous serial interface reception end)
INTST (asynchronous serial interface transmission end)
8-bit timer/counter 2
Asynchronous serial
interface
INTCSI (clock-synchronized serial interface
transmission end)
Clock-synchronized serial
interface
A, B
SIO
The following three types of macro services are available:
(1) Type A
Transfers 1-byte data between a special function register (SFR) and memory upon each interrupt request.
When a specified number of data transfers are performed, a vectored interrupt request is generated.
The SFR with which data is to be transferred is predetermined for each interrupt request. In addition, the
memory to be used is fixed at addresses 0FE00H through 0FEFFH in the internal RAM.
This macro service is easily specified and is usable for transfer of a small amount of data at high speed.
(2) Type B
Similarly to type A, transfers 1-byte data between an SFR and memory upon each interrupt request. When
a specified number of data transfers are performed, a vectored interrupt request is generated.
The SFR and memory between which data is to be transferred are specified by the macro service channel (the
memory is a 64K-byte area at addresses 0000H through FEFFH).
This macro service is a general-purpose version of type A. It is suitable for transfer of a large amount of data.
320
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
(3) Type C
Transfers 1-byte data from memory to the real-time output port and the compare register for 8-bit timer/
counter 1 upon each interrupt request. When a specified number of data transfers are performed, a vectored
interrupt request is generated.
Type C macro service transfers data to two locations upon one interrupt request. In addition, it can be used
together with output data ring control and automatic addition of the compare register contents to data.
Use of type C is limited to INTC10 and INTC11. The SFRs to which data can be transferred are also limited.
A 64K-byte memory area, addresses 0000H through FEFFH, can be used.
Type C is a macro service for real-time output port and is suitable for controlling stepper motors.
12.4.3 Macro Service Basic Operation
The interrupt request that can specify the macro service processing and that is generated by the algorithm shown
in Fig. 12-10 is handled basically by using the sequence shown in Fig. 12-15.
An interrupt request that can specify a macro service is not affected by the state of the IE flag. It is disabled by
settingtheinterruptmaskflagintheinterruptmaskregister(MK0)to1. Themacroserviceprocessingisperformed
regardlessofwhetherinterruptsaredisabledandwhetheramacroserviceprocessingisalreadybeingperformed.
Fig. 12-15 Macro Service Processing Sequence
Interrupt request that can specify
macro service processing occurs.
12
Execute macro service processing
; Transfers data and controls real-time output port
; Decrements macro service counter (MSC)
MSC←MSC – 1
Yes
No
MSC = 0?
××ISM←0
Interrupt request flag←0
Vectored interrupt request is generated
Next instruction is executed.
The type of a macro service and the direction of its data transfer are determined by the value in the mode register
inthemacroservicecontrolword. Thenthemacroservicechannelspecifiedbyachannelpointerisusedaccording
to the type of macro service for data transfer.
A macro service channel contains the macro service counter to hold the number of data transfers to be performed,
transfer destination and source pointers, and data buffers. It is mapped to locations from FE00H through FEFFH
in the internal RAM.
321
µPD78214 Sub-Series
12.4.4 Macro Service Control Register
(1) Macro service control word
The macro service function of the µPD78214 is controlled using the macro service mode registers and macro
service channel pointers. The macro service mode registers specify the mode of macro service processing,
and the macro service channel pointer specifies the address of a macro service channel to be used.
The macro service mode registers and macro service channel pointers are mapped in the internal RAM as
macro service control words for individual macro services as shown in Fig. 12-16.
Toperformmacroservice, itisnecessarytosetvaluesinthemacroservicemoderegisterandchannelpointer
corresponding to an interrupt request that can be processed by macro service.
Fig. 12-16 Macro Service Control Word Configuration
0FEDFH
0FEDEH
0FEDDH
0FEDCH
0FEDBH
0FEDAH
0FED9H
0FED8H
0FED7H
0FED6H
0FED5H
0FED4H
0FED3H
0FED2H
0FED1H
0FED0H
0FECFH
0FECEH
0FECDH
0FECCH
0FECBH
0FECAH
0FEC9H
0FEC8H
0FEC7H
0FEC6H
0FEC5H
0FEC4H
0FEC3H
0FEC2H
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
Channel pointer
Mode register
INTSR
INTST
INTCSI
INTC10
INTC11
INTP4/INTC30
INTP5/INTAD
INTC00
INTC01
INTC20
INTC21
INTP0
INTP1
INTP2
INTP3
322
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
(2) Macro service mode register
A macro service mode register is an 8-bit register that specifies the mode of macro service operation. It is
mapped in internal RAM as part of macro service control word (see Fig 12-16).
Fig. 12-17 shows the format of the macro service mode register.
Fig. 12-17 Macro Service Mode Register Format
7
6
5
4
0
3
2
1
0
CHT2 CHT1 CHT0
MOD3 MOD2 MOD1 MOD0
CHT0
CHT1
CHT2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Type C
MOD3 MOD2 MOD1 MOD0
Type A
Type B
MPT is retained.
MPT is incremented.
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Data transfer from memory to SFR
Data transfer from SFR to memory
12
P0L
P0H
P0L
Data transfer
only
Without
ring control
With
automatic
addition
P0H
P0L
P0H
P0L
P0H
Data transfer
only
With
ring control
With
automatic
addition
(3) Macro service channel pointer
A macro service channel pointer specifies the address of a macro service channel. The macro service channel
can be located in a 256-byte area in the internal RAM at addresses FE00H through FEFFH. The higher 8 bits
of the address are fixed. Therefore, the macro service channel pointer specifies the lower 8 bits of the highest
address of the macro service channel.
12.4.5 Macro Service Type A
(1) Operation
ThetypeAmacroservicetransfersdatabetweenthebuffermemoryinthemacroservicechannelandtheSFR
predetermined for an individual interrupt request.
Forthismacroservice, thedirectionofdatatransfercanbespecifiedaseither“frommemorytoSFR”or“from
SFR to memory.”
Data transfer is repeated as many times as previously specified in the macro service counter. The macro
service transfers 8-bit data.
The type A macro service is suitable for transfer of a limited amount of data at high speed.
The 12 types of interrupt requests listed in Table 12-8 can be specified for the type A macro service. Table 12-
8 also lists the SFR registers that can be specified as transfer destinations and sources.
323
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 12-8 Interrupt Requests That Can Specify Macro Service and Related SFRs (Type A)
Interrupt request specifying
the type A macro service
Transfer source/destination SFR
INTC10
INTC11
INTC20
INTC21
INTC30
INTSR
INTST
INTCSI
INTAD
INTP0
CR10 register
CR11 register
CR20 register
CR21 register
CR30 register
RXB register
TXS register
SIO register
ADCR register
CR11 register
CR22 register
TM2 register
INTP1
INTP2
Caution When the external memory is expanded (or always with the µPD78213), an illegal write access operation may occur during the type
A macro service.
This illegal write access occurs when either of the following two conditions is satisfied.
(1) When data D0H through DFH is transferred from memory to an SFR.
(2) When macro service transfers data from an SFR to a buffer (memory) at 0FED0H through 0FEDFH.
An illegal write access is processed in the same manner as the normal memory access. In addition, wait states may be inserted
according to the setting of the PW20 and PW21 bits of the memory expansion mode register (MM). Table 12-9 lists the conditions
under which an illegal write access occurs and the corresponding operations.
Table 12-9 Illegal Write Access Conditions and Corresponding Operations
Illegal write access
Condition
Data
Address
Data transferred by macro service
Address of a destination SFR
1
2
Lower 8 bits of the address of
the destination buffer (memory)
Address of a source SFR
This problem may be solved by either of the following two methods.
(1) It is difficult for software to solve the problem if it occurs under condition 1, because it depends on the transfer data. Therefore,
use an external address decoder circuit to keep the image in the area of 0FF00H through 0FFFFH from overlapping the memory
addresses of the external circuit.
(2) If the macro service to be used does not satisfy condition 1 (i.e., if data is not transferred from an SFR to memory), and under
condition 2, locate the buffer area so that its addresses are not 0FED0H through 0FEDFH.
The above problem also occurs with an in-circuit emulator.
324
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Fig. 12-18 Flow of Data Transfer by Macro Service (Type A)
Accepts macro service request
Read contents of macro service mode register
Other factors
Identify channel type
To other macro service processing
TYPE A
Read channel pointer contents (m)
Read MSC contents (n)
Buffer address calculation m – n
12
SFR→memory
Identify transfer direction
Memory→SFR
Read contents of buffer and transfer read data
to specified SFR
Read specified SFR contents and transfer read
data to buffer
MSC = n – 1
No
MSC = 0?
Yes
Vectored interrupt request occurs.
Reset interrupt request flag
End
End
325
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Macro service channel configuration
Achannelpointerandamacroservicecounter(MSC)specifytheaddressesoftransfersourceanddestination
buffers in the internal RAM (at FE00H through FEFFH). (See Fig. 12-19.)
The SFR to be accessed is predetermined for each interrupt request. (See Table 12-8.)
Fig. 12-19 Type A Macro Service Channel
↑Lower address
Macro service buffer n
MSC = n
Macro service channel
Macro service buffer 2
Macro service buffer 1
MSC = 2
MSC = 1
Macro service counter
(MSC)
Mode register
Macro service control word
Channel pointer
↓Higher address
(Macro service buffer address) = (Channel pointer) – (Macro service counter)
326
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
(3) Example of using the type A macro service
The following example shows how data received through an asynchronous serial interface is transferred to
a buffer area in the internal RAM.
Fig. 12-20 Asynchronous Serial Reception
Internal RAM
0FEC0H
MSC
0F
0FECFH
-1
Mode register
41 Type A: SFR → memory
Channel pointer
CF
Internal bus
12
Receive buffer (RXB)
Shift register
INTSR macro service request
RXB/P30
12.4.6 Type B Macro Service
(1) Operation
The type B macro service transfers data between a data area in the memory specified by the macro service
channel and an SFR.
Forthismacroservice, thedirectionofdatatransfercanbespecifiedaseither“frommemorytoSFR”or“from
SFR to memory.”
Data transfer is repeated as many times as previously specified in the macro service counter. The macro
service transfers 8-bit data.
The type B macro service can be specified for all interrupt requests of the µPD78214 that can activate a macro
service. For the type B macro service, the SFR pointers can specify any SFRs for data transfer sources and
destinations.
This macro service is a general-purpose version of the type A macro service. It has a data buffer area in a 64K-
byte address space and therefore is suitable for transfer of a large amount of data.
327
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-21 Flow of Data Transfer by Macro Service (Type B)
Accepts macro service request
Read contents of macro service mode register
Other factors
Identify channel type
To other macro service processing
TYPE B
Read channel pointer contents (m)
Memory→SFR
Identify transfer direction
SFR→memory
Select transfer source memory by
macro service pointer (MP)
Select transfer source SFR by SFR pointer
Read data from SFR and write it to the memory
addressed by MP
Read data from memory and write it to the SFR
specified by SFR pointer
Increment MP
MSC←MSC- 1
No
MSC = 0?
Yes
Vectored interrupt request
Reset interrupt request flag
End
End
328
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
(2) Macro service channel configuration
The macro service pointer (MP) indicates a data buffer area in the 64K memory space as a transfer source or
destination.
The SFR pointer (SFRP) is set with the lower 8 bits of the address of an SFR used as a transfer source or
destination.
The macro service counter (MSC) specifies the number of data transfers to be performed.
The macro service channel, which holds the macro service pointer, SFR pointer, and macro service counter,
is located at addresses 0FE00H through 0FEFFH in the internal RAM space.
The channel pointer indicates the macro service channel, as shown in Fig. 12-22. The channel pointer holds
the lower 8-bits of the address.
Caution The following registers cannot be used as SFRs.
IF0L, IF0H, MK0L, MK0H, PR0L, PR0H, ISM0L, ISM0H, and IST
#
Fig. 12-22 Type B Macro Service Channel
64K memory space
Macro service counter
(MSC)
Lower address
↑
SFR pointer
(SFRP)
Macro service pointer,
low (MPL)
Buffer area
Macro service pointer,
high (MPH)
12
Mode register
↓
Channel pointer
SFR
Higher address
(Macro service buffer address) = (Macro service pointer)
329
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) Example of using the type B macro service
Thefollowingexampleshowshowparalleldataisinputfromport3insynchronizationwithanexternalsignal.
The external signal is input to the external interrupt pin (INTP4).
Fig. 12-23 Parallel Data Input in Synchronization with an External Interrupt
64K memory space
(Internal RAM)
MSC
SFRP
MPL (low)
MPH (high)
–1
20
03Note
00
0A000H
0A01FH
Buffer area
+1
0FECFH
A0
Mode register
Channel pointer
A1
CF
Type B: Memory → SFR
Internal bus
Note Port 3 address
INTP4
Macro service
request
P25/INTP4/ASCK
Edge detector
Port 3
P37/TO3
P36/TO2
P35/TO1
P34/TO0
P33/SO/SB0
P32/SCK
P31/TxD
P30/RxD
Fig. 12-24 Parallel Data Input Timing
Port 3
INTP4
Data input (macro service)
330
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
12.4.7 Macro Service Type C
(1) Operation
The type C macro service controls 8-bit timer/counter 1 and the real-time output port simultaneously. This
macro service transfers data to both the compare register for 8-bit timer/counter 1 and the buffer register for
the real-time output port upon one interrupt request.
Only INTC10 and INTC11 can use the type C macro service. Their transfer destination registers are
predetermined as listed in Table 12-8.
Table 12-10 Interrupt Requests That Can Specify Macro Service and SFRs (Type C)
Data transfer destination
addressed by the MPT
Data transfer destination
addressed by the MPD
Interrupt request
INTC10
INTC11
CR10
CR11
P0L or P0H (specified by the mode register)
P0L or P0H (specified by the mode register)
Besides the basic data transfer function described above, the type C macro service can have the following
ancillary functions to reduce the required buffer area and load on the software.
(a) Retention of the timer macro service pointer
It can be specified whether to retain or increment the timer macro service pointer (MPT).
(b) Automatic addition
This function adds data addressed by the timer macro service pointer (MPT) to the value in the compare
register, and transfers the sum to the compare register.
12
If this function is not used, data addressed by the MPT is transferred to the compare register.
(c) Ring control
This function repeats to output a pattern of data with a predetermined length automatically.
These ancillary functions are specified in the mode register in the macro service control word.
Cautions 1. With the type C macro service, the MPT and MPD are incremented only at the lower 8 bits. If a carry occurs at bit 7 of
the MPTL or MPDL, it is ignored; so the higher 8 bits are not affected.
2. Whentheexternalmemoryisexpanded(oralwayswiththeµPD78213),anillegalwriteaccessoperationmayoccurduring
the type C macro service. This illegal write access occurs when the following condition is satisfied.
• When the MPTL address is 0FED0H through 0FEDFH.
An illegal write access is performed in the same manner as the normal memory access. In addition, wait states may be
inserted according to the setting of the PW20 and PW21 bits of the memory expansion mode register (MM). Table 12-
11 lists the conditions under which an illegal write access occurs and the corresponding operations.
Table 12-11 Illegal Write Access Conditions and Corresponding Operations
Illegal write access
Data
Address
Lower 8 bits of the address of
the MPTL
Address of a destination SFR
(CR10 or CR11)
This problem may be solved by the following method.
• Locate the MPTL so that its address does not coincide with an address from 0FED0H through 0FEDFH.
The above problem also occurs with an in-circuit emulator.
331
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-25 Flow of Data Transfer by Macro Service (Type C)
Accepts macro service request
Read contents of macro service mode register
Other factors
Identify channel type
To other macro service processing
TYPE C
Read channel pointer contents (m)
Read memory addressed by MPT
Automatic addition?
Yes
No
Transfer data to compare register
Add data to compare register
Yes
Retains MPT?
No
Increment MPTL
Read memory addressed by MPD
Transfer data to buffer register
Increment MPDL
1
332
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
1
No
Ring control?
Yes
Decrement ring counter
No
Ring counter = 0?
Yes
Subtract modulo register contents from
low-order 8-bits of macro service pointer
for data (MPDL) and return pointer to
the first address
12
Reload modulo register contents to ring counter
MSC←MSC – 1
No
MSC = 0?
Yes
Vectored interrupt request occurs
Reset interrupt request flag
End
End
333
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Macro service channel configuration
There are two types of type C macro service channels, as shown in Fig. 12-26.
The timer macro service pointer (MPT) indicates a data buffer area in the 64K memory space from which data
is transferred to, or added to the contents of, the compare register for 8-bit timer/counter 1.
The data macro service pointer (MPD) indicates a data buffer area in the 64K memory space from which data
is transferred to the real-time output port.
The modulo register (MR) specifies the number of repetition patterns for ring control (if used).
The ring counter (RC) retains the steps in a pattern for ring control (if used). Usually, it is initialized with the
same value as for the modulo register.
The macro service counter (MSC) specifies the number of data transfers to occur.
The macro service channel, holding these pointers and counter, is located at addresses 0FE00H through
0FEFFH in the internal RAM space. The macro service channel is indicated by the channel pointer as shown
in Fig. 12-26. The channel pointer is set with the lower 8 bits of the address of the macro service channel.
Fig. 12-26 Type C Macro Service Channel
(a) Without ring control
Lower address
Macro service counter
↑
(MSC)
Data macro service pointer,
low (MPDL)
Data macro service pointer,
Macro service channel
high (MPDH)
Timer macro service pointer,
low (MPTL)
Timer macro service pointer,
high (MPTH)
Mode register
Macro service control word
Channel pointer
↓
Higher address
334
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
(b) With ring control
Lower address
Macro service counter
(MSC)
↑
Ring counter
(RC)
Modulo register
(MR)
Data macro service pointer,
low (MPDL)
Macro service channel
Data macro service pointer,
high (MPDH)
Timer macro service pointer,
low (MPTL)
Timer macro service pointer,
high (MPTH)
Mode register
Macro service control word
Channel pointer
↓
Higher address
12
335
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) Example of using the type C macro service
The following example shows a pattern output to the real-time output port and how the output interval is
controlled directly.
Update data is transferred from two data areas previously set in the 64K-byte space to the buffer registers
(P0H and P0L) and compare registers (CR10 and CR11) for the real-time output port.
Fig. 12-27 Open-Loop Control for a Stepper Motor by the Real-Time Output Port
64K memory space
Macro service control word
(internal RAM)
–1
MSC
04
00
B0
04
B0
D1
D2
D3
D4
T1
T2
T3
T4
MPDL (low)
MPDH (high)
MPTL (low)
MPTH (high)
0B000H
+1
Output data area
+1
0B003H
0B004H
0FECFH
Output timing
data area
Mode register
Channel pointer
E8 Type C:
Increment
CF
0B007H
Internal bus
Real-time output port
Buffer register
(P0L)
Compare register
CR10
P0
P00
P01
P02
INTC10
Coincidence
Real-time output
trigger/macro
service start
P03
8-bit timer/counter 1
TM1
Stepper motor
336
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Fig. 12-28 Data Transfer Control Timing
T6
T3
T5
T2
TM1 count value
0H
T8
T1
T7
T4
INTC10
timer interrupt
Compare register
(CR10)
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8 T9
Buffer register
POL
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8 D9
P00
12
P01
P02
P03
(4) Example of using automatic addition control and ring control
(a) Automatic addition control
The automatic addition control function adds the output timing data (∆t) specified by a macro service
pointer (MPT) to the contents of a compare register and writes the sum to the compare register.
Using this function makes it unnecessary for software to calculate the setting for the compare register
each time the compare register has to be set.
(b) Ring control
The ring control function cyclically outputs a pattern of predetermined output data.
When this function is used, only one cycle of output data pattern must be prepared even if more data
patterns are required. Therefore, the required data ROM area can be kept small.
The macro service counter (MSC) is decremented each time one data transfer is performed.
The ring control function also generates an interrupt request when MSC = 0.
Let’s take an example of controlling a stepping motor. The data pattern output to the steeping motor
varies with the structure and excitation method (single-phase or double-phase excitation) of the motor.
In any case, the output pattern is repeated. Fig. 12-29 and 12-30 show examples of controlling a 4-phase
stepping motor with the phase 1 excitation method and the phases 1 and 2 excitation method,
respectively.
337
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-29 Four-Phase Stepping Motor with Phase 1 Excitation
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phase D
1 cycle
(4 patterns)
Fig. 12-30 Four-Phase Stepping Motor with Phases 1 and 2 Excitation
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phase D
1 cycle
(8 patterns)
338
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Fig. 12-31 Block Diagram 1 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(Constant-Speed Rotation with Phases 1 and 2 Excitation)
64K memory space
D0
D1
MSC
–1
0B000
0B001
FF
08
08
00
B0
00
B1
Ring counter (RC)
Modulo register (MR)
MPDL
–1
Output data
(8 pieces)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Macro service
channel
D7
+1
0B007
•
•
•
MPDH
MPTL
0FECFH
∆t
Output timing: 0B100
MPTH
•
•
•
Mode register
CE
CF
Macro service
control word
Channel pointer
12
Addition
Compare register
CR10
Buffer register
P0L
P00
P01
P02
P03
INTC10
Coincidence
To stepper motor
P0
8-bit timer/counter 1
TM1
339
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-32 Timing Chart 1 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(Constant-Speed Rotation with Phases 1 and 2 Excitation)
FFH
TM1 count value
∆t
0H
Count starts
INTC10
Compare register
(CR10)
T1
T0+∆t
T2
T1+∆t
T3
T2+∆t
T4
T3+∆t
T5
T4+∆t
T6
T5+∆t
T7
T6+∆t
T8
T7+∆t
T9
T8+∆t
T10
T9+∆t
T0
Buffer register
P0L
D0
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
D2
D3
P00
P01
P02
P03
Remark Select a mode in which the MPT contents are retained.
340
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
Fig. 12-33 Block Diagram 2 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(with the Output Timing Varied by Phase 2 Excitation)
64K memory space
Macro service control word
D0
D1
MSC
–1
0B000
0B001
FF
04
04
00
B0
00
B1
Ring counter (RC)
Modulo register (MR)
MPDL
–1
Output data
(4 pieces)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Macro service
channel
D7
+1
+1
0B007
•
•
•
MPDH
MPTL
∆t0
0FECFH
Output timing: 0B100
MPTH
•
•
•
∆t1
•
•
•
Mode register
EE
CF
Macro service
control word
Channel pointer
∆tFF
12
Addition
Compare register
CR10
Buffer register
P0L
P00
P01
P02
P03
INTC10
To stepper motor
Coincidence
P0
8-bit timer/counter 1
TM1
341
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 12-34 Timing Chart 2 for Automatic Addition Control Plus Ring Control
(with the Output Timing Varied by Phase 2 Excitation)
FFH
∆t7
∆t6
∆t5
∆t4
∆t3
TM1 count value
∆t2
∆t1
∆t9
T0
∆t8
0H
Count starts
INTC10
Compare register
(CR10)
T1
T0+∆t1
T2
T1+∆t2
T3
T2+∆t3
T4
T5 T6
T7
T6+∆t7
T8
T7+∆t8
T9
T8+∆t9
T0
T3+∆t4 T4+∆t5 T5+∆t6
Buffer register
P0L
D2
D3
D0
D1 D2 D3
D0
D1
D2
D1
P00
P01
P02
P03
Remark Select a mode which increments the MPT.
342
Chapter 12 Interrupt Functions
12.5 NOTES
(1) Do not use the RETI instruction to return from the software interrupt.
(2) A macro service request is accepted and processed even when a nonmaskable interrupt service program is
running. To disable macro service processing during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt service
program, cause the nonmaskable interrupt service program to manipulate the mask register so that no macro
service will not occur.
(3) If the IE bit of the PSW is set to 1, for example, by executing the EI instruction in the nonmaskable interrupt
service program, maskable interrupt requests assigned high priority are made acceptable. If a maskable
interrupt with high priority occurs during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt service program, a service
program for the maskable interrupt runs. If the IE and ISP bits of the PSW are set to 1, interrupt requests with
lowpriority willalsooccur, thuscausingtheinterruptserviceprogramto run. An RETI instruction willbe used
to return from the maskable interrupt service program. The RETI instruction resets the NMIS bit to 0, thus
enablingnonmaskableinterruptrequestsevenwhenmultiple-interrupthandlingshouldnotbeperformedfor
nonmaskableinterruptsduringexecutionofthenonmaskableinterruptserviceprogramtowhichareturnwas
justmade. Toinhibitmultiple-interrupthandlingfornonmaskableinterruptrequests,donotenableinterrupts
during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt service program.
(4) Nonmaskable interrupts are always accepted except during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt handling
program (except when multiple-interrupt handling for nonmaskable interrupts have been enabled by
resetting the NMIS bit of the IST register to 0 during execution of the nonmaskable interrupt handling
program)andexceptaperiodbetweenaspecialinstructiondescribedinSection12.3.5andaninstructionthat
follows that special instruction. Therefore, nonmaskable interrupts are accepted, even if the contents of the
stack pointer are undefined, for example, right after a reset occurs. At this point, the contents of the PC and
PSW may be transferred to addresses (see Table 3-4 in Section 3.2.5) where writing to any special-function
registerisinhibited, dependingonthevalueinthestackpointer. Ifthisoccurs, theCPUmayhang, unexpected
signals may be output from pins, or an attempt may be made to transfer the contents of the PC or PSW to a
location where no RAM has been installed, thereby making it impossible to return from the nonmaskable
interrupt handling program to the main routine, hence a program crash.
12
If a falling edge (valid edge of the NMI input after a reset) arrives at the NMI pin at much the same time when
a rising edge is supplied to the RESET pin, a branch occurs to the nonmaskable interrupt handling program
without executing a single instruction after a reset, resulting in a program crash almost with no exception.
To avoid these problems, initialize the stack pointer after a reset, and design the hardware so that the NMI
signal does not drop within 10 µs + 20/f
after the RESET signal rises.
#
CLK
(5) When a BF instruction is used to poll registers related to interrupts, do not specify this BF instruction as the
branch destination. Otherwise, all interrupts and macro services are kept pending until a condition that
inhibits a branch is met during execution of the instruction.
Example of incorrect coding
•
•
•
All interrupts and macro services are kept pending, until
IF0H.3 is set to 1. The pending state continues until the
instruction next to the BF is executed.
LOOP: BF IF0H.3, $LOOP
←
←
× × ×
•
•
•
Example of correct coding (1)
•
•
•
LOOP: NOP
Interrupts or macro services will not be kept pending long,
because they are processed after the NOP is executed.
BF IF0H.3, $LOOP
•
•
•
343
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Example of correct coding (2)
•
•
•
LOOP: BT IF0H.3, $NEXT
BR $LOOP
Remark The BTCLR would be more convenient than the
BT, because it clears the flags automatically.
Interrupts or macro services will not be kept pending long,
because they are processed after the BR is executed.
NEXT:
←
•
•
•
(6) Inaddition, whenyouhavetouseacodingoftheinstructionslistedinSection12.3.5consecutively, yetexpect
frequent occurrence of interrupts and macro services, insert NOP instructions in the coding to allow time
during which interrupts and macro service are accepted.
(7) With the type C macro service, the MPT and MPD are incremented only at the lower bits. If a carry occurs at
bit 7 of the MPTL or MPDL, it is ignored; so the higher 8 bits are not affected.
(8) When the external memory is expanded (or always with the µPD78213), an illegal write access operation may
occur during the type A macro service. This illegal write access occurs when any of the following three
conditions is satisfied.
1. For the type A macro service, when data D0H through DFH is transferred from memory to an SFR.
2. For the type A macro service, when macro service transfers data from an SFR to a buffer (memory) at
0FED0H through 0FEDFH.
3. For the type C macro service, when the MPTL address is 0FED0H through 0FEDFH.
Anillegalwriteaccessisprocessedinthesamemannerasthenormalmemoryaccess. Inaddition, waitstates
may be inserted according to the setting of the PW20 and PW21 bits of the memory expansion mode register
(MM). Table 12-9 lists the conditions under which an illegal write access occurs and the corresponding
operations.
Table 12-12 Illegal Write Access Conditions and Corresponding Operations
Illegal write access
Macro service
type
Condition
Address
Data
Address of a destination SFR
Data transferred by macro
service
1
2
3
A
A
C
Address of a source SFR
Lower 8 bits of the address of
the destination buffer (memory)
Address of a destination SFR
(CR10 or CR11)
Lower 8 bits of the address of
the MPTL
This problem may be solved by the following methods.
1. It is difficult for software to solve the problem if it occurs under condition 1, because it depends on the
transfer data. Therefore, use an external address decoder circuit to keep the image in the area of 0FF00H
through 0FFFFH from overlapping the memory addresses of the external circuit.
2. If the macro service to be used does not satisfy condition 1 (i.e., if data is not transferred from an SFR to
memory), and under condition 2, locate the buffer area so that its addresses are not 0FED0H through
0FEDFH.
The above problem also occurs with an in-circuit emulator.
(9) For the type B service macro, the following registers cannot be used as SFRs.
IF0L, IF0H, MK0L, MK0H, PR0L, PR0H, ISM0L, ISM0H, and IST
#
344
CHAPTER 13 LOCAL BUS INTERFACE FUNCTION
The local bus interface function is provided to connect external memories (ROM and RAM) and I/Os.
External memories (ROM and RAM) and I/Os are accessed by using the RD, WR, and ASTB signals, a multiplexed
address/data bus consisting of lines AD0 to AD7, and an address bus consisting of lines A8 to A19. Figs. 13-3 and
13-4 show the basic bus interface timing diagrams.
In addition, a wait function for interfacing with low-speed memory, and a refresh signal output function for
refreshing pseudo static RAM, are provided.
13
345
µPD78214 Sub-Series
13.1 CONTROL REGISTERS
13.1.1 Memory Expansion Mode Register (MM)
The MM register is an 8-bit register for controlling externally expanded memory, specifying the number of wait
states (address space: 00000H to 0FFFFH), and controlling the internal fetch cycle.
The MM register can be read and written with 8-bit manipulation instructions and bit manipulation instructions.
Fig. 13-1 shows the format of the MM register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the register is set to 20H.
Fig. 13-1 Format of the Memory Expansion Mode Register (MM)
7
6
5
4
3
0
2
1
0
MM IFCH MM6 PW21 PW20
MM2 MM1 MM0
MM2 MM1 MM0
Mode
P50-P57
P40-P47 P65 P65
0
0
0
0
0
1
Input mode
Port mode
Output mode
Single-chip
mode
Port mode
External
memory
expansion
mode
1
1
1
A8-A15
AD0-AD7
WR RD
PW21 PW20 Number of wait states (range: 00000H to 0FFFFH)
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
2
Number of wait states equivalent to low level period of
WAIT pin input
1
1
MM6 Specifies 1M-byte expansion mode
0
P60 to P63 as general-purpose output port
Output latch for P60 to P63 (P60 to P63) stores higher address
(A16 to A19) in external memory expansion mode and P60 to P63
function as A16 to A19 output pins.
1
IFCH Controls internal fetch cycle
0
1
Instruction execution cycle, the same as the external ROM fetch cycle
High-speed internal ROM fetch (execution cycle is faster than
that for external ROM fetch)
346
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
13.1.2 Programmable Wait Control Register (PW)
The PW register is an 8-bit register for specifying the number of wait states for external expansion data memory
space 10000H to FFFFFH. The PW register can be read and written with both 8-bit manipulation instructions and
bit manipulation instructions. Fig. 13-2 shows the format of the PW register.
When the RESET signal is applied, the register is set to 80H.
Fig. 13-2 Format of Programmable Wait Control Register (PW)
7
6
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
PW PW31 PW30
PW31 PW30 Number of wait states (range: 10000H to FFFFFH)
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
2
Number of wait states equivalent to low level period of
WAIT pin input
1
1
13.2 MEMORY EXPANSION FUNCTION
13.2.1 External Memory Expansion Function
The µPD78214 allows additional 48384-byte memory (for the µPD78212, 56704-byte memory) and I/Os to be
connected according to the setting of the memory expansion mode register (MM).
13
When the memory space is expanded externally, P50 to P57 function as an address bus, and P40 to P47 function
as a multiplexed address/data bus.
When the EA signal is tied low, the µPD78214 operates in ROM-less mode. In ROM-less mode, 64768 bytes (65536
bytes for the µPD78212) of memory or I/Os can be connected.
The µPD78213 is a ROM-less device, hence always uses external memory.
Caution Address information output on P50/A8 to P57/A15 and P60/A16 to P63/A19 is valid from the time the ASTB signal goes high until
the RD or WR signal goes high. Other than during this period, the output levels of P50/A8 to P57/A15 and P60/A16 to P67/A19 are
undefined. Whendesigningcircuits, takethisintoconsideration, andmakesurethattheoutputofanundefinedvaluewillnotcause
any problems. The data sheet of the relevant product gives the specification of the valid period for address output.
347
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-3 Read Timing
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Lower address
(output)
Data (input)
AD0-AD7
ASTB (output)
RD (output)
Fig. 13-4 Write Timing
Higher address
A8-A15
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
AD0-AD7
(output)
Lower address
Data
ASTB (output)
WR (output)
Caution ExternaldevicescannotbemappedtothesameaddressesasthoseoftheinternalRAMarea(µPD78213, µPD78214, andµPD78P214:
0FD00H to 0FEFFH, µPD78212: 0FD80H to 0FEFFH) and SFR area (0FF00H to 0FFFFH, excluding the external SFR area (0FFD0H to
0FFDFH)).
When manipulating a space in which external device addresses overlap internal RAM or SFR addresses, the internal RAM or SFR
area is accessed automatically. In this case, the address signal is output, but the ASTB, RD, and WR signals are not output (these
signals remain inactive).
13.2.2 1M-Byte Expansion Function
When bit MM6 of the MM register is set to 1, an additional 960K-bytes of data memory can be used. Therefore,
a 1M-byte memory space is available. In this case, pins P60 to P63 output the highest address bits, A16 to A19.
Example: MOV MM, #47H ; Expansion to 1M bytes
MOV P6, #3H
; Latches the highest address information (select bank 3)
•
•
•
MOV A, &!2000H ; Load the contents of memory at 32000H into register A.
348
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-5 Accessing Expansion Data Memory
(a) Read cycle
Fetch cycle
Expansion data memory access cycle
A16-A19
(output)
Contents of P6/PM6 register
Higher address
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Lower
address
(output)
Lower
address
(output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Program
(input)
Data
(input)
AD0-AD7
ASTB (output)
RD (output)
(b) Write cycle
Fetch cycle
Expansion data memory access cycle
A16-A19
(output)
Contents of P6/PM6 register
13
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Higher address
Lower
address
(output)
Lower
address
(output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Program
(input)
AD0-AD7
Data (input)
ASTB (output)
RD (output)
WR (output)
349
µPD78214 Sub-Series
13.2.3 Memory Mapping with Expanded Memory
Figs. 13-6 to 13-9 show the memory maps when the memory has been expanded. Even when the memory has
been expanded, external devices at the same addresses as those of the internal ROM area, internal RAM area, or
SFR area (excluding the external SFR area (0FFD0H to 0FFDFH)) cannot be accessed. When these addresses are
accessed, the memory and SFRs of the µPD78214 take precedence and are accessed. The ASTB, RD, and WR
signals are not output (these signals remain inactive). The output levels of the address bus and address/data bus
become undefined. However, when the memory is expanded, and the same execution cycle as the external ROM
fetch cycle is specified for internal ROM fetching (by setting the IFCH bit of the memory expansion mode register
(MM) to 0), the address signal and ASTB and RD signals are output upon access to internal ROM. Information on
the address/data bus at this time, however, is not read, and the CPU reads data from internal ROM. (When the RD
signal is active, the address/data bus of the µPD78214 becomes high-impedance.)
The bus cycle in this case is the same as the normal read cycle. So, the programmable wait function can insert
wait states into the bus cycle.
Caution When macro service Type A or Type C is used in external memory expansion mode (the µPD78213 always uses external memory),
an illegal write access may occur. This occurs when any of the following three conditions is satisfied:
(1) Data is transferred from memory to an SFR using macro service Type A, and the transfer data is D0H to DFH.
(2) Data is transferred from an SFR to memory using macro service Type A, and the transfer destination buffer (memory) address
is 0FED0H to 0FEDFH when the macro service is executed.
(3) The MPTL address is 0FED0H to 0FEDFH when macro service Type C is used.
An illegal write access is performed in the same way as normal memory access. In addition, wait states are inserted according to
the setting of bits PW20 and PW21 of the memory expansion mode register (MM). Table 13-1 lists the conditions and operations
for illegal write access.
Table 13-1 Conditions and Operations for Illegal Write Access
Illegal write access
Macro service
type
Condition
1
Address
Data
Data transferred by macro
service
Transfer destination SFR
address
A
A
C
Low-order 8 bits of transfer
destination buffer (memory)
address
Transfer target SFR address
2
3
Low-order 8 bits of MPTL
address
Transfer destination SFR
(CR10 or CR11) address
This problem can be avoided by using the following methods:
1. The problem caused by condition 1 is difficult to avoid by means of software (because whether an illegal access occurs depends
on the transfer data). The problem must be avoided by using the external address decoder so that the area at addresses 0FF00H
to 0FFFFH does not overlap the addresses of the external circuits.
2. When the macro service being used does not satisfy condition 1 (transfer from memory to an SFR is not performed by macro
service Type A), or when condition 2 is satisfied, the buffer area must be mapped to an address other than addresses 0FED0H
to 0FEDFH. In the case of condition 3, the MPTL must be mapped to an address other than addresses 0FED0H to 0FEDFH.
This problem can also occur in the in-circuit emulator.
350
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-6 Data Memory Expansion for µPD78212 (When EA = L)
MM6 = 0
MM6 = 1
00000H
External memory
External memory
0FD7FH
0FD80H
Internal RAM
Internal RAM
0FEFFH
0FF00H
SFR
SFR
0FFD0H
External SFR area
External SFR area
0FFDFH
0FFFFH
10000H
13
Expansion data
memory
FFFFFH
351
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-7 Data Memory Expansion for µPD78212 (When EA = H)
MM2, MM1, MM0 = 0, 0, 0 or 0, 0, 1
MM6 = 0
MM2, MM1, MM0 = 1, 1, 1
MM6 = 0
MM2, MM1, MM0 = 1, 1, 1
MM6 = 1
00000H
Internal ROM
Internal ROM
Internal ROM
01FFFH
02000H
External memory
Internal RAM
External memory
Internal RAM
0FD7FH
0FD80H
Internal RAM
0FEFFH
0FF00H
SFR
SFR
SFR
0FFD0H
0FFDFH
External SFR area
External SFR area
External SFR area
0FFFFH
10000H
Expansion data
memory
FFFFFH
352
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-8 Data Memory Expansion for µPD78213 and µPD78214 (When EA = L)
MM6 = 0
MM6 = 1
00000H
External memory
External memory
0FCFFH
0FD00H
Internal RAM
Internal RAM
0FEFFH
0FF00H
SFR
SFR
0FFD0H
External SFR area
External SFR area
0FFDFH
0FFFFH
10000H
13
Expansion data
memory
FFFFFH
353
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-9 Data Memory Expansion for µPD78214 and µPD78P214 (When EA = H)
MM2, MM1, MM0 = 0, 0, 0 or 0, 0, 1
MM6 = 0
MM2, MM1, MM0 = 1, 1, 1
MM6 = 0
MM2, MM1, MM0 = 1, 1, 1
MM6 = 1
00000H
Internal ROM
Internal ROM
Internal ROM
03FFFH
04000H
External memory
Internal RAM
External memory
Internal RAM
0FCFFH
0FD00H
Internal RAM
0FEFFH
0FF00H
SFR
SFR
SFR
0FFD0H
0FFDFH
External SFR area
External SFR area
External SFR area
0FFFFH
10000H
Expansion data
memory
FFFFFH
354
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
13.2.4 Example of Connecting Memories
Fig. 13-10 shows an example of connecting memories to the µPD78214. In this example, a PROM, SRAM, and
mask-programmableROMareconnectedtotheµPD78214. Addressesareassignedtothesememoriesasfollows:
• PROM (µPD27C512D-15)
: 0000H-FCFFH (µPD78213)
2000H-0FD7FH (µPD78212)
4000H-FCFFH (µPD78214)
FFD0H-FFDFH as an external SFR area
: 10000H-17FFFH
• RAM (µPD43256AC-12)
• Mask-programmable ROM (µPD23C4000A) : 80000H-FFFFFH
Since the µPD23C4000A mask-programmable ROM requires a long access time, insert one wait state by means
of the programmable wait function (See Section 13.4).
The circuit enclosed in dotted lines (74HC375) is required only when an in-circuit emulator is used. When the
emulator is not used, remove the 74HC375, and connect Dn and Qn (n = 1 to 4), respectively. If the emulator is used
without this circuit, malfunctions may occur. (Usually, however, normal operation is possible because of the
delays introduced by the address decoder and other circuitry.) When this circuit is not used, the 150-ns version,
the µPD43256AC-15, can be used as RAM in place of the µPD43256AC-12.
13
355
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-10 Example of Connecting Memories to µPD78214
µPD23C4000A
OE
CE WORD/BYTE
A17
A16
A15
A14
O0-O7
A-1-A13
µPD43256AC-12
74HC32
CS
WE
OE
74HC04
PD78214
µ
I/O1-I/O8
A0-A14
74HC138
VDD
74HC375
G1
G2A
C
A19
A18
A17
A16
D4 Q4
D3 Q3
D2 Q2
D1 Q1
ST ST
B
Y1
A
Y0
G2B
µPD27C512D-15
CE
WR
RD
OE
A15
A8-A14
ASTB
74HC573
LE
A0-A14
O0-O7
Q0-Q7
AD0-AD7
D0-D7
OE
Remark Pull-up resistors must be connected to the address and address/data bus lines.
356
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
13.3 INTERNAL ROM HIGH-SPEED FETCH FUNCTION
The µPD78212, µPD78214, and µPD78P214 contain an internal ROM. The internal ROM can be accessed quickly
without having to use the bus control circuit. Usually, internal ROM is fetched at the same speed as external ROM.
When the IFCH bit of the memory expansion mode register (MM) is set to 1, the high-speed fetch function is
enabled, which can speed up internal ROM fetching.
When the same instruction execution cycle as that for external ROM fetching is selected, wait states are inserted
into the cycle by the wait function. When high-speed fetching is performed, however, no wait state is inserted
when accessing internal ROM.
When the RESET signal is applied, the instruction execution cycle for internal fetching is the same as that for the
external ROM fetch cycle.
13.4 WAIT FUNCTION
When a slow memory or I/O is connected to the µPD78214, wait states can be inserted into the external memory
access cycle.
Wait states are inserted while the RD or WR signal is low. The low level period of the signal is extended by 1/f
CLK
(167 ns with f
= 6 MHz) for each wait state.
CLK
There are two methods of inserting wait states: Using the programmable wait function to automatically insert a
predefined number of wait states, and using an external wait signal to control wait insertion.
Wait state insertion is controlled with the memory expansion mode register (MM) for space 00000H to 0FFFFH and
the programmable wait control register (PW) for space 10000H to FFFFFH. No wait state is inserted when internal
ROM and RAM are accessed upon high-speed fetching. When the internal SFR area is accessed, wait states are
inserted at the appropriate timing, regardless of the register specification.
WhenanaccesstointernalROMisspecifiedsuchthatitwillbeperformedinthesameexecutioncycleasanaccess
to external ROM, wait states are also inserted into the internal ROM access cycle according to the MM register
setting.
13
When control with an external wait signal is specified by the MM register and/or the PW register, the WAIT signal
is applied to pin P66.
When the RESET signal is applied, pin P66 functions as a general-purpose I/O port pin.
Figs. 13-15 to 13-17 show the bus timings when wait states are inserted.
Caution When using the external wait signal, set bit 6 of the PM6 register to 1 to set pin P66/WAIT to input mode.
357
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-11 Wait Control Space of µPD78212 (When EA = L)
FFFFFH
Space subject
Expansion data
to wait control
memory
by PW register
10000H
0FFFFH
0FFDFH
SFR
External SFR area
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
Internal RAM
0FD80H
0FD7FH
Space subject
to wait control
by MM register
External memory
00000H
358
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-12 Wait Control Space of µPD78212 (When EA = H)
Space subject
to wait control
by PW register
Expansion data
memory
10000H
0FFFFH
0FFDFH
SFR
External SFR area
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
Internal RAM
0FD80H
0FD7FH
Space subject
to wait control
by MM register
External memory
13
02000H
01FFFH
Space subject to wait
control by MM register
(only when IFCH bit of
MM register is 0)
Internal ROM
00000H
359
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-13 Wait Control Space of µPD78213 and µPD78214 (When EA = L)
FFFFFH
Space subject
to wait control
by PW register
Expansion data
memory
10000H
0FFFFH
0FFDFH
SFR
External SFR area
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
Internal RAM
0FD00H
0FCFFH
Space subject
to wait control
by MM register
External memory
00000H
360
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-14 Wait Control Space of µPD78214 and µPD78P214
FFFFFH
Space subject
to wait control
by PW register
Expansion data
memory
10000H
0FFFFH
0FFDFH
SFR
External SFR area
0FFD0H
0FF00H
0FEFFH
Internal RAM
0FD00H
0FCFFH
Space subject
to wait control
by MM register
External memory
13
04000H
03FFFH
Space subject to wait
control by MM register
(only when IFCH bit of
MM register is 0)
Internal ROM
00000H
361
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-15 Read Timing of Programmable Wait Function (1/2)
(a) When zero wait states are set
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
Higher address
(output)
Lower
address
(output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Data (input)
AD0-AD7
ASTB (output)
RD (output)
(b) When one wait state is set
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Lower
address
(output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Data (input)
AD0-AD7
ASTB (output)
RD (output)
362
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-15 Read Timing of Programmable Wait Function (2/2)
(c) When two wait states are set
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Data (input)
Lower
address
(output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
AD0-AD7
ASTB (output)
RD (output)
Note f
: System clock frequency (f /2)
XX
CLK
13
363
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-16 Write Timing of Programmable Wait Function (1/2)
(a) When zero wait states are set
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
Higher address
(output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Lower
address
Data
AD0-AD7
(output)
ASTB (output)
WR (output)
(b) When one wait state is set
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Lower
address
Data
AD0-AD7
(output)
ASTB (output)
WR (output)
364
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-16 Write Timing of Programmable Wait Function (2/2)
(c) When two wait states are set
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Data
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Lower
address
AD0-AD7
(output)
ASTB (output)
WR (output)
Note f
: System clock frequency (f /2)
XX
CLK
13
365
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-17 Timing When External Wait Signal Is Used
(a) Read timing
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Lower
address
(output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Data (input)
AD0-AD7
ASTB (output)
RD (output)
WAIT (input)
(b) Write timing
Note
fCLK
A8-A15
(output)
Higher address
Data
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Lower
address
AD0-AD7
(output)
ASTB (output)
WR (output)
WAIT (input)
Note f
: System clock frequency (f /2)
XX
CLK
366
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
13.5 PSEUDO STATIC RAM REFRESH FUNCTION
13.5.1 Function
The µPD78214 provides the pseudo static RAM refresh function to enable pseudo static RAM to be connected
directly.
ThepseudostaticRAMrefreshfunctionoutputsrefreshpulsesatarbitraryintervals. Therefreshpulseoutputcycle
period is specified in the refresh mode register (RFM), and the external access cycle is changed to the refresh bus
cycle that matches the pseudo static RAM bus cycle. (The write pulse width becomes shorter by half a clock pulse
than that observed when pseudo static RAM is not connected.)
The µPD78214 provides a function to support self-refresh and thus reduce the power dissipation of pseudo static
RAM application systems.
13.5.2 Refresh Mode Register (RFM)
The RFM register is an 8-bit register that controls the refresh cycle of pseudo static RAM and switching to self-
refresh.
The register can be read and written with 8-bit manipulation instructions and bit manipulation instructions. Fig.
13-18 shows the format of the register.
WhentheRESETsignalisapplied, theregisterissetto00H. TheREFRQpinissettoportmodesuchthatitfunctions
as pin P67.
Fig. 13-18 Format of Refresh Mode Register (RFM)
7
6
0
5
0
4
3
0
2
0
1
0
RFM RFLV
RFEN
RFT1 RFT0
13
fCLK = 6 MHz
RFT1 RFT0 Specifies refresh pulse output cycle
Note
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
16/fCLK
32/fCLK
64/fCLK
128/fCLK
(2.6 µs)
(5.3 µs)
(10.7µs)
(21.3µs)
RFLV RFEN Controls REFRQ pin output
×
0
1
0
Port mode
Self-refresh operation (REFRQ low level)
Refresh pulse output enabled
Remark ×: 0 or 1
1
Note f
: System clock frequency (f /2)
XX
CLK
367
µPD78214 Sub-Series
13.5.3 Operation
(1) Pulse refresh operation
To support the pulse refresh cycle of pseudo static RAM, the REFRQ pin outputs refresh pulses, synchronized
with the bus cycle.
Adjust the oscillator frequency and bits 1 and 0 (RFT1 and RFT0) of the refresh mode register (RFM) so that
at least 512 refresh pulses are output in 8 ms.
Table 13-2 System Clock Frequency and Refresh Pulse Output Cycle When Pseudo Static RAM Is Used
System clock frequency
RFT1
RFT0
Refresh pulse output cycle
(f
) MHz
CLK
4.096 < f
≤ 6
CLK
64/f
32/f
16/f
1
0
0
0
1
0
CLK
CLK
CLK
(8.192 < f ≤ 12)
XX
2.048 < f
≤ 4.096
CLK
(4.096 < f ≤ 8.192)
XX
2 < f
≤ 2.048
CLK
(4 ≤ f ≤ 4.096)
XX
Pulse refresh is controlled so that it does not overlap external memory access. During the refresh cycle, the
external memory access cycle is held pending (ASTB, RD, and WR are inactive). During the external memory
access cycle, the refresh cycle is held pending.
When pulse refresh does not cause a contention with external memory access, the refresh cycle can be
executed without affecting instruction execution by the CPU.
(a) Accessing internal memory
Even when external pseudo static RAM is not accessed, and internal memory is accessed, the refresh bus
cycle is output at the intervals specified by the RFM register, ensuring that the contents of pseudo static
RAM are retained.
Fig. 13-19 Pulse Refresh When Internal Memory Is Accessed
Refresh timing counter
REFRQ
pin output
1tCYC
Refresh cycle
tCYC: system clock cycle time (1/fCLK) [ns] (fCLK = 6 MHz)
368
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
(b) Accessing External Memory
The refresh bus cycle is generated at the intervals specified with the refresh mode register (RFM).
Pseudo static RAM may malfunction if the access timing overlaps the refresh pulse output timing;
therefore, the µPD78214 generates a refresh bus cycle of three clock pulses, synchronized with the bus
cycle.
Fig. 13-20 Pulse Refresh When External Memory Is Accessed
(a) When memory is read
tCYC
tCYC
ASTB
(output)
RD (output)
REFRQ
(output)
Read cycle
Refresh bus cycle
(b) When memory is written
13
fCLK
fCLK
ASTB
(output)
WR (output)
REFRQ
(output)
Write cycle
Refresh bus cycle
369
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(2) Self-refresh
Self-refresh is performed to retain the contents of pseudo static RAM when in standby mode.
(a) Setting self-refresh mode
When bit 4 (RFEN) of the RFM register is set to 1, and bit 7 (RFLV) is set to 0, pin REFRQ outputs a low-level
signal, requesting pseudo static RAM to enter self-refresh mode.
(b) Restoration from self-refresh
Note
Refresh pulse output to pseudo static RAM is disabled for approximately 200 ns
after the output level
of pin REFRQ goes high. The µPD78214 drives pin REFRQ high, synchronized with the refresh timing
counter, so that refresh pulses are not output during a refresh disabled period.
To detect pin REFRQ going high, the read out level of bit RFLV is set to 1 when pin REFRQ goes high.
Note This time varies with the speed of the pseudo static RAM.
Fig. 13-21 Restoration Timing from Self-Refresh
Self-refresh mode
Approx. 200 ns min.Note
REFRQ
Output of
refresh timing counter
RFLV bit
Execution of set manipulation by software
Note Refresh disabled period
370
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Caution If the RFEN bit of the refresh mode register (RFM) is already set to 1 (or is simultaneously set to 1) when the RFLV bit is changed
from 0 to 1, pin REFRQ may output a glitch, having a peak level of approximately 2.6 V, for approximately 10 ns.
WhensettingtheRFLVbitto1, followthestepsshowninFig. 13-22. The200-nsdelayaftersettingRFENassurestheaccessdisabled
time when pseudo static RAM returns from self-refresh mode.
Fig. 13-22 Return from Self-Refresh
Self-refresh mode
Clear RFEN bit to 0
Set RFLV bit to 1
No
RFLV = 1
Yes
Set RFEN bit to 1
Approximately 200 ns delay
13
Pulse refresh mode (normal operation)
371
µPD78214 Sub-Series
13.5.4 Example of Connecting Pseudo Static RAM
Fig. 13-23 shows an example of connecting pseudo static RAM to the µPD78214. In this example, pseudo static
RAM is assigned to addresses 20000H to 3FFFFH.
Fig. 13-23 Example of Connecting Pseudo Static RAM to µPD78214
VDD
74AC74
PR
74HC02
D
74HC04
CK
Q
R
74AC74
PR
Pseudo-static RAM
D
74AC00 74AC00
CK
Q
CE
R
µPD78214
REFRQ
VDD
RFSH
OE
RD
WR
WE
A19
A18
A17
CS
A8-A16
A8-A16
74HC573
ASTB
A0-A7
LE
A0-A7
D0-D7 Q0-Q7
OE
I/O1/-I/O8
Remarks 1. To ensure the precharge and access times for pseudo static RAM, devices of a sufficiently high speed must be used for those
devices identified as 74AC××. To satisfy the precharge time for pseudo static RAM, use a high-speed product.
2. Pull-up resistors must be connected to the address and address/data bus lines.
13.6 NOTES
(1) Address information output on P50/A8 to P57/A15 and on P60/A16 to P63/A19 is valid from when the ASTB
signal goes high until the RD or WR signal goes high. Except during this period, the output levels of P50/A8
to P57/A15 and of P60/A16 to P63/A19 are undefined. When designing circuits, take this into consideration,
and make sure that the output of an undefined value will not cause any problems.
The data sheet of the relevant product gives the specification of the valid period for address output.
(2) External devices cannot be mapped onto the same addresses as those of the internal RAM area (µPD78213,
µPD78214, and µPD78P214: 0FD00H to 0FEFFH, µPD78212: 0FD80H to 0FEFFH) and SFR area (0FF00H to
0FFFFH, excluding the external SFR area (0FF00H to 0FFDFH)).
Upon manipulating the space where external device addresses overlap with internal RAM or SFR addresses,
the internal RAM or SFR area is accessed automatically. In this case, the address signal is output, but the
ASTB, RD, and WR signals are not output (these signals remain inactive).
372
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
(3) WhenmacroserviceTypeAorTypeCisusedinexternalmemoryexpansionmode(theµPD78213alwaysuses
external memory), an illegal write access may occur.
This occurs when any of the following three conditions is satisfied:
(a) Data is transferred from memory to an SFR using macro service Type A, and the transfer data is D0H to
DFH.
(b) Data is transferred from an SFR to memory by using macro service Type A, and the transfer destination
buffer (memory) address is 0FED0H to 0FEDFH upon execution of the macro service.
(c) The MPTL address is 0FED0H to 0FEDFH when macro service Type C is used.
Anillegalwriteaccessisperformedinthesamewayasduringnormalmemoryaccess. Inaddition, waitstates
are inserted according to the setting of bits PW20 and PW21 of the memory expansion mode register (MM).
Table 13-3 lists the conditions and operations for illegal write access.
Table 13-3 Conditions and Operations for Illegal Write Access
Illegal write access
Macro service
type
Condition
1
Address
Data
Transfer destination SFR
address
Data transferred by macro
service
A
A
C
Low-order 8 bits of transfer
destination buffer (memory)
address
Transfer target SFR address
2
3
Low-order 8 bits of MPTL
address
Transfer destination SFR
(CR10 or CR11) address
13
This problem can be avoided by applying the following methods:
1. The problem caused by condition 1 is difficult to avoid by means of software (whether an illegal access
occurs depends on the transfer data). The problem must be avoided by using the external address
decoder so that the area at addresses 0FF00H to 0FFFFH does not overlap the addresses of the external
circuits.
2. When the macro service being used does not satisfy condition 1 (transfer from memory to an SFR is not
performed by macro service Type A), or when condition 2 is satisfied, the buffer area must be mapped
to an address other than addresses 0FED0H to 0FEDFH. In the case of condition 3, the MPTL must be
mapped to an address other than addresses 0FED0H to 0FEDFH.
This problem can also occur in the in-circuit emulator.
(4) When using the external wait signal, set bit 6 of register PM6 to 1 to set pin P66/WAIT to input mode.
(5) If the RFEN bit of the refresh mode register (RFM) is already set to 1 (or is simultaneously set to 1) when the
RFLV bit is changed from 0 to 1, pin REFRQ may output a glitch, having a peak level of approximately 2.6 V,
for approximately 10 ns.
When setting the RFLV bit to 1, follow the steps shown in Fig. 13-24. The 200-ns delay after setting RFEN
assures the access disabled time when pseudo static RAM returns from self-refresh mode.
373
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 13-24 Return from Self-Refresh
Self-refresh mode
Clear RFEN bit to 0
Set RFLV bit to 1
No
RFLV = 1
Yes
Set RFEN bit to 1
Approximately 200 ns delay
Pulse refresh mode (normal operation)
(6) When using the in-circuit emulator, note the following points:
• When the RD signal or WR signal is active, a glitch may occur on pins A16 to A19.
Fig. 13-25 Glitch Observed on Pins A16 to A19 during Emulation
Approx. 2 V
An (n = 16 -19)
Approx. 10 ns
RD or WR signal
• For the RD and WR signals, the hold time of the address signals on pins A16 to A19 is almost 0 ns.
Fig. 13-26 Insufficient Address Hold Time during Emulation
A16-A19
RD or WR signal
Changes at almost the same time
To prevent these problems, it is recommended that a latch be provided for pins A16 to A19 when emulation is
performed (the latch is not necessary for the device).
374
Chapter 13 Local Bus Interface Function
Fig. 13-27 Preventing Problems That May Occur during Emulation
74HC375
A19
D4
Q4
A18
A17
D3
D2
Q3
Q2
Target probe
To target circuit
A16
D1
Q1
ASTB
13
375
376
CHAPTER 14 STANDBY FUNCTION
14.1 FUNCTION OVERVIEW
TheµPD78214supportsastandbyfunctiontoreducethesystem’spowerconsumption. Withthestandbyfunction,
two modes are available:
• HALT mode: In this mode, only the CPU clock is stopped. Intermittent operation, when combined with normal
operating mode, can reduce overall system power consumption.
• STOP mode: In this mode, the oscillator is stopped to stop the entire system. Since only leakage currents are
allowed to flow in this mode, the system’s power consumption is minimized.
Each mode is specified by software. Fig. 14-1 is the transition diagram for the standby modes (STOP and HALT
modes).
Fig. 14-2 shows the functional block that implements the standby functions.
Fig. 14-1 Transition Diagram for the Standby Modes
Program
operation
Macro
service
STOP
(standby)
14
HALT
(standby)
Interrupt request
when interrupts
are disabled
Vectored interrupt
requestNote 1
Notes 1. When a vectored interrupt with a low priority is requested when it is disabled at the start of HALT mode
2. When a vectored interrupt with a high priority is requested, or when a vectored interrupt with a low priority is requested when it
is enabled at the start of HALT mode
3. When a macro service with a low priority is requested when low-priority interrupts are disabled at the start of HALT mode
4. When a macro service with a high priority is requested, or when a macro service with a low priority is requested while low-priority
interrupts are enabled at the start of HALT mode
377
µPD78214 Sub-Series
378
Chapter 14 Standby Function
14.2 STANDBY CONTROL REGISTER (STBC)
The standby control register (STBC) is an 8-bit register which controls standby mode. The STBC register can be
both read and written. Only a specified instruction (MOV STBC, #byte), however, can be used for writing to the
register, topreventtheapplicationsystemstoppingunintentionallyasaresultofaprogramcrash. Fig. 14-3shows
the format of the STBC register.
When the RESET signal is input, the register is set to 0000×000B.
Fig. 14-3 Configuration of the Standby Control Register (STBC)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
0
1
0
STBC
×
STP
HLT
HALT mode specification bit
When this bit is set to 1, HALT mode is set.
This bit is automatically reset to 0 when HALT mode is released.
STOP mode specification bit
When this bit is set to 1, STOP mode is set.
This bit is automatically reset to 0 when STOP mode is released.
×: 0 or 1
14.3 HALT MODE
14.3.1 Specifying HALT Mode and Operation States in HALT Mode
14
The system enters HALT mode when the HLT bit of the STBC register is set to 1.
The STBC register can be written only with a specified 8-bit data write instruction. When specifying HALT mode,
execute the “MOV STBC, #01H” instruction.
Caution If HALT mode is specified under the conditions for releasing HALT mode, the system does not enter HALT mode, instead executing
the next instruction or branching to the vectored interrupt service program. Clear any interrupt requests before specifying HALT
mode to ensure that the system enters HALT mode correctly.
Table 14-1 Operation States in HALT Mode
Clock oscillator
Internal system clock
CPU
Operating
Operating
Note
Stopped
I/O lines
Same as before HALT mode
Operating
Peripheral functions
Internal RAM
Contents maintained
AD0-AD7 High-impedance
A8-A15 States maintained
A16-A19 Low
Bus lines
RD, WR output
ASTB output
High
Low
Note Macro services are executed.
379
µPD78214 Sub-Series
14.3.2 Releasing HALT Mode
HALT mode can be released by any of the following three sources:
• Nonmaskable interrupt request (NMI)
• Maskable interrupt request (vectored interrupt or macro service)
• RESET input
Table 14-2 lists the sources used for releasing HALT mode and the operations that are performed after HALT mode
is released by each source.
Table 14-2 Sources for Releasing HALT Mode and Operations Performed after Release
Releasing source MK××
PR××
IE
ISP
Operation
RESET input
×
×
×
×
Ordinary reset operation
Nonmaskable
Note
—
—
×
×
Handling a vectored interrupt
interrupt request
Maskable
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
×
0
×
1
×
1
1
0
0
×
×
×
1
×
1
0
×
Handling a vectored interrupt
vectored interrupt
request
Executing the instruction at the next address (holding the
interrupt request)
Continuing HALT mode (holding the interrupt request)
Executing the macro service
Macro service
request
0
0
0
1
1
×
When the end conditions are satisfied, a vectored interrupt
is handled.
When the end conditions are not satisfied, HALT mode is
resumed.
×
1
Executing the macro service
0
0
0
0
0
×
When the end conditions are satisfied, the instruction at the
next address is executed.
When the end conditions are not satisfied, HALT mode is
resumed.
×
1
Executing the macro service then resuming HALT mode
(holding the interrupt request)
0
1
1
×
×
0
×
×
Continuing HALT mode
Note When the NMIS bit of the interrupt status register (LST) is set to 1, the instruction at the next address is executed. Processing then
branches to the NMI interrupt service program when NMIS is cleared to 0.
Remark MK×× : Interrupt mask flag
PR×× : Priority designation flag
IE
: Interrupt request enable flag
: Interrupt priority status flag
ISP
(1) Release by a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) request
When a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) is requested, HALT mode is released regardless of whether interrupts
are enabled (EI) or disabled (DI).
Once HALT mode has been released, processing branches to the NMI service program if the NMIS bit of the
interrupt status register (IST) is set to 0. If the NMIS bit is set to 1 (for example, when HALT mode is specified
in the NMI interrupt service program), processing is resumed from the instruction subsequent the one that
has specified HALT mode. Processing then branches to the NMI interrupt service program when the NMIS
bit is set to 0 (for example, with a RETI instruction).
380
Chapter 14 Standby Function
(2) Release by a maskable interrupt request
Only maskable interrupts with 0 in the interrupt mask flag can be used to release HALT mode. If the interrupt
priority status flag (ISP) is set to 0 (only high-priority interrupts are enabled), only interrupts with 0 in the
priority designation flag (high priority) can release HALT mode. Macro services are, however, executed
regardlessoftheirpriorities(aninterrupttobegeneratedattheendofeachmacroserviceissubjecttopriority
control).
Once HALT mode has been released, processing branches to the interrupt handling program if the interrupt
request enable flag (IE) is set to 1. If the IE flag is set to 0, processing is resumed from the instruction
subsequent to that which specified HALT mode.
When a macro service is requested, HALT mode is temporarily released to execute the macro service. After
the macro service is executed, HALT mode is resumed. Once the macro service has been executed the
specified number of times, subsequent operations depend on the IE flag, ISP flag, and priority designation
flag.
Table 14-3 Release of HALT Mode by a Maskable Interrupt Request
Releasing source MK××
PR××
IE
1
1
0
0
×
×
ISP
×
Operation
0
×
0
×
1
×
Maskable
0
0
0
0
0
1
Handling a vectored interrupt
vectored interrupt
request
1
×
Executing the instruction at the next address (holding the
interrupt request)
1
0
Continuing HALT mode
×
Executing the macro service
Macro service
request
0
0
0
1
1
×
When the end conditions are satisfied, a vectored interrupt
14
is handled.
When the end conditions are not satisfied, HALT mode is
resumed.
×
1
Executing the macro service
0
0
0
0
0
×
When the end conditions are satisfied, the instruction at the
next address is executed.
When the end conditions are not satisfied, HALT mode is
resumed.
×
1
0
1
1
×
×
0
Executing the macro service then resuming HALT mode
Continuing HALT mode
×
×
Remark MK×× : Interrupt mask flag
PR×× : Priority designation flag
IE
ISP
: Interrupt request enable flag
: Interrupt priority status flag
(3) Release by RESET input
The program is resumed from the reset vector address in the same way as for an ordinary reset operation,
except that the contents of internal RAM are the same as those existing immediately before entering HALT
mode.
381
µPD78214 Sub-Series
14.4 STOP MODE
14.4.1 Specifying STOP Mode and Operation States in STOP Mode
The system enters STOP mode when the STP bit of the STBC register is set to 1.
The STBC register can be written only with a specified 8-bit data write instruction. To specify STOP mode, execute
the “MOV STBC, #02H” instruction.
Table 14-4 Operation States in STOP Mode
Clock oscillator
Internal system clock
CPU
Operating
Operating
Stopped
I/O lines
Same as before entering STOP mode
Note
Peripheral functions
Internal RAM
Stopped
Contents maintained
AD0-AD7 High-impedance
A8-A15 States maintained
A16-A19 Low
Bus lines
RD, WR output
ASTB output
High
Low
Note The A/D converter stops, but its current dissipation is not reduced if the CS bit of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is set.
Cautions 1. In STOP mode, the X1 pin is internally short-circuited to V (ground potential) to prevent current leakage from the clock
SS
oscillator circuit. STOP mode must not, therefore, be specified for a system using an external clock.
2. Reset the CS bit for the A/D converter.
3. The system enters STOP mode even if an NMI request is being held when STOP mode is specified. When using an NMI request
to release STOP mode, input the NMI signal again.
14.4.2 Releasing STOP Mode
STOP mode can be released by inputting an NMI or RESET signal.
(1) Releasing STOP mode by NMI input
(a) Operation
The oscillator restarts when an effective edge, specified with the external interrupt mode register
(INTM0), is detected at the NMI pin. Then, STOP mode is released after the specified time, required to
allow the oscillation to settle, has elapsed.
Once STOP mode has been released, processing branches to the NMI service program if the NMIS bit of
the interrupt status register (IST) is set to 0. If the NMIS bit is set to 1 (for example, when STOP mode
isspecifiedintheNMIinterruptserviceprogram),processingisresumedfromtheinstructionsubsequent
tothatwhichspecifiedSTOPmode. ProcessingthenbranchestotheNMIinterruptserviceprogramwhen
the NMIS bit is set to 0 (for example, with a RETI instruction).
(b) Oscillation settling time
The oscillator restarts when an effective, edge specified with the external interrupt mode register
(INTM0), is detected at the NMI pin. Then, when the input level of the NMI signal returns to its original
level, the oscillation settling time counter starts counting. When the 16-bit counter overflows (in 11 ms
when f = 12 MHz), the internal system clock is started. The system therefore waits, from the detection
XX
of the effective edge to the start of the internal clock, a total time equal to the high- or low-level width of
theNMIsignalafterdetectingtheeffectiveedgeandthetimeneededforthe16-bitoscillationsettlingtime
counter to overflow.
382
Chapter 14 Standby Function
Fig. 14-4 Releasing STOP Mode with an NMI Signal
STOP
Oscillator
fCLK
STP flip-flop 1
STP flip-flop 2
NMI input
(effective at rising edge)
Oscillator stops
Count time for
oscillation settling time counter
Caution If another effective edge of the NMI signal is detected during the oscillation settling time, the oscillation settling time counter is
cleared and restarts counting, resulting in a longer wait time than usual. The extra wait time is the total of the time from the end
of the first active level to detection of the next effective edge and the width of the second active level, starting from its effective
edge. Fix the NMI signal at the inactive level during the oscillation settling time, to ensure the release of STOP mode.
#
Fig. 14-5 Example of Longer Oscillation Settling Time
NMI
(effective at falling edge)
14
216/fCLK
CPU operation STOP mode
Wait for oscillation to settle
Normal operation
Count value of
oscillation settling
time counter
Cleared by
effective edge
Oscillation settling time
is extended by this period.
(2) Releasing STOP mode by RESET input
The oscillator restarts when the RESET signal is changed from high to low to set the system to the reset state.
KeeptheRESETsignalactiveuntiltheoscillationsettlingtimehaselapsed. WhentheRESETsignalgoeshigh,
normal operation starts.
Unlike ordinary reset, the contents of data memory will be the same as those existing immediately before the
system enters STOP mode.
383
µPD78214 Sub-Series
14.4.3 Notes on Using STOP Mode
Check the following items to ensure that current consumption is appropriately reduced in STOP mode:
(1) Is the output level of each output pin appropriate?
The appropriate output level of each pin depends on the circuit of the next stage. Select an output level that
minimizes current consumption.
• When the circuit of the next stage has a low input impedance, high output causes current to flow from the
power supply to the port, thus increasing current consumption. A CMOS IC is an example of such a circuit.
CMOS ICs having low impedance when the power is turned off. Apply a low voltage to pins used for output
toCMOSICs,toreducethecurrentconsumptionandminimizeanydegradationinthereliabilityoftheCMOS
ICs. A high output may result in latch-up when the power is next turned on.
• Lowoutputmayincreasethecurrentconsumption,dependingonthecircuitofthenextstage. Insuchacase,
apply a high voltage to the relevant pins or place the pins in the high-impedance state to reduce current
consumption.
The procedure for setting the output level for each port depends on the state of the port.
• When a port is set to control mode, the output level depends on the state of the internal hardware. The state
of the internal hardware must be considered when setting the output level.
• When a port is set to port mode, the output level can be set by writing appropriate data to the output latch
for that port, as well as the port mode register, by means of a program.
When a port is set to control mode, setting of the output level is facilitated by changing the setting of the port
to port mode.
(2) Is the input level of each input pin appropriate?
The voltage input to each pin must be maintained at a level between V and V . A voltage that falls outside
SS
DD
this range will result in increased current consumption as well as adversely affecting the reliability of the
microcomputer. Any intermediate voltage must also be avoided.
(3) Is the built-in pull-up resistor necessary?
Any unnecessary pull-up resistors may increase current consumption and result in the latch-up of other
devices. Specify the use of only necessary pull-up resistors.
If a port consists both of pins that require pull-up resistors and those that do not require pull-up resistors,
connect external pull-up resistors to those pins that require them and specify internal pull-up resistors for a
port that is not to be used.
(4) Are the address bus and address/data bus pins arranged appropriately?
The outputs of the address bus pins are unpredictable (high or low) in STOP mode. If the external circuit has
a low input impedance, current flows from the address bus pins, thus increasing the current consumption.
The input impedance of the external circuits connected to the address bus pins must therefore be high, even
in STOP mode.
In particular, CMOS ICs have a low input impedance when their power is turned off. Therefore, the following
arrangements are necessary to prevent current consumption from increasing or the reliability of the ICs from
being degraded:
• Do not turn off the CMOS IC (always supply power, even in STOP mode).
• Connect a diode with a small V to prevent current from flowing, as shown in Fig. 14-6.
F
384
Chapter 14 Standby Function
Fig. 14-6 Example of Address Bus Arrangement
Power supply backed up
Power supply not backed up
VDD
VDD
PD78214
CMOS IC, etc.
µ
An
IN
(n = 8 to 15)
Diode with small VF
VSS
VSS
The outputs of the address/data bus pins are high-impedance in STOP mode. The address/data bus pins are
usually pulled up with pull-up resistors. If a pull-up resistor is connected to a power supply which is backed
up, current flows through the pull-up resistor to an external circuit that is connected to a power supply that
is not backed up, if the circuit has low input impedance. As a result, current consumption increases. To
prevent this, connect pull-up resistors to any power supply that is not backed up, as shown in Fig. 14-7.
Fig. 14-7 Example Address/Data Bus Arrangement
Power supply backed up
Power supply not backed up
VDD
VDD
PD78214
CMOS IC, etc.
IN/OUT
µ
14
ADn
(n = 0 to 7)
VSS
VSS
The outputs of the RD, WR, ASTB, and REFRQ pins are fixed in STOP mode and, therefore, require the same
arrangements as the address bus pins. The ASTB pin, which outputs a low voltage, usually does not require
any external parts.
The level of the voltage input to the WAIT pin must be maintained between V and V . Any voltage falling
SS
DD
outside this range increases the current consumption as well as adversely affecting the reliability of the
microcomputer.
For theµPD78214, you can prevent problems related to address/data bus pins simply by specifying port mode
for the pins. The µPD78213, however, requires that the above arrangements be implemented.
(5) A/D converter
When the CS bit (bit 7) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is reset to 0, the current flowing from the
AV
pin is reduced. To reduce the current further, cut off the current supplied to the AV
pin by means
REF
REF
of an external circuit. In this case, however, a voltage higher than that of the AV
to the following pins:
pin must not be applied
REF
• Pin selected with bits ANI0 to ANI2 when the MS bit of the ADM register is 0
• AN0 pin when the MS bit of the ADM register is 1
Fig. 14-8 shows an example arrangement for preventing voltages higher than that of the AV
pin. Note,
REF
however, that in this case, response to changes in the input signal may become slow due to the time constant
derived from C and R on the input line.
385
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 14-8 Example Arrangement for Analog Input Pin
Power supply not backed up
Power supply backed up
VDD
AVREF
Diode with
small VF
PD78214
µ
Signal source
ANn (n = 0 to 7)
VSS
The voltage input to the AN0 to AN7 pins must be maintained at a level between V and V . Any voltage
SS
DD
falling outside this range increases the current consumption as well as adversely affecting the reliability of
the microcomputer.
14.5 NOTES
(1) If HALT mode is specified under the conditions for releasing HALT mode, the system does not enter HALT
mode, instead executing the next instruction or branching to the vectored interrupt service program. Clear
any interrupt requests before specifying HALT mode to ensure that the system correctly enters HALT mode.
(2) In STOP mode, the X1 pin is internally short-circuited to VSS (ground potential) to prevent current leakage
from the clock oscillator circuit. STOP mode must not, therefore, be specified for a system using an external
clock.
(3) Reset the CS bit for the A/D converter before specifying STOP mode.
(4) The system enters STOP mode even if an NMI request is held when STOP mode is specified. When using an
NMI request to release STOP mode, input the NMI signal again.
(5) If another effective edge of the NMI signal is detected during the oscillation settling time, the oscillation
settling time counter is cleared and restarts counting, resulting in a longer wait time than usual. The extra
wait time is the total of the time from the end of the first active level to detection of the next effective edge
andthewidthofthesecondactivelevel, startingfromitseffectiveedge. FixtheNMIsignalattheinactivelevel
during the oscillation settling time, to ensure the correct release of STOP mode.
#
386
Chapter 14 Standby Function
Fig. 14-9 Example of Longer Oscillation Settling Time
NMI
(effective at falling edge)
216/fCLK
CPU operation STOP mode
Wait for oscillation to settle
Normal operation
Count value of
oscillation settling
time counter
Cleared by
effctive edge
Oscillation settling time
is extended by this period.
14
387
388
CHAPTER 15 RESET FUNCTION
15.1 RESET FUNCTION
When the signal applied to the RESET input pin is low, the system is reset, and each hardware component is set
tothestateindicatedinTable15-2. Allpins, exceptthepowersupplypin, assumethehigh-impedancestate. Table
15-1 lists the states of pins during reset and after the reset state is released.
When the signal applied to the RESET input pin goes high, the reset state is released and program execution
branches as follows: The contents of address 00000H in the reset vector table are set in bits 0 to 7 of the program
counter(PC),whilethecontentsof00001Haresetinbits8to15ofthePC. Theprogramisresumedfromtheaddress
set in the PC. You can thus resume the program from an arbitrary address.
Initialize registers in the program as required.
The RESET pin contains a noise eliminator based on analog delays to prevent abnormal operation due to noise
(see Fig. 15-1).
Fig. 15-1 Acceptance of the RESET Signal
Execution of instruction
at reset start address
Delay
Delay
Delay
PC initialization
20/fCLK
RESET
(input)
Internal reset signal
Reset starts
Reset ends
Remark f
: System clock frequency (f /2)
XX
CLK
15
When resetting the system at power-on, keep the RESET signal active until the oscillation settling time (approx.
40 ms, depending on the resonator being used) elapses.
Fig. 15-2 Reset Operation at Power-On
Execution of instruction
at reset start address
Oscillation settling time
Delay PC initialization
20/fCLK
VDD
RESET
(input)
Internal reset signal
Reset ends
Remark f
: System clock frequency (f /2)
CLK XX
389
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 15-1 Pin States during Reset and After Reset State Is Released
Pin name
I/O
Output
Input
I/O
During reset
Hi-Z
After reset state is released
Hi-Z
P00-P07
P20/NMI-27/SI
Hi-Z
Hi-Z (input port)
Hi-Z (input port mode)
Hi-Z (input port mode)
Hi-Z (input port mode)
0
P30/RxD-P37/TO3
P40/AD0-P47/AD7
P50/A8-P57/A15
P60/A16-P63/A19
P64/RD, P65/WR
P66/WAIT/AN6, P67/REFRQ/AN7
P70/AN0-P75/AN5
ASTB
Hi-Z
Note
Note
I/O
Hi-Z
I/O
Hi-Z
Output
I/O
Hi-Z
Note
Hi-Z
Hi-Z (input port mode)
Hi-Z (input port mode)
Hi-Z (input port mode)
0
I/O
Hi-Z
Input
Output
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Note WhenROM-lessmodeisspecified(EApin=0), thesepinsfunctionasanaddress/databusandoutputsignalsforfetchingtheresetvector
address from address 0000H (see Fig. 15-3 (a)).
390
Chapter 15 Reset Function
Table 15-2 Hardware States after Reset (1/2)
Hardware
State after reset
Program counter (PC)
The contents of the reset vector table
(0000H and 0001H) are set.
Stack pointer (SP)
Undefined
02H
Program status word (PSW)
Data memory
Built-in
RAM
Note
Undefined
General registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H)
Port 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 7
Port 6
Ports
Undefined (high-impedance)
×0H
FFH
Port mode registers
PM0, PM3, PM5
PM6
F×H
Port 3 mode control register (PMC3)
Pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO)
Memory expansion mode register (MM)
00H
00H
20H
Timer (TM0)
0000H
Timer/
counter
unit
16-bit timer/
counters
Compare registers (CR00, CR01)
Capture register (CR02)
Timer (TM1, TM2, TM3)
Undefined
00H
8-bit timer/
counters
Compare registers
(CR10, CR20, CR21, CR30)
Undefined
00H
Capture register (CR22)
Capture/compare register (CR11)
15
Timer control registers (TMC0, TMC1)
Timer output control register (TOC)
CRC0
10H
00H
Capture/compare control
registers
CRC1, CRC2
Prescaler mode registers (PRM0, PRM1)
00H
A/D converter
Mode register (ADM)
00H
A/D conversion result register (ADCR)
Undefined
Note When STOP mode is released by a RESET signal, the values stored immediately before setting STOP mode are maintained.
391
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Table 15-2 Hardware States after Reset (2/2)
Hardware
State after reset
00H
Serial
Mode register (CSIM)
interface
Shift register (SIO)
Undefined
80H
Asynchronous mode register (ASIM)
Asynchronous status register (ASIS)
Serial bus control register (SBIC)
Serial reception buffer (RXB)
Serial transmission buffer (TXS)
Baud rate generator control register (BRGC)
00H
00H
Undefined
Undefined
00H
Real-time output port control register (RTPC)
Programmable wait control register (PW)
Refresh mode register (RFM)
00H
80H
00H
Interrupts Interrupt request flag register (IF0)
Interrupt mask register (MK0)
0000H
FFFFH
FFFFH
0000H
00H
Priority designation flag register (PR0)
Interrupt service mode register (ISM0)
Interrupt status register (IST)
External interrupt mode registers (INTM0 and INTM1)
Standby control register (STBC)
00H
0000 × 000B
392
Chapter 15 Reset Function
Fig. 15-3 Timing Charts for Reset Operation
(a) For µPD78213
#
RESET
(input)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
ASTB (output)
A8-A19
(output)
Hi-Z
Address
(output)
Program
(input)
AD0-AD7
Hi-Z
RD (output)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
WR output
Other I/O ports
Reset period
Instruction execution period after reset
(b) For µPD78214
15
RESET
(input)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
ASTB (output)
P60-P63
(output)
Other I/O ports
Reset period
Instruction execution period after reset
15.2 NOTE
When resetting the system at power-on, do not set the RESET signal high immediately after the supply voltage
reaches the specified level. Keep the signal low until oscillation has settled.
393
394
CHAPTER 16 APPLICATION EXAMPLES
16.1 OPEN-LOOP CONTROL OF STEPPER MOTORS
This section provides an example of controlling stepper motors with the real-time output function, 8-bit timer/
counter 1, and the macro service function of the µPD78214.
Fig. 16-1 shows the functional blocks for controlling two stepper motors.
Aninterruptsignalisgeneratedwhenthevaluein8-bittimer/counter1(TM1)ismatchedwiththevalueincompare
registerCR10orCR11. TheinterruptsignaltriggersamacroserviceinwhichtheCPUautomaticallytransferstable
data prepared in memory to the compare register and the buffer register for the real-time output port. Data
transferred to the compare register is used for the interval before the generation of the next interrupt.
Data transferred to the buffer register is output from port 0.
Open-loop control of stepper motors with the µPD78214 has the following advantages:
(1) The real-time output function provides accurate control (output) signals based on a specified interval.
(2) Two stepper motors can be independently controlled with an 8-bit timer/counter and two compare registers.
Hardware can thus be efficiently used.
(3) Themacroservicefunctioncanperformcomplicatedcontrol, suchastheacceleration/decelerationofstepper
motors, without the need for software.
16
395
µPD78214 Sub-Series
396
Chapter 16 Application Examples
16.2 SERIAL COMMUNICATION WITH MULTIPLE DEVICES
Fig. 16-2 shows an example of a system configured with a serial bus interface. The serial bus interface can transfer
addresses (for selecting devices), commands, and data, as well as acknowledge and busy signals, using only two
lines: The serial clock and serial bus lines.
When a master device communicates with multiple slave devices, the master device outputs an address for
selecting a slave device on the serial bus line. Each slave device checks whether the received address is the same
as the address assigned to the device, using software. Only a slave device whose address is the same as the
received address returns an acknowledge signal to the master device, after which it receives commands from the
master device or transfers data to and from the master device. Fig. 16-3 shows an example of communication
using the serial bus interface (SBI).
Fig. 16-2 Example System Configuration Using the Serial Bus Interface
[Master]
[Slave]
SCK
SB0
SCK
SB0
PD78214
PD75402
µ
µ
SCK
SB0
PD75008
PD75308
µ
µ
SCK
SB0
16
397
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 16-3 Example of Communication with SBI
Address
Command
Command
SB0
Address
Address
Address
Address
Command
Command
Data
Data
Data
Command
SB0
SB0
SB0
SB0
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Command
: Bus release
: Command trigger
Fig. 16-4 Serial Bus Communication Timing
Selection of slave CPU (a feature of SBI)
Address transfer
SCK
8
9
SB0
A7
A0
ACK BUSY
Bus release signal
Command signal
Command transfer
SCK
8
9
SB0
C7
C0 ACK BUSY
READY
Data transfer
SCK
8
9
SB0
D7
D0 ACK BUSY
READY
398
CHAPTER 17 PROGRAMMING FOR THE µPD78P214
The µPD78P214 employs an electrically writable PROM of 16384 × 8 bits for program memory. Use the NMI and
RESET pins to set the µPD78P214 to PROM programming mode when programming the PROM.
Note
The µPD78P214 provides programming characteristics compatible with the µPD27C256A
.
#
Note 100 µs program pulses are not supported.
17.1 OPERATING MODE
When +6 V is applied to the V pin and +12.5 V to the V pin, the µPD78P214 enters PROM programming mode.
DD
PP
This mode can be changed to each of the operating modes shown in Table 17-1 according to the settings of the
CE and OE pins.
Setting the µPD78P214 to read mode enables it to read the contents of PROM.
Table 17-1 Operating Modes for PROM Programming
Pin
NMI
RESET
V
V
CE
OE
D0-D7
Data input
PP
DD
Mode
Program write
Program verify
Program inhibit
Read
L
H
H
L
H
L
+12.5 V
+5 V
+6 V
+5 V
Data output
H
High-impedance
Data output
+12.5 V
L
L
Output disable
Standby
L
H
High-impedance
High-impedance
H
L/H
Caution When V is +12.5 V and V is +6 V, CE and OE must not be set to low at the same time.
PP
DD
17.2 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING INTO PROM
Data can be written into PROM at high speed by following the procedure below:
(1) FixtheRESETpintothelowlevel. Apply+12.5VtopinNMI. HandleunusedpinsasdescribedinSection1.3.2.
17
(2) Apply +6 V to the V pin and +12.5 V to the V pin.
DD
PP
(3) Input an initial address.
(4) Input the write data.
(5) Input a program pulse (active low), having a period of 1 ms, to the CE pin.
(6) Check that data has been written into the PROM (verify mode). When the data has been written correctly, go
to step (8). Otherwise, repeat steps (4) to (6). If data has still not been written successfully after repeating this
part of the procedure 25 times, go to step (7).
(7) Assume the device to be defective and abandon the write operation.
(8) Input the write data, then input a program pulse which has a period of (number of times steps (4) to (6) have
been repeated) × 3 ms (additional write).
(9) Increment the address.
(10) Repeat steps (4) to (9) until the address exceeds the previous address.
Fig. 17-1 is the timing chart for steps (2) to (8) above.
399
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 17-1 Timing Chart for PROM Write and Verify
Repetition of X times
Write
Verify
Additional write
A0-A14
Address input
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Data input
Data output
Data input
D0-D7
+12.5 V
Vpp
VDD
+6 V
VDD
VDD
3X ms
CE (input)
OE (input)
400
Chapter 17 Programming for The µPD78214
Fig. 17-2 Write Operation Flowchart
(1)
Start writing
Apply power supply voltage
Set an initial address
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Input write data
Input a program pulse
(6)
Write failure (up to 24th)
Write failure (25th)
Verify mode
Write success
Additional write (3X ms pulse)
(8)
(9)
X: Number of times
writing is repeated
Increment the address
(10)
<
Last address
Last address
17
> Last address
(7)
Write completes
Defective device
17.3 PROCEDURE FOR READING FROM PROM
The contents of PROM can be read out to the external data bus (D0 to D7) by following the procedure below:
(1) FixtheRESETpintothelowlevel. Apply+12.5VtopinNMI. HandleunusedpinsasdescribedinSection1.3.2.
(2) Apply +5 V to the V and V pins.
DD
PP
(3) Input the address of the data to be read into the A0 to A14 pins.
(4) Set read mode.
(5) Output the data on the D0 to D7 pins.
Fig. 17-3 is the timing chart for steps (2) to (5).
401
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Fig. 17-3 PROM Read Timing Chart
Address input
A0-A14
CE (input)
OE (input)
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Data output
D0-D7
17.4 NOTE
When V is +12.5 V and V is +6 V, CE and OE must not be set to low at the same time.
PP
DD
402
CHAPTER 18 INSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
This chapter describes the operation of each instruction of the µPD78214 sub-series. Refer to the 78K/II Series
User’s Manual, Instructions (IEU-1311) for details of each operation, the corresponding machine language code
(instruction code), and the number of clock states for each instruction.
18.1 LEGEND
18.1.1 Operand Field
Code operands in the operand field for each instruction, using the specified operand representation format (for
details, refer to the relevant assembler specifications). When several coding forms are presented, any one can be
used. Since uppercase letters and symbols +, –, #, !, $, /, [], and & are keywords, write any symbols as is.
Do not omit symbols +, –, #, !, $, /, [], and & when writing immediate data with labels. r and rp can be written with
any functional and absolute names.
+
–
: Auto increment
: Auto decrement
: Immediate data
#
!
: Absolute addressing
: Relative addressing
: Bit inversion
$
/
[]
&
r,r’
: Indirect addressing
: Sub-bank specification
: Registers;
Functional name: X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H
Absolute name : R0-R7
: Register group 1;
B, C
r1
rp, rp’ : Register pairs;
Functional name: AX, BC, DE, HL
18
Absolute name : RP0-RP3
: Special function registers;
sfr
P0, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P0H, P0L, RTPC, CR10, CR11, CR20, CR21, CR22, CR30, PM0, PM3, PM5, PM6,
PMC3, PUO, CRC0, CRC1, CRC2, TOC, TM1, TM2, TM3, TMC0, TMC1, PRM0, PRM1, ADM, ADCR, CSIM,
SBIC, SIO, ASIM, ASIS, RXB, TXS, BRGC, STBC(onlyfordedicatedinstruction), MM, PW, RFM, IF0L, IF0H,
MK0L, MK0H, PR0L, PR0H, ISM0L, ISM0H, INTM0, INTM1, IST
sfrp : Special function register pairs;
CR00, CR01, CR02, TM0, IF0, MK0, PR0, ISM0
mem : Memory address indicated in indirect addressing mode;
Register indirect mode : [DE], [HL], [DE+], [HL+], [DE–], [HL–]
Base mode
: [DE+byte], [HL+byte], [SP+byte]
Indexed mode
: word[A], word[B], word[DE], word[HL]
mem1 : Memory address indicated in indirect addressing group 1 mode;
[DE], [HL]
403
µPD78214 Sub-Series
saddr, saddr’: Memory address indicated in short direct addressing mode;
FE20H-FF1FH immediate data or label
saddrp
addr16
addr11
addr5
word
byte
: Memory address indicated in short direct addressing pair mode;
FE20H-FF1EH immediate data or label
: 16-bit address;
0000H-FEFFH immediate data or label
: 11-bit address;
800H-FFFH immediate data or label
: 5-bit address;
40H-7EH immediate data or label
: 16-bit data;
16-bit immediate data or label
: 8-bit data;
8-bit immediate data or label
: 3-bit data;
bit
3-bit immediate data or label
: Number of shift bits;
n
3-bit immediate data (0-7)
: Register bank;
RBn
RB0-RB3
18.1.2 Operation Field
A
: Register A; 8-bit accumulator
X
: Register X
B
: Register B
C
: Register C
D
: Register D
E
: Register E
H
: Register H
L
: Register L
R0-R7
AX
BC
DE
HL
: Register 0 to register 7 (absolute name)
: Register pair (AX); 16-bit accumulator
: Register pair (BC)
: Register pair (DE)
: Register pair (HL)
RP0-RP3 : Register pair 0 to register pair 3 (absolute name)
PC
: Program counter
: Stack pointer
SP
PSW
CY
: Program status word
: Carry flag
AC
: Auxiliary carry flag
404
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
Z
: Zero flag
RBS1-RBS0 : Register bank selection flag
IE
: Interrupt request enable flag
STBC
jdisp8
( )
: Standby control register
: Signed 8-bit data (displacement: –128 to +127)
: Contents at address enclosed in parentheses or at address indicated in register enclosed in
parentheses
××H
: Hexadecimal number
× , ×
H
: Eight high-order bits and eight low-order bits of 16-bit register pair
L
18.1.3 Flag Field
Blank
: No change
0
1
×
R
: Cleared to zero.
: Set to 1.
: Set or cleared according to the result.
: Saved values are restored.
18
405
µPD78214 Sub-Series
18.2 LIST OF OPERATIONS
(1) 8-bit data transfer instructions: MOV, XCH
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
r, #byte
bytes
Z
AC CY
MOV
2
3
r ← byte
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
(saddr) ← byte
sfr ← byte
r ← r'
3
2
A, r
1
A ← r
A, saddr
saddr, A
saddr, saddr
A, sfr
2
A ← (saddr)
(saddr) ← A
(saddr) ← (saddr)
A ← sfr
2
3
2
sfr, A
2
sfr ← A
A, mem
A, & mem
mem, A
& mem, A
A, !addr16
A, & !addr16
!addr16, A
& !addr16, A
PSW, #byte
PSW, A
1-4
2-5
1-4
2-5
4
A ← (mem)
A ← (& mem)
(mem) ← A
(& mem) ← A
A ← (!addr16)
A ← (& !addr16)
(!addr16) ← A
(& !addr16) ← A
PSW ← byte
PSW ← A
5
4
5
3
×
×
×
×
×
×
2
A, PSW
2
A ← PSW
XCH
A, r
1
A ↔ r
r, r'
2
r ↔ r'
A, mem
A, & mem
A, saddr
A, sfr
2-4
3-5
2
A ↔ (mem)
A ↔ (& mem)
A ↔ (saddr)
A ↔ sfr
3
saddr, saddr'
3
(saddr) ↔ (saddr')
406
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
(2) 16-bit data transfer instructions: MOVW
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
rp, #word
bytes
Z
AC CY
3
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
rp ← word
MOVW
saddrp, #word
sfrp, #word
rp, rp'
(saddrp) ← word
sfrp ← word
rp ← rp'
AX, saddrp
saddrp, AX
AX, sfrp
AX ← (saddrp)
(saddrp) ← AX
AX ← sfrp
sfrp, AX
sfrp ← AX
AX, mem1
AX, & mem1
mem1, AX
& mem1, AX
AX ← (mem1)
AX ← (& mem1)
(mem1) ← AX
(& mem1) ← AX
(3) 8-bit arithmetic/logical instructions: ADD, ADDC, SUB, SUBC, AND, OR, XOR, CMP
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
A, #byte
bytes
Z
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
AC CY
ADD
2
3
A, CY ← A + byte
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte
sfr, CY ← sfr + byte
4
2
r, CY ← r + r'
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A, CY ← A + (saddr)
3
A, CY ← A + sfr
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) + (saddr')
A, CY ← A + (mem)
18
2-4
3-5
2
A, & mem
A, #byte
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
A, CY ← A + (& mem)
A, CY ← A + byte + CY
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte + CY
sfr, CY ← sfr + byte + CY
r, CY ← r + r' + CY
ADDC
3
4
2
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A, CY ← A + (saddr) + CY
A, CY ← A + sfr + CY
3
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) + (saddr') + CY
A, CY ← A + (mem) + CY
A, CY ← A + (& mem) + CY
2-4
3-5
A, & mem
(Continued)
407
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Flags
No. of
bytes
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
Z
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
AC CY
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
A, #byte
2
3
A, CY ← A – byte
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) – byte
sfr, CY ← sfr – byte
r, CY ← r – r'
4
2
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A, CY ← A – (saddr)
A, CY ← A – sfr
3
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) – (saddr')
A, CY ← A – (mem)
A, CY ← A – (& mem)
A, CY ← A – byte – CY
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) – byte – CY
sfr, CY ← sfr – byte – CY
r, CY ← r – r' – CY
2-4
3-5
2
A, & mem
A, #byte
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
3
4
2
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A, CY ← A – (saddr) – CY
A, CY ← A – sfr – CY
(saddr), CY ← (saddr) – (saddr') – CY
A, CY ← A – (mem) – CY
A, CY ← A – (& mem) – CY
A ← A ∧ byte
3
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
2-4
3-5
2
A, & mem
A, #byte
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
3
(saddr) ← (saddr) ∧ byte
sfr ← sfr ∧ byte
4
2
r ← r ∧ r'
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A ← A ∧ (saddr)
3
A ← A ∧ sfr
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
(saddr) ← (saddr) ∧ (saddr')
A ← A ∧ (mem)
2-4
3-5
2
A, & mem
A, #byte
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
A ← A ∧ (& mem)
A ← A ∨ byte
3
(saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ byte
sfr ← sfr ∨ byte
4
2
r ← r ∨ r'
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A ← A ∨ (saddr)
3
A ← A ∨ sfr
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
(saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ (saddr')
A ← A ∨ (mem)
2-4
3-5
A, & mem
A ← A ∨ (& mem)
(Continued)
408
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
Flags
No. of
bytes
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
A, #byte
Z
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
AC CY
XOR
2
3
A ← A ∨ byte
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
(saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ byte
sfr ← sfr ∨ byte
r ← r ∨ r'
4
2
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A ← A ∨ (saddr)
A ← A ∨ sfr
3
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
(saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ (saddr')
A ← A ∨ (mem)
A ← A ∨ (& mem)
A – byte
2-4
3-5
2
A, & mem
A, #byte
saddr, #byte
sfr, #byte
r, r'
CMP
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
3
(saddr) – byte
sfr – byte
4
2
r – r'
A, saddr
A, sfr
2
A – (saddr)
3
A – sfr
saddr, saddr'
A, mem
3
(saddr) – (saddr')
A – (mem)
2-4
3-5
A, & mem
A – (& mem)
(4) 16-bit arithmetic/logical instructions: ADDW, SUBW, CMPW
Flags
No. of
Operation
AX, CY ← AX + word
Mnemonic
Operand
AX, #word
bytes
Z
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
AC CY
ADDW
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
AX, rp
AX, CY ← AX + rp
AX, CY ← AX + (saddrp)
AX, CY ← AX + sfrp
AX, CY ← AX – word
AX, CY ← AX – rp
AX, CY ← AX – (saddrp)
AX, CY ← AX – sfrp
AX – word
18
AX, saddrp
AX, sfrp
AX, #word
AX, rp
SUBW
CMPW
AX, saddrp
AX, sfrp
AX, #word
AX, rp
AX – rp
AX, saddrp
AX, sfrp
AX – (saddrp)
AX – sfrp
409
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(5) Multiply/divide instructions: MULU, DIVUW
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
bytes
Z
AC CY
r
r
2
2
AX ← A × r1
MULU
DIVUW
AX (quotient), r (remainder) ← AX ÷ r
When r = 0, r ← X, AX ← 0FFFFH
(6) Increment/decrement instructions: INC, DEC, INCW, DECW
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
bytes
Z
×
×
×
×
AC CY
INC
r
1
2
1
2
1
1
r ← r + 1
×
×
×
×
saddr
r
(saddr) ← (saddr) + 1
r ← r – 1
DEC
saddr
rp
(saddr) ← (saddr) – 1
rp ← rp + 1
INCW
DECW
rp
rp ← rp – 1
(7) Shift/rotate instructions: ROR, ROL, RORC, ROLC, SHR, SHL, SHRW, SHLW, ROR4, ROL4
Flags
No. of
bytes
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
Z
AC CY
ROR
r, n
r, n
r, n
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
(CY, r ← r , r
← r ) × n times n=0 to 7
×
×
×
×
7
0
m-1
m
ROL
(CY, r ← r , r
← r ) × n times n=0 to 7
0
7
m+1
m
RORC
ROLC
SHR
(CY ← r , r ← CY, r
← r ) × n times n=0 to
7
0
7
m-1
m
r, n
(CY ← r , r ← CY, r
← r ) × n times n=0 to
7
7
0
m+1
m
r, n
(CY ← r , r ← 0, r
← r ) × n times n=0 to
7
×
×
×
×
0
0
0
0
×
×
×
×
0
7
m-1
m
SHL
r, n
(CY ← r , r ← 0, r
← r ) × n times n=0 to
7
7
0
m+1
m
rp, n
rp, n
(CY ← rp , rp ← 0, rp
← rp ) × n times n=0 to
7
SHRW
SHLW
ROR4
0
15
m-1
m
(CY ← rp , rp ← 0, rp
← rp ) × n times n=0 to
7
15
0
m+1
m
mem1
A
← (mem1) , (mem1)
← A
,
3-0
3-0
3-0
7-4
(mem1)
← (mem1)
7-4
3-0
& mem1
mem1
3
2
3
A
← (& mem1) , (& mem1)
← A
,
,
3-0
3-0
7-4
3-0
3-0
(& mem1)
← (& mem1)
7-4
3-0
ROL4
A
← (mem1) , (mem1)
← A
,
3-0
7-4
3-0
3-0
(mem1)
← (mem1)
3-0
7-4
& mem1
A
← (& mem1) , (& mem1) ← A
3-0
3-0
7-4
(& mem1)
← (& mem1)
3-0
7-4
410
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
(8) BCD conversion instructions: ADJBA, ADJBS
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
bytes
Z
×
×
AC CY
1
1
Use the decimal adjust accumulator after addition.
Use the decimal adjust accumulator after subtraction.
×
×
×
×
ADJBA
ADJBS
(9) Bit manipulation instructions: MOV1, AND1, OR1, XOR1, SET1, CLR1, NOT1
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
bytes
Z
AC CY
MOV1
CY, saddr.bit
CY, sfr.bit
CY, A.bit
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
CY ← (saddr.bit)
CY ← sfr.bit
CY ← A.bit
×
×
×
×
×
CY, X.bit
CY ← X.bit
CY, PSW.bit
saddr.bit, CY
sfr.bit, CY
A.bit, CY
CY ← PSW.bit
(saddr.bit) ← CY
sfr.bit ← CY
A.bit ← CY
X.bit, CY
X.bit ← CY
PSW.bit, CY
CY, saddr.bit
CY, /saddr.bit
CY, sfr.bit
CY, /sfr.bit
CY, A.bit
PSW.bit ← CY
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
AND1
CY ← CY ∧ (saddr.bit)
CY ← CY ∧ (saddr.bit)
CY ← CY ∧ sfr.bit
CY ← CY ∧ sfr.bit
CY ← CY ∧ A.bit
CY, /A.bit
CY ← CY ∧ A.bit
CY, X.bit
CY ← CY ∧ X.bit
18
CY, /X.bit
CY ← CY ∧ X.bit
CY, PSW.bit
CY, /PSW.bit
CY, saddr.bit
CY, /saddr.bit
CY, sfr.bit
CY, /sfr.bit
CY, A.bit
CY ← CY ∧ PSW.bit
CY ← CY ∧ PSW.bit
CY ← CY ∨ (saddr.bit)
CY ← CY ∨ (saddr.bit)
CY ← CY ∨ sfr.bit
CY ← CY ∨ sfr.bit
CY ← CY ∨ A.bit
OR1
CY, /A.bit
CY ← CY ∨ A.bit
CY, X.bit
CY ← CY ∨ X.bit
CY, /X.bit
CY ← CY ∨ X.bit
CY, PSW.bit
CY, /PSW.bit
CY ← CY ∨ PSW.bit
CY ← CY ∨ PSW.bit
(Continued)
411
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Flags
No. of
bytes
Operation
CY ← CY ∨ (saddr.bit)
Mnemonic
Operand
Z
AC CY
XOR1
CY, saddr.bit
CY, sfr.bit
CY, A.bit
CY, X.bit
CY, PSW.bit
saddr.bit
sfr.bit
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
2
2
1
3
3
2
2
2
1
×
×
×
×
×
CY ← CY ∨ sfr.bit
CY ← CY ∨ A.bit
CY ← CY ∨ X.bit
CY ← CY ∨ PSW.bit
(saddr.bit) ← 1
sfr.bit ← 1
SET1
A.bit
A.bit ← 1
X.bit
X.bit ← 1
PSW.bit
CY
PSW.bit ← 1
CY ← 1
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
1
CLR1
saddr.bit
sfr.bit
(saddr.bit) ← 0
sfr.bit ← 0
A.bit
A.bit ← 0
X.bit
X.bit ← 0
PSW.bit
CY
PSW.bit ← 0
CY ← 0
×
0
NOT1
saddr.bit
sfr.bit
(saddr.bit) ← (saddr.bit)
sfr.bit ← sfr.bit
A.bit ← A.bit
X.bit ← X.bit
PSW.bit ← PSW.bit
CY ← CY
A.bit
X.bit
PSW.bit
CY
×
×
412
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
(10) Call/return instructions: CALL, CALLF, CALLT, BRK, RET, RETI, RETB
Flags
No. of
bytes
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
!addr16
Z
AC CY
3
2
2
1
(SP – 1) ← (PC + 3) , (SP – 2) ← (PC + 3) ,
CALL
H
L
PC ← addr16, SP ← SP – 2
rp
(SP – 1) ← (PC + 2) , (SP – 2) ← (PC + 2) ,
H
L
PC ← rp , PC ← rp , SP ← SP – 2
H
H
L
L
!addr11
[addr5]
(SP – 1) ← (PC + 2) , (SP – 2) ← (PC + 2) ,
CALLF
CALLT
H
L
PC
← 00001, PC
← addr11, SP ← SP – 2
10-0
15-11
(SP – 1) ← (PC + 1) , (SP – 2) ← (PC + 1) ,
H
L
PC ← (00000000, addr5 + 1),
H
PC ← (00000000, addr5), SP ← SP – 2
L
BRK
1
(SP – 1) ← PSW, (SP – 2) ← (PC + 1)
H
(SP – 3) ← (PC + 1) , PC ← (003EH),
L
L
PC ← (003FH), SP ← SP – 3, IE ← 0
H
RET
1
1
PC ← (SP), PC ← (SP + 1), SP ← SP + 2
L
H
RETI
PC ← (SP), PC ← PSW ← (SP + 2),
R
R
R
R
R
R
L
H
SP ← (SP + 3), NMIS ← 0
RETB
1
PC ← (SP), PC ← PSW ← (SP + 2),
L
H
SP ← (SP + 3)
(11) Stack manipulation instructions: PUSH, POP, MOVW, INCW, DECW
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
bytes
Z
R
AC CY
PSW
sfr
1
2
1
1
2
1
4
2
2
2
2
(SP – 1) ← PSW, SP ← SP – 1
PUSH
(SP – 1) ← sfr, SP ← SP – 1
rp
(SP – 1) ← rp , (SP – 2) ← rp , SP ← SP – 2
H
L
POP
PSW
sfr
PSW ← (SP), SP ← SP + 1
R
R
18
sfr ← (SP), SP ← SP + 1
rp
rp ← (SP), rp ← (SP + 1), SP ← SP + 2
L
H
MOVW
SP, #word
SP, AX
AX, SP
SP
SP ← word
SP ← AX
AX ← SP
INCW
SP ← SP + 1
SP ← SP – 1
DECW
SP
(12) Unconditional branch instruction: BR
Flags
No. of
bytes
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
!addr16
Z
AC CY
BR
3
2
2
PC ← addr16
rp1
PC ← rp , PC ← rp
L
H
H
L
$ addr16
PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8
413
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(13) Conditional branch instructions: BC, BL, BNC, BNL, BZ, BE, BNZ, BNE, BT, BF, BTCLR, DBNZ
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
$ addr16
bytes
Z
AC CY
BC
2
PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 1
BL
BNC
BNL
BZ
addr16
2
2
2
PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 0
PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 1
PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 0
$ addr16
$ addr16
BE
BNZ
BNE
BT
saddr.bit, $ addr16
sfr.bit, $ addr16
A.bit, $ addr16
3
4
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
3
4
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 1
PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if X.bit = 1
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1
PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 0
PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 0
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 0
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if X.bit = 0
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 0
X.bit, $ addr16
PSW.bit, $ addr16
saddr.bit, $ addr16
sfr.bit, $ addr16
A.bit, $ addr16
BF
X.bit, $ addr16
PSW.bit, $ addr16
saddr.bit, $ addr16
BTCLR
PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 1
then reset (saddr.bit)
sfr.bit, $ addr16
A.bit, $ addr16
X.bit, $ addr16
PSW.bit, $ addr16
4
3
3
3
PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1
then reset sfr.bit
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1
then reset A.bit
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if X.bit = 1
then reset X.bit
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1
×
×
×
then reset PSWH.bit
DBNZ
r1, $ addr16
2
3
r1 ← r1 – 1, then PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if rl
≠
0
saddr, $ addr16
(saddr) ← (saddr) – 1,
then PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr) ≠ 0
414
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
(14) CPU control instructions: MOV, SEL, NOP, EI, DI
Flags
No. of
Operation
Mnemonic
Operand
bytes
Z
AC CY
STBC, #byte
RBn
4
2
1
1
1
STBC ← byte
MOV
SEL
NOP
EI
RBS1 – 0 ← n, n = 0 – 3
No operation
IE ← 1 (Enable interrupts)
IE ← 0 (Disable interrupts)
DI
18
415
µPD78214 Sub-Series
18.3 INSTRUCTION LISTS FOR EACH ADDRESSING TYPE
(1) 8-bit instructions
MOV, XCH, ADD, ADDC, SUB, SUBC, AND, OR, XOR, CMP, MULU, DIVUW, INC, DEC, ROR, ROL, RORC, ROLC,
SHR, SHL, ROR4, ROL4, and DBNZ
Table 18-1 8-Bit Instructions for Each Addressing Type
Second
operand
r
saddr
First
operand
Note 2
# byte
A
sfr
mem
& mem !addr16 & !addr16
MOV
PSW
MOV
n
None
r'
saddr'
A
MOV
MOV
XCH
MOV
XCH
MOV
XCH
Note 1
XCH
XCH
ADD
MOV
MOV
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
ADD
ADD
ADD
ADD
r
ROR
RORC
ROL
MULU
DIVUW
DEC
MOV
XCH
MOV
ROLC
SHR
Note 1
ADD
INC
SHL
rl
DBNZ
saddr
MOV
XCH
DEC
INC
MOV
MOV
Note 1
ADD
Note 1
ADD
DBNZ
sfr
MOV
POP
MOV
MOV
Note 1
ADD
PUSH
mem
& mem
mem1
ROR4
ROL4
& mem1
!addr16
MOV
MOV
& !addr16
POP
PSW
MOV
MOV
PUSH
STBC
Notes 1. ADDC, SUB, SUBC, AND, OR, XOR, and CMP are the same as ADD.
2. The second operand does not exist or is not an operand address.
416
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
(2) 16-bit instructions
MOVW, ADDW, SUBW, CMPW, INCW, DECW, SHRW, and SHLW
Table 18-2 16-Bit Instructions for Each Addressing Type
Second
operand
rp
First
operand
# word
AX
saddrp
sfr
mem1 & mem1
SP
n
None
rp'
AX
MOVW MOVW
ADDW ADDW
ADDW
SUBW
CMPW
ADDW
SUBW
CMPW
MOVW MOVW MOVW
SUBW
SUBW
CMPW CMPW
DECW
INCW
PUSH
POP
rp
SHLW
SHRW
MOVW
MOVW
saddrp
MOVW MOVW
MOVW MOVW
sfrp
mem1
MOVW
& mem1
SP
DECW
INCW
MOVW MOVW
18
417
µPD78214 Sub-Series
(3) Bit manipulation instructions
MOV1, AND1, OR1, XOR1, SET1, CLR1, NOT1, BT, BF, and BTCLR
Table 18-3 Bit Manipulation Instructions for Each Addressing Type
Second
operand
First
operand
Note
/A. bit
/X. bit saddr. bit /saddr. bit sfr. bit /sfr. bit PSW. bit /PSW. bit
CY
A. bit
X. bit
None
MOV1
AND1
OR1
CY
MOV1
AND1
OR1
MOV1
AND1
OR1
MOV1
AND1
OR1
MOV1
AND1
OR1
CLR1
AND1
OR1
AND1
OR1
AND1
OR1
AND1
OR1
AND1
OR1
NOT1
SET1
XOR1
XOR1
XOR1
XOR1
XOR1
CLR1
NOT1
SET1
BF
A. bit
MOV1
MOV1
MOV1
MOV1
MOV1
BT
BTCLR
CLR1
NOT1
SET1
BF
X. bit
BT
BTCLR
CLR1
NOT1
SET1
BF
saddr. bit
BT
BTCLR
CLR1
NOT1
SET1
BF
sfr. bit
BT
BTCLR
CLR1
NOT1
SET1
BF
PSW. bit
BT
BTCLR
Note The second operand does not exist or is not an operand address.
418
Chapter 18 Instruction Operations
(4) Call instructions and branch instructions
#
CALL, CALLF, CALLT, BR, BC, BT, BF, BTCLR, DBNZ, BL, BNC, BNL, BZ, BE, BNZ, and BNE
Table 18-4 Call Instructions and Branch Instructions for Each Addressing Type
Instruction addressing
$addr16
BR
!addr16
rp
!addr11
MOV1
[addr5]
MOV1
operand
Basic instruction
CALL
BR
CALL
BR
Note
BC
BT
BF
Composite instruction
BTCLR
DBNZ
Note BL, BNC, BNL, BZ, BF, BNZ, and BNE are the same as BC.
(5) Other instructions
ADJBA, ADJBS, BRK, RET, RETI, RETB, NOP, EI, DI, and SEL
#
18
419
420
APPENDIX A 78K/II SERIES PRODUCT LIST
The following pages list the 78K/II series products.
For details, refer to each User’s Manual.
A
421
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Series name
µPD78214 Sub-Series
µPD78218A Sub-Series
µPD78224 Sub-Series
Product name
µPD78214
(µPD78P214)
µPD78218A
(µPD78P218A)
µPD78224
(µPD78P224)
µPD78212
µPD78213
µPD78217A
µPD78220
Item
Number of basic instructions
Minimum instruction execution time
65 (instructions common to all 78K/II series products)
500 ns 333 ns 500 ns 333 ns 500 ns
When the stack area is
configured in the internal configured in the internal
333 ns
333 ns
PUSH PSW instruction
execution time (number of
clocks)
When the stack area is configured in When the stack area is
the internal dual-port RAM: 5 or 7
Other cases: 7 or 9
dual-port RAM: 6
Other cases: 8
dual-port RAM: 5 or 7
Other cases: 7 or 9
–40 to +85˚C,
Operating temperature and
voltage ranges
Other than µPD78P2148A : –40 to +85˚C, V = +5 V 10%
V
= +5 V 5%
DD
DD
–10 to +70˚C,
µPD78P2148A
: –40 to +85˚C, V = +5 V 0.3 V
DD
V
= +5 V 10%
DD
General-purpose registers
Bank registers
8 bits × 8 × 4 banks
P6 and PM6
P6 only
ROM
Internal memory
8K
None
16K
None
None
32K
None
16K
(bytes)
EEPROM
RAM
384
512
1024
640
8
(bytes)
Memory space
I/O pins Input
Output
Program memory space: 64K bytes, Data memory space: 1M byte
14
12
12
25
45
20
35
63
28
54
10
36
28
54
10
36
28
54
I/O
Total
With a pull-up
resistor
16
0
34
16
8
16
0
None
8
34
16
34
16
LED direct drive
output
Transister direct
drive output
None
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
8-bit output port
—
8-bit I/O port
8-bit input port
8-bit I/O port
—
—
8-bit I/O port
8-bit I/O port
—
—
8-bit I/O port
8-bit I/O port
—
8-bit I/O port
8-bit output port
8-bit I/O port
8-bit I/O port
—
4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
4-bit I/O port
2-bit I/O port
4-bit I/O port
2-bit I/O port
4-bit I/O port
2-bit I/O port
4-bit I/O port
P7
6-bit input port
7-bit I/O port
Note The ancillary function pins are included in the I/O pins.
422
Appendix A 78K/II Series Product List
(1/3)
µPD78234 Sub-Series
µPD78234 µPD78237
µPD78244 Sub-Series
µPD78238
(µPD78P238)
µPD78233
µPD78243
µPD78244
65 (instructions common to all 78K/II series products)
333 ns 500 ns 333 ns 500 ns
500 ns
333 ns
When the stack area is configured in the internal dual-port RAM: 6
Other cases: 8
–10 to +70˚C,
–40 to +85˚C, V = +5 V 10%
DD
V
= +5 V 10%
DD
8 bits × 8 × 4 banks
P6 and PM6
32K
None
16K
None
None
16K
Note
(32/16K
)
None
512
1024K
640
1024
512
Note
(1024/640K
)
Program memory space: 64K bytes/Data memory space: 1M byte
16
14
12
18
46
36
64
18
46
36
64
10
36
28
54
16
0
34
16
24
8
42
24
24
8
42
24
A
8
8-bit output port
8-bit I/O port
8-bit input port
8-bit I/O port
—
—
—
8-bit I/O port
8-bit I/O port
—
8-bit I/O port
8-bit I/O port
—
—
8-bit I/O port
8-bit I/O port
—
4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port 4-bit output port
+
+
+
+
+
+
2-bit I/O port
4-bit I/O port
2-bit I/O port
4-bit I/O port
2-bit I/O port
4-bit I/O port
8-bit input port
Note Set by software.
6-bit input port
423
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Series name
µPD78214 Sub-Series
µPD78214
µPD78218A Sub-Series
µPD78224 Sub-Series
Product name
µPD78218A
µPD78224
µPD78212
µPD78213
µPD78217A
µPD78220
Item
(µPD78P214)
(µPD78P218A)
(µPD78P224)
PWM output
Comparator
None
None
4 bits × 8
8 bits × 8
None
A/D converter
Selection of conversion time
Selected according to operating frequency
—
—
AV input voltage
REF
3.4 V to V
3.6 V to V
DD
DD
range
Pins selected by bits ANI0 to ANI2 of Pins subject to A/D
the ADM register. Pin voltage is conversion. Pin voltage
always 0 V to AV is 0 V to AV during
Restrictions on input
voltage
—
.
REF
REF
A/D conversion.
D/A converter
None
1
16-bit timer/counter
8-bit timer/counter
Timer output
3
Provided
7
2
4
None
None
5
PWM/PPG output
One-shot pulse
Interrupt source
None
Provided
16 bytes (0FFD0H to 0FFDFH)
1 channel
None
External SFR area
UART
1 channel (SBI)
Provided (shared with timer/counter 3)
Provided
CSI
Provided
None
BRG timer
Baud rate generator
External baud rate clock
input
Provided
None
4 bits × 2 or 8 bits × 1
Real-time output port
424
Appendix A 78K/II Series Product List
(2/3)
µPD78234 Sub-Series
µPD78234 µPD78237
12 bits × 2
µPD78244 Sub-Series
µPD78238
(µPD78P238)
µPD78233
µPD78243
µPD78244
None
None
8 bits × 8
Selected freely
Selected according to
operating frequency
3.4 V to V
3.6 V to V
DD
DD
Pins subject to A/D conversion. Pin voltage is 0 V to AV
conversion.
during A/D
REF
8 bits × 2
None
1
3
4
Provided
Provided
7
16 bytes (0FFD0H to 0FFDFH)
1 channel
1 channel (SBI)
Provided (shared with timer/counter 3)
Provided
Provided
4 bits × 2 or 8 bits × 1
A
425
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Series name
µPD78214 Sub-Series
µPD78218A Sub-Series
µPD78224 Sub-Series
Product name
µPD78214
(µPD78P214)
µPD78218A
(µPD78P218A)
µPD78224
(µPD78P224)
µPD78212
µPD78213
µPD78217A
µPD78220
Item
Interrupt
2 levels (programmable), vector/macro service
External
7
8
9
Internal
12
Interrupts that can use
macro service
15
6
8/16 bits selectable
Bits of macro service
counter
8 bits only
8 bits only
(except type A)
Increments lower 8 bits
only
Incrementing MPD and
MPT of type C macro
service
Increments lower 8 bits only
(higher bits remain as is)
Increments 16 bits
(higher bits remain as is)
Constraints on memory-
to-SFR data transfer by
type A macro service
Occurs when trans-
ferred data is D0H to
DFH
Occurs when transfer source
buffer (memory) address is
0FED0H to 0FEDFH
Occurs when transferred data is D0H
to DFH
#
Macro service execution
time
Depends on mode.
Refer to the relevant user's manual.
Standby function
HALT/STOP mode
Oscillation setting time
Selected from two
options
Fixed
Fixed
upon releasing STOP mode
Provided (refresh pulse
Pseudo SRAM refresh
function
Provided (refresh pulse width: 1/f
)
CLK
width: 1.5/f
)
CLK
FC80H to FDFFH cannot be
accessed during refresh
Constraints on memory
access
None
ROM-less mode setting
EA pin =
low level
EA pin =
EA pin =
low level
EA pin =
—
—
—
low level
low level
Package
• 64-pin plastic shrink DIP (750 mil)
• 68-pin plastic QFJ (except µPD78212)
• 64-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
• 74-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
• 64-pin plastic QUIP (except µPD78212)
• 64-pin plastic shrink
DIP (750 mil)
• 84-pin plastic QFJ
• 94-pin plastic QFP
• 64-pin plastic QFP
(20 × 20 mm)
(14 × 14 mm)
• 64-pin ceramic shrink
DIP with window
• 64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with
(for µPD78P218A only)
window (for µPD78P214 only)
426
Appendix A 78K/II Series Product List
(3/3)
µPD78234 Sub-Series
µPD78234 µPD78237
µPD78244 Sub-Series
µPD78238
(µPD78P238)
µPD78233
µPD78243
µPD78244
2 levels (programmable), vector/macro service
7
12
14
15
8/16 bits selectable (except type A)
Increments 16 bits
Occurs when transfer source
buffer (memory) address is
0FED0H to 0FEDFH
Occurs when transferred data is D0H to DFH
Depends on mode.
#
Refer to the relevant user's manual.
HALT/STOP mode
Selected from two options
Provided (refresh pulse width: 1/f
)
CLK
None
MODE pin
MODE pin
= high level
EA pin =
low level
—
—
—
= high level
(cannot be set)
• 84-pin plastic QFJ
• 64-pin plastic shrink
DIP (750 mil)
• 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14 mm)
• 64-pin plastic QFP
A
• 94-pin plastic QFP (20 × 20 mm)
(14 × 14 mm)
• 94-pin ceramic WQFN (for µPD78P238 only)
427
428
APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
The development tools described on the following pages are available for the development of systems using
µPD78214 sub-series.
B
429
µPD78214 Sub-Series
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
µ
430
Appendix B Development Tools
B.1 HARDWARE (1/2)
IE-78240-R-A
The IE-78240-R-A is an enhanced version of the IE-78210-R and IE-78240-R.
This in-circuit emulator can be used for any model of the µPD78214 sub-series.
It operates with a PC-9800 series or IBM PC/AT host machine. By using this
emulator together with the optional screen debugger and device file, programs
written in C or a structured assembly language can be debugged at the source
program level. Features such as the simultaneous tracing of data access and
program fetch, as well as C0 coverage, enable efficient debugging and program
testing. For those already using the IE-78210-R or IE-78240-R, the emulator can
be upgraded to a level equivalent to the IE-78240-R-A simply by adding an
optional board (IE-78200-R-BK).
Note 2
These in-circuit emulators can be used for any model of the µPD78214 sub-
IE-78240-R
Note 1
Note 2
series
. They are connected to a host machine or a console to enable
IE-78210-R
debugging. When connected to a host machine, they enable symbolic debug-
ging and allow object files to be exchanged with the host machine, thus
making the debugging process more efficient. These emulators each have two
RS-232C ports, to which the PC-1500 PROM programmer can be connected.
IE-78240-R-EM
These boards are used to upgrade the 75X and 78K series in-circuit emulators
Note 2
Note 2
IE-78210-R-EM
to a level equivalent to the IE-78240-R-A, IE-78240-R, or IE-78210-R
. For
Note 2
IE-78200-R-EM
details, see B.3.
IE-78200-R-BK
EP-78240CW-R
These emulation probes are used for the µPD78210CW, µPD78212CW-×××,
µPD78213CW, µPD78214CW-×××, µPD78P214CW, µPD78212CW(A)-×××,
µPD78213CW(A), and µPD78214CW(A)-×××. The EP-78240CW-R is essentially
the same as the EP-78210CW, the only difference being that the former has a
longer cable.
Note 2
EP-78210CW
These emulation probes are used for the µPD78212GC-×××-AB8, µPD78213GC-
AB8, µPD78214GC-×××-AB8, µPD78P214GC-AB8, µPD78212GC(A)-×××-AB8, and
µPD78214GC(A)-×××-AB8. Both are used together with the EV-9200GC-64. The
EP-78240GC-R is essentially the same product as the EP-78210GC, the only
difference being that the former has a longer cable.
EP-78240GC-R
Note 2
EP-78210GC
Note 2
EP-78210GJ
This emulation probe is used for the µPD78210GJ-5BJ, µPD78212GJ-×××-5BJ,
µPD78213GJ-5BJ, µPD78214GJ-×××-5BJ, µPD78P214GJ-5BJ, and
µPD78214GJ(A)-×××-5BJ. It is used together with the EV-9200G-74 and EP-
78210L or EP-78240LP-R.
EP-78240GJ-R
This emulation probe is used for the µPD78210GJ-5BJ, µPD78212GJ-×××-5BJ,
µPD78213GJ-5BJ, µPD78214GJ-×××-5BJ, µPD78P214GJ-5BJ, and
B
µPD78214GJ(A)-×××-5BJ. It is used together with the EV-9200G-74. Unlike the
EP-78210GJ, this probe is of single-unit type, and is thus easier to use.
These emulation probes are used for the µPD78213GQ-36, µPD78214GQ-×××-36,
µPD78P214GQ-36, µPD78213GQ(A)-36, and µPD78214GQ(A)-×××-36. The EP-
78240GQ-R is essentially the same product as the EP-78210GQ, the only
difference being that the former has a longer cable.
EP-78240GQ-R
Note 2
EP-78210GQ
These emulation probes are used for the µPD78210L, µPD78213L, µPD78214L-
×××, µPD78P214L, and µPD78214L(A)-×××. The EP-78240LP-R is essentially the
same product as the EP-78210L, the only diffence being that the former has a
longer cable.
EP-78240LP-R
Note 2
EP-78210L
Notes 1. µPD78212, µPD78213, µPD78214, µPD78P214, µPD78212(A), µPD78213(A), and µPD78214(A)
2. These products are no longer produced and are not available from NEC.
431
µPD78214 Sub-Series
HARDWARE (2/2)
EV-9200G-74
This socket is mounted on the board of the user system developed for the 74-
pin QFP. It is used together with the EP-78210GJ or EP-78240GJ-R.
EV-9200GC-64
PG-1500
This socket is mounted on the board of the user system developed for the 64-
pin QFP. It is used together with the EP-78210GC or EP-78240GC-R.
This PROM programmer, when connected to an accessory board and the
optional programmer adapter, enables programming of the PROM built into a
single-chip microcomputer, either in its stand-alone mode or under the control
of the host machine. PROMs having typical capacities, from 256K to 4M bits,
can be programmed.
#
PA-78P214CW
This PROM programmer adapter is used with the µPD78P214CW and
µPD78P214DW. It is used together with a PROM programmer such as the PG-
1500.
PA-78P214GC
PA-78P214GJ
PA-78P214GQ
PA-78P214L
This PROM programmer adapter is used with the µPD78P214GC-AB8. It is used
together with a PROM programmer such as the PG-1500.
This PROM programmer adapter is used with the µPD78P214GJ-5BJ. It is used
together with a PROM programmer such as the PG-1500.
This PROM programmer adapter is used with the µPD78P214GQ-36. It is used
together with a PROM programmer such as the PG-1500.
This PROM programmer adapter is for the µPD78P214L. It is used together
with a PROM programmer such as the PG-1500.
Remarks 1. The EP-78210GC, EP-78210GJ, EP-78240GC-R, and EP-78240GJ-R are provided with one EV-9200G-74 or
EV-9200GC-64.
2. The EV-9200G-74 and EV-9200GC-64 are supplied in batches of five.
432
Appendix B Development Tools
B.2 SOFTWARE
B.2.1 Language Processing Software (1/3)
78K/II series relocatable
assembler (RA78K/II)
This relocatable assembler can be used for all the 78K/II series products. Its macro
functions enhance efficiency in software development. It also includes a struc-
tured assembler, which makes the program control structure more comprehensive,
thus improving software productivity and maintainability. The relocatable assem-
bler consists of the following programs:
Structured assembler preprocessor
(program name: ST78K2)
Converts a source program written in the
structured assembler language into a
form that can be input into the
relocatable assembler.
Relocatable assembler
Converts a source program written in
assembly language into a machine
language program, enabling the genera-
tion of a relocatable object module file.
(program name: RA78K2)
Linker (program name: LK78K2)
Links an object module file, generated by
the relocatable assembler, with a library
file, to determine the absolute address of
the program and to generate a load
module file.
Object converter
Converts a load module file, generated
by the linker, into a suitable form for
downloading to the in-circuit emulator
and PROM programmer.
(program name: OC78K2)
Librarian (program name: LB78K2)
Links object module files, generated by
the relocatable assembler, to create a
single library file. It also updates the
library files.
List converter
Creates an assemble list from the
assemble list file output by the
relocatable assembler, using the object
and load module files. The assemble list
contains absolute values.
(program name: LCNV78K2)
B
433
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Language Processing Software (2/3)
78K/II series relocatable
assembler (RA78K/II)
Host machine
Distribution medium
Part number
µS5A1RA78K2
µS5A10RA78K2
µS5A13RA78K2
µS7B11RA78K2
µS7B10RA78K2
µS7B13RA78K2
µS3H15RA78K2
µS3K15RA78K2
µS3M15RA78K2
OS
Note1
8-inch 2D
TM
MS-DOS
Ver.5.00A
(Ver.3.30 to
PC-9800 series
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Note 3
)
Note2
5.25-inch 2D
#
IBM PC/AT or
compatibles
See Section B.2.4.
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
TM
HP-UX
TM
(rel.7.05B)
HP9000 series300
Cartridge tape
(QIC-24)
SPARCstationTM
Sun OS
(rel.4.1.1)
TM
TM
TM
EWS-UX/V
(rel.4.0)
EWS-4800 series
(RISC)
78K/II series C compiler
(CC78K/II)
This C compiler can be used with all 78K/II series products. Its language specifica-
tions conform to ANSI standards, and compiled programs can be written into ROM.
The compiler offers such features as special function register manipulation, bit
manipulation, variables using short direct addressing, and interrupt control. The
use of these features ensures effective programming and high object efficiency. It
also has a start-up routine sample program and a standard function object library.
To use this compiler, the 78K/II series relocatable assembler (RA78K/II) is neces-
sary.
Host machine
PC-9800 series
OS
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10CC78K2
µS5A13CC78K2
µS7B11CC78K2
µS7B10CC78K2
µS7B13CC78K2
µS3H15CC78K2
µS3K15CC78K2
µS3M15CC78K2
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
Note 3
Ver.5.00A
)
Note2
5.25-inch 2D
#
IBM PC/AT or
compatibles
See Section B.2.4.
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
HP-UX (rel.7.05B)
Sun OS (rel.4.1.1)
EWS-UX/V (rel.4.0)
HP9000 series300
SPARCstation
Cartridge tape
(QIC-24)
EWS-4800 series (RISC)
Notes 1. The 8-inch 2D model has been superseded by the 5.25-inch 2HD and 3.5-inch 2HD models. Those users who
have already purchased an 8-inch 2D model will be supplied with a 5.25-inch 2HC model when the product is
next upgraded.
2. The 5.25-inch 2D model is no longer available. Those users who have already purchased a 5.25-inch 2D model
will be supplied with a 5.25-inch 2HC model when the product is next upgraded.
3. Versions 5.00 and 5.00A feature a the task swap function. However, the task swap function cannot be used with
#
this software.
434
Appendix B Development Tools
Language Processing Software (3/3)
This source program is used to modify the libraries supplied with CC78K/II to
78K/II series C compiler
library source file
satisfy user specifications.
Host machine
OS
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10CC78K2-L
µS5A13CC78K2-L
µS7B10CC78K2-L
µS7B13CC78K2-L
µS3H15CC78K2-L
µS3K15CC78K2-L
µS3M15CC78K2-L
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
PC-9800 series
Note
Ver.5.00A
)
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
#
#
HP-UX (rel.7.05B)
Sun OS (rel.4.1.1)
EWS-UX/V (rel.4.0)
HP9000 series300
SPARCstation
Cartridge tape
(QIC-24)
EWS-4800 series (RISC)
Note Versions 5.00 and 5.00A feature a task swap function. However, the task swap function cannot be used with this
software.
B.2.2 Software for the In-Circuit Emulator (1/2)
Screen debugger
(SD78K/II)
This program controls the in-circuit emulator for the 78K/II series when used
together with the device file (DF78210). It can be used when the in-circuit emulator
has been upgraded to IE-78240-R-A class and a PC-9800 series or IBM PC/AT
computer is being used as a host computer. This debugger can debug source
programs written in C, structured assembly language, and assembly language. Its
split screen function, by which the screen is split into sections to enable the
simultaneous display of different information, makes debugging more efficient.
Host machine
PC-9800 series
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10SD78K2
µS5A13SD78K2
µS7B10SD78K2
µS7B13SD78K2
OS
#
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
Note
Ver.5.00A
)
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
Device file (DF78210)
This is used together with the screen debugger (SD78K/II) to debug programs of
the µPD78214 sub-series.
Host machine
PC-9800 series
OS
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10DF78210
µS5A13DF78210
µS7B10DF78210
µS7B13DF78210
B
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
Note
Ver.5.00A
)
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
Note Versions 5.00 and 5.00A feature a task swap function. However, the task swap function cannot be used with this
#
software.
435
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Software for the In-Circuit Emulator (2/2)
This program enables control of the in-circuit emulator for the 78K/II series from the
In-circuit emulator
control program
host machine. It can automatically execute commands, thus enhancing efficiency in
debugging. The following programs are available, depending on the type of in-circuit
emulator:
Note 1
IE78210
IE78240
(
)
Host machine
OS
Distribution medium
Part number
µS5A1IE78210-P01
µS5A10IE78210-P01
µS5A13IE78210
µS7B11IE78210-P02
µS7B10IE78210
µS7B13IE78210
µS5A11IE78240
µS5A10IE78240
µS5A13IE78240
µS7B11IE78240
µS7B10IE78240
µS7B13IE78240
Emulator
IE-78210-R
Note 3
8-inch 2D
PC-9800 series (Ver.3.10
IE-78210-R-EM
MS-DOS
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Note 2
to Ver5.00A
)
Note 4
5.25-inch 2D
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
B.2.4.
Note 3
8-inch 2D
IE-78240-R
PC-9800 series (Ver.3.10
IE-78240-R-EM
MS-DOS
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Note 2
to Ver5.00A
)
Note 4
5.25-inch 2D
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
B.2.4.
Notes 1. When using the IE-78210-R or IE-78210-R-EM, the IE-78210 is also necessary. For the IE-78240-R or IE-78240-R-
EM, the IE-78240 is necessary. When using the IE-78210-R together with the IE-78240-R-EM, the IE-78210 is
necessary.
2. Versions 5.00 and 5.00A feature a task swap function. However, the task swap function cannot be used with this
#
software.
3. The 8-inch 2D model has been superseded by the 5.25-inch 2HD and 3.5-inch 2HD models. Those users who
have already purchased an 8-inch 2D model will be supplied with a 5.25-inch 2HD model when the product is
next upgraded.
4. The 5.25-inch 2D model is no longer available. Those users who have already purchased a 5.25-inch 2D model
will be supplied with a 5.25-inch 2HC model when the product is next upgraded.
436
Appendix B Development Tools
B.2.3 Software for the PROM Programmer
This program provides the serial and parallel interfaces between PG-1500 and the
host machine, enabling the host machine to control the PG-1500.
PG-1500 controller
Host machine
PC-9800 series
OS
Distribution medium
5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10PG1500
µS5A13PG1500
µS7B11PG1500
µS7B10PG1500
µS5A13PG1500
MS-DOS (Ver.3.10 to
Note 1
Ver.5.00A
)
3.5-inch 2HD
Note 2
5-inch 2D
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
5-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
Notes 1. Versions 5.00 and 5.00A feature a task swap function. However, the task swap function cannot be used with this
#
#
software.
2. The 5.25-inch 2D model is no longer available. Those users who have already purchased a 5.25-inch 2D model
will be supplied with a 5.25-inch 2HC model when the product is next upgraded.
B.2.4 OS for the IBM PC
The following OSs are supported for the IBM PC:
OS
Version
Ver.3.1 to Ver.6.1
Ver.3.1
PC DOS
Note 1
Windows
MS-DOS
IBM DOS
Ver.5.0 to Ver.6.0
Note 2
5.0/V
Note 2
J5.02/V
Notes 1. PC DOS and Windows are used together for the fuzzy knowledge-data creation tool.
2. Only English-version systems are supported.
Caution Versions 5.00 and later feature a task swap function. However, the task swap function cannot be used with this
software.
B
437
µPD78214 Sub-Series
B.3 UPGRADING OTHER IN-CIRCUIT EMULATORS TO 78K/II SERIES LEVEL
The 78K series and 75X series in-circuit emulators can be upgraded to the level of the 78K/II series by replacing
their internal boards with an optional board.
Note that the upgraded in-circuit emulator requires an appropriate new control program.
B.3.1 Upgrading to IE-78240-R-A Level
Emulator
IE-78230-R-A
IE Group Number
Required Board
IE-78240-R-EM
Remarks
1
2
—
—
IE-78140-R
Note 1
IE-78240-R
IE-78200-R-BK
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
IE-78112-R
IE-78210-R
IE-78220-R
IE-78310-R
The high-speed download function is
not supported. Those users who are
also using an in-circuit emulator of IE
group 1, 2, or 4, are recommended to
upgrade these emulators also. Those
users with an in-circuit emulator of IE
group 1 do not need to purchase the IE-
78200-R-BK (the IE-78200-R-BK board is
built into the IE group 1 in-circuit
emulator).
IE-78200-R-BK
IE-78240-R-EM
IE-78310A-R
3
Note 2
IE-75000-R
IE-75001-R
IE-78000-R
IE-78130-R
IE-78230-R
Those users with an in-circuit emulator
of IE group 1 do not need to purchase
the IE-78200-R-BK (the IE-78200-R-BK
board is built into the IE group 1 in-
circuit emulator).
IE-78200-R-BK
IE-78240-R-EM
4
Note 1
IE-78320-R
IE-78327-R
IE-78330-R
IE-78350-R
IE-78600-R
Note 1
Notes 1. This product is no longer produced, and is not available from NEC.
Note 1
2. This board is used for emulation for the µPD78214 series. Those users who already have the IE-78210-R-EM
do not have to purchase this board.
438
Appendix B Development Tools
Note 1
B.3.2 Upgrading to IE-78240-R Level
(Upgrading to IE-78240-R-A Level is recommended.)
Emulator
IE Group Number
Required Board
Remarks
Note 1
IE-78112-R
The high-speed download function is
not supported. Those users who are
also using an in-circuit emulator of IE
group 4, are recommended to upgrade
to IE group 4 level.
Note 1
Note 1
IE-78210-R
IE-78220-R
Note 2
1
IE-78240-R-EM
IE-78240-R-EM
IE-78130-R
IE-78230-R
2
3
—
Note 1
Note 1
IE-78310-R
The high-speed download function is
not supported. Those users who have
an in-circuit emulator of IE group 1 do
not need to purchase the IE-78200-R-EM
(the IE-78200-R-EM board is built into
the IE group 1 in-circuit emulator).
IE-78310A-R
Note 1
Note 2
IE-78200-R-EM
IE-78240-R-EM
IE-75000-R
IE-75001-R
IE-78000-R
Those users who have an in-circuit
emulator of IE group 1 do not need to
purchase the IE-78200-R-EM (the IE-
78200-R-EM board is built into the IE
group 1 in-circuit emulator).
Note 1
IE-78320-R
IE-78327-R
IE-78330-R
IE-78350-R
IE-78600-R
Note 1
IE-78200-R-EM
IE-78240-R-EM
4
5
Note 1
Note 1
IE-78200-R-EM
IE-78240-R-EM
Upgrading to IE-78240-R-A level is
recommended.
IE-78140-R
IE-78230-R-A
Notes 1. This product is no longer produced, and is not available from NEC.
Note 1
2. This board is used for emulation for the µPD78214 series. Those users who already have the IE-78210-R-EM
do not have to purchase this board.
B
439
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Note 2
B.3.3 Upgrading to IE-78210-R Level
(Upgrading to IE-78240-R-A level is recommended.)
Emulator
IE Group Number
1
Required Board
Remarks
—
Note 2
IE-78112-R
Note 1
IE-78210-R-EM
Note 2
Note 2
IE-78220-R
IE-78310-R
Those users who have an in-circuit
emulator of IE group 1 do not need to
purchase the IE-78200-R-EM (the IE-
78200-R-EM board is built into the IE
group 1 in-circuit emulator).
IE-78310A-R
Note 2
Note 1
IE-78200-R-EM
IE-78210-R-EM
2
IE-75000-R
IE-75001-R
IE-78000-R
IE-78130-R
IE-78140-R
IE-78230-R
IE-78230-R-A
IE-78240-R
IE-78240-R-A
Upgrading to IE-78210-R level is not
allowed. Upgrading to IE-78240-R or IE-
78240-R-A is recommended.
—
3
Note 2
IE-78320-R
IE-78327-R
IE-78330-R
IE-78350-R
IE-78600-R
Notes 1. This board is no longer produced, and is not available from NEC. Those users who do not have the IE-78210-R-EM,
are recommended to upgrade to the IE-78240-R-A level, which includes the functions of IE-78240-R.
2. This product is no longer produced, and is not available from NEC.
440
APPENDIX C SOFTWARE FOR EMBEDDED APPLICATIONS
C.1 FUZZY INFERENCE DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT SYSTEM
#
Fuzzy knowledge-data
creation tool
Supports input and editing, as well as the evaluation (simulation) of fuzzy knowl-
edge-data (fuzzy rules and membership functions).
Host machine
PC-9800 series
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10FE9000
µS5A13FE9000
µS7B10FE9200
µS7B13FE9200
OS
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
Note
Ver.5.00A
)
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
Translator
This program converts fuzzy knowledge-data, obtained with the fuzzy knowledge
data creation tool, into an assembler source program for the RA78K/II.
Host machine
PC-9800 series
OS
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10FT9080
µS5A13FT9080
µS7B10FT9085
µS7B13FT9085
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
Note
Ver.5.00A
)
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
Fuzzy inference module
(FI78K/II)
This program performs fuzzy inference by linking with the fuzzy knowledge data
converted by the translator.
Host machine
PC-9800 series
OS
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10FI78K2
µS5A13FI78K2
µS7B10FI78K2
µS7B13FI78K2
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
Note
Ver.5.00A
)
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
This program is used to evaluate and adjust fuzzy knowledge-data at the hardware
level, using the in-circuit emulator.
Fuzzy inference debugger
(FD78K/II)
Host machine
PC-9800 series
OS
Distribution medium
5.25-inch 2HD
3.5-inch 2HD
Part number
µS5A10FD78K2
µS5A13FD78K2
µS7B10FD78K2
µS7B13FD78K2
MS-DOS (Ver.3.30 to
Note
Ver.5.00A
)
C
5.25-inch 2HC
3.5-inch 2HC
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
See Section B.2.4.
Note Versions 5.00 and 5.00A feature a task swap function. However, the task swap function cannot be used with this
software.
441
442
APPENDIX D REGISTER INDEX
D.1 REGISTER INDEX
16-bit capture register (CR02) ... 111
16-bit compare register (CR00,CR01) ... 111
16-bit timer 0 (TM0) ... 111
8-bit capture/compare register (CR11) ... 142
8-bit capture register (CR22) ... 161
8-bit compare register (CR10) ... 142
8-bit compare register (CR20) ... 161
8-bit compare register (CR21) ... 161
8-bit compare register (CR30) ... 206
8-bit timer 1 (TM1) ... 142
8-bit timer 2 (TM2) ... 161
8-bit timer 3 (TM3) ... 206
A
A/D conversion result register (ADCR) ... 227
A/D converter mode register (ADM) ... 229, 304
Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) ... 245
Asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS) ... 246
B
Baud rate generator control register (BRGC) ... 251
C
Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0) ... 112
Capture/compare control register 1 (CRC1) ... 144
Capture/compare control register 2 (CRC2) ... 165
Clock synchronous serial interface mode register (CSIM) ... 262, 273
E
External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0) ... 294
External interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1) ... 295, 303
I
Interrupt mask register (MK0) ... 306
Interrupt request flag register (IF0) ... 305
Interrupt service mode register (ISM0) ... 306
Interrupt status register (IST) ... 307
M
D
Macro service mode register ... 323
Memory expansion mode register (MM) ... 346
P
Port 0 (P0) ... 60
Port 2 (P2) ... 63
443
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Port 3 (P3) ... 66
Port 4 (P4) ... 75
Port 5 (P5) ... 80
Port 6 (P6) ... 84
Port 7 (P7) ... 92
Port 0 buffer register (P0L, P0H) ... 97
Port 0 mode register (PM0) ... 61
Port 3 mode control register (PMC3) ... 72
Port 3 mode register (PM3) ... 72
Port 5 mode register (PM5) ... 80
Port 6 mode register (PM6) ... 89
Prescaler mode register 0 (PRM0) ... 207
Prescaler mode register 1 (PRM1) ... 143, 164
Priority specification flag register (PR0) ... 306
Programmable wait control register (PW) ... 347
Pull-up-resistor-option register (PUO) ... 65, 74, 78, 82, 91
R
Real-time output port control register (RTPC) ... 97
Refresh mode register (RFM) ... 367
S
Serial bus interface control register (SBIC) ... 264
Serial reception buffer (RXB) ... 245
Serial shift register (SIO) ... 276
Serial transmission shift register (TXS) ... 245
Standby control register (STBC) ... 379
T
Timer control register 0 (TMC0) ... 111, 207
Timer control register 1 (TMC1) ... 143, 163
Timer output control register (TOC) ... 113, 166
444
Appendix D Register Index
D.2 REGISTER SYMBOL INDEX
A
ADCR: A/D conversion result register ... 227
ADM:
A/D converter mode register ... 229, 304
ASIM: Asynchronous serial interface mode register ... 245
ASIS:
Asynchronous serial interface status register ... 246
B
BRGC: Baud rate generator control register ... 251
C
CR00:
CR01:
CR02:
CR10:
CR11:
CR20:
CR21:
CR22:
CR30:
16-bit compare register ... 111
16-bit compare register ... 111
16-bit capture register ... 111
8-bit compare register ... 142
8-bit capture/compare register ... 142
8-bit compare register ... 161
8-bit compare register ... 161
8-bit capture register ... 161
8-bit compare register ... 206
CRC0: Capture/compare control register 0 ... 112
CRC1: Capture/compare control register 1 ... 144
CRC2: Capture/compare control register 2 ... 165
CSIM: Clock synchronous serial interface mode register ... 262, 273
I
IF0:
Interrupt request flag register ... 305
INTM0: External interrupt mode register 0 ... 294
INTM1: External interrupt mode register 1 ... 295, 303
ISM0:
IST:
M
Interrupt service mode register ... 306
Interrupt status register ... 307
MK0:
MM:
P
Interrupt mask register ... 306
Memory expansion mode register ... 346
D
P0:
Port 0 ... 60
P2:
Port 2 ... 63
P3:
Port 3 ... 66
P4:
Port 4 ... 75
P5:
Port 5 ... 80
P6:
Port 6 ... 84
P7:
Port 7 ... 92
P0H:
P0L:
Port 0 buffer register ... 97
Port 0 buffer register ... 97
445
µPD78214 Sub-Series
PM0:
PM3:
PM5:
PM6:
Port 0 mode register ... 61
Port 3 mode register ... 72
Port 5 mode register ... 80
Port 6 mode register ... 89
PMC3: Port 3 mode control register ... 72
PR0: Priority specification flag register ... 306
PRM0: Prescaler mode register 0 ... 207
PRM1: Prescaler mode register 1 ... 143, 164
PUO:
PW:
R
Pull-up-resistor-option register ... 65, 74, 78, 82, 91
Programmable wait control register ... 347
RFM:
Refresh mode register ... 367
RTPC: Real-time output port control register ... 97
RXB:
S
Serial reception buffer ... 245
SBIC:
SIO:
Serial bus interface control register ... 264
Serial shift register ... 276
STBC: Standby control register ... 379
T
TM0:
TM1:
TM2:
TM3:
16-bit timer 0 ... 111
8-bit timer 1 ... 142
8-bit timer 2 ... 161
8-bit timer 3 ... 206
TMC0: Timer control register 0 ... 111, 207
TMC1: Timer control register 1 ... 143, 163
TOC:
TXS:
Timer output control register ... 113, 166
Serial transmission shift register ... 245
446
APPENDIX E INDEX
E.1 INDEX
0 parity ... 247, 248
B
Bank register ... 43
16-bit timer 0 ... 111, 114
16-bit timer/counter ... 109
1M-byte expansion function ... 348
4-bit counter ... 251
Basic operation ... 121
Baud rate ... 251, 254
Baud rate generator ... 243, 251
Baud rate generator control register ... 251
Baud rate generator for UART ... 243
Baud rate setting ... 254
4-bit separate real-time output port ... 97
64-pin ceramic shrink DIP with window ... 6
64-pin plastic QFP ... 8
64-pin plastic QUIP ... 6
Both edges ... 294
64-pin plastic shrink DIP ... 6
68-pin plastic QFJ ... 7
Both-edge detector ... 251
Buffer register ... 97
74-pin plastic QFP ... 9
Built-in pull-up resistor ... 59, 65, 74, 78, 82, 91
Bus interface function ... 345
Bus release detection flag ... 274
Bus release signal ... 277
78K/II products ... 2
8-bit timer 1 ... 142, 145
8-bit timer 2 ... 161, 167
8-bit timer 3 ... 206, 208
Bus release trigger bit ... 274
Bus release/command/acknowledge detector ... 261
Busy enable bit ... 275
8-bit timer/counter 1 ... 99, 139
8-bit timer/counter 2 ... 159
8-bit timer/counter 3 ... 205
Busy signal ... 269, 280
Busy/acknowledge output circuit ... 261
C
A
Accepting maskable interrupt ... 311
Accepting nonmaskable interrupt ... 308
Accepting software interrupt ... 308
Acknowledge detection flag ... 275
Acknowledge enable bit ... 275
Acknowledge signal ... 269
Capture operation ... 145, 149, 167, 177
Capture register ... 111, 142, 161
Capture trigger ... 118, 149, 177
Capture/compare control register 0 ... 112, 119
Capture/compare control register 1 ... 144
Capture/compare control register 2 ... 165, 179
Capture/compare register ... 142, 148, 149
Carry flag ... 45
Acknowledge trigger bit ... 275
Active level ... 113, 166
Address ... 272, 278
Ceramic oscillation ... 55
Address bus ... 29, 345
E
Character bit ... 247
Analog delay ... 296, 389
Clear operation ... 112, 144, 165
Clear ... 117, 148, 176, 210
Analog-to-digital (A/D) converter ... 225
Asynchronous serial interface ... 243
Asynchronous serial interface mode register ... 245, 247
Clock for baud rate generation ... 251
Clock generator ... 55
Asynchronous serial interface operations ... 247
Clock pulse ... 161, 170
Asynchronous serial interface status register ... 246
Automatic addition ... 331
Clock sampling ... 297
Clock synchronous serial interface ... 259
Auxiliary carry flag ... 46
447
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Clocksynchronousserialinterfacemoderegister...262, 273 External memory expansion mode ... 346
Command ... 279
External SFR area ... 43
External trigger ... 118, 149, 177
F
Command detection flag ... 274
Command signal ... 278
Command trigger bit ... 274
Compare operation ... 117, 148, 176, 210
Compare register ... 111, 161, 142, 148, 206
Controlling multiple-interrupt handling ... 301
Conversion result ... 231
Framing error ... 249
Frequency divider ... 251, 253
Full-count ... 175
Full-duplex transmission ... 243
G
Conversion time ... 232
General-purpose register ... 47
H
Count clock ... 114, 143, 164, 207
Count operation ... 114, 145, 167, 208
Count-up operation ... 114, 145, 167, 208
Counting up ... 142, 161
Hardware start ... 225, 235
I
I/O circuit ... 33
Crystal oscillation ... 55
I/O port ... 60
D
Input circuit ... 227
Data ... 279
Input port ... 60
Data buffer area ... 329
Input voltage ... 231
Data format ... 247
Instruction ... 403
Data frame ... 247
Instructin lists for each addressing type ... 416
Internal clock ... 262
Data macro service pointer ... 334
Default priority ... 302
Internal dual-port RAM ... 43
Internal RAM ... 43
Digital noise elimination ... 297
Driving a transistor directly ... 62
E
Internal ROM ... 37, 357
Internal system clock ... 55
Interrupt ... 301
Edge detection ... 293, 296
Edge detection function ... 293
Edge detector ... 111, 142, 161, 228
Edge to be detected ... 294
Error flag ... 249
Interrupt function ... 301
Interrupt handling ... 308
Interrupt handling control register ... 304
Interrupt mask flag ... 306
Interrupt mask register ... 304, 306
Interrupt operation timing ... 317
Interrupt priority status flag ... 45
Interrupt request ... 239
Interrupt request acceptance time ... 317
Interrupt request pending ... 316
Interrupt request enable flag ... 46
Interrupt request flag register ... 304, 305
Interrupt request flag ... 305
Interrupt request source ... 302
interrupt service mode flag ... 306
Interrupt service mode register ... 304, 306
Error ... 249
Even parity ... 247
Expansion address bus ... 43
External baud rate input ... 253, 258
External clock ... 55
External clock pulse ... 170
External event counter ... 161, 170, 201
External event counter function ... 170
External event counter operation mode ... 170
External extension data memory ... 43
External interrupt mode register ... 293, 294
External memory ... 43
448
Appendix E Index
Interrupt status register ... 304, 307
Interval timer ... 129, 151, 190, 192, 210, 211
Interval ... 109, 139, 159, 205
L
Multiplexed analog ... 225
N
Noise elimination ... 296
Noise eliminator ... 389
Nonmaskable interrupt ... 308
Local bus interface function ... 345
Loop counter ... 49
Nonmaskable interrupt request ... 303, 307
Number of I/O ports ... 60
Number of wait states ... 346
O
M
Macro service ... 301, 319
Macro service channel ... 321, 326, 329
Macro service channel pointer ... 322
Macro service control register ... 322
Macro service control word ... 321
Macro service counter ... 326, 329
Macro service function ... 319
Macro service mode register ... 323
Macro service operation timing ... 317
Macro service pending ... 316
Macro service pointer ... 329
Macro service processing time ... 318
Macro service type ... 320
Odd parity ... 247, 248
One-shot ... 175
One-shot timer ... 175, 203
One-shot timer function ... 175
One-shot timer operation ... 175
One-shot timer operation mode ... 175
Operating mode ... 399
Operations ... 406
Operations in the three-wire serial I/O mode ... 265
Oscillation settling time ... 58, 382
Output control circuit ... 111, 163
Output port ... 60
Macro service type A ... 323
Macro service type B ... 327
Macro service type C ... 331
Main data bank ... 44
Output trigger ... 99
Overflow ... 114, 167
Overflow flag ... 112, 143, 163
Overrun error ... 249
Maskable interrupt request ... 303
Master ... 262
P
Master device ... 287
Parallel data ... 261
Match signal ... 117, 119, 176, 179
Maximum frequency ... 161, 170
Maximum interval ... 109, 139, 159, 205
Maximum pulse width ... 109, 160
Measurable pulse width ... 139, 160
Memory expansion functin ... 347
Memory expansion mode register ... 76, 80, 346
Memory map ... 38
Parity bit ... 247
Parity error ... 247, 249
Pattern generator ... 95
Pending interrupt request ... 311
Peripheral RAM ... 43
Pin 25
Pin state ... 390
E
Pin state after reset state is released ... 390
Pin state during reset ... 390
Pointer ... 46, 49
Memory space ... 37
Minimum interval ... 109, 139, 159, 205
Minimum pulse width ... 109, 160, 161
Modulo register ... 334
Port ... 59
Port 0 ... 60
Multiple interrupt ... 307, 313
Multiple-interrupt handling ... 306
Multiplexed address/data bus ... 345
Port 0 mode register ... 61
Port 2 ... 63
Port 3 ... 66
449
µPD78214 Sub-Series
Port 3 mode control register ... 72
Port 3 mode register ... 71
Port 4 ... 75
Refresh mode register ... 367
Refresh pulse ... 367
Register bank selection flag ... 46
Register ... 45
Port 5 ... 80
Port 5 mode register ... 80
Port 6 ... 84
Release detection flag ... 274
Release trigger bit ... 274
Releasing the busy state ... 287
Reset ... 389
Port 6 mode register ... 89
Port 7 ... 92
Port mode ... 346, 367
Reset function ... 389
Prescaler ... 142, 163, 206
Prescaler mode register 0 ... 207
Prescaler mode register 1 ... 143, 164
Priority ... 306, 308
Reset vector table ... 389
Resolution ... 109, 139, 159, 160, 205
Ring control ... 331
Ring counter ... 334
Priority specification flag register ... 304, 306
Priority specification flag ... 306
Procedure for reading ... 401
Procedure for writing ... 399
Program counter ... 45
S
Sample and hold circuit ... 227
Scan mode ... 225, 233
Select mode ... 225, 232
Selector ... 245
Program status word ... 45, 304, 308
Programmable priority ... 313
Programmable wait control register ... 347
Programming ... 399
Self-refresh ... 370
Sending a Command ... 289
Sending an Address ... 288
Sending Data ... 290
Pseudo static RAM ... 367
Pseudo static RAM refresh function ... 367
Pull-up-resistor-option register ... 65, 74, 78, 82, 91
Pulse refresh operation ... 368
Pulse width ... 170
Serial bus interface mode ... 259
Serial bus interface control register ... 263, 274
Serial clock ... 267, 270
Serial clock controller ... 261
Serial clock counter ... 261
Serial clock pin ... 270
Pulse width measurement ... 132, 155, 194
R
Serial clock selector ... 261
Serial data ... 261, 270
Serial data bus ... 270
Read timing ... 348
Ready signal ... 280
Real-time output function ... 95
Real-time output port ... 95, 331
Real-time output port control register ... 61, 97
Receive data ... 249, 265
Serial data bus pin ... 270
Serial data input ... 265
Serial data output ... 265
Series resistor string ... 227
Shift ... 267
Reception ... 249, 267
Reception buffer ... 245
Shift register ... 245, 261, 267, 276
Single-chip mode ... 346
Slave ... 262
Reception control parity check ... 245
Reception error ... 246, 249
Reference voltage pin ... 227
Refresh bus cycle ... 367
Slave device ... 287
Software interrupt request ... 302
Software start ... 225, 234
Refresh function ... 367
450
Appendix E Index
Wake up ... 269, 287
Wake-up function ... 269
Write timing ... 348
Z
Special function register ... 43, 50
Specifying 1M-byte expansion mode ... 346
Specifying the operation of the capture/compare register ... 144
Stack pointer ... 46
Zero flag ... 46
Standby control register ... 379
Standby function ... 377
Standby mode ... 377
Start bit ... 247
Stop bit ... 247
Sub-data bank ... 44
Successive approximation ... 225
System clock ... 55
System reset ... 389
T
Three-wire serial I/O mode ... 259
Time-multiplexed address/data bus ... 29
Timer control register 0 ... 111, 207
Timer control register 1 ... 143, 163
Timer macro service pointer ... 334
Timer output mode ... 112, 165
Timer output control register ... 113, 119, 166, 179
Timer output ... 119, 179
Timer/counter unit ... 107
Timing in three-wire serial I/O mode ... 266
Transmission ... 248, 267
Transmission and reception ... 267
Transmission control parity generation ... 245
Transmission data ... 248, 265
Transmission shift register ... 245
Trigger input ... 225
Type A ... 320
Type B ... 320
Type C ... 321
U
E
Unused pin ... 33
V
Valid edge ... 293
Vector table ... 42, 302
Vectored interrupt ... 301, 302
Voltage comparator ... 227
W
Wait function ... 357
451
µPD78214 Sub-Series
E.2 SYMBOL INDEX
ADCR ... 225, 227
ADM ... 228, 304
ALV0 ... 113
A
A ... 48
A0 ... 31
ALV1 ... 113
A1 ... 31
ALV2 ... 166
A2 ... 31
ALV3 ... 166
A3 ... 31
AN0 ... 225
A4 ... 31
AN1 ... 225
A5 ... 31
AN2 ... 225
A6 ... 31
AN3 ... 225
A7 ... 31
AN4 ... 225
A8 ... 29, 31, 345
A9 ... 29, 31, 345
A10 ... 29, 31, 345
A11 ... 29, 31, 345
A12 ... 29, 31, 345
A13 ... 29, 31, 345
A14 ... 29, 31, 345
A15 ... 29, 345
AN5 ... 225
AN6 ... 30, 225, 239
AN7 ... 30, 225, 239
ANI0 ... 229
ANI1 ... 229
ANI2 ... 229
ASCK ... 28, 253, 258
ASIM ... 245, 247
ASIS ... 246
A16 ... 30, 345
A17 ... 30, 345
ASTB ... 31, 345
A18 ... 30, 345
AV
... 31, 227
A19 ... 30 345
REF
AC ... 46, 308
AV ... 31, 227
SS
AX ... 48
ACKD ... 282
B
ACKE ... 281
ACKT ... 281
B ... 48
Baud rate generator for UART ... 243
AD0 ... 29, 345
AD1 ... 29, 345
AD2 ... 29, 345
AD3 ... 29, 345
AD4 ... 29, 345
AD5 ... 29, 345
AD6 ... 29, 345
AD7 ... 29, 345
A/D conversion ... 234
A/D conversion result ... 230, 231, 235
A/D conversion result register ... 225
A/D conversion start signal ... 295
A/D converter ... 225
A/D converter mode register ... 228
BC ... 48
BRGC ... 251
BRK ... 302
BSYE ... 283
BYTE ... 97
C
C ... 48
CALLF instruction entry ... 42
CALLT instruction table ... 42
CE ... 252
CE ... 31
CE0 ... 112, 114
CE1 ... 143
452
Appendix E Index
CE2 ... 163, 167
CE3 ... 207, 208
CHT0 ... 323
CR00 ... 111, 117
CR01 ... 111, 117
CR02 ... 111, 118
CR10 ... 142, 148
CR11 ... 142, 148
CR20 ... 161, 176
CR21 ... 161, 176
CR22 ... 161, 177
CR30 ... 206, 210
CRC0 ... 112, 119
CRC1 ... 144
CRC2 ... 165, 179
CRXE ... 262, 273
CS ... 229, 304
CSIIF ... 305
CSIISM ... 306
CSIM ... 262, 273
CSIMK ... 306
CSIPR ... 307
CTXE ... 262, 273
CY ... 45, 308
D
CHT1 ... 323
CHT2 ... 323
CI ... 28, 161, 170
CIF00 ... 305
CIF01 ... 305
CIF10 ... 305
CIF11 ... 305
CIF20 ... 305
CIF21 ... 305
CISM00 ... 306
CISM01 ... 306
CISM10 ... 306
CISM11 ... 306
CISM20 ... 306
CISM21 ... 306
CL ... 246
CLR01 ... 112
CLR10 ... 144
CLR11 ... 144
CLR21 ... 165
CLR22 ... 165
CLS0 ... 262, 273
CLS1 ... 262, 273
CM ... 144
D ... 48
D0 ... 31
D1 ... 31
D2 ... 31
D3 ... 31
CMD2 ... 163
CMDD ... 280
CMDT ... 280
CMK00 ... 306
CMK01 ... 306
CMK10 ... 306
CMK11 ... 306
CMK20 ... 306
CMK21 ... 306
CPR00 ... 307
CPR01 ... 307
CPR10 ... 307
CPR11 ... 307
CPR20 ... 307
CPR21 ... 307
D4 ... 31
D5 ... 31
D6 ... 31
D7 ... 31
DE ... 48
DI ... 308
Driving LED directly ... 79, 83
E
E
E ... 48
EA ... 31, 37
EI ... 308
ENTO0 ... 113
ENTO1 ... 113
ENTO2 ... 166
ENTO3 ... 166
453
µPD78214 Sub-Series
ES00 ... 294
ES01 ... 294
ES10 ... 294
ES11 ... 294
ES20 ... 294
ES21 ... 294
ES30 ... 295
ES31 ... 295
ES40 ... 295, 303
ES41 ... 295, 303
ES50 ... 295
ES51 ... 295
ESNMI ... 294
EXTR ... 97
F
INTP0 ... 28, 99, 149, 294, 302
INTP1 ... 28, 177, 294, 302
INTP2 ... 28, 161, 294, 302
INTP3 ... 28, 118, 295, 302
INTP4 ... 28, 295, 302, 303
INTP5 ... 28, 225, 239, 295, 302, 303, 304
INTSER ... 249, 302
INTSR ... 249, 302
INTST ... 248, 302
IRAM ... 43
ISM0 ... 304, 306
ISM0H ... 306
ISM0L ... 306
ISP ... 45, 308
ISP flag ... 311
IST ... 304, 307
L
f
... 55
CLK
FE ... 247
FR ... 229
L ... 48
H
M
H ... 48
MDL0 ... 252
HALT mode ... 377, 379
HL ... 48
MDL1 ... 252
MDL2 ... 252
HLT ... 379
MDL3 ... 252
I
MK0 ... 304, 306
MK0H ... 306
IE ... 46, 308
IE flag ... 308
MK0L ... 306
IF0 ... 304, 305
IF0H ... 305
MM ... 346
MM0 ... 346
IF0L ... 305
MM1 ... 346
IFCH ... 346
MM2 ... 346
INTAD ... 239, 302, 304
INTC00 ... 117, 302
INTC01 ... 117, 302
INTC10 ... 99, 148, 302, 331
INTC11 ... 99, 148, 302, 331
INTC20 ... 176, 302
INTC21 ... 176, 302
INTC30 ... 210, 302
INTCSI ... 302
MM6 ... 346
MOD0 ... 112, 165, 323
MOD1 ... 112, 165, 262, 273, 323
MOD2 ... 323
MOD3 ... 323
MP ... 329
MPD ... 334
MPT ... 334
MR ... 334
Interrupt request from the A/D converter ... 239
INTM0 ... 293
MS ... 229, 304
MSB first ... 265
MSC ... 326
INTM1 ... 293
454
Appendix E Index
µPD78210 ... 20
µPD78212 ... 1
µPD78213 ... 1
µPD78214 ... 1
µPD78p214 ... 1, 399
N
PISM4 ... 306
PISM5 ... 306
PM0 ... 61
PM3 ... 72
PM5 ... 81
PM6 ... 89
NC ... 31, 32
NMI ... 428, 302, 303
NMIS ... 307
O
PMC3 ... 72
PMK0 ... 306
PMK1 ... 306
PMK2 ... 306
PMK3 ... 306
PMK4 ... 306
PMK5 ... 306
Port 0 ... 60
OE ... 31
OVE ... 247
OVF0 ... 112
OVF1 ... 143
OVF2 ... 163
P
Port 2 ... 63
Port 3 ... 66
P0H ... 97
Port 4 ... 75
P0L ... 97
Port 5 ... 80
P0HM ... 61
P0LM ... 61
P0MH ... 97
P0ML ... 97
P20 ... 294
P20/NMI ... 31
P21 ... 294
P22 ... 294
P23 ... 294
P24 ... 295
P25 ... 295
P26 ... 295
PC ... 45
Port 6 ... 84
Port 7 ... 92
PPG frequency ... 125, 186
PPG output ... 125, 185
PPG period ... 125, 185
PPG pulse width ... 125, 185
PPR0 ... 307
PPR1 ... 307
PPR2 ... 307
PPR3 ... 307
PPR4 ... 307
PPR5 ... 307
PR0 ... 304, 307
PR0H ... 307
PE ... 247
PIF0 ... 305
PIF1 ... 305
PIF2 ... 305
PIF3 ... 305
PIF4 ... 305
PIF5 ... 305
PISM0 ... 306
PISM1 ... 306
PISM2 ... 306
PISM3 ... 306
PR0L ... 307
PRAM ... 43
E
PRM0 ... 207
PRM1 ... 143, 164
Procedure for reading from PROM ... 401
Procedure for writing into PROM ... 399
PROM ... 399
PROM programming mode ... 27, 399
PRS0 ... 207
PRS1 ... 207
455
µPD78214 Sub-Series
PRS2 ... 207
RELD ... 280
PRS3 ... 207
Releasing HALT mode ... 485
Releasing STOP mode ... 382
RELT ... 280
PRS10 ... 144
PRS11 ... 144
PRS12 ... 144
PRS20 ... 164
PRS21 ... 164
PRS22 ... 164
PRS23 ... 164
PS0 ... 246
RESET ... 31, 389
RETB ... 308
RETB instruction ... 308
RETI ... 308
RETI instruction ... 308
RFEN ... 367
PS1 ... 246
RFLV ... 367
PSW ... 45, 304, 308
PUO ... 65, 74, 78, 82, 91
PUO2 ... 65
RFM ... 367
RFT0 ... 367
RFT1 ... 367
PUO3 ... 74
ROM less ... 42
RP0 ... 49
PUO4 ... 78
PUO5 ... 82
RP1 ... 49
PUO6 ... 91
RP2 ... 49
PW ... 347
RP3 ... 49
PW20 ... 346
PW21 ... 346
PW30 ... 347
PW31 ... 347
PWM frequency ... 122, 183
PWM output ... 122, 182
PWM period ... 122, 182
PWM pulse width ... 122, 182
PWM signal ... 122, 182
R
RTPC ... 61, 97
RXB ... 245
RxD ... 29
RXE ... 246
S
SAR ... 227
SB0 ... 270
SBI ... 272
SBIC ... 263
SBI mode ... 259, 268
SCK ... 246
R0 ... 49
R1 ... 49
SCK ... 267, 270
SCK pin ... 267
SERIF ... 305
SERMK ... 306
SERPR ... 307
SFR ... 43, 50
SFR pointer ... 329
SFRP ... 329
R2 ... 49
R3 ... 49
R4 ... 49
R5 ... 49
R6 ... 49
R7 ... 49
RBS0 ... 46, 308
RBS1 ... 46, 308
RC ... 334
SI ... 28, 265
SI pin ... 267
SIO ... 261, 267, 276
SL ... 246
RD ... 30, 345
REFRQ ... 30
456
Appendix E Index
SO ... 29, 265
SO pin ... 267
SO latch ... 261
SP ... 46
WUP ... 262, 273
X
X ... 48
X1 ... 31, 55
X2 ... 31, 55
Z
Specifying HALT mode ... 379
Specifying STOP mode ... 382
SRIF ... 305
Z ... 46, 308
SRISM ... 306
SRMK ... 306
SRPR ... 307
STBC ... 379
STIF ... 305
STISM ... 306
STMK ... 306
STOP mode ... 377, 382
STP ... 379
STPR ... 307
T
TM0 ... 111, 114
TM1 ... 142, 145
TM2 ... 161, 167
TM3 ... 206, 208
TMC0 ... 111, 207
TMC1 ... 143, 163
TO0 ... 29, 119
TO1 ... 29, 119
TO2 ... 29, 179
TO3 ... 29, 179
TOC ... 113, 119, 166, 179
TPS0 ... 252
TPS1 ... 252
TPS2 ... 252
TRG ... 229, 304
TxD ... 29
E
TXS ... 245
V
V
V
V
... 31
DD
PP
SS
... 31
... 31, 32
W
WAIT ... 30
WR ... 30, 345
457
458
|